Google This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project to make the world's books discoverable online. It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the publisher to a library and finally to you. Usage guidelines Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. We also ask that you: + Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for personal, non-commercial purposes. + Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. + Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. + Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. About Google Book Search Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web at |http: //books .google .com/I miTT laaBisiiiii! uiiij ilJ5ll'J«HI!iS«#JsUMJI;L SCHOOL OF EDUCATION LIBRARY TEXTBOOK COLLECTION GIFT OF THE PUBLISHERS STANFORD V^p/ UNIVERSITV LIBRARIES The rctaU price of th» book is | . I rnm lEeisiveiii uiu I iSffJ'J «^ ® et ; and its resolution into two letters — ^V for the consonant, and U for tlie vowel — also dates from the middle ages. For convenience, V and U are still distin- guished in this grammar. Vowels. 2. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, (y) ; and are divided : 1. According to their quality (i, e., the position of the organs used in pronunciation), into guttural (or back), a, o, u ; palatal (or front), e, 1, (y). 2. According to their quantity or prolongation (i. e., the time required for pronunciation), into long, ( — ) ; short, ( ^ ). Remark. — Vowels whose quantity shifts in poetry are called com- mon (see 18), and are distinguished thus : w, by preference short; :=^, by preference long. 2 DIPHTHONGS — COi^SONANTS. 3. Sounds of the Vowels. a — a in father. o — o in bone. 6 = e in prey. u ~ oo in moon. i — i in caprice. y — u in sfir (French), German il. Remark. — The short sounds are only less prolonged in pronuncia- tion than the long sounds, and have no exact English equivalents. Diphthongs. 4, D-iphthongSy or double soundSy are to be pronounced so that both sounds can be heard in a slur. ae = aye (&h-eh). ei = ei in feint (drawled). oe = oy in boy. eu = eu in Spanish dei^da (8h-oo). au = ou in out. (ui = we, almost). Remark. — Ae was perhaps pronounced 6 as early as the Augustan age. 6, The sign •• {Diter^iSy i. e., separation) over the second vowel shows that each sound is to be pronounced separately : S8r, air ; OenomatlB, aloS. Consonants. 6. Consonants are divided : 1. According to the principal organs by which they are pronounced, into Labials (lip-sounds) : b, p, (ph), f, v, m. Dentals (tooth- sounds) : d, t, (th), 1, n, r, s. Gutturals (throat-sounds) : g, c, k, qu, (ch), h, n (see 7). Note.— Instead of dental and guttural^ the terms lingtial and palatal are often used. 2. According to their prolongation, into A. Semi-vowels : of which 1, m, n, r, are liquids (m and n being nasals), h is a breathing. 8 is a sibilant. B. Mutes : to which belong P-mutes, p, b, (ph), f, labials^ T-mutes, t, d, (tb), dentals. K-mutes, k, c, qu, g, (ch), gutturals. Those on the same line are said to be of the same organ. COKSONANTS — SYLLABLES. 3 Mutes are further divided into Tenufii (thin, smooth) : p, t, k, c, qu, ?iard (surd). Mediae (middle) : lt>, d, g, auft (sonant). [ABpXrfitae (aspirate, rough) : ph, th, ch,] aspirate. Those on the same line are said to be of t lie name order. 3. Double consonants are : 1 = djs in adzQ ; z = cs (ki), gi ; i and u between two vowels are double sounds, half vowel, half consonant. Sounds of the Consonants. 7. The consonants are sounded as in English, with the following exceptions : C is hard throughout = k. Ch in Latin words is pronounced like k ; in Greek words it = kh mid Is commonly pronounced as oh in German. G is hard throughout, as in get, give, H at the beginning of a word is but slightly pronounced ; in the middle of a word it is almost imperceptible. I consonant (J) has the sound of a broad y ; nearly like y in yule. N has a guttural nasal sound before c, g, q, as in a72chor, anguish. Qu = kw (nearly) ; before 0, qu = c. . B is trilled. S and X are always hard, as in hiss, aa;e. T is hard throughout, as in tone ; never like t in nation. U consonant (V) is pronounced like the vowel, but with a slur. Syllables. (8, 9) 10. The syllable is the unit of pronunciation ; it consists of a yowel, or of a vowel and one or more conso- nants. A word has as many syllables as it contains separate vowels and diphthongs. In dividing a word into syllables, a consonant, between two vowels, belongs to the second : a-mo, / love ; li-xa, a sutler. Any combination of consonants that can begin a word (including mn) belongs to the following vowel ; in other combinations the first consonant belongs to the preceding vowel : a-sper, rougli ; feu-stus, lucky ; li-bri, looks ; a-mnis, river. 4 QUAI^TITY. Remarks. — 1. The combinations that cannot begin a word are (a) doubled consonants : bIo-ouB) dry ; (p) a liquid and a consonant : al- mas, fostering ; am-bS, hoik ; an-^ois, snake ; ar-bor, tree, 2. Compounds are treated by the best grammarians as if their parts were separate words : ab-igO, I drive off ; rOs-ptLblioa, commonwealth. 11. The last syllable of a word is called the ultimate (ultiiiiay last)', the next to the last the penult (paene, almost, and ultiiiia) ; the one before the penult, the antepenult (ante, before, and paenultima). Remark. — A syllable is said to be open when it ends with a vowel ; close, when it ends with a consonant. Quantity. 12. Distinguish carefully between the length of a sylla- ble and the length of a yowel : 1. A syllable is said to be long by nature, when it contains a long yowel or diphthong : mos, custom ; caelum, heaven. Remarks. — 1. A vowel before nf, lui, %ai, gn, is long hy nature : InfSliz, unlucky ; mfiiuia, table ; Sg^en, train ; Sgnus, lamb, 2. Before i consonant ( j ) a vowel is long by nature : Fompfiius, Pompey ; except in compounds of iugum, yoke (bMugns, two-horse), and in a few other words. 2. A syllable is said to be long by position, when a short vowel is followed by two or more consonants, or a double consonant : &rs, art; cdllum, neck ; ftbrumpo, / break off ; p6r mare, through the sea ; n6x, murder, 3. A syllable is said to be short when it contains a short vowel, which is not followed by two or more consonants : Ideas, place ; t&btUa, picture. Remark. — A vowel is short by nature when followed by another vowel (h does not count), or by nt, nd : ddos, God ; innocdntia, inno- cence ; am&ndus, to be loved, 13. A syllable ending in a short vowel, followed by a mute with 1 or r, is said to be common (anceps, doubtful) : tenSbrae, darkness. Remark. — In prose such syllables are always short. In poetry they were short in early times, common in the Augustan period. ACCENTUATION— PARTS OF SPEECH. 5 14. Every diphthong, and every vowel derived from a diphthong, or contracted from other vowels, is long : saevos, cruel; concludo, I shut up (from aSiAMAbf I shut) ; cogo (from co-ago), / drive together. Accentuation. 15. I. Dissyllabic words have the accent or stress on tlie penult : b6nii8» good, 2. Polysyllabic words have tlie accent on the penult, when the penult is long ; on the antepenult, when the penult is short or common : mandare, to commit ; mdnddre, to clieio ; intSgmm, entire; drcdnidare, to surround; snp^rstites, survivors. Remarks. — 1. The little appendages (enclitics) ^ que, ve, ne, add un accent to the ultimate of words accented on the antepenult: idminaque, and lights; fliiminiye, or rivers; y6merene1 from a plowshare f Dis- syllables and words accented on the penult follow the ordinary rule of accentuation : egomet, I indeed; amiSreye, or to love. 2. Compounds (not prepositional) of facere and dare retain tlie accent on the verbal form : calefadt, yfinnmdare. 3. Vocatives and genitives of substantives in iui of the second de- clension, as well as genitives of substantives in ium, retain the accent on the same syllable as the nominative : Vergill. Parts of Speech. 16. The Parts of Speech are the Xoun, the Pronoun, the Verb, and the Particles, defined as follows : 1. The Substantive (also loosely called 7ioim) gives a name : vir, a man ; Codes, Codes ; ddnnm, a gift, 2, The Adjective adds a quality to the Substantive : . bonus vir, a good man, 3. The Pronoun points out without giving the name : hie, this ; iUe, that ; ego, /. 4. The Verb expresses a complete thought, whether assertion, wish, or command : amat, he loves ; amet, may he love ; ama, love thou ! ^ ( 5. The Adverb shows circumstances, 6. The Preposition shows originally local relation. s .i-^ W ,. The C«,ju,^ion .how. connection. 6 lifFLECTIOK^ — THE SUBSTANTIVE — GENDER. Remarks. — 1. The Interjection is either a mere cry of feeling: Sh! ah ! and does not belong to language, or falls under one of the above- mentioned classes. 2. The Particles are mainly mutilated forms of the noun and pro- noun. Inflection. 17. Inflection (inflexio, bending) is that change in the form of a word which shows a change in the relations of that word. It occurs chiefly at the end of the word. The noun, pronoun, and yerb are inflected ; the particles are not capable of further inflection. The inflection of nouns and pronouns is called declension, and nouns and pronouns are said to be declined. The inflection of verbs is called conjugation, and verbs are said to be conjugated* The Substantive. 18. A Substantive is either concrete or abstract ; C07icrete when it gives the name of a person, place, or thing ; abstract when it gives the name of a quality ; as amicitia, friend- ship. Concrete substantives are either proper or comvnon : Proper when they are proper, or peculiar, to certain per- sons, places, or things : HoratiiUy Horace; Neftpolis, Naples; Padns, Po. Common when they are common to a whole class : dominus, a lord ; urbs, a city ; amnis, a river. Gender of Substantives. 19. For the names of animate beings, the gender is de- termined by the signification ; for things and qualities, by the termination. Names of males are masculine ; names of females, femi- nine. Masculine : Romnlns ; Inppiter ; vir, man ; equus, horse. Feminine : Cornelia ; luno ; femina, woman ; equa, mare. GENDER. 7 20. Some classes of words, without natural gender, have their gender determined by the signification : 1. Names of months and winds, most names of rivers, and many names of mountains are masculine : as Aprilis, April; AquilO, the north wind; Albis, the River Elbe ; AihSsy Mount Athos. Remarks. — 1. Of the rivers, AUia, LSthfi, Matrona, Sagra, Styx are feminine ; Albnla, AoherOn, Oaminna vary, being sometimes masculine, sometimes feminine. 2. Of the mountains, AlpSs, tJie Alps, is feminine ; so, too, sundry (Greek) names in a (G. ae), 6 (G. 6i). II. Many names of countries, islands, cities, plants, and trees are feminine : Aeg^tus, Egypt ; Rhodns, Rhodes ; pirns, a pear-tree; abies, a fir -tree. Remarks. — 1. Many names of countries (especially Greek) and islands in qb (G. i) follow the termination; and are masculine, except AdgyptnSi Cypnui, PeloponnOsuS) Bhodus, and some others, mainly Greek. 2. Most names of trees with stems in -tro (N. -tor) are masculine: oleaster, wild olive ; ptnaster, wild pine. So also most shrubs : dUmiu, bramble-bush ; rhlls, sumach. Neuter are acer, maple ; papfiver, poppy (usually); rObnr, oak; iner, tvillow; itLber, cork-tree; ttLber, mush- room, III. All indeclinable substantives, and all words and phrases treated as indeclinable substantives, are neuter : fas, right ; a longnm, a long ; scire tuum, thy hnowing ; triste vale, a sad '^ farewell.^' 21. I." Substantives which have but one form for mascu- line and feminine are said to be of common gender : civis, citizen (male or female) ; comes, companion ; iudex, judge. 2. Snbstantiva mdbilia are words of the same origin, whoso different terminations designate difference of gender : ma- gister^ master, teacher ; magistra, mistress ; servus, serva, slave (masc. and fern.) ; victor, victrix, conqueror (masc. and fem.). 3. If the male and female of animals have but one desig- nation, mas, male, and fbmina, female, are added, when it is necessary to be exact : pavo mfts (mascnlns), peacoch ; pav6 fi&mina, peahen. These substantives are called epicene. 8 NUMBER — CASES. Number. 22. In Latin there are two numbers : the Singular, denoting one ; the Plural, denoting more than one. Cases. 23. In Latin there are six cases : 1. Nominative (Case of the Subject). Answers the question : who f what f 2. Genitive (Case of the Complement). Answers the question : whose f whereof f 3. Dative (Case of Indirect Object or Personal Interest). Answers the question : to whom f for whom f 4. Accusative (Case of Direct Object). Answers tlic question : whom f what f 5. Vocative (Case of Direct Address). 6. Ablative (Case of Adverbial Kelation). Answers the question: where f whence f wherewith f Note. — ^Theae six cases are the remains of a larger number. The Locative (answers the question : where f) is akin to the Dative, and coincident with it in the Ist and 3d Declensions ; in the 2d Declension it is lost in the Genitive ; it is often blended with the Ablative in /orm, regttlarly in syntax. The Instrumental (answers the question : wherewith /), which is found in other members of the Indo-European family, is like- wise merged in the Ablative. 24. According to their syntactical use, the cases are divided into C&s^ Recti, or Independent Cases, and Casus Obliqni, or Dependent Cases. Nominative and Vocative are Casus Bectiy the rest Castls Obliqui. 25. The case-forms arise from the combination of the case-endings with the stem, I. The stem is that which is common to a class of forma- tions. Notes.— 1. The stem is often so much altered by contact with the case-ending, and the case-ending so much altered by the wearing away of vowels and consonants, that they can be determined only by scientific analysis. So in the paradigm mfinsa, the stem is not mfins, but mfiniS, the final S having been absorbed by the ending in the Dative and Ablative Plural xnfinilB. So -d, the ending of the Ablative Singular, has nearly disappeared, and the locative ending has undergone many changes (6, @1, 1, 6). The " crude form " it is often impossible to ascertain. DECLENSIONS. 9 2. The root is an ultimate stem, aud the determination of the root l)clong8 to com- parative etymology. Tlie stem may be of any length ; the root wjih probably a mono- Byllable. In penna the stem is pennS- ; in pennula, pennulfi- ; in pennStulus, pennStnlo- ; the root is pet (petna, petna, penna), and !» found in pet-ere, to fail uporiy to fly at ; Greek, wrr-o/uiat, nrtpov ; English, feather. 2. The case- endings are as follows : So. — N.V. Wanting or m. f. -s ; n. -m. Pl. — N.V. -fis; -I; n. -a. G. -is; -I. G. -am; nun. D -t D. -bns; -Is. Ac. -m, -em. Ac. -s ; n. -a. Ab. Wanting ; -e. Ab. -bns ; -Is. Declensions. 26. There are five declensions in Latin, which are charac- terized by the final letter of their respective stems {stem- characteristic). For practical purposes and regularly in lexicons they are also im- properly distinguished by the ending of the Genitive Singular. Stem Characteristic. Genitive Singular. I. & (S). ae. II. «. I. III. I, H, a consonant. is. IV. 1i. as. V. e. 61. Remark. — The First, Second, and Fifth Declensions are called Vowel Declensions ; the Third and Fourth, which really form but one, the Consonant Declension, i aud n being semi-consonants. 27. The case-endings in combination with the stem-char- acteristics give rise to the following systems of terminations : Singular. I. II. III. ns ; wanting ; nm. s ; wanting. I. is. 5. I. nm. em, im. e; wanting ; nm. s. 0. e, I. N. a. G. ae. D. ae. Ac. am. V. a. Ab. S. 10 FIRST i)ECLENSION. IV. V. N.V. qb; tL. 08. G. Us. &, 0. D. nl, 11. &, 0. Ac. um; tL. em. Ab. 11. Plueal. 0. I. II. III. N.V. ae. I; 4. 08 ; a, ia. G. finun. um, Oram. um, ium. D. Ab. Is. Is. ibii. Ac. fts. 08; &. IV. V. Is, 08 ; a, ia. N.V. Us; ua. 08. G. unm. . D. Ab. ubus, ibns. 0bii8. Ac. Us; ua. 08. 28, General Rules of Declension. 1. The Vocative is like the Nominative, except in the Singular of the Second Declension when the Nominative ends in -ns. 2. In the Third, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative cases are alike in the Plural. 3. Neuter substantives have the Nominative, Accusative, and Vo- cative alike ; in the Plural these cases always ends in &. 4. The Dative and Ablative Plural are alike in all declensions. FIRST DECLENSION. 29. The stem ends in &, which is weakened from an original ft. The Nominative is the simple stem, with no ending. Sg. — ^N. m0nsa (f.), the table, a table, G. m0nBae, of the table, of a table. D. m0iLBae, to^ for the table, to, for a toMe, Ac. m0zuNun, the table, a table, V. m0]i8a, table ! table ! Ab. mOnsS, from, with, by the table, from, with, by a toMe, SECOND DECLENSION. II Pl. — K. mftuae, the tctbles, taiblea. G. mftisinim, of the tables, of tables. D. m8n8lS| to, for the tables^ to, for tables, Ac. mSiuSSi the tables, tables. y. mSnsae) tables f tables ! Ab. mOntlB, from, tvith, by the tables, from, with, by tables, Remaeks. — 1. The early ending of the Gen., fts, is retained in the classical period only in the form familifii, of a family, in combination with pater, father, mfiter, mother, filius, son, filia, daughter ; viz., pater- fiunilifiiy mfiterfBunilifts, fUins fEunilifis, fUia familifis. 2. The Loc. Sing, is like the Genitive : BOmae, at Rome ; mllitiae, abroad, * 3. The Gen. Sing, sometimes ends in -SI in poetry ; the Gen. PI. some- times takes the form -nm instead of -Srom ; this occurs chiefly in the Greek words amphora {amphora, measure of tonnage), and drachmai fram,c—{Oreek coin). The poets make frequent use of this form in Greek patronymics in -da, -dfts, and compounds of -cola (from colQ, 1 inhabit) and -gena (from root gen, begef). 4. The ending -Sbns is found (along with the regular ending) in the Dat. and Abl. PL of dea, goddess, and filia, daughter, 30. Rule of Gender, — Substantives of the First Declen- sion are feminine, except when males are meant. Exception. — Hadria, the Adriatic, is masculine. SECOND DECLENSION. 31. The stem ends in d, which in the classical period is usually weakened to t. In combination with the case- endings it contracts into 6 or disappears altogether. In the Vocative (except in neuters) it is weakened to 6. The Nominative ends in 8 (m. and f.) and m (n.). But many masculine stems in which the final vowel, 6, is pre- ceded by r, drop the us and e of the Nominative and Vocative, and insert 6 before the r if it was preceded by a consonant. The final -o is often retained after u or v until the first century a.d.; as servos, slave. 12 SECOND DECLENSIOK. (32)33. KortQM (m,), garden; puer (m.). Soy; ager(m.), field ; bellnm (n.), war, are thus declined : Sg.— Pl.— X. hortui, puer, ager, bellam, G. horti, puerl, agri, belli, D. hortO, .^ puerQ, agrO, bellQ, Ac. hortum, * •» puerum, agrum, bellam, V. horte, puer, ager, bellum, Ab. hortO, puerO, agrO, bells, •N. hortl, puerl, ftgrl» beUa, G. hortOmm, puerOmm, agrOrxun, bellGmm, D. hortli, pnerli, agrls, bellls, Ac. hort08, puerSs, agrOfl, • bella. V. hortl, pnerl, agri, bella, Ab. hortli. puer Is. agrls. bellls. Remarks. — 1. Stems in -io liave Gen. Sing, for the most part in I until the first century a.d., witliout change of accent : ingenl (N. ingenium), of genius^ VergiU, of Vergil, See 15, r. 3. 2. Proper names in -ins (stems in -io) have Voc. in I, without change of accent : AntOnl, TolU, CHU, Vergill. Fllius, son, and genius, genius^ form their Voc. in like manner : fill, genl. In solemn discourse -ui of the Nom. is employed also for the Vocative. So regularly dens, Ood ! 3. The Loc. Sing, ends in I (apparent Genitive), as BhodI, at Rhodes^ TarentI, at Tarentum, 4. In the Gen. PI. -urn instead of Onun is found in words denoting coins and measures ; as, rnimmnm, of moneys = sestertiom, of sesterces ; dSnSriom ; talentum, of talents ; modiom, of measfiires ; itLgenun ; me- flimrnifn • stadium. Likewise in some names of persons : deum (also -Qrum) ; Uberum ; vimm (poetical, except in technical expressions, as triumvirum) ; socium. Most of these have also the regular endings. 5. The Loc. PI. is identical with the Dative : Delphls, at Delphi. 6. Deus, Ood, is irregular, and declined as follows : Sg. N. V. deus ; G. del ; D. deO ; Ac. deum ; Ab. deO. PI. N. V. del, dil, dl ; G. deum, deOrum ; D. Ab. dels, dils, dis ; Ac. deOs. 34. Rule of Gender, — Substantives in -us are masculine ; in -um neuter. ExGEPTiONS. — Feminine are : 1st. Cities and islands, as, Corintbus, tenus. 2d. Most trees, as, fftgus, beech ; pirus, pear-tree. 3d. Alvus, helly ; oolvm, distaff ; humxiBf ground y YSJimiaf wheat~f an. 4th. Many Greek nouns, as, atomus, atom. Neuters are : pelagus, sea; virus, venom; vulgus, the rabble. THIRD DECLENSIOK — CONSOKANT STEMS. 1 3 THIRD DECLENSION. 35. I. The stem ends in a consonant, or in the close vowels i and u. 2. The stems are divided according to their last letter, called the stem-characteristic, following the subdivisions of the letters of the alphabet : I. — Consonant Stems. II. — Vowel Stems, A. Liquid stems, ending in 1, m, n, r. 1. Ending in i. B. Sibilant stems, ending in s. 2. Ending in u. (1. Ending in a P-mute, b, p. (Compare the Fourth C. Mute stems, J 2. Ending in a K-mute, g, e. Declension.) 13. Ending in a T-mute, d, t. 36. I. The Nominative Singular, masculine and femi- nine, ends in s, which, however, is dropped after 1, n, r, 8, and combines with a K-mute to form x. The final vowel of the stem undergoes various changes. The Vocative is like the Nominative. In the other cases, the endings are added to the un- changed stem. 2. Neuters always form : The nominative without the case-ending s. The Accusative and Vocative cases in both numbers like the Nominative. The Nominative Plural in &. I.-CONSONANT STEMS. A.— Liquid Stems. 1. Liquid Stems in 1. (37, 38) 39. Form the Nominative without 8. These comprise : A. Those in which the stem-characteristic is preceded by a vowel : B. Two neuter substantives with stems in -U, one of which is lost in the Nominative : mel, meUis, honey ; fel, fellis, gall. Sg. — N. consul, consul (m.). Pl. — N. cOiuiulfii, the consuls, G. cOnsulis, G. cOiuiulam, D. cOnBulI, D. cOnfltilibiis, Ac. cGnsulem, Ac cQnBulfii, y. consul, V. cOnsulfii, Ab. cQuBule, Ab. oOniulibns, 14 CONSONANT STEMS. Rules of Gender, — i. Stems in -1 are masculine. Exceptions : SXl, ochre, is neuter, and occasionally sSl, salt. 2. Stems in -11 are neuter. 2. Liquid Stems in m. 40. Nominative with 8. One example only : hiein(p)s, winter (f.) ; Gen., hiem-is, Dat., hiem-i, etc, 3. Liquid Stems in n. 41. Most masculine and feminine stems form the Nomi- native Singular by dropping the stem-characteristic and changing a preceding vowel to o. • Some masculine and most neuter stems retain the stem- characteristic in the Nominative and change a preceding i to e. 42. MASCULINE. F£MININE. NEUTER. Sg.- -N. leS, Zion(m.), imfigS, likeness (f.), nOmen, name {n,\ G. leOnifl, imSginis, nSminis, D. leOnl, imftginl, nOminX, Ac. leOnem, imfiginem, nOmen, V. lel$, imfigO, nOmen, Ab. leOne, imfigine. nOmino, Pl.- -N. leOnei) imSLginHf nOmina, G. leOnnm, imftg^um, nOminum, D. leOnibuB, imftg^nibnS) nOminibiu, Aq, leOnCs, imSigiRBif nSmina, V. leOnei, inAgmHf nOmina, Ab. leOnibuB. imSginibns. nOminibus. Irregular formations : carS, G. camiB, flesh ; AniS, G. AniSniB, the Anio river ; N6ri8, G. Nfirienis, a proper name. Sanguis, Uood, and polliB, flour, drop the stem-characteristic knd add b to form nominative ; G. Banguinii, pollinii. 43. Rules of Oender, — I. Masculine are nouns in -6, Save those in -do, -go, and -ioj Withcaro, j?e57i; but cardo, ordo. Are masculine with ligo, margo ; So harpagd, and in -io All concrete nouns like pugio.* * cards, hinge ; harpagO, grappling-hook ; ligQ, mattock ; margO, border ; OrdO, rank ; pfLgiQ, dagger. CONSOKANT STEMS. 1 5 2. Substantives in -en (-men) are neuter. Exceptions. — Masculine are liSn, splfin, spleen; rSnei (pi.), kidneys ; peoten, com^, and a few others, mostly names of males. 4. Liquid Stems in r. 44. Form Nominative without 8. 45. SINQULAB. PLUBAL. 8INOULAR. PLUBAL. N. labor, /otZ (m.), labOrCs, ^Utr, father (m.), patrfii, G. labOris, labOmni) patris, patram, D. labOrl, labOribus, patrl, patribns, Ac. labOrem, labOrfii, patrem, patrOs, v. labor, labOrM, pater, patrOs, Ab. labOre, * labOribns. patre, patribns. Irregular formations : Four neuters, ebnr, ivory ; femur, thigh ; iecnr, liver ; rObur, oaky show Gen. in -orii ; two of these, femur, iecur, liave also the irregular forms feminis and iecineris, iecinoris, iocinoris. Iter, wayy has G. itineris ; and BupeUSz, furniture, has G. BupeUeotilis. Remark. — Imber, shower^ linter, skiff , flter, hag, yenter, helly, have Gen. PI. in -ium. Imber has also sometimes Abl. Sing, in I. 46. Rules of Gender, — i. Substantives in -er and -or are masculine. 2. Substantives in -ar and -ur are neuter. Exceptions. — Masculine are salar, trout; furfur, hrany and names of animals in -ur. Feminine are linter, arbor. Neuters are : jKr, nectar, marmor, Aequor, iter, acer, piper^ Yerber, tLber, v6r, cadftver, Ador, tuber, and papftver.* B.— Sibilant Stems. 47. The Nominative has no additional 8, and changes in masculines e to i, and in neuters e or to u before s. In the oblique cases, the s of the stem usually passes over, between two vowels, into r. 48. BINGTTLAB. PLURAL. SINGULAR. PLURAL. N. A. y. genus, kind (n.), genera, corpus, body (n.), corpora, G. generis, generum, corporis, corporum, D. generl, generibus, corporl, corporibus, Ab. genere, generibus. corpore, corporibus. ♦ arbor, tree ; acer, maple ; ador, spelt ; aequor, sea ; oadSyer, dead body ; fSr, spelt; iter y way : maxmoif marble ; nectar, nectar; papfiver, poppy ; piper, j>^ per; tftbeTi tumor ; tLber, teat ; ySr^ spring ; [yerber], thong ; linter, skiff. l6 THIRD DECLENSION. Remark. — As, a copper, and os, hoiie, form tlie Gen. PI. in -ium, after the usage of vowel stems. So also mils, mouae. 49. Rules of Gender, — i. Masculiue are substantives in -is (-eris), and -os (-oris). 2. Neuter are substantives in -Tis (-erlB, -oris), and in -us (ruris). Exceptions. — Os, mouth (G. Oris), is neuter; telltls, earth (G. -tbis), is feminine ; and lepns, hare (G. -oris), mils, mouse (G. mllris), are masculine. C— Mute Stems. 50. All masculines and f eminines of mute stems have s in the Nominative. Before s a P-mute is retained, a K-mute combines with it to form x, a T-mute is dropped. Most polysyllabic mute stems change their final vowel i into e in the Nominative. The stems show variations as follows : 51. Stems in a P-mute. Sg. N. princeps, chief {m.)^ Pl.— prineipes. G. principis. principam, D. prlndpl, prinoipibns, Ac. principem, prlndpes, V. princeps, prineipes. Ab. prIncipe, prlndpibns. 52. Stems in a K-mute. Sg.— N. rex, king (m.), Pl. — reges, G. regis. regnm. D. rfigl, regibus. Ac. regem. reges, V. rex. reges, Ab. rege. regibus. Irregular formations: nix (G. nivis), snow; bes (G. bovis; see 71), ox. 53. Stems in a T-mute. Sg. — N. aetas,a^e(f.), Pl.— aetstes, Sg.— p6s,/oo/(m.), Pl. — pedes, G. aetStis, aetStum, pedis, pedum, D. aetStT, aetStibus, pedl, pedibus, Ac. aetStem, aetStes, pedem, pedes, y. aetSs, aetstes, pes, pedes, Ab. aetSte, aetStibus. pede, pedibus. Irregular formations : cor (G. cordis), heart ; nox (G. noctis), night ; caput (G. capitis), head ; lac (G. lactis), milk. VOWEL STEMS. 1 7 54. Many substantives of this class have the termination -ixun in the Gen. PI. and -I in the Abl. Singular. Monosyllabic mute stems, with the characteristic preceded by a consonant, have the Gen. PI. in -iom : orbiuin, of cities ; ardnm, of dtadeh ; montium, of mountains ; noctium, of the nights. Monosyllabic mute stems, with characteristic preceded by a long vowel or diphthong, vary : dOt-iunii of dowries ; llt-iom, fauc-iom, fraud-nm (-iom), laud-nm (-inm). But vOcnm, of voices. Monosyllabic mute stems with characteristic preceded by a short vowel have -um : opnm, of resources ; but foo-iom, nuc-um (-iom), niv-ium (-nm). The polysyllabic stems in -nt and -rt have more frequently -ium, as clientiuin (-xun), of clients ; oohortixun (-nm), of companies. Of other polysyllabic stems feminine stems in -St have frequently both -xun and -inm, as aetfitnm and aetfitium, clyitfitum and civitfitium, etc.; the rest have usually -am. Pains, marsh, has usually palUdium. 55. BuU of Gender. — Mute stems, with Nominative in s, are feminine. 1. Exceptions in a k-mute. Masculine -nnx, -ix, and -ez, Saving forfex, forpez, nez, L6Z, vibfiz, £mz, and forms of [prez].* Calx, hsel, and oalz, chalky vary. 2. Exceptions in a t-mute. Masculine are lapis, stone, and substantives in -es, -itis, except merges (f.), sheaf; pari6s, wall; also y^Byfoot. Masculines in -ns are : dfins, tooth ; fOns, spring ; mOns, momitain ; p5ns, bridge; mdfins, rope; torrfins, torrent. Neuters are only : cor, heart, lac, milk, and caput, head. II.-VOWEL STEMS. 1 . Vowel Stems in 1. 56. Masculines and f eminines form their Nominative in s. Some feminines change, in the Nominative, the stem- vowel i into e. Neuters change, in the Nominative, the stem-vowel i into e. This e is generally dropped by polysyllabic neuters after 1 and r. * fiMZ, dregs ; forfez, shears ; forpez, tongs ; iSz, law ; nez, slaughter ; [prez], prayer ; ylbSz, toeal. 2 i8 THIRD DECLEXSIOK. Stems in i have Genitive Plural in -imn. Neuter stems in i have the Ablative Singular in i, and Nominative Plural in -ia. JK* V« 7* Ma IC« So.— N. eolh»f hia, turriBj tower, valp6s,/oa;, niare,««a, KnimBl, living beinff, 6. ooUis, tnrris, vulpiB, xnaris, animftljg, D. com, tnrrl, volpl, marl, animfiU, Ac. ooUem, tnrrimCem), volpem, mare, animal, v. oollis, tnrris, YUlpftl, mare. animal. Ab. coUe, tiirrl(e), Yulpe, marl, anim&ll. Pl.~N. coUes, turrfti, YUlpAl, maria. animSlia, G. oollinm, tum-nm, vulpium) animfilinm. D. combui, turri-biu, valpibai, maribui. animSlibui, Ac. 001118(60), turrlKfti), valpls(68), maria. animSlia, V. ooUte, tnrres, TnlpAi, maria. animSlia, Ab. oombui. turri-bui. valpibns. maribui. animSlibui. 67. Remarks. — 1. The proper ending of the Ace. Sing, -im is re- tained always in sitiB, tassis, vis ; and in names of towns and rivers in -is, as Nefipolifl, Tiberis ; usually in febris, puppis, reetiB, seeliriB, tnrris ; occasionally in clSvis, crStis, ontis, messis, nSvis. 2. The Abl. in -I is found in substantives that regularly have -im in Ace. (except perhaps restis) : also not unfrequently in amnis, avie, canSlis, clvls, clfiesis, flnifl, fELstis, Ignis, orbis, nngnii; occasionally in angnis, bilis, clSvis, collie, corbie, meeeie ; regularly in neuters in e, al, and ar, except in r6te, and in the towns Caere, Praeneete. 3. In the Gen. PI., instead of the ending -inm, -am is found always in canie, dog, iuvenis, young man, pSnie, bread, eenex, old^ etrufie, heap, volucrie, bird; usually in apie, hee, eSdfie, seat, vStfie, ha/rd; frequently in meneie, month. On imber, e^c, see 45, r. 4. The proper ending of the Ace. PL, -Is, is found frequently in the classical period along with the later termination -ee. 68. Rule of Gender, — i. Vowel stems, with Nominative in -es are feminine ; those with Nominative in -is are partly masculine, partly feminine. 2, Vowel stems, with Nominative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter. 3. The rest are feminine. Remarks. — 1. Of the names of animals in -is, some are masculine : tigrie, tiger (fem. in poetry) ; canie, dog (also fem.); pieoie,^«^; others feminine : apie, bee ; avis, bird; ovis, sheep; ffilis, C(U (usually fSlee). VOWEL STEMS — FOURTH DECLENSION. 1 9 2. MasdUlnl generis orbis, p&nii, pottis, ensis, Are these words that end in -is : veotis, vermis, nngais, mfinsis, amnis, axis, bttris, collis, — antfis, cassfls, xnftnes, (plural) — cavlis, erlnis, fiuMis, foUis, Add to these the mullet^ mtLgil, fDnis, fELstis, Ignis, torris ; Which is sometimes mflgilis.* 2. Vowel Stems in u. 69. Of stems in u, the monosyllabic stems, two in num- ber, belong to the Third Declension. So. — N. grtis, crane (f.), Pl. — gmfls, G. gruis, gmam, D. gml, gmibui, Ac. gmem, gmes, V. grfls, gm8s, Ab. gme, graibus. fills, 8V)ine (commonly f.), usually subns, in Dat. and Abl. Plural. FOURTH DECLENSION. (60) 61. The Fourth Declension embraces only dissyllabic and polysyllabic stems in u. The endings are those of the Third Declension. In the Genitive and Ablative Singular, and in the Nomi- native, Accusative, and Vocative Plural (sometimes, too, in the Dative Singular), the u of the stem absorbs the vowel of the ending, and becomes long. In the Dative and Ablative Plural u becomes i before the ending -bus. The Accusative Singular, as always in vowel stems, has the ending -m, without a connecting vowel (compare the Accusative in -i-m of the stems in i), hence -u-m. MASCULINE. NEUTER. So.— N. firHctuB, /rui^, Pl.— frtlcttis, So.— corntl, hom^ PL.-comua, 6. frUctfUi, frUctaum, corntls, cornuum, D. frflctuKfraottl), frfLctibns, comH, cornibos, Ac. frOotam, frtlcttis, corntl, comaa, y. frUotus, frUctfLs, corntl, comoa, Ab. frflcttl, frfLctibns. coma, comibns. * Amnis, river ; antSs (pl.)> rows ; axis, axle ; bUris, plow-tail ; cassSs (pl.), Mis : canlis, stalk ; oollis. Mil : crXnis, hair ; ensis, glaive : foMoiBy fagot ; follis, ^nXUnes ; ftnis, rove : fELstis, cudgel ; Ignis, Jire ; mfinSs (pl.), Manes; mfinsis, month ; mUgiKis), mullet ; orbis, drcU ; pSnis, bread ; postis, door-post ; torris, Jlre-brand ; unguis, nail ; yeotis, lever ; vermis, worm. 20 FIFTH DECLENSION — GEEBK SUBfiffAlttlVai, Remarks. — Plural: 1. Dal., AbL The original form -abiu is re* tained always in aoni, needle ; arena, bow; qaereos, oak/ tribui, Iribe; sometimes in a few other words. 2. Domns, house, is declined: G. domlUi. D. domnl. Ac. domom. Y. dornus. Ab. domO. Loc. doxnl (domol). PI. N. domlUi. G. domOmm. D. Ab. domilmB. Ac. domOB, domlUi. 62. Rule of Gender, — Substantives in -tis are masculine ; those in -u are neuter. Exceptions. — Femininea are acus, needle, domns, house, IdlUi (pi.), the Ides, maniui, hand, peniui, tnctuals, ^rticiuBy piazza, tribuB, tribe. FIFTH DECLENSION. 63. The stem ends in -e ; Nominative in 8. In the Genitive and Dative Singular -e is shortened after a consonant ; after a vowel it remains long. In the Accusative Singular we find always 6. The ending in the Genitive Singular is that of the Second Declension, -i ; the other endings are those of the Third. MASCULINE. FEMININE. Sg. — N. dieiif day, Pl. — dies, So. — re^f thing, Pl.— res, G. difil, dienun, rel, rfirum, D. difil, diebuB, rel, rebuB, Ac. diem, di6B, rem, rte, Y. di6B, diSB, r6B, rte, Ab. die, dieboB. r6, rSbuB. Remarks. — 1. Plural: Gen., Dat., Abl. Common in but two sub- stantives, dies, res. 2. Many words of the Fifth Declension have a parallel form, which follows the First Declension, as moUitiiS, softness, and moUitia. Where this is the case, forms of tlie Fifth Declension are usually found only in the Nom., Ace, and Abl. Singular. 64. Rule of Gender. — Substantives of the Fifth Declen- sion are feminine except dies (which in the Sing, is common, and in the PI. masculine), and meridies (m.), midday. Declension of Greek Substantives. 65. Greek substantives, especially proper names, are com- monly Latinized, and declined regularly according to their stem-characteristic. Many substantives, however, either SIKOtrtAB FORMS OF GREEK SUBSTANTIVES. 21 retain their Greek form exclusively, or have the Greek and Latin forms side by side. These variations occur principally in the Singular, in the Plural the declension is usually regular. Singular Forms of Greek Substantives. First Declension. N. Penelope, LeOnidSi, AnohlsOs, G. Fexielopes, LeOnidae, Anchlsae, D. Penelopae, LeOnidae, Anchlsae, Ac. Penelopen, 1 LeOnidam, Sn, AnchlsOn, am, V. Penelope, Leonids, Anchlse, S, &, Ab. PenelopS. LeOnidS. AnchlsS. Second Declension. N. D6IOS, HI, Ilion, am. PanthllB, AndrogeOs, as. G. D6U, 1 lui. Pantlil, Androgel, D. D610 » luo, PanthO, AndrogeO, Ac. DGlon, uin, Ilion, nm. PanthUn, AndrogeOn, 0, Ona, V. Dele » Ilion, am. PanthH, AndrogeOs, Ab. D610 '• TliO. PanthO. AndrogeO. Tliird Declension. N. SolOn, Solo, Ser, air. XenophOn, AtlSs, G. SolOnis, Seris, XenophOntis, Atlantis, D. SolOnI, Sen, XenophOntI, Atlantl, Ac. SolOna, em, Sera, em, XenophOnta, en L, Atlanta, V. Sol&n, ser. XenophOn, AtlS, Ab. Sol&ne. Sere. XenophOnte. Atlante. N. Thalee, Paris, herOs, ^ero. G. Thal-etii 1, -is. Paridis, os. herOis, D. Thal-etl, .-I, ParidI, i. herOl, Ac. Tlial-eta >, -en, -em. Par-ida, -im, -in. herOa, em. V. Tliale, Pari, Paris, herOs, Ab. Thaie. Mixed Paride. I Declensions. herOe. n. Ill • II. III. II. III. N. OrpheOs, 1 AthOs, 0edip!to, G. Orphel, ei, AthO, Onis, Oedip-odis, -I, D. OrpheO, AthO, OedipodI, Ac. Orphenm, ea, AthO, On, Onem, Oedip-am, -oda, V. Or^es, AthOs, Oedipe, Ab. Oi^eO. AthOne. Oedip-ode, -0. n. ni, » II. III. III. IV. N. Achines , ens. SOcrates, DIdO, G. AchiUis, 1 el, I, eOs, SOcratis, I, DidfU, OnIs, D. AcMUI, SOcratI, DIdO, Onl, Ac. AchiUem, ea, en. SOcraten, em. DIdO, Onem, V. Acunee , e, ei, e, SOcrate, es, DIdO, Ab. AcliiUe, e, I. SOcrate. DIdO, One. 22 IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES. Remarks. — 1. In the Gen. PI. -On and -eOn are found in the titles of books ; as, OeOrgioOn, XetamorphOseOn. 2. Many Greek names, of the Third Declension in Latin, pass over into the First Declension in the Plural ; as, ThIloydicUUi, Hyperldae, and many names in -cratfis ; as SOcratfis ; PL, SOoratae (also SOoratfis). 3. In transferring Greek words into Latin, the Accusative Singular was sometimes taken as the stem : So Kpartfjp, Ace. Kpari^pa, (punch) botcl. crfttOr, crSteris (masc), and orfttSra (crSterra), orfttSrae (fem.). 2aXa|iCf , Ace. 2aXa|iCva, Salamis, SalamlB, SalamlniB, and Salamlna, ae. IRREGULAR SUBSTANTIVES. I. Redundant Substantives. (Abundantia.) (66) 67. A. Heterogeneous Substantives, or those whose gender varies : 1, The variation occurs in several cases in either number or in both. aevnm, baculnm, baltens, cfiiens, cavnm, cing^lom, clipeos, collum, forum, gladios, 2. The gender varies in Singular and Plural. a. The Plural has -a sometimes, while the Singular ends in -ni (or -er) : cUyoB, hill, iocos, jest, locui (looa, localities ; lool, usually pas- sages in hooks, topics), and many others, especially names of places. h. The Plural has -I, while the Singular ends in -urn : fUam, thread, frfinuin, hit, rSstnun, hoe, and many others. 68. B. Heteroclites, or substantives which show different stems with the same Nominative ; Metaplasts, or those which have certain forms from another than the Nominative stem. Many of these belong also under 67. -us, age, iogalnm, -us. collar-hone. -US, staff. nSsoi, -am. nose, -nm, girdle. palfttom, -OB, palate. cheese. pfleoB, •am. cap. -us, cavity. sagum, -us. cloak, -us, helt. tergum. -us, hack, -Tun, shield, thesaimui, -am. treasure. -OB, neck. vSUus, -am. palisade. -Hi, market, and many others. -am, sword, 1. iBt, 2d. esseda, -am, ostrea, -am, 2. let, 5th. dtlritia, -60, and many others. See 63, r. 3. 3. 2d, let. mendom, -a. cTiariot, oyster, hardness, fault. margarlta, -am, pearl, mSteria, -60, matter, sertam, -a, wreath. IBBEGULAB SUBSTANTIVES. 25 The following fonn their Plaral according to the First Declension only : balneum, bathy diliciimi, pUaturet epnlnm, banquet^ falmentnm, prop. 4. Sd, 4tlx. ColvSi dUtoff^ domoi, house^ and a large number of substantives of the Fourth Bedenaion have one or two cases of the Second ; so arcuB has G. arcl ; cOnStns (-um), illisiif (-urn), haye Nom. Plural in a ; senfitns, seruiU, has Gen. Sing. senStl. Some subetantives of the Second Declension form individual cases according to the Fourth : ffgtl (Ac. PI. fltotfUi), f^tom (N. fretoi, Ab. frettl), lectns (G. leotlUi), and others. 5. 8d, 2d. Yfii, vessel^ and ySnmi ; palombSs, pigeon, and palambns ; liflger], acre., and ifLgemm ; all Greek nouns in -a (G. -ati8)| as po6ma, poeni (H. pofimatiB), but PI. Gen. poSmatOmiii, Dat. Abl. poftnatb. 6. 8d, 5th. Fames, hunger, tSbei, corruption, have Abl. fam6, tSbfi ; requiSs, quiet (G. -Stis) has Ace requiem, Abl. requifi ; plGbs (G. plSbis), commons, and plSMs (G. plSbeD. 7. 2d, 8d, Ist. Yeeper, evening, has Ace. vespemm; Dat. Abl. vesperO; PI- Nom. yeeperaof the Second Declension ; Ace. vesperam ; Abl. veeperfi <>f tlu; Firnt ; Gen. yeeperis \ Abl. yespere; Loc. yeepere, yesperl of the Third. 8. Variations in the same Declension : femnr (G. femoris, feminis, ^tr.) : iecur (G. iecoris, ieeinoris, etc.) ; pecoi, early, also pecu (('. pecoris, pecudis, etc.). II. Defective Substantives. I. SUBSTANTIVES DEFECTIVE IN NUMBER. 69. A. Substantives used iu Singular only : Sin^firia tantum. Most abstract substantives, and names of materials ; such as iflstitia, justice. aumm. gold. B. Substantives used in Plural only : Pltlrfilia tantum. ang^stiae, straits. arma, Omm, arms. armSmenta, Omm, tackle. bigae, quacUrlgae, two-hjorse,four1uyi'8e chariot. cerylcfie, nMk. cOdicilU, a short note. compedfie, fetters. dlyitiae, riches. epulae (eonlom), banquet. excubiae, ezsequiae, exta. Scum, exayiae, iSitl (fSitfUi), fCLUCAl, fSriae, forte, liXbema, XdfUi, Kalendae, NOnae, indtltlae, watching. funeral procession. the interned organs. equipments. calendar. gullet. holidays. door. winter quarters. Ides, Calends. Nones, truce. Insidiae, Uberl, mfinfis, manubiae, minae, moenia, ium, ntlptiae, penfites, phalerae, praecordia, Orum, preces, -um, reliquiae, r6n68, scfilae, spolia, Orum, tenebrae, yalvae, yerbera, um, ylBcera, ambuscade. childreik. shades of the dead. spoils. threats. town- wall. wedding. the Penates. trapjnngs. diaphragm. prayer. remains. kidneys. stairway. spoils (sing, late, ancl poet.). darkness, folding-doors, scourging (eing. poet. and late). entrails (sing, poet and late). 24 IRREGULAB SUBSTANTIVES. C. Substantives used in Plural with a special sense : Heterologa. aedfti, i8, temple (better aedis). aedte. ho^tse, palace. aqua, watevy aquae. mineral springe. auxiliom, help. auzilia. auxiliaries, reinforcements. career, prUxmy career fie. barriers. castmm, forty castra. camp. comitiom, place of OBteniblagey comitia. assemblage for voting. cOpia, abundance^ cOpiae, forces, troops. facultfis, capabilitjfy facultStfis, goods. flnis, end, limit. flnfis. territory, borders. fortUna, fortune. fortftnae. possessions. habSna, strap. habfinae, reins. impedlmentom, hindrance, impedimenta, baggage. Uttera, letter (of the alphabet) 1 Utterae, epistle, literature. pars, part, partfie, aleorole. rOstmm, beak. rOetra, the tribunal at Some. son, lot. sortfis. also oracle* tabula, board, tablet. tabulae. a^Bo accounts. vigiUa, a night-watch. vlgiliae. pickets. 2. SUBSTANTIVES DEFECTIVE IN CASE. 70. A. Many verbals of the Fourth Declension occnr only in the Ab. tl, as admonittl, coSctll, invltstll, iflsstl, iniflMtl, mandfittl, misell, nStll, permiBsIl, rogfitll. B. Some substantives have only two cases, as, flUl, neflU, Sing. N. Ac; Initar, Sing. N. Ac. Some verbals in -ui have in Floral only Nom. and Ace., as impettls, monittLs. Greek neaters in -os have only Nom. and Ace. Singular. C. Substantives with three cases: faex, dregs; Sing. N. D., Plur. Ab.; vlruB, slime ,• Sing. N., 6., Ab. D. lTfim6, nobody, substitutes for Gen. and Abl. ntUlIui homixiis, and nUlO homine. in the Dat. and Ace. it is normal ; nfimini, nfiminem. 71. III. Peculiarities. fie, assis (m.), a copper. auceps, aucupiB,/oi£'^. bOs (for bovs), bovis (c), ox, cow. PI. G., bourn. D. Ab., btLbui, bObus. caput, capitis (n.), head. anceps, ancipitis, tivo-headed. praecops, -dpitis, headlong. car6, camis (S.), flesh. PI. G. camium. Gerfie, Cereris, Ceres. fSr, farris (n.), spelt. fel, fellis (n.), gaU. femur, femoris (n.), thigh. feminis. iter, itineris (n.), way, route. iecur, iecoris (n.), liver. iecinoris, ieoineris, iocineris. Itlppiter, lovis. mel, mellii (n.), Iwney. nix, nivis (f.)t snow. OS, OSSis (n.), b(me (48 b.). Os, Oris (n.), mouth. pollis, pollinis {ixi.),jUmr. sftnguls, sanguinis (m.), blood. senez, senis, old man. supellfiz, supellSctilis (f.)t furniture. Tonus, Yoneris, Venus. ADJECTIVES. 2$ ADJECTIVES. 72. The adjective adds a quality to the substantive. Ad- jectives have the same declension as substantives, and ac- cording to the stem-characteristic are of the First and Second, or Third Declension. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension. 73. Stems in -o for masculine and neuter, -a for femi- nine ; nominative in -us, -a, -um ; (er), -a, -urn. The same variations in termination occur as in the substantives ; except that adjectives in -ius form Singular Genitive and Vocative regularly. See 33, r. 1 and 2. Bonns, bona, bonum, ffood. X. F. N. M. F. N. So.— N. bonui, bona, bonnm, Pl.— boni, bonae, bona, O. boni, bonae, boni, bonOrum, bonfinun, bonOnun, D. bono, bonae, bonO, bonis, bonis, bonis, Ac. bonnm, bonam, bonum, bonOs, bonfis, bona, V. bone, bona, bonum, boni, bonae, bona, Ab.bonO, bonS, bonO, bonis, bonis, bonis. Miser, misera, miserum, wretched. Sg.— N. miser, misera, miserum, Pi^.—miserl, miserae, misera, 6. miserl, miserae, miserl, miserOrum, miserfirum,miserOrum, D. miserO, miserae, miserO, miserls, miserls, miserls, Ac. misemm, miseram, miserum, miserOs, miserSs, misera, V. miser, misera, miserum, miserl, miserae, misera, Ab.miserO, miserS, miserO, miserls, miserls, miserls. Figer, pig^a, pigrum, slow. Sg.— N. piger, pigra, pigrum, Pl— pigri, pigrae, pigra, 6. pigprl, pigrae, pigri, pigprOrum, pigrfirum, pigprOrum, D. pigrO, pigrae, pigrO, pigrls, pigrls, pigrls, Ac. pigrum, pigpram, pigrum, pig^Os, pig^Ss, pigra, V. piger, pigra, pigrum, pigrI, pigrae, pigra, Ab.pigrO, pigrfi, pigrO, pigrls, pigrls, pigrls. 74. Stems in -ro follow the same principle in the forma- tion of the Nominative masculine as the substantives, except that -us is retained : I. In ferns, wild, properus, quick, praeproperus, prae- postems, absurd, inferus, loiver, superus, upper. 26 ADJECTIVES. 2. Also when -ro is preceded by a long vowel ; as, anstSnii, harsh, matonu, early, proc^nu, tall, ptlnu, pure, aevenu, serious, sinc6ni% sincere, senu, late, venu, true. Remarks. — 1. Bextera, dexterum, etc^ right, are found side by side with dextra, dextmm, etc., tliroughout the language. Caesar uses only the shorter form. 2. A few adjectives of this class lack the Nom. Sing, wholly or in part ; so there is no ofitenw or pottenii in the best period. 76. ^» I^ poetry, but at all periods, we find -urn alongside of -Onim and -inun in the Gen. Plural. 2. In the Dat. and Abl. PI. -ili from adjectives in -iui is often con- tracted to Is ; usually in names of months and in adjectives formed from proper names. 76. The so-called pronominal adjectives show certain peculiarities in the declension of the singular, in the Gen- itive and Dative. They are : alter, one of the two ; altemter (a combination of alter and uter), either of the two ; alios, other ; neuter, neither ; nullus, none ; sdlus, sole ; tdtns, whole ; ullus, any ; unus, one ; uter, which of the two. X. F. N. X. p. N. N. alter, altera, alteram, alias. alia. aUad, G. alterlui, alterluB, alterlos. alias. alias, alias, D. alter!, alterl. alterl. alii, alii, alii. Ac. alteram, alteram, alteram. aliom. aliam, aliad. Ab. alterO, alters. alterO. aUO, alifi. aUO. N. mills, mia, miarn. ater, atra, atram, G. milnii, milns, milas, atrloB, atrlas. atnas, D. mil. mil, . mil. atrl, atrl, atn. Ac. minin. fOlam, miam. atram, atram. atram, Ab. mio, mifi. mio. atrO, atrfi. atrO. Like ater is declined neater ; like QUas are declined nmias, sOlas, tOtas, Unas. The Plural is regular. Remaeks.— 1. The Gen. alias is very rare, and as a possessive its place is usually taken by aliSnas. 3. The I of the ending -las (except in alias) could be shortened in poetry. This was usually the case with alter, and regularly in the compounds of ater ; as, atriasqae. ADJECTIVES. 27 8. In the compound alterater we find usually both parts declined ; sometimes the second only. 4. Alius makes Norn, and Ace. Sing, neuter irregularly : aliud. Adjectives of the Third Declension. 77. The declension of the adjectives of the Third Declen- sion follows the rules given for the substantives. Most adjectives of the Third Declension are vowel stems in -i, with two (rarely three) endings in the Nominative. The remaining adjectives of the Third Declension are consonant stems and have one ending only in the Nomi- native. ADJECTIVES OF TWO ENDINGS. 78. I. These have (except stems in -ri) one ending in the Nominative for masculine and feminine, one for neuter. Most stems in -1 form the masculine and feminine alike, •with Nominative in s; but the Nominative neuter weakens the characteristic i into e. (Compare mare, sea.) 2. Several stems in -i, preceded by r (cr, tr, br), form the Nominative masculine, not by affixing s, but by dropping the i and inserting short e before the r, as, stem, acri, sharp, Nom., ftcer (m.), acris (f.), acre (n.). These adjectives are Seer, alaoer, campester, celeber, celer, equester, polllfter, pedester, pater, saltlbor, sUveflter, terrester, volacer, and the last four months ; and are sometimes called adjectives of three endings. The e belongs to the stem in oeler, celeris, celere, swift^ and therefore appears in all cases. K. and F. N. M. F. N. Sg.— N. fiEudlis, easy. facUe, Soer, sharpf Scris, Sere, G. fkdlis, faciUs, Sorts, Scris, Scris, D. fiusUl, jbdll, Sen, Sen, Sorl, Ac. fEudlein, fiaoUe, Screm, Sorem, Sore, V. fiftdliii, feutile, Seer, Scris, Sere, Ab. fodll, facUl, Serf, Serf, Son, Pl.— N. fadles, &eilia, Seres, Seres, Scria, G. fjEudliom, faciUnm, Scrinm, Scrinm, Scrinm, D. fiEudUbiis, facilibui, ScribuB, Scribus, Scribus, Ac. fieudl68(Ii), facilia, Scr68(l8), Scres(l8), Scria, V. faeiles, faoUia, ScrSs, Sores, Scria, Ab. &eiUbiiB, facilibns, Scribns, Scribus, Scribus, 28 ADJECTIVES. Remark. — Stems in -ill and -iri differ from the substantival declen- sion in not dropping final -e in the Nom. Sing, neuter, except occa- sionally eapitaL See 56. 79. Remaeks. — 1. Many adjectives of two endings (except stems in -ri) have also -• in the Ablative. This is found chiefly in the poets. When, however, these adjectives become proper names, -e is the rule. 2. The Gen. PI. in -um is found frequently in the poets. In clas- sical prose are found only TitiSniom and funiliftmm. ADJECTIVES OF ONE ENDING. 80. Adjective stems of one ending (consonant steins) close with 1, r, 8, a p-mute, a k-mute, or a t-mute. Examples are : vigil, cUert, memor, minc^, pauper, poor, dear, tamet ptLb63, adtilty yetai, old, Tigilii. memoris. pauperii. oicurifl. ptLberis. veteris. particepe, sharing, eaelebs, unmarried, inope, poor, partioipii. eaelibis. inopis. aadSx,do^« tSllx^ lucky, dwgleXj double, tet^, fierce, trvLZ, savage, audScis. fBUcis. duplicis. ferOois. tmcis. dives, rich, dflses, slothful, compot, possessed of, prtLd6n8,7ri««, concors, hannotiious, dlvitis. dfisidis. compotis. prfldentis. concordis. Present active participles are also consonant stems and follow the same declension. (81) 82. The consonant stems have the same forms in all the genders, except that in the Accusative Singular, and in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, the neuter is distinguished from the masculine and feminine. In the oblique cases they follow in part the declension of vowel stems ; thus, 1. In the Ablative Singular they have i and e — when used as adjectives commonly i ; when used as substantives commonly e. The participles, as such, have e ; but used as substantives or adjectives, either e or i, with tendency to i. 2. In the neuter Plural they have ia ; except vetus, old, which has Vetera. Many have no neuter. 3. In the Genitive Plural they have : ium, when the stem- characteristic is preceded by a long vowel or a consonant ; ADJECTIVES. 29 nm, when the characteristic is preceded by a short vowel. The participles have ium. M. and F. N. So.— N. fSLLZjlucky^WUZf G. feiloU, ftUoii, D. feilol, fBUoI, Ac. feiloem, f61Iz, V. feux, feuz, M. and F. N. prfidSniftiyiM, prfldSni, prildentis, prfldentis, prfldenti, prfidentl, prfldentoiii) porlldSxii) prfidSni, prlLdOni, Ab. fBUoI (e), fBUel (e), prfidentl (e), prfidentl (e), Pl.— N. fBlXOSe, f6Uoia, prfidentfti, prfidentia, G. fBUoium, f61Iciiim, prfidentium, prfidentinxn, J). fBlIdbns, fBUcibus, prfidentiboB, prfidentibui, ' Ac. fBUoQs, f6Ucia, prfidentfti, prfidentia, V. fBUclto, feilcia, prfidentfti, prfidentia, Ab. feilcibns, feUcibns. prfidentibui, prfidentibns. M. and F. N. ▼etnSyO'^, vetns, veterii, veterii, veterl, yeterl, ▼eterem, yetai, vetns, vetns, vetere (D, vetere (D, veterfti, vetera, veterum, vetemm, veteriboB, veteribui, ▼eterfti, Vetera,* ▼eterfti, yetera, veteribui, veteribui. M. and F. N. M. and F. N. So.-N. amSne, loving^ amfine, Pl.— amantfie, amantia, G. amantis, amantie, amantium, amantinm, D. amantl, amanti, amantibns, amantiboi, Ac. amantem, amSns, amantta (b), amantia, V. amfins, amfins, amantlto, amantia, Ab. amante (D, amante (I), amantiboi, amantibns. 83. Remarks. — 1. In the poets, -e is often found for -i in the Abl. Singular. Also in classical prose we find regularly paupere, vetere, and frequently divite, sapiente. With participles, -i is usual when they are used as adjectives. 2. In the Nom. and Ace. PI. -Is for -6s belongs to early Latin and the poets, but a few cases of the Ace. are still found in Ciceeo. In the case of participles -Is is very common, and is the rule in Vergil and Horace. In the neuter, -a for -ia is found only in fibera, Vetera. 3. In the Gen. PL, cicnr, tamef vetus, o?rf, dives, rich^ have -nm instead of -inm ; so also many compound adjectives. 4. In the poets and in later writers, -nm is not unfrequently found where classical prose uses -inm. Irregrular Adjectives. 84. A. Abundantia. Some adjectives which end in -ns, -a, -nm, in the classical times, show occasionally, especially in the poets, forms in -is, -e, e. ^., imbSoillns and imbScillis ; InfrSnns and InfrSnis ; biingns and biingis ; violentns and violSns ; indecQms and indeooris ; so also perpetnns and perpes . 86. B. Defective. Several adjectives lack a Nom. Singular, wholly or in part : as, ottera (f.), cStemm, nfipemm (n.), prImOris (G.), and a few others. 30 ADJECTIVES. C. Indecunables. . NSqiiam, worthless; frfiglj frugal ; necefse, necessary, and a few others. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 86. The Degrees of Comparison are : Positive, Compara- tive, and Superlative. The Comparative is formed by adding to the consonant stems the endings -ior for the masculine and feminine, and -ins for the neuter. The Superlative is formed by adding to the consonant stems the endings -ia-siinns, -a, -nm (earlier -is-sainiu). Vowel stems, before forming the Comparative and Super- lative, drop their characteristic vowel. POSITIYX. COMPARATIYS. SUPBBLATIYS. M. and F. N. altus, a, um, higkj altior, higher, altins, altiuimiu, a, um, highest. fortifl, e, brave, fortior, fortins, fortiBsiiiLiiB. fLtilis, e, useful, tLtilior, fltilias, tLtiliMimiu. audSz, bold, audScior, audficiiii, audSdisimiii. prtld6ii8, tpise, prtldentior, prILdentiui, prIldentiBsiiiiiiB. Peculiarities. 87. I. Adjectives in -er add the Superlative ending -rimns (earlier -rnmiui) directly to the Nominative masculine. The Comparative fol- lows the rule. Positive. CoxPABATiyx. Superlative. miser, a, am, wretched, miierior, miBeriui, miserrimui. celer, is, e, sioift, celerior, celeriui, celerrimus. ficer, Scris, Sere, sharp, fiorior, Serins, Seerrimus. Remarks. — 1. Dexter, right, and sinister, left, have always dexterior and sinisterior in the Comparative. DSterior, worse, deterrimos, lacks a Positive. 2. Vetns, old, has Comp. yeterior (archaic) or yetnstior; Sup., veterrimus. 2. Some Comparatives in -er-ior, whose Positive is lacking or rare, form the Superlative either in -r&nas ; or in -imus or -amas ; or in both. citerior, on this side, citimns ; interior, inner, intimns ; dexterior, on the right, dextimns ; posterior, hinder, postrSmns, postnmns ; exterior, outer, extrSmns, extimns ; superior, upper, snprfimus, snmmns. Inferior, lower, infimns, taoB ; ADJECTIVES. 3 1 3. Six adjectives in -ilii add -Umiis to the stem, after dropping -1, to form the Superlatiye : fuiUi, ecisy ; diAdlis, hard ; liiiiilii, Ixkt ; diiti- milis, unlike; graoilis, slender, and hnmilis, low, fuilii, Comp. fiEudlior, Sap. fMillimns. 4. Adjectives in -diou, -fleni, -volui, borrow the Comparative and Superlative from the participial forms in -dloftii, -fiofini, and -voleni. benevoluf, Jfenevolent, Comp. benevolentior, Sap. benevolentinimiis. naledicns, teurrilaus, maledlcentior, maledlcentitsimns. mignifleui, ditHnguishidj migniflcentior, migxdflcentiMimiui. 5. In like manner, egtnvi and prOvidns form their Comparative and Superlative. egSnvi, nsedyt egentior, egentiMimns. prOvidvi, far-Hghled, prOvidentior, prOvidentitsimiis. 6. Adjectives in -um, preceded by a vowel (except those in -qans), form the Comparative and Superlative by means of magii and mfizime, more and most id&nens, JU, Comp. magis idOneus, Sap. mfiximS idOneos. antlquufjOU, Comp. antlqnior, Sap. antlqoiisimiii. Bemark. — But piiii, pious, which lacks the Comparative, forms the Superlative regularly, pUsiimiiB. 7. Some Comparatives and Superlatives are in use, whilst the cor- responding Positive is either lacking or rare. So those mentioned in 87, z, b. 1, and 87, 2 : dSterior, toorse ; citerior, on this side (from dter and prep. citrS, on this side) ; exterior, outer (from extenu, on the out- tide, and prep. extrS, uoithout) ; Inferior, lower (from Infems, below, and prep. fnfrS, bdow) ; posterior, hinder (from pottems, coming after, and prep, post, tlfter) ; luperior, upper (from supems, on the top, and prep. suprS, above). Also Ocior, swift, OciBsimiiB ; potior, better, potissimns. 8. The Positive stem of existing Comparatives is sometimes met with only in a preposition or an adverb ; as, ante, before ; anterior, thai is "before ; prope, near ; propior, proximns ; filterior, further, UltimaB, from llltri, beyond ; interior, ijiner, intimns, from intrS, toithin ; prior, former, primus, first, from prO, before. 9. Many adjectives lack one or both of the degrees of comparison ; especially those denoting material, relationship, tims, etc. KOYUS, new, falsiiB, untrue, meritos, deserved^ have no Comparative. Longinquui, (tfar, propinquns, near, saltLtSris, healtl^ul, iuvenis, young (Comparative ittnior), and senex, old (Comparative senior), have no Superlative. ** Youngest " and " oldest " are expressed by minimus, mfiximus (nStH). 10. Dives, rich, shows in Cic. only divitior and divitissimus ; other- wise the Comparative and Superlative are found principally in poetry and later prose, the more usual forms being ditior, dltissimos. 32 ADVERBS. 88. Participles used as adjectives are subject also to the same laws of comparison : as^ amftna, loving, amantior, amantissimiu ; apertns, open, apertior, apertissiiiins. 89. The Superlative follows the declension of adjectives of Three Endings of the First and Second Declensions. The Comparative is declined according to the Third Declension, thus : M. aiid F. N. M. and F. N. Sg.-N. altior, altins, PL.-alti5r8s, altiOra, G. altiOris, altiOris, altiOmm, altiOmm, D. altiorl, altiOrl, altiOribus, altiOribus, Ac. altiOrem, altins, altiOres, altiOra, v. altior, altins, altiOres, altiOra, Ab. altiOre and I, altiOre and I, altiOribus, altiOribns. Remarks. — 1. In classical prose the Abl. Sing, ends in -e. In the poets and in early and late prose, often in -I. 2. In the Ace. PI. the ending -Is for -6s is confined mainly to pllirlS, minOrls, mfiiflrls, meliOrlS. 3. The Gen. PI. in -iiim is found in plUrium and complOriiun only. 90. Irregrular Comparison. bonus, good, melior, melins, optimns. mains. bad, p6ior, pfiins, pessimus. mSgnns, great. mfiior, mfiins, mfizimus. parvns, small. minor, minus, minimus. mnltns, much. 8. pltis (no Dat. nor Abl.), pltlrimns. PI. plllres, pltlra. oompllires, compllira and -ia. neqnam, worthless. neqnior, nSquins, nfiquissimns. frflgl (indecl.), /rwg'o/, frflgSlior, frIlgSlissimus. ADVERBS. 91. Most adverbs are either oblique cases or mutilated forms of oblique cases of nominal or pronominal stems. The cases from which they are derived are principally the Accusative and the Ablative. Substantives. 1. Many substantives form adverbs with the Accusative ending -tim: asacervus, heap, acervStim, in heaps; pBOSfpart, partim, ^ar%. 2. The Ablative of many substantives is used as an adverb ; as domO at home ; initio, at the outset ; modo, only ; vnlgO, commonly. ADVERBS. 33 Adjectives and Pronouns. 1. Many adjectives in -ui, -a, -am use the Abl. case as an adverb; as, tlltiiB, «a/e, tuts ; pr&iLiis, first, prlmO, at first. So also some pronouns : hOe, here ; istO, therey etc. 2. Adjectives in -ni and -er may form adverbs in : altos, lofty, altS; pnleher, beautiful, pnlohre. Also ferS and fermS, almost, 3. In a few cases the adverbial form is the Abl. Sing, feminine : alls, otherunse ; aliquA, somehow ; dexterfi and dextrS, to the right ; BiiiistrS and laeyS, to the left hand; qu£, on which side ; rfictfi, straight- way, and some others. 4. A large number of these adjectives show adverbs in two endings, sometimes with a difference in meaning : consults and oOnsultO, purposely ; oertS, at least, and oertO, certainly ; rSrS, thinly, and rfirO, seldom ; y6rS, in truth, and vSrO, true hut ; rfictS, correctly, and rOotfi, straightway ; dexterfi or deztrfi, to the right, and dexterS, skillfully, 5. Many adjectival and pronominal stems use the Accusative Singu- lar neuter as an adverb. This is true of all Comparatives, Multom, much; paolum, a little ; nimiom, too much; c6terum,/or the rest ; prlmom, first ; postrSmum, finally ; potisBimnm, chiefiy ; facile, eAJbsily ; dulce, sweetly ; triste, sadly ; impflne, scot-free ; aliqaantam, somewhat, and others. To the Comparatives belong magis, more ; nimis, too ; satis, enough. 92, I. Adjectives and participles of the Third Declension form their adverbs by adding -ter (-iter) to the stem ; stems in nt dropping the t, and stems in a k-mute inserting the connecting vowel i before the end- ing ; also a few adjectives of the Second Declension : fortis, brave, fortiter; ferOz, wUd, ferOciter; prfLd6n8,/ore«€d/i<7, prfLdenter. Exceptions : andSz, hold, andfio-ter ; difficilis, hard to do, difficulter, difficiliter (but generally, nOn facile, viz, aegrS), and others. 2. Some adjectives of the Second Declension in -us and -er form in early and late Latin their adverbs by dropping the stem vowel and adding -iter or -er. In a few cases the normal form in -S is also found : hamfiniter and hUmfinS, humanely ; largiter and large, lavishly ; torbu- lenter and turbnlentfi, riotov^y, 3 34 KUMEBALS. COMPARISON OP ADVERBS. 93. The Comparative of the adverb is the Accusative neuter of the Comparative of the adjective. The Superla- tive ends in -is-aiiiie, -er-rime, etc., according to the Super- lative of the adjective. Positive. COKPARATIVE. SUFEBLATIYS. altS) WtUy, altiiis, altissimS. pnlchrS, beauiiftdly. pulehrios. puloherrimC. misers, poorly. miserios, miserrimS. fortiter, bravely, fortius, fortissimC. andScter, boldly. audScini, audlcissimg. tato, tqfely. ttttini, tlltissime. foeUe, eatiiy. ftdUns, faoUlimS. bene, well. meUni, optimC. male, m. pSini, pessimC. [parvus], tmalLt minus, lest. minims, least. [mfignusj, great. magis, more. mSximS, most. mnltum, much. pllis, more. plllrimum. cito, quickly. citius. eitissimS. din, long. dilltius, dilltissime. saepe, often. saepius, saepissimC. nflper, recently. f nfLperrimS. satis, enough. satius, better. NUMERALS. NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 94. The Cardinal numerals answer the question quot, how many ? and are the numbers used in counting. The Ordinal numerals are derived from these and answer the question qnotoB, which one in the series ? They are as fol- lows : 1. Cabdinal Xukbebs. 1 I Onus, Una, finum 2 II ^ duo, duae, duo 3 III tres, tria 4 IV(IIII) quattuor 5 V quinque 6 VI sex 7 VII septem 8 VIII OCtO 9 IX noyem 10 X decem 11 XI lindeoim 2. Ordinal Numbers. primus, -a, -um (prior) secundus (alter) tertius qufirtus quintus seztus Septimus octSvus nOnus decimus lindeoimus NUMERALS. 35 1. Cardinal Numbkbs. 2. Ordinal Nukbbrs. 12 XII dnodeeim dnodeeimni 13 XIII tndedm tertini deoimni 14 XIV quattoordeoim qnfirtni deoimns 15 XV qulndeoim qnlntni deoimni 16 XVI 80d6oim ■extns deoimni 17 XVII teptendeoim leptimni deoimni 18 XVIII duodSYlgintl dnodSYlofiiimni 19 XIX flndsvlgiiitl findSYloeiimni 20 XX YlgintI Ylofiiimni 21 XXI vlgintl finiu Yloteimni prlmni 22 XXII vlgintldno YloSiimni leonndni 23 XXIII vlgintltrte YloSiimni tertini 24 XXIV YlgintI quattuor Ylofiiimni qnfirtni 25 XXV YlgintI qnlnqne Ylofiiimni qnlntni 26 XXVI YlgintI lex YloSiimni lextni 27 XX VII YlgintI septem YloSiimni leptimni 28 XXVIII dnodetrlgintfi dnodStrloteimni 29 XXIX fLndetrlginU findetnofiiimni 30 XXX trIginU trlofiiimni 40 XL quadrdgintS qnadrfigOiimni 50 L qnlnqndgintfi qnlnqnfigfiiimai 60 LX 8ez(lgintfi lexfigfiiimni 70 LXX septu^ntfi leptnfigSiimni 80 LXXX octogmtSL ootQgfiiimni 90 xc nOnagintfi nOnfigSiimni 100 c centum oentSiimni 101 CI oentTun et flnai oentfiiimni prlmni [mm 115 cxv oentnm et qalndecim oentfiiimni (et) qnlntni deoi- 120 cxx centxun et YlgintI oentadmni YloeiimnB 121 CXXI oentnm YlgintI Anns oentftdmni Ylofiiimni prlmni 200 cc dnoenti, -ae, -a dnoentadmni 300 ccc trecenti treoentMimni 400 cccc qnadrtragenti qnadringentfiiimni 500 I) (10) qulngentl qnlngentfiiimni 600 DO seseentl iSioentSiimni 700 DCC septmgentl leptingentSiimni 800 DCCC octmgenti ootingentfiiimni 900 DCCCC ncmgenti nOngentadmni 1000 M (CIO) mllle mlllSiimni 1001 MI mUle et ?tiwi mlllfiiimni prlmni 1101 MCI mllle oentnm finni mlllfiiimni oentMimni prlmni 1120 MCXX mllle oentnm YlgintI mfllaiimni oentMltfkni yIo^ [llnni limni [limni prlmni 1121 MCXXI mllle oentnm YlgintI mllieiimni oentSiimni yIo0- 36 KUM£KALS. 1. Cardinal Ncxbersi. 1200 2000 2222 5000 10,000 21,000 100,000 1,000,000 8. Obdikal Nuvbkbs. mlllnrimm dnowitHrimm bii mninrimm MCC mflle dueentl MM dno milia (mlllia) bbuk mIlia duo mIlia dnooitl vl gintl dno X33 qulnqne mIlia quina i»fii<»- CCIOO decern mIlia dOna i»fii<»- llnam et vlgintl mIlia Mmel et yldte mfllftdmoB centum mIlia centite mlllfldmni oentSna mIlia [mIlia deci68oentSna(oentnm) dedte oentite mlllfldmni bis mfllfisimni dneenUiinins Ylotaimns leenndnB qnlnqnite mXllifimni dedte mlllnrimni 95. The Cardinal numerals are indeclinable, except : unus, one, duo, two, trfiB, three, the hundreds beginning with forms miliTun and milibos. ■&X/ f^M.*.^A. %MM, ■■■ ■ M. and F. • N. N. dno, two^ dnae, dno, trfti, threey tria. G. dnOmm, dnftmm, dnOmm, trinm. trinm. D. duObns, dn&bns, dnObnf, tribns, tribns, A. dnOe, dno, dnSf, dno, trfis, tris. tria, Ab. dnObns, dn&buB, dnObns. tribns, tribns. Like dn5 is declined ambO, -ae, -0. Remarks. — 1. For the declension of Anns, see 76. It occurs also in plural forms in connection with pltLrSlia tantum, as flnae Utterae, one epistle), or with another numeral in the sense ofily ; in the latter sense also with substantives. 2. The Gen. of the hundreds, dnoenti, etc, ends in -nm and not -0mm. 'S, The PL mIlia, milium, mllibnB, are treated almost always as sub- stantives, the adjectival form being the Singular. 96. 1 . Compound Numerals. 1. From 10 to 20, as in the tables, or separately : decem et trfis. 2. The numbers 18, 19, 28, 29, etc., are commonly expressed by subtraction ; occasionally as in English, but never in Ciceeo. 3. From 20 to 100, the compound numerals stand in the same order as the English : twenty-one, viginti tlnns ; or, one and twenty, tlnns et (atque) vlgintl ; as, twenty one years old : ann^s flnnm et ylginti (vIgintI NUMERALS. 37 ttnam), llBiim et ylginti annOi nitui. But compounds like septnS^tfi et trte are not uncommon, though avoided by good writers. 4. From 100 on, et may be inserted after the first numeral, if there be but tw(i numbers ; as, oentum quattuor, or centum et quattnor. If the smaller number precedes, the et should be inserted ; likewise in all cases where a word is inserted within the compound numeral, as ducentl annX et ylgintl. If there be three numerals, the et is regularly omitted ; exceptions are very rai-e. 5. In compound ordinals alter is preferred to lecandiii. b. CentSna mllla is often omitted after the numeral adverb decifis = 1,000,000 ; especially in stating sums of money. 7. Fractions ai-e expressed by pars (omitted or expressed) in com- bination with dimidia (i), tertia (i), qnfirta (i), etc. A Plural numera- tor is expressed by a Cardinal ; as, duae qnlntae (j). The fraction is often broken up ; as, pan dlmidla et tertia (f = ^ + h). The even de- nominators could be divided ; as, dimidia tertia (^ x ^ £= I). Instead of dimidia without pan, dlmidiom is used. 97. 2. Distributive Numerals. These answer the question qnotdnl, how many each f 1 singoll, -ae, -a, one ea^h, 30 tncfini 2 biDl, -ae, -a, two each. 40 quadrfigfinl 3 term (trini) 50 qulnquftgenl 4 qnaterni CO sezfigfinl 5 qnlnl 70 septnSgenl 6 BSnl 80 octOgenI 7 septdnl 90 nOnSgenI 8 octOnI 100 centSnl 9 novSnl 102 centSnl binl 10 dSnl 125 centeni ylcCnl qnlnl 11 flndenl 200 ducenl 12 dnodSnl 300 trecSnl 13 temi dSnl 400 quadringenl 14 quaternl dSnl 500 quingeni 15 quInl d6nl 600 sezceni (sSsoenl) 16 86nl deni 700 septingSnl 17 septSnl dSnl 800 octingSnl 18 octOnI d6nl, duodevIeSnl 900 nOngSnl 19 novSnl dSnl, nndSylcfinl 1000 singula milia 20 yleSnl 2000 bina mIlia 21 Ylcfinl singoll 3000 trina mIlia 22 YloSnl binl, binl et ylcfinl 10,000 d6na mIlia 28 dnodetrlceni 100,000 centSna mIlia 29 llndfitrlceni 38 NUMERALS. Remarks. — 1. The Gen. PI. masc. and neuter end usually in -nm, but lixignliu has always lingnlOnim. 2. The Distributives are used with an exactness which is foreign to our idiom, whenever repetition is involved, as in the multiplication table. But when liiigall is expressed, the Cardinal may be used. 3. The Distributives are used with plllrfilia tantnm : binaa Utterae, two epistles. But with these tlnl is used for one, trlnl for three : tlnae Utterae, trinae Utterae. 4. The same rules as to the insertion or omission of et apply to the Distributives as to the Ordinals (96, 3, 4). 3. Multiplicative Numerals. These answer the question, how many fold f Only the following forms occur : 1 simplez, single, 5 qnlncaplex 2 dnplez, double, 7 septemplez 3 triplex, triple, 10 decemplex 4 qnadmplex, quadruple. 100 oentnplex 4. Proportional Numerals. These answer the question, how many times as great f Only the following forms occur : 1 simpliu, -a, -am, single, 4 qnadmplm 2 dnplus, double. 7 septnplus 3 triplni 8 octuplm 98. NUMERAL ADVERBS. These answer the question qnotifins : how often f 1 semel, once, 13 ter dedte, trodeoite 2 bis, tvnce, 14 quater dedte, quattndrdadte 3 ter 15 qulnqidfis decite, qnlndecite 4 quater 16 sexiSs deciSs, sfldecite 5 qulnquifis 17 septifis decite 6 sexiSs 18 dnodSvIciSs, octifis dedte 7 septifis 19 llndevlciss, novlte deoifis 8 octite 20 YlciSs 9 noyite 21 semelet vlcite, vleite et semel, 10 dedte vicifis seniAl * 11 llndecite 22 bis et vlcifis, vXcite et bis, yldte 12 dnodeoifis bis * * Not semel vlciSs, bis vlcifis, etc., because that would be, once twenty times = 20 times ; twice twenty times = 40 times ; this, however, does not hold for numerals be- tween 10 and 20. PRONOUNS. 39 80 trldii 40 qvadrSgiif 50 qnlnqnigiSi 60 Mzf^ 70 MptnigiM 80 oetOgiiB 90 nOnigiBi 100 eentiei 200 dneentite 400 qiudriiigentiei 500 quingentite 600 lexoentite (tHoentite) 700 leptingentiei 800 ootingentiei 900 nOngentite 1000 mnUte 2000 bismmiai 100.000 eentite mlllite 1,000,000 mlllite mlllite, decite oen- titemniite PRONOUNS, 99. Pronouns point out a person, place, or thing, but do not give its name. A. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 100. I. Personal Pronouns of the First Person. Sttbstantiye. Possebbive. mens, -a, -urn, mine or my. (Voc. maec. ml). So.-N. ego, /, G. mel, qfme, D. mShif to, for me, Ac. m<, me. Ab. mS, Jivm, with, by me. PL.-N. nOf, we. G. nottn, qffii. nottmm (Part. Oen. S04, 3), D. nObIs, to, for us. Ac. nOf, Its, Ab. nObb, from, with, by us. XLMter, nostra, nootrnm, our or ours. 101. II. Personal Pronouns of the Second Person. SUBSTANTIVB. PO88E88IVE. tuui, -a, -nm, thy or thine. So.- -N.V • ttl, thoU^ G. tol, qfthee. D. tibi, to, for thee. Ac. w, thee. Ab. «, from, with, by thee. Pl.. -N. vBi, ye or you. 0. Yostrl, of you. Yestmin (Part. Gen. 804, 3), D. vSbls, to, for you. Ac. vC, youy Ab. YObb, from, with, by you. yester, yestra, yestmm, ymr or yours. 40 PRONOUNS. III. Personal Pronouns of the Third Person. 102. The original personal pronoun of the third person, together with its possessive, is used only as a reflexive in Latin, and therefore lacks a Nominative. Its place is taken in the oblique cases by the Determinative is (103). DETERMINATIVE. SUBSTANTIYK. POSBKSSIYE. So.— N. [is, ea, id], he^ tihe^ W, supplied by the Qenitiye. G. SioB, of him, fivj^^his^Jiers^itt, etc. Pl.— N. [el, il, I ; eae, ea] , they, G. eOnim, efimin, eOmm, of them, eOnun, efinim, eOnun, their or thdrt, etc. REFLEXIVE. Substantive. Possessite. So.— N. G. sol, of him, her, if (self), luus, -a, -mn, his, heris), its D. gibl, to, for, himiself), heriself), {own). Ac. 80, steS, him{8e{f), heriself), Ab. 86, 8660, from, with, by himisdf), Pl.— N. G. 8iil, of them(gelv€s), sniis, -a, -mn, their (otr»), D. gibi, to, for themisdves), theirs. Ac. 86, 8666, themiselves), Ab. 86, 8666, from, with, by them{selves). Remaeks.— 1. The enclitic -met is sometimes added to certain forms of the Personal Pronouns ; as, egomet, / myself. 2. The enclitic -pte is sometimes added to the Abl. Sing, of the Possessives ; as, 8a6pte ingeniO, by his own genius. 103. B. DETERMINATIVE PRONOUNS. I. is. he, that. SiKOULAR. Plural. N. i«, ea. id. il, el, I, eae. ea. G. 6iai, 6iii8, 6iii8, eOnun, eSmm, eOr D. el. el. el, il8, el8. Is, Ac. eum. earn. id, e06. eSs ea. Ab. e6. ea, eO, il8, el8, l8. PRONOUNS. 41 2. Idem (ii + dem), the same. SmoxTLAB. Plural. N. Idem, eadem, idem, Idem, eldem, ildem, eaedem, eadem, G. OioBdem, OioBdem, eioBdem, eOnindem, eSnmdem, eOnmdem, D. eldem, eldem, eldem, Isdem, elsdem, ilsdem, Ac. enndem, eandem, idem, eOsdem, eSsdem, eadem, Ab. eOdem, eSdem, eOdem, Isdem, elsdem, ilsdem. 3. ipee (perhaps is + pse), he, self. Singular. Plural. N. ipse. ipsa. ipsnm. ipsl, ipsae. ipsa. G. ipeliis. ipelns, ipslns, ipeOmm, ipsSrum, ipeOrnm, D. ipsl, ipsl. ipsl. ipels, ipels. ipels, Ac. ipeam, ipsam. ipsum. ipsOe, ipsSs, ipsa, Ab. ipso. ipsS, ipso. ipsis, ipsis. ipels. 104. C. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. I. Demonstrative Pronoun for the First Person. hie, this, Sg. — N. hie, haec, hOc, Pl. — hi, hae, Iimc^ these, hHias, hOmm, hSnun, hOrum, hulc, his, his, his, hOc, hOe, hfis, haec, hOc, his, his, his. Remark. — The full forms -ce are rare in classical Latin, except in the phrase htdnsoe modi, of this kind, II. Demonstrative Pronoun for the Second Person. iste, that. •N. hie. haec. G. hOios, htdos. D. hole, hnic. Ac. hunc, hanc. Ab. hOc, hSc, . N. iste, ista. istnd. Pl.- -istl. istoe. ista, G. isUns, istlns. istlns. istOmm, istSrnm, istOmm, D. isti, istI, istI, istis. istIs, istIs, Ac. istom, istam. istnd. istOs, istSs, ista. Ab. istO, istS, istO, istIs, istIs, Istis. Kemabk. — Iste combines with -oe, but in classical Latin the only common forms are istnc (for istnd) and istaec (for ista). III. Demonstrative Pronoun for the Third Person. So.— N. ille, ilia, illnd. Pl.- -illl. illae. ilia, G. illlns. illlns. illlns. illOmm, illfimm, illOrnm, D. illl, illl. illT, illlR, illlR, illlR, Ac. illnm, illam, illnd. illOs, illSs, ilia. Ab. iUO, ills. mo. illlR, illls. illlR. So.— N. qnl, quae, quod, G. eflini, efliui, efliui, D. enl, enl, eul, Ac. quexii, quam, quod, Ab. qnC, qui, quo, 42 PRONOUNS. 105. D. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. qui (Substantiye and Adjective), who, Pl.— qui, quae, quae, quOruxu, quftrum, quQmm, quibuB, quibui, quibus, quOf, quSf, quae, quibus, quibui, quibui. General Relatives are : Substa/ntive, quinquii, whoever, quidquid, quioquid, wTuUever. Adjective, (quiqui, quaequae, quodquod), whosoever, quieunque, quaecunque, quodeunque, whichever. Remarks. — 1. D. Ab. PI. quli is common in the poets at all periods ; and occurs sometimes also in prose writers. 2. The Abl. Sing, qui for all genders is the prevalent form in early times, and in combination with cum is preferred to quO, qu£, by Cicero. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. quill who? quidi what? qui 1 quae 1 quod 1 which f uteri utral \i\xvaiL% who, which of two f quid 1 who f what f Possessive. ofLiui 1 whose f otLius, onia, eflium, whose f cull to, for whom f quidi whom? what? quo 1 from, with, by whom or what f The plural of the substantive interrogative pronoun and both num- bers of the adjective Interrogative pronoun coincide with the forms of the relative qui, quae, quod, who, which. Strengrthened Interrogratives. Substantive, quiiuam 1 who, pray t quidnam 1 whai, pray f ecquii 1 is there any one who t eoquid 1 Adjective. quiuami quaeuami quodnami which, pray f ecqull ecqual (ecquael) ecquodi Remark. — In the poets qui is sometimes found as a substantive for quis in independent sentences. In dependent sentences the use always fluctuates. 107. F. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. I. Substantive, aliquis, aliqua (rare); aliquid, ) somebody, some one quii, qua, quid, ) or other. Adjective. aliqul, aliqua, aliquod, ) _ f some, any. qui, quae, qua, quod, ) 106. E. Substantive. Adjective, Subst, and Adj. Sg.— N. quill G. cttiuil D. cull Ac. quern 1 Ab. quOl CORRELATIVES. 43 Remarks. — 1. The coraraon rule is that quia and qui occur properly only after il, niii, nS, nun, or after a relative j; otherwise aliquis, aliqnl. 2. Aliqnifl and quia are not unfrequently used as adjectives instead of aliqnl, qnl. 3. The PL N. Ac. Neut. of qnii is both quae and qna ; of aliquis only aliqua. ( quiddam (subst.), ) . . . . {. quidam, quaedam, "j V^^ ( V ^ \ ^ certain, certain one. 3. quiqiiam, quaepiam, quidpiam (and quodpiam), some one, some, quisquam, , quioquam, any one (at all). Remark. — Quisquam has no plural ; but forms of alius are used instead. ( quidvls (subst. )» quiYlB, quaevis, ^ ^^^^ (^^j j^ quflibet, quaeUbet, < ^^^idHbet (subst.), * * ^ * lquodUbet(adj.), any one you please, you like. ( quidque (subst.), ) , 5. qmique, qua«u be, 3. es-t. Tie, she, it is. si-t. he, she, it be. -I. sn-mni. we are, Bl-miu, we be. 2. es-tis, you are, 8l-ti8, you be. 3. sn-nt, they are. Bi-nt, they be. Imperfect. -I. era-m, I was, esBe-m, I were (forem), 2. erS-s, thou wast, eBB«-B, thou wert (forfifl). 3. era-t. he was. esse-t. he were (foret). -I. erS-mii8, we were, eBBS-muB, we were. 2. erS-tis, you were, eB8«-tiB, you were, 3. era-nt. they were. esse-nt, they were (forent). Future. I. er-5. I shall he. 2. eri-s, thou unit be. 3. eri-t, he will be. I. eri-mns, we shall be. 2. eri-tis. you will be. 3. eru-nt, they will be. 48 THE VERB. Pebtbct. Sg. — I. fa-I, I have been, I fa-eri-m^ I have^ may have, been, waSf 2. fa-i-itl) thou hast been, fa-erl-f, iJiou have, may est have, thou wast, been, 3. fa-i-t, he has been, he fa-eri-t, ?ie have, may have, been. was. Pl. — I. fa-i-mus, we have been, we fa-erl-mus, we have, mny have, been, were, 2. fa-i-8tis, you have been, fa-erl-tis, you have, may have, you were, been, 3. fa-Sm-nt, fa-6re, they have fa-eri-nt, they have, may have, been, they were. been. Pluperfect. So. — I. fa-era-m, I had been, fa-isse-m, I had, might have, been, 2. fa-erft-i, thou hadst fa-issS-f, thou hadst,mightst have, been, been, 3. fa-era-t, he had been. fa-isse-t| he had, might have, been. Pl. — I. fa-erft-mus, we had been, fa-iiiS-mus^i^e had, might have, been, 2. fa-erS-tis, you had been, fa-issS-tis, you had, might have, been. 3. fa-era-nt, they had been, fa-isse-nti thsy 7uid, might have, been. Future Perfect. So. — I. fa-er-0, I shall have been, 2. fa-eri-8, thou wilt have been, 3. fa-eri-t| he will have been. Pl. — I. fiEL-erl-miui, we shall have been, 2. fa-eri-tis, you will have been, 3. fiEL-eri-nt) they will have been. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. Present. Future. Pees. es-ie, to be, Sg. — I. , , Pebf. fu-isse, to have been, 2. 68, be thou, e8tO, thou shall be, FuT. fa-ttLr-um (-am, -um) esse 3. , estO, he shall be. (fore), to be about to be. Pl.— I. , PARTICIPLE. 2. es-te, be ye, estOte, you shall be, Pbes. only in the compounds 3. , suntO, they shall be, ab^ens, prae-sSns. FuT. fa-ttLr-os, -a, -um, about to be. THE VERB. 49 117. Compounds of sum, I am. ab-fum, lam away, absent. Pf . (ab- poi-fum, I am able, fiiI)SfiiI, Pr. Part. al>-i6n8, a&sen^. wi-^vjxky I am present, Pf . affol. dS-fom, / am wanting, In-inm, / am in, inter-fum, I am between. prae-ium, lam over, I superintend, Pr. Part. ^tM-u9n»j present. prO-ium, / am for, I profit, lab-innii I am under. No Pf . luper-ium, / am, or remain, over. ob-fom, / am against, I hurt, Pf . obfol or offul. These are all inflected like sum, but prdsum and possum require special treatment by reason of their composition. Prdsum, I profit. 118. In the forms of prOsum, prod- is used before vowels. Present. IlCPEBFECT. FUTUBB. Perfect. PLnPERTECT. FUT. Perf. INDICATIVE. prO-nim, prOd-es, prOd-est, prS-iamus, prOd-estiB, pr5-simt| prOd-eram, pr0d-er5, prO-fuI, * prS-faeram, prO-faerO. SUBJUNCTIVE. pr5-iim, prOd-essem, pr5-faerim, prO-foiBsem. INFINITIVE. Pres. prOd-esie ; Fut. prO-fatUnuii esse (-fore) ; Pbrp. prO-foisse. Possum, I am able, I can. 119. Possum is compounded of pot (potis, pote) and sum; t becomes s before s ; in the perfect forms, f (pot-ful) is lost. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Sg. — I. po8-ium, lam able, ca/n, pos-sim, I be able. 2. pot-es, poi-Bl8, 3. pot-est. po8-iit. Pl. — I. pos-Biuniui, po8-iImnB, 2. pot-eBtiB, pOB-BltiB. 3. poB-Bunt. poB-Bint. Imperfect. So. — I. pot-eram, 1 was able, could, poB-Bom, I were, might be, able. 2. pOt-erSB, pOB-BfiB, 3. pot-erat. poB-Bot. Pl. — I. pot-erSmuB, Pob-bSxuub, * 2. pot-erfitiB, poB-B6tiB, 3. pot-erant. poB-Bent. 4 50 REGULAR VERBS. Future. So. — I. pot-erO, I sJiall be able. 2. pot-erii, 3. pot-erit. Pl. — I. pot-erimus, 2. pot-eritii, 3. pot-enint. PXBFECT. Sg. — I. pot-n-I, / have been able^ pot-a-erim) Ihave, may have, been 2. pot-u-iftl, pot-u-erli, [able, 3. pot-u-it. pot-n-erit. Pl. — I. pot-u-imus, pot-n-erimni, 2. pot-n-iftif, pot-u-erltii, 3. pot-a-finmt. pot-u-erint. Plupkrpect. So. — I. pot-u-eram, I had been able, pot-a-iiiem, / had, might have, 2. pot-u-erfis, pot-u-iMAi, [been able. 3. pot-u-erat. pot-n-isset. Pl. — I. pot-n-erSmus, pot-n-istAnus, 2. pot-u-erfitii, pot-a-isietis, 3. pot-u-erant. pot-a-inent. Future Perfect. So. — I. pot-u-erS, / shall have been Pl. — i. pot-u-erbniui, 2. pot-u-eris, [able, 2. pot-n-eritii, 3. pot-u-erit. 3. pot-u-erint. INFINITIVE. Pre8., pot-ie, to be able, Perf., pot-U-ilM, to have been able. REGULAR VERBS. SYSTEMS OF CONJUGATION. 120. I. There are two Systems of Conjugation, the The- matic and the Non-thematic (132). The Non-thematic is confined to a small class. The Thematic System comprises four Conjugations, distinguished by the vowel characteris- tics of the present stem, a, e, 6, i, which may be found by dropping -re from the Present Infinitive Active. The con- sonant preceding the short vowel stem-characteristic is called the consonant stem-characteristic. REGULAR VERBS. 51 2. From the Present stem, as seen in the Present Indica- tive and Present Infinitive Active ; from the Perfect stem, as seen in the Perfect Indicative Active ; and from the Supine stem, can be derived all the forms of the verb. These tenses are accordingly called the Principal Parts ; and in the regular verbs appear in the four conjugations as follows : Pbe8. Ind. Pres. Inf. Pert. Ind. SUPINB. I. ain-5, ftm£-re, am£-vl, amS-timi) to love. II. d6le-5, d6l6-re, deie-vi, dele-tum, to hlot out. xuono-S) monS-re, mon-ul, mon-i-taxU) to remind. III. exii-5, eme-re, 6m-I, 6m(p)-ti2iii, to buy. Btatu-O, itatue-re, Btatu-I, itattL-tum, to settle. BcrIb-5, Bcrlbe-re, Bcrlp-sl, icrlp-tnm, to vmte. capi-0, oape-re, c6p-I, cap-turn, to take. IV. audi-5, andl-re, audl-vl, andl-tnm, to hear. Formation of the Tenses. 121. The tenses are formed by the addition of the per- sonal endings to the various stems, either directly, or by means of certain tense signs, as shown in the paradigms. While no practical rules for the formation of the tenses can be given, it is well to observe that 1. The Second Person Jmpv. Active is the same as the stem of the Pres. Infinitive. 2. The Impf. Suhjv. may be formed from the Pres. Inf. Active by adding -m for Active and -r for Passive. 3. The Second Person Impv. Passive and Seomd Person Sing. Pres. Passive in -re are the same as the Pres. Inf. Acti ve. Hence -na is pre- ferred in the Pres. Indie. Pass, in order to avoid confusion. 4. The Pres. Subjv. Active and Fut. Indie. Active in the third and fourth conjugations are alike in the First Person Singular. 5. The Fut. Perf. Indie. Active and the Perf. Suhjv. Active differ only in the First Person Singular. Remark. — Fuphonic changes in the consonant stem-characteristic in the Perfect and Supine. Characteristic b before 1 and t becomes p ; g and qu before t become c ; c, g, qu, with s, become x; t and d before I are assimilated, and then sometimes dropped. 8orIb-5, Bcrlp-il, scrlptum ; leg5, iGo-tum ; coqn-0, coo-tun ; dIo-0, dizl (dle-il) ; inng-S, iHnz-I (itlng-sl) ; ooqu-0, cozl (ooqn-f I) ; ed-5, e-iiim (ed- •iiin) ; c6d-0, c6s-8l (c6d-8l) ; mitt-O, ml-il (mit-Bl), xnis-fum (mit-Bum). 52 BEG L LAB VEBBS. X22-. First Conjuflration. Conjugation of amftre, to love. P&iN. Parts : am-O, amS-re, amfi-Tl, amfi-tom. ACTIVE INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Am loving, do love, love. Be loving, may love. Sg. — I. am-5, ame-m, 2. amfi-s, amS-8, 3. ama-t, ame-t. Pl. — I. amft-mus, amS-miui, 2. amfi-tii, ame-tiB, 3. ama-nt, ame-nt. IlCPEBFBCT. Was loving, loved, Sg. — I. amS-ba-m, 2. ama-bfi-s, 3. am^ba-t, Pl. — I. ama-bft-mus, 2. amS-bft-tif, 3. ainS-ba-nt, Were loving, might love, amft-re-m, amS-rS-i, amfi-re-t. amfi-rS-miui, amfi-re-tii, amS-re-nt. Future. Shall he loving, shall love, Sg. — I. ama-b-C, 2. am^bi-f, 3. amS-bi-t, Pl. — 1. amS-bi-miui, 2. amU-bi-tis, 3. amS-bu-nt. Perfect. Have loved, did love, Sg. — I. amfi-v-I, 2. ainS-Y-istI, 3. amS-Y-it, Pl.— I. ama-v-imiis, 2. amfi-Y-iitiS| 3. amS-y-inmt (-6re)) Have, may have, loved. amfi-Y-eri-m, ama-Y-eri-i, amfi-Y-eri-t. amft-Y-eri-miui, amfi-Y-erl-tis, amS-Y-eri-nt. BEGULAB TEBBS. 53 Flrst Cc >nJufiratfo n. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Plufbrfbct. Had loved. Mad, might have, loved. So.- —I. amfi-y-era-m, ama-Y-iaie-xu, 2. amfi-y-erfiHi, ama-Y-isse-i, 3. amtl-T-era-t, amu-Y-isse-t. Pl.- —I. amS-T-erfi-miui, amS-Y-ifie-xuas, 2. ama-T-erft-tis, ama-Y-is86-tii, 3. amU-y-era-nt, amS-y-iiM-nt. FUTURB PbBPBCT. Skdll have loved. So.- —I. ama-v-er-5, 2. amfi-Y-erl-f, 3. amft-T-eri-t, Pu- —I. amS-T-eri-mus, 2. amS-T-eri-tis, 3. amfi-y-eri-nt. IMPERATIVE. Prbsbnt. Future. So.- -I. , t 2. ama, love thou. ama-t5, thou shall love. 3. , ama-t5, he shall love. Pl.- -I. , i 2. ama-te, love ye. ama-tOte, ye shall love. 3. . ama-ntO, they shall love. INFINITIVE. Prbs. amS-re, to love, Pbrf. ama-y-isse, to have loved. Fur. ama-ttLr-um, -am, -nm [esie], to he about to love. GERUND. SUPINE. N. [amS-re], loving, G. ama-nd-I, of loving, D. ama-nd-S, to loving. Ac. [amS-re], Ac. ama-tum, ^0 love, (ad) ama-nd-um, loving, to love. Ab. ama-nd-0, hy loving, Ab. amE-ttL, to love, in the loving, PARTICIPLES. Present. N. amS-n-B (G. ama-nt-is), loving. Future. amS-ttLr-iui, -a, -um, heing about to love. 54 REGULAR VERBS. First Conjufiratfon. PASSIVE. INDICATIVE. Am loved. Sg. — I. amo-r, 2. amfi-ris (-re), 3. ama-tnr, Pl. — I. ama-mur, 2. amfi-mini, 3. ama-ntnr, Present. Imperfect. Was loved. So. — I. araa-ba-r, 2. ama-bft-rii (-re), 3. ama-bfi-tor, Pl. — I. amS-bS-mor, 2. ama-bfi-minl, 3. amS-ba-ntor, SUBJTJNCTTV^E. Be^ may 6e, loved. ame-r, amS-ri8 (-re), ame-tor. ame-mnr, amS-minl, ame-ntnr. Were, might he, loved, a;nil-re-r, am^-re-ris (-re), ama-rS-tor. ama-rS-mor, ama-rS-minI, aina-re-ntor. Future. Shall he loved. So. — I. ama-bo-r, 2. amO-be-ris (-re), 3. ama-bi-tor. Pl. — I. amil-bi-xiiar, 2. ama-bi-minl, 3. ama-bu-ntor. Perfect. Have heen loved^ was loved. So. — I. amfi-t-ns, -a, -am sum, 2. es, 3. est, Pl. — I. ama-t-I, -ae, -a sumiui, 2. estis, 3. Bunt. Have, may have, been loved, amS-t-us, -a, -am sim, 8l8, sit, ama-t-I, -ae, -a slmos, Bitis, Biat. REGULAR VERBS. 55 INDICATIVE. Had heen loved. So. — I. amS-t-os, -a, -um eram, 2. erSs, 3. erat, First Conjuflration. PASSIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pluperpkct. Had^ might have, been loved. ama-t-iui, -a, -am esiexu, esset, Pl. — I. ama-t-I, -ae, -a erSmiui, 2. erfitis, 3. erant. ama-t-I| -ae, -a esiemus, essetii, essent. Future Perfect. Shall have heen loved. So. — I. amS-t-us, -a, -am erO, 2. oris, 3. erit, Pl. — I. ama-t-I, -ae, -a erimas, 2. eritii, 3. erant. Present. So.— I. IMPERATIVE. 2. ama-re, he thou loved. 3. , Pl.— I. 2. ama-minl, he ye loved. 3. . Future. ama-tor, thou shall he loved, ama-tor, he shall he loved. ama-ntor, they shall he loved. iNFiNrnvB. Pbes. amS-rl, to he loved, Pebf. ama-t-am, -am, -am esse, to have heeti loved. FuT. amS-tom Irl, to be about to be loved, FuT. Pebf. amS-t-am, -am, -am fore. PARTICIPLE. GERUNDIVE. PsRF. amS-t-os, -a, -am, loved. ama-nd-as, -a, -am, (one) to be loved. 56 REGULAR VERBS. 123. Second Conjugratfon. Conjugation of deldre, to destroy (blot out). PRIN. Parts : dSle-0, dSl6-re, dSl9-Yl, d6l9-tam. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV. Present. Sg. —dele-5, dele-f, dele-t, delc-a-m, dele-a-i, dele-a-t. dele-o-r, dele-rii (-re), dele-tur, dele-a-r, dele-S-rii (-re), dele-fi-tnr, Pl. — dele-mill, dele-til, d6le-nt. delc-S-moi, delc-a-tii, dele-a-nt. dele-mnr, dele-mini, dele-ntnr. dele-a-mnr, dele-S-minI, dele-a-ntnr. Impbbfect. Sg. — dele-ba-m, dele-bfi-i, dele-ba-t. dele-re-m, delS-rS-i, dCle-re-t, dSle-ba-r, delS-bft-rii (-re), dele-bft-tnr. dSle-re-r, dele-re-rii (-re] dgl6-r6-tnr. Pl.— dclg-bft-mni, delS-bft-tii, dele-ba-nt. dele-r9-niiii, d6le-r6-tii, dele-re-nt. dele-bS-mnr, dele-bft-mini, dSlC'-ba-ntnr. dele-r9-mnr, dele-r9-minl, dele-re-ntnr. Future I* Sg. — dele-b-5, d6le-bi-i, d6le-bi-t. dele-bo-r, dSlS-be-rii (-re), delg-bi-tor. Pl. — d ele-bi-mui, dele-bi-tii, delS-bu-nt. dSle-bi-mnr, dSlS-bi-minI, delg-bu-ntnr. Perfeci r. Sg. — dele-v-I, dele-v-iitl, dele-v-it, d6le-v-0ri-m, dele-v-eri-i, dele-v-eri-t, dele-t-ni ram, es, est. dele-t-ni sim, lit. Pl. — dSl5-v-imni, dele-v-eri-mus, dele-v-istls, dSle-v-eri-tii, dCle-v-Brtint (-fire), d5l5-v-eri-nt. d5le-t-I ramus, dele-t-I simns, estis, sitis, snnt. sint. BEGULAH YEBBS. 57 INDIC. Second Conjugration. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. SUBJV. INDIC. Plupkbfbct. SUBJV. So. — dele-v-era-m, dele-T-erfi-s, dele-y-era-t. dele-Y-iiae-m, deie-Y-isso-i, dele-y-ine-t. dele-t-us eram, erSs, erat, dele-t-ns essem, eases, esset. Pl. ^-dele-v-erft-mtui, dele-T-erft-tis, dele-y-era-nt. dele-y-issO-miu, ' deie-y-iMO-tu, deie-y-ine-nt. dele-t-i erSmus, erStie, erant. dele-t-I essflmn essetis, essent. FUTUBK PbBFECT. So. — delS-v-er-O, dele-y-eri-s, dele-y-eri-t, dele-t-na erO, erie, erit, Pl. — dele-v-erl-muB, dele-y-eri-ti8, dele-y-eri-nt. deie-t-i erimos, eritie, emnt. IMPERATIVE. Prkbknt. PUTURB. Present. Future. So. , dele, dele-to, dele-to, dele-re, > 1 deie-tor, dele-tor. Pl. , dele-te, 1 » dele-tote, dele-ntO. » dele-min^ » dele-ntor. Pbes. dele-re. PiBRF. dele-y-Uee. FuT. dele-ttbr-um, mpmrnvE. Pres. Pbrf. -am, -um [ene]. fut. Put. I*r dele-rl. dele-t-um, -am, -nm esse. dele-tnm Irl. . dele-t-nm, -am, -nm fore. GEBUND. SUPINE. PARTICIPLES. N. [dele-re]. G. dele-nd-I. D. dele-nd-0. Ac. [dele-re] (ad) dele-nd-nm. Ab. dele-nd-0. Ac. d^le-tum. Ab. dele-tti. Pres. Fut. Pert. N. dele-n-e; G. dele-nt-i dele-ttlr-ns, -a, -nm. dele-t-ns, -a, -nm. GERUNDIVE. dele-nd-ns, -a, -nm. 58 BEGULAB YEBBS. 124. Like ddl6re, to destroy, are conjugated only^ nSre, to spiriy flfire, to weep, and the compounds of -pWre, fill, and -oldre, grow (the latter with Supine in -itum) ; also ciere, to stir up. All other verbs of the Second Conjugation retain the character- istic e in the Present System, but drop it in the Perfect System, changing vi to ui, and weaken it to i in the Supine System. Second Conjugation. Conjugation of monere, to remind. Prin. Parts : mone-O, mon9-re, mon-nl, moni-tnm. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SUBJV. PRKSENT. So.- — mone-«, mone-a-m, raone-0-r, mone-a-r, raone-s, monc-ftHi, monS-riB (-re), mone-a-riB (-re). mone-t, mone-a-t, mone-tnp, mone-a-tor, Pl.- — raong-miii) mone-S-moB, monS-mur, mone-S-mnr, inonG-tiB, mone-S-tiB, raone-minl, inone-fi-mini, mone-nt. mone-a-nt. mone-ntur. mone-a-ntnr. Ibcpebfect. Sg.- — monS-ba-m, monS-re-m, inone-ba-r, mone-re-r, mopS-bfi-B, mone-rS-B, mone-bft-riB (-re), inon6-r«-riB (-re). monS-ba-t, mone-re-t, mone-bft-tur, mone-r«-tnr, Pl.- — mone-bft-moB, mone-r9-iimB, raonS-bfi-mur, monS-re-mur, inonS-bft-tiB, monS-r9-tiB, monS-bft-minI, monS-re-minl, nione-ba-nt. monS-re-nt. mone-ba-ntnr. inone-re-ntor. Future. Su.- — monC-b-O, monS-bi-B, inone-bi-t, nioii5-bo-r, inoiie-be-riB (-re), mone-bi-tnr. Pl. — nione-bi-mnB, mone-bi-mur. - inoii5-bi-tiB, % monS-bi-minl, nionC-bu-nt. monS-bxL-ntor. Perjtbct. Sg.- — nion-u-I, mon-u-eri-m, moni-tu-B Bum, moni-t-OB Bim, iiion-U'iBtl, mon-u-eri-B, es. Bis, mon-u-it, mon-u-eri-t, eBt, Bit, Pl.- — raon-u-imuB, mon-a-eri-moB, moni-t-I Bumtm, moni-t-I BimnB, luon-u-iBtiB, iDon-u-eri-tiB, estiB, BitiB, mon-n-Brtmt (A >re), mon-n-eri-nt. Bunt. Bint. BEGULAR VERBS. 59 ACTIVE. INDIC. Second Conjugratlon. SUBJV. INDIC. Plupbrpect. PASSIVE. SUBJV. So. — moTi-n-era-m, mon-n-erSHi, mon-u-era-t, mon-a-iiM-m, moni-t-os eram, mon-u-issS-s, erSs, mon-n-isse-t, erat, Pl.' — mon-u-erft-miu, mon-a-ifi9-xiiiui, moiii-t-I erSmos, moni-t-I mon-xL-erft-tif, moii-u-iMS-tis, erStis, mon-u-era-nt. mon-u-iaie-nt. erant. moni-t-us essem, 08808 I e88et, 0886X11118, 0S86ti8, eooont. So. — mon-u-er-O, moQ-u-ori-s, mon-n-eri-t, Pl. — mon-u-eri-miui, mon-xL-erl-tio, mon-a-ori-nt. Present. Future Perfect. moni-t-iui orO, orii, orit| moni-t-I orixniu, oriti8, enint. IMPERATIVE. Future. Present. Future. Sg. mone, Pl. monS-tS, monS-tO» mone-ro, nione-tor, mon6-tor, mon6-to, mone-tOto, mone-ntO. mone-minl, mone-ntor. INFINITIVE. Pre8. monS-ro. Pres. mon6-rI. Perp. mon-XL-i880. Perf. moni-t-um, -am, -am 0880. Fut. moni-ttlr-iim, -am, -um [o88o]. Fut. moni-t-um Irl. FuT. Pf. moni-t-um, -am, -um foro. GERUND. SUPINE. N. [raone-ro]. G. mone-nd-I. D. mone-nd-5. Ac. [mone-ro] Ac. moni-tum, (ad) mone-nd-um. Ab. mone-nd-9. Ab. moni-ttl. PARTICIPLES. Pres. N. monS-n-8; G. mone-nt-i8. Fut. moni-tfir-u8, -a, -um. Perf. moni-t-u8, -a, -um. GERUNDIVE. mone-nd-uB, -a, -um. 6o BEOULAR YEBBS. 125. Third Conjugration. Conjugation of emere, to htiy. Prin. Parts : em-O, eme-re, Sm-I, 6m(p)-tiim. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SL'BJV. INDIC. Pbesbnt. SUBJV. Sg. — em-0, ema-m, em-o-r, ema-r, emi-i, emS-f, eme-ris (-re), ema-ris (-re), emi-t, ema-t, erai-tur, emtl-tur. Pl.— erai-miui, ema-mus, emi-mur. cmO-mar, emi-tii, ema-tii, emi-mini, eina-minl, emu-nt. ema-nt. emu-ntor. Imperfect. ema-ntur. So.— eme-ba-m, eme-ro-xn, emC-ba-r, eme-re-r. emg-bS-f, eme-rS-f, em«"-bfi-rif (-re). eme-r6-ris (-re). emg-ba-t, eme-re-t. eme-bft-tor, enie-rC-tur, Pl. — em S-bft-miu, eme-r9-xiiiui, emS-bfi-mor, erae-re-mur. emS-bft-tis, eme-r6-tis, emS-bft-minl, eme-r6-minl. em€-ba-nt. eme-re-nt. eme-ba-ntor. Future. eme-re-ntor. Sg. — ema-m, ema-r. emS-f, eme-ris (-re). eme-t, eme-tur, Pl.— eme-mns, eme-mur, eme-tif, emS-minX, eme-nt. eme-ntor. Perfect. Sg.— Sra-I, em-eri-m. Smp-t-os sum, emp-t-os sim. em-istl, gm-eri-f. es, sis. em-it, Sm-eri-t, est. sit. Pl. — Sm-imus, Sm-erl-miui, emp-t-X snxnas. emp-t-I slmos, em-iftis, 6m-eri-ti8, estis. litis. ^ 8m-8nuit (-6r9)« Sm-ari-nt. iunt. Bint. B£GULAB VERBS. 6l Third Conjugation. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. 8UBJV. Iin)lC. SUBJV. Sg.- Sm-erfi-i, em-era-t, Sm-isse-m, Sm-i8s9-i, Sm-iise-t, Plupjcrfect. Smp-t-QS oraBi} erfii, erat, Smp-t-QS flMem, tMMMtl enet, Pl.- — Sm-erS-miu, em-erfi-tii, em-era-nt. Sm-lMS-mus, em-iM6-tis, eiu-iMe-nt. , emp-t-I erSmiui, erfitiB, erant. Smp-t-I eMSmoi, enent. Sg.- — em-er-U, em-eris, 6m-eri-t, FUTUBB PeRTBCT. Smp-t-oi erO, erii, 6rity Pl.. — Sm-erl-miui) Sm-er!-tis, em-eri-nt. Bmp-t-I erimoi, eritiB, enmt. Prksbnt. Sg. erne, Future. emi-tO, emi-t5, IMPERATIVE. Present. eme-re, Future. emi-tor, emi-tor, Pl. emi-te, emi-tSte, emu-ntS. emi-minl, » emu-ntor. INFINITIVE. Pres. eme-re. Pres. em-I. Perf. 6iu-iBS6. Perf. emp-t-mn, -am, -nm eMe. FuT. Smp-ttbr-um, -am, -um [obbo]. Fut. Smp-tum Xrl. Fut. Pf. Smp-t-um, -am, -nm fore. GERUND. N. [eme-re], G. em-e-nd-I. D. em-e-nd-5. Ac. [em-e-re] (ad) em-e-ndum. Ab. em-e-nd-5. SUPINE. Ac. 5mp-tnm. Ab. Cmp-ttl. PARTICIPLES. Pres. N. emg-n-8; G. eme-nt-if. Fut. Smp-ttbr-ni, -a, -nm. Perf. 6mp-t-nB, -a, -nm. GERUNDIVE. em-e-nd-ni, -a, -nm. 62 REGULAR VERBS. 126, Many verbs of the third conjugation with Pres. Indie, in 16, change 1 to e before r and drop it when it would come before 6 or i in all tenses of the Present System except the Future, Participle, and Gerund. Otherwise they follow the inflection of eme-re. These verbs are capiO, enpiO, facio, fodiO, fagiO, iado, pario, qnatio, rapid, sapid, and their compounds ; also compounds of -licid, HE^icid, and the deponents gradior and its compounds, morior and its compounds, patior and its compounds. Synopsis of Present System of cape-re, to taJce. Prin. Parts : oapi-0, cape-re, oSp-i, cap-torn. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SL-BJV. INDIC. Present. SITBJV. Sg.- -capi-5a capi-8, capi-t. capi-a-m, capi-S-8, capi-a-t. capi-o-r, cape-rii (-re), capi-tnr. capi-a-r, capi-fi-ris (-re\ capi-tl-tnr. Pl.- — capi-mus, capi-ti», capi-u-nt. capi-a-mus, capi-mur, capi-a-tis, capi-minl, capi-a-nt. capi-u-ntur. capi-a-mor, ca pi-S-minl, capi-a-ntnr. Imperfect. Sg.- -capi-e-ba-m, etc. cape-re-m, etc. capi-0-ba-r, etc. Future. cape-re-r, etc. Sg.- -capi-a-m, capi-S-i, tic. capi-ji-r, capi-C-ris (-re), etc. IMPERATIVE. Pres. Fl'T. Pres. FUT. Sg.- -cape, capi-te. cap-i-t5, capc-re, cap-i-tO, capi-tOte, capi-minl. capi-u-ntO. ca pi-tor, capi-tor, capi-u-ntor, INFINITIVE. Pbe«. cape-re. cap-I. PARTICIPLE. GERUND. GERUNDrV'E. Pbes 1. capi-6-n-B. G. capi-e-nd-I. capi-e-nd-us, -a, -um. REGULAR TERBS. 63 127. Fourth Conjugation. Conjugation of audire, to hear. Prin. Parts : aadi-O) andl-re, audl-vl) andl-tmn. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. SURIV. Present. Sg.- — audi-5, audi-a-m, audi-o-r, audi-a-r, audi-i, audi-il-i, audl-rii (-re), audi-a-rii (-re), aiidi-t, audi-a-t, audi-tnr, audi-S-tnr, Pl.- — aiidi-mu8, audi-S-mnS) audl-mnr, audi-a-mnr, audi-tii, audi-a-tii, audl-mini, audi-ft-mini, audi-u-nt. au(li-a-nt. aadl-u-ntnr. audi-a-ntnr. I>rPERFECT. Sg.- — audi-S-ba-ni) audl-re-m, audi-S-ba-r, audl-re-r, audi-e-bS-8, audi-r6-i, audi-S-bfi-riB(-re] >,audi-re-ri» (-re), audi-e-ba-t, audi-re-t, audi-e-bS-tur, audi-rS-tnr, Pl.. — audi-e-bfi-mu8, audi-rS-mns, audi-e-bfi-mnr, audi-r6-mnr, audi-e-bfi-tifl, audl-rfi-tifl, audi-e-bfi-minl, audl-r6-minl, audi-S-ba-nt. audi-re-nt. audi-g-ba-ntur. audi-re-ntnr. Future. Sg.- — audi-a-m, audi-e-i, audi-e-t, audi-a-r, audi-e-rifl (-re), audi-S-tur, Pl. — audi-e-mua, audi-e-tis, audi-e-nt. audi-e-mnr, audi-S-minI, audi-e-ntnr. Perfect. So.- — audi-v-I, audl-v-eri-m, audi-t-ns mm, audl-t-ni gim, audl-v-isti) audX-v-erl-i, e«, ■IB, audl-v-it, audl-v-eri-t, eit, lit, Pl.- — audl-v-imiu, audl-v-erl-miu, audX-t-I inmui, audl-t-I limns, audi-v-ifltif, audl-v-er!-tii, Mtif, litis. audl-v-enmt (-6re). aud!-v-eri-nt. innt. sint 64 REGULAR VERBS. Fourth Conjugation. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. INDIC. SUBJV. INDIC. Pluperfect. audl-v-iue-m, audi-t-ni eram, audI-v-iM6-i, erfii, audl-v-iife-t, SUBJV. Sg . — audi-v-era-m, audl-v-erfi-i, audi-v-era-t, Pl. — audl-v-erfi-mui, audi-v-iM9-miu, audi-v-erfi-tif) aud!-v-iM6-tif, audl-v-«ra-nt. aadl-v-iiie-nt. erat, audl-t-I erftmns, erftUi, erant. audl-t-ni effem, etiet, aud!-t-I eMfimuB eisStiB, Msent. Sg. — audI-v-«r-0, audl-v-erl-f, audl-v-«ri-t, Pl. — audi -v-eri-miu, audl-v-erl-tif, audi-v-eri-nt. FuTXJBE Perfect. audl-t-ni erO, erii, erit, audi-tl erimni, eritif) emnt. Present. mPERATTVE. Future. Prerent. So. audi, audl-tO) audl-tO, audl-re, Pl. Future. audl-tor, audl-tor, audi-te, audl-tOte, audi-u-ntO. audl-minl. audi-u-ntor. Pres. audl-re. I^RF. audl-v-isse. FuT. audl-ttLr-nm, -am, -am [ GERUND. N. faudi-re]. Gr. audi-e-nd-I. D. audi-e-nd-0. Ac. [audl-re] (ad) audi-e-nd-um. Ab. audi-e-ndo. INFINITIVE. Pres. audl-rl. Perf. audl-t-um, -am, -urn FuT. audl-tnm Irl. FuT. Pf. audl-t-um, -am, -tun ']. fore. SUPINE. PARTICIPLES. Ac. audl-tnm. Ab. audl-ttl. Pres. N.audi-e-n-f,G.audi-e-nt-iB. FuT. audi-ttlr-iiB, -a, -tun. Perf. audl-t-ns, -a, -tun. GERITNDIVE. audi-e-nd-ns, -a, -um. DEPONENT VERBS. 65 DEPONENT VERBS. 128. Deponent verbs have the passive form, but are ac- tive in meaning. They have also the Present and Future Active Participles, and the Future Active Infinitive. Thus a deponent verb alone can have a Present, Future, and Perfect Participle, all with active meaning. The Gerun- dive, however, is passive in meaning as well as in form. The conjugation differs in no particular from that of the regular conjugation. I- First Conjugation. Cojf JUGATION OF hort&rl, to exhort. PaiN. Parts : hort-or, hortS-rl, hortS-tni inm. INDICATIVE. Exhort Sg. — hort-o-r, hortS-rit (-re), hortS-tnr, Pl. — hortfi-mnr, hortO-xninl, horta-ntnr. Was exhorting. Sg. — horttt-ba-r, hortS-bS-rit (-re), hortS-bS-tnr, Pl. — hor ta-bfi-mor , hortS-bS-minl, hortS-ba-ntur. Shall exhort. So. — horta-bo-r, horta-be-ris (-re), horta-bi-tur, Pl. — horta-bi-mur, horta-bi-xninl, horta-ba-ntnr. 5 SUBJUNCTIVE. Fbbsent. Be exhorting, may exliort. horte-r, hort6-ris (-re), hortS-tor, hortS-mnr, horte-minl, horte-ntnr. IXPEBFECT. Were exhorting, might exhort. horta-re-r, horta-re-ri» (-re), horta-r6-tur, horta-re-mrr, horta-rO-minI, hoHa-re-ntnr. FUTURB. 66 DEPONENT VEBBS. PXRFECT. Save exhorted^ exhorted. Have, may have, exhorted. So. — hortfl-t-ui, -a, -urn turn, bortfl-t-uB, -a, -urn gim, M, Bis, Mt, sit, Pl. — hortft-t-I, -ae, -a inmui, horUl-t-I, -ae, -a Blmni, Mtis, iltii, funt. ■int. Pluperfect. Had exhorted. Had, might have, exhorted. So. — ^hortft-t-ui, -a, -urn eram, hortfl-t-tiB, -a, -nm eMem, erfii, ess«i, erat, esset, Pl. — bortil-t-I, -ae, -a erftmns, hortfl-t-I, -ae, -a ewemni, erfttis, essStis, erant. etient. Future Perfect. Shall have exhorted. So. — liortfi-t-ns, -a, -um er(J, erif, 0rit, Pl. — horta-t-I, -ae, -a erimns, eritii, emnt. IMPERATIVE. Pretext. Future. So. horta-re, exhort thou. horta-tor, thou shali exhort. liortiT-tor, ht shall exhort. Pl. liorta-minl, exhort ye, horta-ntor. the.n Rhall pjrhnrf INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. Pres. horta-rl, to exhort. ' Pres. hortff-n-i, exhorting. FuT. horta-tUr-nm, -am, -nm [eise], Fut. hortfi-ttlr-ns, -a, -um, nhout to he about to exhort. to exhort. Perf. horta-t-nm, -am, -nm esse, to Perf. horta-t-ns, -a, -urn, having have exhorted. exhorted. F. p. horta-t-nm, -am, -nm fore. GERUNDIVE. SUPINE. horta-nd-ns, -a, -nm, [one] fo he Ac. horta-tnm, to exhort, for ex- exhorted. horting. GERUND. Ab. horta-tfl, /o exhort, in the ex- Q. horta-nd-I, 0/ fxAor/my. horting. DEPONENT VERBS. (>7 2. Second, Third, Fourth Conjugations. « Synopsis of vereri, to fear ; loqoi, to speah; mentiri, to lie. Prin. Parts: vere-or) ver6-rl, veri-tns lum ; loqu-or, loqu-I, loetl-tns ram; menti-or, mentl-rl, mentl-tns ram. Pbxb. Impebf. Fdt. Perf. Plupf. Put. Pf. INDICATIVE, n. III. IT. vere-o-r, loqu-o-r, menti-o-r, vere-riB (-re), etc., loque-ri» (-re), eic.^ menti-ri» (-re.\ dc.y vere-ba-r, vere-bo-r, veii-t-UB sum, veri-t-ns eram, veri-t-us er(J. loqu6-ba-r, loqua-r, locQ-t-QB ram, loctL-t-ns eram, locQ-t-ns erO. menti-e-ba-r, menti-a-r, nieuti-t-u8 ram, ment!-t-ns eram, inenti-t-ns erO. Pres. IXPERF. Perp. Plupf. SURTUNCTIVE. vcre-a-r, loqua-r, menti-a-r, A'ere-a-riB(-re), etc., loquS-rii (-re), e/c, menti-il-rit(-re),e/<;., vere-re-r, loque-re-r, mentl-re-r, vei'i-t-ui lim, loca-t-OB sim, mentl-t-OB aim, veri-t-us essem. loctL-t-us essem. meiit!-t-iu Pres. FUT. vere-re, verC-tor, IMPERATIVE. loque-re, loqui-tor. menti-re, menti-tor. Pres. FUT. Perp. FuT. Pf. INFINITIVE. vere-ri, loqu-I, inentl-ri, A'cri-ttLr-um [esse], locQ-ttLr-um [esse], ment!-t1ir-iim[esse], yeri-t-um esse, locu-t-um esse, menti-t-um esse, veri-t-nm fore. locCL-t-tim fore. mentl-t-um fore. Pres. FUT. Perf. verS-n-8, veri-tftr-ns, veri-t-us. GERUND. vere-nd-I, etc., GERUNDIVE, vere-nd-us, SUPINE. veri-tum, veri-ttl. PARTICIPLES. loque-n-s, loeQ-ttlr-us, locCl-t-us. loque-nd-I, loque-nd-us, locQ-tum, locd-tU. menti-6-n-i, menti-tllr-us, ment!-t-us. menti-e-nd-I, menti-e-nd-us, mentl-tum, menti-tU. 68 PEBIPHRASTIC C0NJU6ATI0X. Periphrastic Conjugation. 129. The Periphrastic Conjugation arises from the com- bination of the Future Participle Active and the Gerundive with forms of the verb sum. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCm^E. Pre8. ama-ttlr-iui (-a, -nm) turn, amil-tlir-ni (-a, -nm) dm, Am about to love. Be about to love. iMPF. amft-ttlr-QB eram, amfl-tfLr-iu eisem, Wan about to love. Were about to love, FuT. amS-tOr-ns erO, Shail be about to love, Perf. amil-tllr-QB ful, amfi-tflr-ni faerim, Have been, was, about to love. Have, may have, been about to love. , Fluff. aml-tlLr-QB faeram, amfi-tfLr-ui ftduem, Had been about to love. Had, might have, been about to love. FuT. PsRF. aina-tfir-118 faerO, Shall have been about to love. INFINITIVE. Prbs. araa-ttUf-um (-am, -nm) [esse], To be about to love. Pbbf. amS-tfLr-nm foisee. To have been about to love, PASSIVE. Pres. ama-nd-ns (-a, -urn) sum, ama-nd-us (-a, -nm) sim, Have to be loved. Have to be loved. Impf. ama-nd-ns eram, ama-nd-us essem, forem, Had to be loved. Had to be loved, FuT. ama-nd-us erC, Shall have to be loved. Perf. ama-nd-ns fal, ama-nd-ns fuerim, Have had to be loved. Have had to be loved, Plupf. ama-nd-ns fneram, ama-nd-ns fuissem, Had had to be loved. Should have had to be loved. INFINmVE. Pres. ama-nd-nm (-am, -nm) cjse. To have to be loved. Perf. ama-nd-nm faisse. To have had to be loved. NOTES ON THE CONJUGATIONS. 69 130. I. Imperative. — Four verbs, dioere, dUoere, fieusere, ferre (171), form the Pr. Impv. active die, dto, fae, fer. But in early Latin dice, dUce, fEMO are not uncommon. The compounds also have dice, dtUse, face, except the non-prepositional (173, R.) compounds of fadO. Scire, to know, lacks the Pr. Impv. boX. 2. The older ending of the Gerund and Gerundive in the third and fourth conjugations was -undiii; and -endui was found only after a. In classical times -undiui is frequent, especially in verbs of third and fourth conjugations. Later, -endus is the regular form. 131. I. Syncopated Forms. — The Perfects in -Svl, -fivl, -IvI, often drop the y before a or r, and contract the vowels throughout, except those in -IvI, which admit the contraction only before a. These forms are called syncopated. They are found in all periods, and in the poets are used to suit the metre. Perfect. Sing. 1. 2. amSviBtl, amSstl. dfilSvifltl, dSlOitL aodlviBtl, audllitl. Plub. 1. 2. amSviBtifl, amSitiB. d9l9vi8ti8, d^Itetis. audlvifltiB, audlstis. 8. axnSvSnint, amfinmt. d6l6v6nmt, dfilSmnt. audlv6nmt, audifinmt. SuBjy. amSverim, amfirim, dSlSverim, dfilfirixn, audlverim, audierim, €tc. etc, etc. Pluperitect. Iin)ic. amSveram, axnSram, dfilfiveram, dSlSram, audlveram, audieram, etc, etc. etc. SuBjy. amSvissem, amSBsem, dSlfivissem, deiessem, audlvissem, audlssem, etc, etc. etc. Future Pbrtbct. amSverO, amSrO, dSlSverO, dSlfirO, audlverO, audierO, etc. etc. etc. Infinitive Perfect. amSvisBe, amSsse. dfilSvisse, dslfisse. audlvisse, audlsse. 2. In the first and third persons Sing, and in the first person PL of the Perfect, syncope occurs regularly only in Perfects in -IvI, and there is no contraction. It is most common in the Perfects of Ire (169) and petere. The unsyncopated forms are always common except those of Ire (169), which are very rare in good prose, but occur more often in the poets for metrical reasons. 3. nCvI, I know, and mSiyif I Tiave moved, are also contracted, in their compounds especially. Sing. — 2. nOetl. Plur. — 2. nOetis. 3. nOnmt. Subjv. nOrim, etc, Plupf. nOram, etc. Subjv. nOssem, etc. Inf. nOue. But the Fut. Perf. nOrO is found only in compounds. Similar contractions i^re seen in mOvI, but not so often. 70 THE STEM. THE STEM. 132. Most of the forms of the verbs sum, / am, edo, / eat, eo, I go, fero, I bear, void, / wish (perhaps do, / give), and their compounds come directly from the root. The other verbs in Latin form their stems from the root by the addition of a vowel or of a combination of a vowel with a consonant. This vowel is called the thematic vowel, and these verbs are called Thematic verbs (120, i). In the first, second, and fourth conjugations, and in some verbs of the third conjugation, the stem thus formed is* found throughout the whole conjugation ; in other verbs the present stem shows different forms from the other stems. I. THE PRESENT STEM. 133. I. The Stem or Thematic class : This comprises (a) Verbs of the first, second, and fourth conjugations : stems in S, 6) and I. (&) Most verbs of the third conjugation : stems in e, either unlength- ened or lengthened ; leg-0 (root leg), lege-re, to read; dUo-O (dug-), dftoe-rC) to lead, II. T?ie Reduplicated class : The Present stem is formed by redu- plication, with i in the reduplicated syllable : gen-, gl-gnO (for gi-oen-C), gl-gne-re, to beget; ita-, si-stO, si-ite-re, to set, stand. Compare stSre, to stand. in. The T class: The root, which usually ends in a guttural, is strengthened by t : flectO (flec-), flecte-re, to bend. IV. The Nasal class : In this class the root is strengthened by n, the nasal being inserted A. In vowel-stems : sinO (si-), line-re, to let ; linO (li-), line-re, to be- smear, B. After the characteristic liquid : cemO (cer-), cerne-re, to sift, separate; temnO (tem-), temne-re, to scorn; pellC (for pel-nO, by assimi- lation), pelle-re, to drive. C. Before the characteristic mute : vincO (vie-), vince-re, to conquer; frangO (frag-), frange-re, to break ; fandO (fud ), fande-re, to pour. Before a p-mute n becomes m: rnmpO (rup-), nimpe-re, to rend; combo (cub-), cumbe-re, to lie doum. D. Here belong also those verbs in which the root is strengthened by -nu; as stemuO (ster-), stemne-re, to sneeze. THE STEM. 71 V. The Inchoative class : The Present stem has the suffix -io ; as, irS-80or, / am in a rage ; cr6-BoO, / grow ; pro-flolHMor, I set out ; nO-soO, I become acquainted; pO-scO (=porc-8c0), / demand; dl-seO (= di-do-8c0)) / learn. VI. The I class : The root is strengthened by i (e) in some forms of the Present System : oapi-0 (cap-), oape-re, to take, VII. Tlie Mixed class : Some verbs that originally belong to the i-class have gone over in the Present stem to the forms of the Stem class : as veniO (yen-), venl-re, to come; videCi (vid-), vidO-re, to see; sonO (son-), sonS-re, to sound. II. THE PERFECT STEM. 134. I. Perfect in -vl (or -nl) : These are formed by the addition (a) Of -vl to the Present stem. To this class belong the Perfects of the first and fourth conjugations, and the few verbs of the second con- jugation mentioned in 124 ; amS-re, amfi-vl ; audl-re, audl-vl ; d6l6-re, d6l6-vl. (h) Of -uI to the Present stem after its characteristic vowel is dropped. Here belong the majority of the verbs of the second con- jugation ; mon6-re, mon-ul. II. Perfect in -si : These are formed by the addition of -si to the root; Avhich is, as a rule, long either by nature or position. This class comprises a large number of Aerbs in the third conjugation in which the stem-characteristic consonant is a mute : rSpO, / creep^ rSp-sI; scrlbO, / urifej scrlp-sl; dlc5, I say, dixl (=dlc-sl); carpO, I pluck, carp-sl; rfido, J scrape, rSsI (= rSd-sI). In three verbs the stem-characteristic is -m: preme-re, to pi'ess; sOme-re, to take ; con-te]ii(n)e-re, to scorn ; and in a few others it is -•, as fir-0, I hum, Os-sI ; haereO, I stick, haesl (= haes-sl). III. Reduplicated Perfects : These are formed by prefixing to tlie unstrengthened root its first consonant (or group of consonants), together with the following vowel (but e instead of a or ae), and adding the termination -I : currO, I run, cu-corr-I ; dIscO, / learn, di-dici ; spondeO, I pledge, 8po(s)pondI; tangO, I touch, te-ti-gl; tundO, I strike, tu-tud-l. In composition the reduplication is in many cases dropped ; so always in compounds of cade-re, to fall ; caede-re, to fell; cane-re, to sing ; falle-re, to deceive; parce-re, to spare ; pare-re, to hear; pende-re, to weigh; tange-re, to touch; tende-re, to stretch ; tunde-re, to strike, etc. DIsc-ere, to learn, always retains the reduplication in compounds, and so pOsce-re, to demand, and admordfire, to hite. Of compounds of curre-re, to run, succorrere always drops the redu- plication, praecnrrere always retains it ; the others vary. ^2 THE STEM. Of compounds of dare, abMondere usually drops it» but all trisyl- labic compounds that change the a, and all quadrisyllabic compounds, retain it. Compounds of listere, to set, and stire, to stand, retain it. Remark. — A few verbs beginning with vowels form the Perfect by prefixing e, which then contracts with the initial vowel : ago, / oc/, Sgl (= e-ag-I) ; emO, / buy, 9ml (= e-em-I). IV. Perfect in L Verbs of the third conjugation, with a short stem- syllable, take I in the Perfect, after lengthening the stem-syllable and changing & into 9 : legO, / read^ I6g-I; vide-O, / see, yld-I; fodi-0, I stab, fOd-I ; fugi-O, I flee, flig-I ; frang-0, / break, frSg-I. V. Denominative verbs in -uB, like aonO, I sharpen ; metaO, / fear ; also stemuO, I sneeze, form the Perfect in -u-I after the analogy of pri- mary verbs. III. THE SUPINE STEM. 135. I. Supine in -turn, Perfect Passive Participle in -tus : The stems are formed by the addition of -tu or -to (a) To the Present stem. Here belong most verbs of the first and fourth conjugations, and those verbs of the second conjugation that are mentioned in 124 : amS-tom, d6l6-tam, audl-trun. Those verbs of the second conjugation which form Perfect in -ul, form the Supine stem by weakening the thematic vowel e to i, and adding -to, -to, except c9ns9-re, to deem, doo6-re, to teach, mlioA-ro, to mix, tenO-re, to hold, torrS-re, to scorch, which omit the thematic vowel, and form cSnsimi, doctimi, mlxtum, (tentom), tOttom. {b) To the unstrengthened stem. Here belong most verbs of the third conjugation and the five verbs of the second just given, with sporadic forms in the other conjugations : cap-tnm (capiO) / take), rOp- tum (rSpO, I creep), dic-tom (dIcO, I say), fac-tom (faciO, I do). In combinations of -t- with a dental, assimilation took place, giving usually 88 after a short vowel and 8 after a long vowel : seissnm (soindO, / cleave), oaesoxn (oaedO, I felt). On the analogy of this and under the influence often of Perfect in -si, we find -•- also in some other stems : so fIg-0, Ifi-x, flx-om ; parcO, I spare, par-sum, etc. II. Future Active Participle in -tttroB. — The same changes occur in the stem as are found in the case of the Supine. 1. In some stems ending in -u a thematic vowel i is inserted ; as argaittbnu (argnere, to prove) ; abnnitUnui (abnuere, to deny) ; rnitflms (mere, to rush) ; fruitUnui (frul, to enjoy). 2. Some Future Participles are found without corresponding Per- fect, as : ealitttrof (cal6re, to be warm); dolitflms (dolSre, to grieve). CHANGE OF CONJUQATIOIT. 73 3. Irregular are : SgnOtllnu, fignitttnif (fignOecere, to know welt) ; dlBoittlrTui (dlBcere, to harn) ; hanfttms, hanstllnui (htiiirlre, to drain) ; nlsOms (nitl, to lea/n) ; moritlLnii (morl, to die) ; nOscitllnui (nOsoere, to know); oritUnui (orlrX, to arise); paritUnui (parere, to bear). Change of Conjugation. 136. A change of Conjugation occurs in verbs which show a long thematic vowel in the Present stem, but not in the Perfect stem, or the reverse. I. Verbs with Perfect and Supine formed regularly, according to the third conjugation, have the Present stem formed according to one of the other three : auge-O, aug6-re, aux-I, auc-tmn, to increase. B0Xlti-O) sentl-re, 86n-tl, 86n-8iun, to/eel. saepi-O, saepl-re, saep-Bl, saep-tum, to hedge about. veni-0, venl-re, v6n-I, ven-tom, to come. vide-0, vid6-re, Tld-I, vl-inni) to see. vinei-0, vind-re, vinx-I, vino-tom, toUnd. 2. Verbs with Perfect and Supine formed according to the first, second, or fourth conjugations, have the Present stem formed accord- ing to the third, in consequence of strengthening : 8ter-n-9, 8ter-ne-re, 8trfi-yl, itrS-tnm, to strew. or6-80-0, cr6-8oe-re, orS-vI, to grow. li-n-0, li-ne-rOi l»-vl Ol-vl), li-tom, to smear. 3. Verbs with the Present formed regularly according to the third conjugation, have the Perfect and Supine formed according to (a) the second, or (&) the fourth conjugation : accumb-O) gIgn-5, arcesB-0) cupi-0, aocumbe-re, acoub-ul, gigne-re, gen-ul, arcesse-re, onpe-re, arcessl-vl, cupl-vl, accubi-tum, geni-tnm, aroe88l-tam, onpl-tom, to recline, to beget. to summon, to desire. 4. Stems vary among the first, second, and fourth conjugations : orep-0) I. orep£-re, in. orep-nl, n. orepi-tom, u. to crackle. aperi-0, lY. aperl-re, aper-nl, n. aper-tum, to uncover. oie-0, II. do-re, ol-yl, IV. ol-tnm, to stir up. 5. dare, to give, and 8tftre, to stand, pass over to the third conjuga- tion in the Perfect, in consequence of reduplication. d-0, 8t-0, da-re, 8tS-re, ded-I, 8tet-I, da-tnin, (8tS-t11r-QB), to give, to stand. 74 LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 137. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. First Conjugation. Type : am-0, amS-re, amS-vI, amS-tnm. Perfect: -nl; Supine: -(i)tam. orep-0| oropS-rO) orep-nX, arepi-toxn, to i-attle. onb-0) onbS-rO) eub-nl, enbi-tmn, to lie. dom-0, domfi-re, dom-nl, domi-tam, to tame. frio-0, fricft-re, fric-uX, fric-trun (-S-tnm), to rub. mic-O, micft-re, mic-nX, to guivevt flash. Bat dl-mioSrO) tofigM (ovt). is usually r^olar. nee-O, necS-re, necS l-vi (nec-nl rare), necS-tnm, to km. -plic-0, -plicS-re, -(plicft-vD, -plici-tam, to/ad. lee-O, secfi-re, sec-nl, sec-tum, to cut. wm-O, Bonft-re, Bon-nl, loni-tnm, to sound. Bat regalarly sonfitllnu. ton-0, tonS-re, ton-nX, to thunder. yet-0, vets-re, vet-nI, veti-timi, io/orbid. 138, Perfect: -Ivrith', reduplication; Supine: -i tUBLy -tam. I. d-0| da-re. ded-i, da-tum, to give, putt do. Everywhere &, except in dSs, thou givest, and dS, give thou. 1. Like do, are conjugated the compounds with dissyllabic words, such as : dream-do, / surround; satis-dO, I give hail ; pessnm-dO, 1 ruin ; v6niim-d0, / sell ; thus : dream-d-O, droum-da-re, oirenxii-de-dl, oirenm-da-tnm, to surround. 2. The compounds of da-re with monosyllabic words pass over wholly into the Third Conjugation. ab-d-O, ad-d-O, con-d-O, abs-con or6-d-0, d6-d-0, 6-d-O, in-d-O, per-d-O, prO-d-O, red-d-O, trS-d-O, yfin-d-O, ab-de-re, ad-de-re, con-de-re, •do, -con-de-re, crO-de-re, de-de-re, 6-de-re, in-de-re, per-de-re, prO-de-re, red-de-re, trS-dO're, ▼8n-de-re, ab-did-X, ad-did-I, con-did-X, -con-d-I, crO-did-X, dO-did-X, 6-did-X, in-did-X, per-did-I, prO-did-I, red-did-X, trS-did-I, ▼6n-did-X, ab-di-tnm, ad-di-tum, con-di-tTun, -con-di-tnm, crO-di-tnm, dO-di-tum, O-di-tum, in-di-tum, per-di-tum, prO-di-tnm, red-di-tum, trfi-di-tum, ▼On-di-tnm, to put away. to put to, to put up (found), to put far away, to jrut faith. to give up. to put out, to put in. to fordo {ruin), to betray. to give back. to give over. to put vp to sale. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 75 2. 8t-0, Its-re, So the compounds : Stet-I, (Bt&-ifi'TUB\ to stand. ad-it-0, ad-itS-re, ad-stit-X, — io stand by. cOn-st-0, cOn-stS-re, cOn-stit-I, — io standfast. In-8t-0, In-stS-rO) In-stit-I, — to stand upon. ObHBt-0) ob-8tS-re, ob-8tit-I, — io stand out (f gainst. per-st-O, per-stS-re, per-8tit 1, — to stand firm. prae-8t-0, prae-stS-re, prae-8tit-X, — to stand ahead. re-st-0, re-stS-re, ro-8tit-I, — to stand over. dl-stO, dl-stS-re, — io stand apart. ez-st-O, ez-stfi-re, — to stand out. All compounds of 8tftre with dissyllabic prepositions, have, however, -stetl in the Perfect, as : antenBtO, / am superior; interHBtO, I am be- tween ; 8nper-8t0, / stand upon ; thus : oiroiim-8t-0, oiroiLm-8tfi-re, oiroum-8tet-X, to stand round. 139. iuv-C, ad-iuv-0, (lav-(J), Iav-0, Perfect! -I; Supine ; -turn, -80111. iuvfi-re, itlv-I, itL-tum (iuvfit11ni8\ to help. -iuvS-re, -itlv-X, -ifL-toxn (-itl-t11ru8)) to stand by as aid. (lav-ere), iSv-I, lau-tum (lO-tiim\ to wash. lavS-re, (lavfi-yD) lavfi-tum, to wash. Second Conjugation, Types : d6Ie-0, mone-0, d9l6-re, monO-re, d6l6-yl, monn-I, 140. Irregular and defective : dele-turn, see 124. moni-tum. oie-0 (ci-Q), cie-re (cire), ol-vl, cX-tum (ci-tiim\ to stir vp. In the compoands wc find the Participles concitiu or concltus, percitll8, ezcltus or ezcitui, but accXtxL8. 8orbe-e, 8orbe-re, sorb-ul, — tosupvp. 141. iube-0, Srde-0, rlde-O, baere-O, mane-e, tnSde-O, Perfect: -8l; Supine: -turn, -sum. iube-re, firde-re, rIde-re, baere-re, mane-re, snSde-re, ifls-sl, fir-8l, rX-8X, bae-8X, xnSn-sX, 8Ufi-8l, iil8-8iim, fir-sum, rl-8um, (bae-8um\ mSn-8um, 8uS-8um, With dental dropped before ending of Pf . and Supine. to order, io be on fire, to laugh (of), to stick {to), to remain, io counsel. 76 LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. ange-O, angS-re, auzl, auc-tum, to cause to wax. frIge-0, frlgS-re, (frixr, to be chitted. lUce-O, ltic6-re, ItLxI, to give light. ltlge-5, Itlge-re, lUxI, to be in mourning. alge-5, alge-re, al-8l, tofreeze. faIge-0, falg6-re, fol-sl, to glow. indnlge-0, indulgO-re, indul-sl, (indul-tum), to give way. mulce-O, mnlcO-re, mul-sl, mul-stim, to stfvke. mnlge-O, mulge-re, mul-sl, mul-8tim(ctum), to milk. terge-0, terg6-re, ter-8l, ter-snm, to WijH. torque-0, torqu6-re, tor-sl, tor-turn, to twist. turge-0, tnrgS-re, tor-sI, — to swell. nrge^, urge-re, or-sl, to press. 142. Perfect: '1 wilh reduplication; Supine : -sum. morde-0, mordS-re, mo-mord-I, morHBum, to bite. pende-0, pend6-re, pe-pend-I, — to hang (mtr.). Bponde-9, spondS-re, spo-pond-X, sp0n-8um, to pledge one^idf. Compomids omit the redaplication. tonde-0, tond6-re, to-tond-I, tOn-stim,' to shear. 143. Perfect : -I; Supine: •turn, -stun. cave-O, cav6-re, cfiv-I, cau-tum. to take heed. fave-O, favS-re, fSv-I, fau-tum, to be well-disposed. ferve-(J(ferv-(J), fervfi-re (ere), ferv-i (ferb-uD » to seethe. fove-0, fov6-re, fOv-I, f9-tum, to keep warm. move-0, movS-re, mOv-I, to more. pave-O, pav6-re, pfiv-i, to quake (wifhfear). prande-0, prand6-re, prand-I, prSn-stim, to breakfast. sede-0, sede-re, s6d-I, ces-sum, to sit. 8trIde-0 (-dO), 8trld6-re(-e-re) , strld-I, to whistle, screech. vove-5, voyC-re, vCv-L vO-tiun, to vow. The Present forms of the third conjugation also ) occur in the Augastan poets. vide-0, vid6-re, vid-l, vX-suTn, to see. Third Conjugation. First type : Perfect: -si; Supine: -turn, -stun. 144. The Stem class : oarp-0, dS-cerp-O, ntlb-0, ■*- rSp-O, carpe-re, -cerpe-re, nUbe-re, r6pe-re, carp-sX, -cerp-sl, nllp-sX, r6p-sl, carp- turn, •cerp-tum, nUp-tum, rSp-tum, to pluck, to pluck off. to put on a veil (as a bride), to creep. LIST OF THE MOST XMPOBTANT VEBBS. n •oalp-0, 8oalpe-re, Boalp-8l, Bcalp-tum, to scrape. scrlb-O, serlbe-re) 8orIp-8l, sorlp-tnm, to write. BCUlp-0, sculpe-re, 8CUlp-8l, iculp-tnm, to chisel. serp-O, ■erpe-re, serp-sl, serp-tum, to creep. prem-0 (-primO), preme-re, pre8-8l, prM-snm, to press. Some compounds of emo, I take ^ but/f have Pf. in -si, Sup. in -turn, before which a euphonic p develops : C5lll-0y oOme-re, cOm-p-sI, cOm-p-tnm, to adorn. d6m-0, deme-re. dem-p-sl. dSm-p-tnm, to take away. prOm-0, prOme-re, prOm-p-sX, prOm-p-tnm, to take out. sfLni-O, On contemn-0 see sfUne-re, i 146, c. • sfUn-p-sI, sfUn-p-tnni, to take. dIc-0, Impv. die, see 130, dioe-re, 1. dizl (dXc-sI), dic-tnm. to say. dllc-0, dllce-re, Imperative dfic, see 130, 1. dOzI, dnc-tnm, to lead. flg-5, flge-re. £1x1, flznm, tofasten. -flIg-5 (con-,af-, in-) , -flige-re, -flIzX, -fllc-tnm. to strike. merg-0, merge-re, mer-8l| mer-snm. to jilunge. sparg-(J, cOn-sperg-O, sparge-re, -sporge-re, spar-sl, -sper-sl, spar-snm, -sper-snm, to strew, to besprinkle. coqn-0, co^ne-re. cozl. coo-tnm. to cook. [-lig-5 (leg-), -lige-re, -16x1, dI-Ug-0, dl-Uge-re, dl-l6zl, intel-legO (ligO), intel-lege-re, intel-l6zl, neg-leg-d (ligd), neg-lege-re, neg-16xl, other compounds have I8gl in the Perfect. -I6c-tnm.] dUSc-tnm, intel-l6c-tnm, neg-16c-tnm. to love. , to understand, to neglect. rega, dI-rig-0, per-g-5, sn-rg-5. rege-re, dl-rige-re, per-ge-re, sn-rge-re. rSzI, dl-rSzI, per-r6zl, Bnr-r6zl, rSc-tnm, dl-rSc-tnm, per-rSctnm, sur-rSc-tnm, to keep right, to guide, to go on. to rise up. teg-5. tege-re. tSzI, tSo-tnm, to cover. cland-0, con-, ez-clUd-O, clande-re, -cldde-re. clan-sI, •Cl&-8l, clan-snm, -cld-snm, to shut. to shut upy out. laed-0, col-lId-0, laede-re, -Ude-re, lae-sI, -U-sI, lae-snm, -ll-snm. to harm. to strike together. lOd-Q, Ifide-re, IfL-sX, IfL-snm, to play. pland-O(ap-pland-O), plande-re, ez-plOd-0, -plOde-re, plau-sl, -pld-sl. plan-sum, -plO-snm, to clap, to hoot off. rSd-0, rfide-re. rfi-sl. rfi-snm. to scratch. trOd-O, trflde-re. tra-si. trd-sum. to push. vfid-d (in-, 6-), -vade-re, -vS-sI, -vfi-snm. to go. c6d-d. c6de-re. c6s-sl. c6s-8nm. to give way. quati-0, con-cntiO (per-, es qnate-re, :-), con-cnte-re, (qua8-sl\ f con-cns-sl. qnas-snm, con-cns-sum, to shake, to shatter. 78 LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. mitt-Oi mitte-re, ml-sl, mig-gnm, to8md. dI-vid-5, dl-vide-re, dl-vl-el, dl-vl-gnm, to part. llr-O, Ore-re, tbi-gl, fls-tnm, to bum. com-btLr-0| com-btLre-re, com-btbi-sl com-blls-ttim, to bum up. ger-5, gere-re, ges-sl, ges-tnnii to cairy. fia-5 (flugv), flue-re, fluxl, (flux-nB), tojlow. Btru-0 (atmgv-), stme-re, strlLxI strfLc-tuxn) to build. trah-o (tragh-), trahe-re, trSxI, trftc-tam, to drag. veh-5 (vegh), vehe-re, vexl, vec-tnm, to carry. vIv-(J (vlgv), vIve-re, ▼Ixl, vlo-tnm, to live. 145. The T-claaa: flect-9, flecte-re, flexl, flextun, to bend. iiect-9, necte-re, nexl (-nexQl) , nexum, to knot. peot-O, pecte-re, pexl, pexam, to comb. pleot-0, plecte-re, (plexl), plexnm, toplaU. 146. The Nasal class : (a) Supine without N : fing-O, finge-re, ping-O, pinge-re, Btring-9, Btringe-re, (h) Supine with N : ang-9, ange-re, cing-9, dnge-re, iTing-O, iunge-re, pang-5, pange-re, Perfect also p9gl, and Supine pSi plang-O, plange-re, -Btingn-O, -8tingae-re, So the compounds ex-, diB-, re-. ting-O (tingn-O), ting(n)e-re, ung-O (ungu-O), img(u)e-re, (c) tem-n-0 (rare) and its compounds form oon-tem-n-O, -temne-re, -tem-p-8l, 147. Thel'daas: finxl, flc-tnm. toform. pinxl, pic-tnm, to paint. Btrinxl, Btric-tam, to draw tight. anxl. to throttle^ vex cinxl, oinc-tnxn, to gird. itlnxl, iUnc-tam, toyoke^join. panxl. panc-tnin. to drive in. un. Compare 150 and paclBCOr, 165. planxl. planc-tum. to smite. -Btinxl, -Btinc-tnxn, to put out. tinxl. tinc-tnm. to wet, dye. Unxl, tlnc-tam. to anoint. the Pf . with a euphonic p : -ton-p-ttun, to despise. [-lici-5 (lac), -lice-re, -lexl, -lec-tnm], to lure. pel-lici-0, pel-lice-re, pel-lexl, peMec-tum, to allure. So allicere, illicere. But e-Ucere has .-ol regularly in classical times. [-Bpici-0 (spec), -spice-re, -spexl, per-spici-O, per-spice-re, per-spexl, So the compounds with ad-| con-, dS-, in-. -spec-tom], to peer. per-Bpeo-tnm, to see through. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 79 Second type — Perfect: -Itinth reduplication ; Supine: ••am, -tanL 148. Stem class : Reduplication lost in the compounds : cad-0, cade-re, ce-cid-I, cft-snm, (ofaU. oc-dd-O, oc-cide-re, oc-oid-I, oc-cfi-Biim, topetiah. re-cidere Bometimes foraiH recoidi, as well ae reoidl, in the Perfect. caed-0, caede-re, ce-cld-l, cae-snm, tofell. oc-cId-9, oo-clde-re, oo-cld-l, oo-cI-Bom, to kill. can-O, cane-re, ce-cin-I, (can-tnm), toHng. Compoands form the Pf. in -uI. For (oantiun), oantStum was used. cnrr-O, corre-re, ou-cnrr-I, cur-Bum, to run. The compoonds vary in their use of the reduplication ; see 134, iii. parc-9 parce-re, pe-perc-I (pan-D, (par-stLnu), to spare. com-parcO (-percQ), com-paroe-re, com-par-sl, com-par-sum, to save. 149. Reduplicated class : I. sistO (= 8i-8t-0), as a simple verb, has the transitive meaning, / {cause to) stand, but in its compounds, the intransitive meaning, I stand. Compare stO, I stand, and its compounds (188) : sist-O, slBte-re, (Btit-I), Bta-tam, to {cause to) stand. So the compounds : cQn-sist-O, cOn-Biste-re, de-sist-O (ab-), dS-siste-re, ex-Bist-0, ex-Biste-re, ob-sist-O, re-sist-O, ad-sist-O, In-Bist-0, ob-siste-re, re-siste-re, ad-siste-re, In-siste-re, cQn-Btit-I, d9-Btit-I, ex-Btit-I, ob-Btit-I, re-Btit-I, ad-8tit-I, In-Btit-I, circnm-Bist-O, circum-Biste-re, circnm-stet-I, 2. bi-bO, bi-be-re, bi-bl, No Supine. The Pf. Part, is late. oOn-Bti-tum, to come to a stand. dS-Bti-tnm, to stand off. to stand up, to take a stand against, to tvithstand. to stand near. to stand upon. to take a stand round. (bi-bi-tnB), to drink. ex-Bti-ttim, ob-Bti-tnm, re-Bti-tnm, 150. Nasal class : &11-0, falle-re. fe-feU-I, fal-Bom, to cheat. The compound refellO has the Perfect refelU, and lacks Supine. pell-0, pelle-re, pe-pul-I, pul-Bum, repellO loses the reduplicating vowel in Pf . reppuU. to push^ drive back. toll-9, tolle-re, — Pf . and Sup. are formed BnB-tulI and Bub-lStum. — to lift vp. 8o LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VEHBS. to touch. to border vpon. (pang-O)) (pange-re), pe-pig-I» pftc-tum, to drive a bargain. The F^. forms are Bupplied by paoXscor, 106. The Pf. p9gl| rare in the simple form, is r^ular in the compounds com-| im-) op-. See 146, b. tang-O (tag), tange-re, te-tig-I, tfic-tnm, at-ting-O, -tinge-re, -tig-I, -tSc-tomi So with other compounds. pend-O, pende-re, pe-pend-I, pSn-ium, to Aan^ (trans.). tend-O, tende-re, te-tend-I, tSn-snm and .tum, to stretch. ex-teiid-9, -tende-re -tend-I, -tSn-Biini and -tnm, to stretch out. oe-tend-0, -tende-re, -tend-I, -tSn-som (-tns), to stretch at^ show. The compounds prefer the Sup. in -torn ; ho always attentns, contentos, usually distentnB and intentnB. pung-0, punge-re, inter-pnngO, -pnnge-re, pn-png-I, -pnnxl, puno-tom, -puno-tnm, to prick, to place points bettoeen. tnnd-O, tnnde-re, tn-tod-I, tUn-iam, tfL-sam, to thump. Simple form has usually ttlnsnB in the Participle ; in the compounds more often ttlBllB. The reduplicating vowel is lost in rettndl. 151. Lichoative class : dUMO (= di-d(e)c-8oO), dlsce-re, di-dic-I, — to learn. A late form is Fut. Part. dJscitfirilB. Compounds retain reduplication. See 134, ui. p5so-o (= porc-8c0), pOece-re, pe-pOsc-I, todaim. Compounds retain the reduplication. See 134, iii. 152. TheLclass: pari-9, pare-re, pe-per-I, par-torn (paritfims), to bting forth. The compounds drop the reduplication and form the Inf. in -Ire. But reperXre, tojlndy forms its Pf., repperl, with omission of the vowel of reduplication. Third type — Perfect: -I; Supine: -torn, -sam. 163. The Stem class : With long vowel in the Perfect. ag-o, c5-g-5, de-g-5, red-ig-0, em-o, inter-im-0, age-re, o9^ge-re, de-ge-re, red-ige-re, eme-re, -ime-re. oo-6g-I, Sc-ttun, co-Sc-tnm, red-fic-tnm, Smp-tnm, to do, drive, to compel, to pass (time), to bring back, to take, to buy. red-6g-I, 6m-I, _ , , -Sm-I, CO-em-O, I buy up, is conjugated like em-0. But the compounds with ad-, ex-, inter-, red-, take -im-O. So, too, dir-im-0, 1 sever. -6mp-tam, to make away with. ed-9, ede-re, cfLd-9, ctlde-re, leg-o, lege-re, col-lig-0, -lige-re, 6d-I, S-Bom, (c1Ld-I), (ctl-Biun), I6g-I, l6o-tam, -I6g-I, -I6c-tam, So the other compounds, except dI-lig-0, intel-leg-0, neg-leg-0, see 144. Ic-9 (defective), Ice-re, Ic-I, Xc-tnm, to strike. to eat. to hammer. to pick up, read, to gather. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. 8l Bld-9, Bide-re, ild-I, — The Pf. was origiaally reduplicated as the Present ; see 13S, zz. the Pf . is -sBdl, -MSBTUn, from gede-O, thus : c(Jn-8ld-9, oOn-Blde-rei cOn-sSd-I, Bcab-9, BOlV-O, vert-5, re-vert-or, verr-O, volv-5, Bcabe-re, Bolve-re, verte-re. re-vert-I, verre-re, yXse-re, volve-re, BcSb-I, Bolv-I, vert-I, re-vert-I (active), verr-I (rare), ▼IB-I, volv-I, oOn-Bes-Bum, BoHL-tum, ver-Bom, re-yer-Bnm, ver-snm, vollL-tiim, In composition to settle down. to scratch. to loose^ pay. to turn. to turn back, to sweep. to visit. toroU. On peroellO, perctdl, see 158, c. On tollO, BUitulI, see 150. 154, The Nasal class: peall-O, vell-0, lamb-9, ramp-9, ac-cend-9, de-fend-O, psalle-re, psall-I, velle-re, lambe-re, mxnpe-re, ac-cende-re, de-fende-re, vell-I (val-Bl), vxLl-BTun, lamb-I, — rtlp-I, rap-tom, ac-cend-I, ao-cSn-Bum, d9-fend-I, d6-f6n-8iim, fand-O(FUD), fande-re, flid-I, fa-Bum, mand-9, mande-re, mand-I, mSn-Bom, pand-9, pande-re, pand-I, pas-Biim, prehend-9, prehende-re, prehend-I, preh6n-Bnm, Often shortened to prSndO, prSndere, prSndl, prexMuxn. Bcand-I, BcSn-Bum, •Bcend-I, -Bcen-BuxiL, frange-re, fr6g-I, frSo-tnm, -fringe-re, -fr6g-I, linqne-re, Uqa-I, -linqae-re, -llqn-I, (pange-re), (p6g-D, -pinge-re, -p8g-I, Bcand-9, 8oande-re, S(d)-, de-Boend-O, -Bcende-re, frang-0, per-fring-0, linqu-0, re-linqu-O, (pang-5), com-ping-O, See 146, b, 150. Vinc-9 (VIC), -frftc-tnm, •lic-tTun, (pSc-tTim), -pSo-tom, ▼ince-re, vlc-l, vic-tum, to play on the cithern, to pluck. to lick. to break. to kindle. to strike away^ difend. to pour. to chew. io spread out. to seize. to climb. to climb up J down. to break, to shiver. to leave. to leave behind. to drive in. to drive tight. to conquer. 165. The I'Class. (a) With long vowel in the Perfect. capi-9 (cap-), cape-re, ac-oipi-9, ac-oipe-re, &ci-0, lace-re, cale-faei-0 (oalf.), oale-fkce-re, per-floi-0, per-flee-re, On Impv. fao, Bee 180, 1. 6 o6p-I, cap-tnm, ac-oSp-I, ao-oep-tnm, f5c-I, fac-tnm, oale-fSe-I, cale-fac-ttim, per-fBc-I, per-fJM-tnm, to take, to receive. to make. to make wdrm. to achieve. 82 LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VERBS. fodi-0, fode-re, fOd-I, foe-gam, to dig. fugi-O, fage-re, fttg-I, (fag-i-tfims), tojlee. iad-O, iaoe-re, ifiC-I, iac-tnm, to cast. oon-ioi-0, -ioe-re, -iee-I, *iec-tiim, to gather. (6) With short vowel in the Pf. duo to the loss of the reduplication : find-0, finde-re, fld-I| fis-Bum, to cleave. ■eind-0, seinde-re, 8oid-I, sois-Bom, to split. 156. A. number of verbs of the third conjugation liave a character- istic -u- ; these form the perfect in -I. ab-lu-0, ab-lue-re, ab-lu-I, ab-ltl-tum, to wash qff. ab-nn-9, ab-nue-re, ab-nu-I, (ab-nu-ittLr-uB), to dissent. acn-9, acue-re, acu-I, aclL-tum, to sharpen. ad-nu-O(an-iiu-O), ad-nue-re, ad-nu-I, to nod assent. argn-5, argue-re, argu-I, arglL-tum, to accuse. batu-0, batne-re, batu-I, to heat. con-gm-O , con-grue-re , con-gru-I, to agree. dS-Uba-O, de-libue-re, d«-Ubu-I, d6-lib1L-tuxn, to anoint. ez-n-9, ex-ne-re, ex-u-I, ex-tL-tum, topvt off, doff. im-bu-0, im-bne-re, im-bu-I, im-bfl-tuixi, to dip, dye. in-du-9, in-due-re, in-du-I, in-dtl-tum, to put on, don. la-0, lue-re, lu-I, lu-itfLr-uB, to atone/or. xnetu-O, xnetne-re, metu-I, to/ear. xiiiiin-9, xninae-re, xninu-I, minlL-tum, to lessen. pla-0, plue-re, plu-it, pltlv-it, — to rain. ru-5, rue-re, ru-I, ru-tuin (ruittlrus) , to rush down. Bpa-9, Bpue-re, spu-I, BpfL-tum, to spew. Btatu-0, Btatue-re, Btatu-I, Btatfl-tum, to settle. Btoma-O, 8temue-re, Btemu-I, to sneeze. BU-0, Bue-re, BU-I, Btl-tuxn, to sew. triba-0, tribue-re, tribu-I, tribtL-tum, to allot. Mixed Conjugation. Perfect; -vl; Supine: -turn. 157. («) Stem class : arceBB-0, arceBse-re, arcesBl-vI, arcessl-tum, in-ceBB-O, In-ceBBe-re, In-ceBBl-vI (oeBBi), — So faceBB-0, /cause, make off. pet-9, pete-re, petl-vl, petl-tum, quaer-0, quaere-re, quaeel-vl, quaeBl-tum, con-quIr-0, -quIre-re, -qulBl-vI, -quiBl-tuxn, So other compounds of -quIrO (quaerO). to send for. to attack. to seek (Jli/ at). to seek, to hunt up. LIST OF THE MOST IMPORTANT VEBBS. 83 radl-yl| tri-vl, radI*tTi]n, trl-tum, to roar, to rub. sa-tum, to sow. rad-0| mde-rey ter-«, tere-re, (ft) Reduplicated class : 86r-0, Bere-re, b6-vI, So cQnserO, but with Sap. o9n-Bitam. (c) Nasal class : li-n-O, li-ne-re, si-n-O, si-ne-re, pO-ii-(K=posinO), pO-ne-re, cer-n-9, cer-ne-re, Bper-n-9, Bper-ne-re, ster-n-O Bter-ne-re, {d) Inchoative class : inveterS-BC-O, inveterS-sce-re, inveterfi-vl, inveterS-tnm, to grow old. pS-8c-0, pS-Boe-re, vesperfi-BC-O, vesperS-soe-re, cr9-BC-0, or6-Boe-re, con-cupI-BC-0, -cupI-Boe-re, ob-dorml-BC-O, -dorml-Bce-re, So condormlBcQ, SdormlscO. ex-ol6*BC-0, -olS-Bce-re, So ob-Bol6BcO, / groto old. But ab-ol6flCO, / disappear, has aboUttun ; co-alAioO, I grow together y co-alitnm; ad-olSscO, / grow up, ad-ultnm iu the Sup.; and inolfiflCO lacks the Supine. 1§-Vl, li-tum, to besmear. Bl-yl, Bi-tum, to let. pe-B-uI, po-Bi-tum, to put. or9-vI, (erfi-tuxn), to separate. Bpr6-vl, Bprfi-tum, to despise. Btrfi-vl, Btrft-tuxiii to strew. pa-vi, pSs-tam, to graze (tranB.). vespers- vl, to become evening. or9-vI, crS-tnni) to grow. -cupl-vl, -cupl-tiim, to long for. -dorml-vl, •dorml-tuxiL) to fall asleep. -ole-vl, -oie-tnm, to get one* s growth. quie-BO-O, quie-Bce-re, quie-vl, BcI-Bc-0, BCl-Bce-re, bcI-vI, Bn-6flC-9y Bn6-Bce-re, Bn6-vl| So compounds as-, con-, d6-, man-. (g)nO-BC-0, nO-Boe-re, nO-vI, qoifi-tnm, Bcl-tnm, BnS-ttim, (nO-tnm), to rest, to decree, to accustom one^s se(f. to know. So IgnOBCO, / pardon ; but cO-gnOsco, / recognize, and other compounds of nOsco, have Sup. in -itom. re-sip-lBO-O, -Bipl-soe-re, (e) I-class: -sipI-Tl, onpi-0, onpe-re, cnpl-yl, Bapi-0, Bape-re, Bapl-vl (-nl), Perfect: -uI; Sup 158. (a) Stem class: frem-O, freme-rOi frem-ul, geni-5, geme-re. gern-ul, vom-O, vome-re, vom-ul, al-9, ale-re, al-nl, onpl-tuxn, to come to one's senser, to desire. to have a flavor. to roar, rage. to groan. yomi-tum, to vomit. al-tom (ali-tom), to nourish. 84 LIST OF THE HOST IMPORTANT YEBBS. col-9, cole-re, col-ul. oul-tum. to cultivaU. con-cin-0, -cine-re, So occinere, praecinere. -cin-ul. to sing together. cOn-Bul-0, cOn-Bnle-re, cOn-sul-uI, c0n-8ul-tiim. to consult. xnol-O, mole-re, mol-ul. moli-tnm. to grind. occul-0, occule-re. occnl-ul. occul-tum. to conceal. plns-O, plnse-re, Sap. alfio plnsnm, pXetiim. plnf-ul. plnBi-tnm, to pound. Ber-9, sere-re, Conunon in compoonds : as, dfiierO, dfiiererc (Ber-tum), to string {out). >, dfiieml, dteertnm, to desert. Btert-0, Bterte-re, stert-ul. to snore. Btrep-9, Btrepe-re, Btrep-ul, (strepi-tam), to make a din. tex-0, texe-re. tex-TiI, tex-tom. to weave. Irregular are : xnet-O, mete-re. mesB-uI, meB-Bom, to mow. vol-5, vel-le. So nOlO, mfilO ; see 174. VOl-TlI, to wish. (b) Reduplicated class : gI-gn-9 (GEN), gl-gne-re. gen-TiI, geni-tnm, to beget. (c) The Nasal class : frend-0, frende-re, — Also in the form frende-0, frend9-re. frS-Bom, frte-Bom, to gnash. ao-cnmb-O, -cumbe-re, -cub-uI, -cabi-tom, to lie down. So also the compounds con-, dis-, in- ; but re-CombO lacks the Supine. ex-cell-0, -celle-re, (cell-uD, (cel-sns), to surpass. But per-cellere, to beat down^ has Pf. per-ooU, Sup. per-cnlBiim. (d) Inchoative class : di8p68C-0, dispfiBce-re, dispfiflc-ul, to let loose. So comp6scwe, to check. A large number of verbs are formed from verbs of the second con- jugation, or from substantives or adjectives, and take Pf. in -ul; as, oo-alSsc-o, See 157, d. -al6Bce-re, •al-ul, -ali-tnm, to grow together. 9-Tfin6sc-0, -vfin68ce-re. -vfin-nl. to disappear. con-valSsc-O, -val6sce-re. -val-nl, -vali-tum. to get well. in-geml8c-0, nOtesc-O, -gemlBce-re, n0t6sce-re. -gem-nl, nOt-uI, to sigh. to become known. in-cal63C-0, -cal6Bce-re, -cal-ul. to get warm. (e) I-class. • rapi-0, rape-re, cor-ripi9, -ripe-re. So other compounds. rap-ul, •rip-ol. rap-tnm, •rep-tum. to snatch, to seize. DEPOIfENTS. 85 Fourth Conjugation. Type : andi-O, andl-rOi andl-yl, andl-tnm. 159. Irregular in Supine is : sepeli-O, Bepell-re, Bepell-vl, sepnl-tnmi to bury. 160. amici-O, aperi-Oy operi-0, Bali-9, 161. Perfect: -ul; Supine: -torn. amicl-re, amic-ul (ami-xT, amic-toxn, aperl-re, aper-ul, aper-tum, operl-re, oper-ul, oper-tum, Ball-re, sal-al, Bal-tnm, Perfect : -bI; Supine : -turn, -smn. to clolhe. to open, to cover vp. to loop. Baepi-9, Baepl-re, Baep-sl, Banci-0, sancl-re, sfinxl, vind-O, vincl-re, vinzl, feirci-O (-feroi-0), farcl-re, far-Bl, falci-0, folcl-re, fal-Bl, sarci-O, Barcl-re, sar-sl, Benti-9, Bentl-re, B6n-Bl, hanri-O, hanrl-re, han-Bl, Yebq., a. iv.j 883, has hanstbllB. saep-tum, to hedge in. Bfinc-tum, to hallow. vinc-tnm, to bind. far-turn, to stuff. fal-tnm, to prop. BaTctum, to patch. BSn-Bum, fofeel. hanB-tnm, to drain. 162. Perfect I -I; Supine : -turn. oom-peri-0, com-perl-re, com-per-I, com-per-ttun, to find out. re-peri-9, re-perl-re, rep-per-I, re-per-tum, to find. See the simple verb parere, 153. veni-O, venl-re, vSn-I, yen-tnm, to come. DEPONENTS. 163. The majority of the deponent verbs belong to the Jirst conju- gation. In many instances they have parallel active forms in early or in late Latin. A few of the principal verbs are as follows : In the first conjugation, arbitr-or, arbitrS-rI| comit-or, comitS-rl, cnnct-or, ounctfi-rl, (for), See 175, 8. ft-rl, arbitrS-tnB sum. to Odnk. eomitfi-toB Bom, to accompany, ounctS-tnB sum. to delay. ft-tuB Bam, to speak. 86 DEPONENTS. opZn-OTy ttLt-OTi Tag-or, vener-or, opInft-rX, tILtl-rX, vagft-rl, venerS-rl, opInS-toi Bum, tfttft-toi SUXII, yagC-tnB Bum, venerS-tus sum, 164. In the second conjugation : fate-or, eOn-flte-or, lioe-or, mere-or, fate-rl, cOn-fltS-rX, lic«-n, mer6-rl, fM-BUiium, eOn-fM-BUE Bum, lici-tuB Bum, meri-tuB sum, (otMnk, to protect, to wander, to reverence. to confess, to cor\fese. to Hd (at a tale). to deserve. Especially in the phrases merfirl bene dS aliquO, to deserve well qf any one. miBere-or, pollloe-or, miserS-rl, pollic9-ri, re-er, r*-rl, Pr. Part. Active is wanting. tue^nr, tu9-rl, Tere-or, ver*-rl, mieeri-tuB Bum, pcllici-tuB Bum, ra-tu8 sum, tui-tuB (tILtuB) Bum, veri-tuB Bum, to pity, to promise, to think. to protect, to/ear. 165. In the third conjugation : ad-iplBc-or, ad-ipXsc-I, ad-ep-tuB Bum, am-plect-or, am-plect-I, am-plex-us sum, So the compounds complector, circumplector. oom-min-lBC-or, com-min-Xsc-I, com-men-tuB Bum, ezperg-lBC-or, ex-perg-lBC-I, ex-per-r6c-tuB Bum, fimg-er, fung-X) firu-or (frugv-), firu-I, ftnc-tuB Bum, frIle-tuB Bum, toffet. to twine roundt embrace. to think 1/p, devise. to (right one*s self tfp,) awa^. to discharge. to enjoy. gradi-er, ag-gredi-er, grad-I, ag-gred-X, gree-BUB Bum, ag-gres-BUB Bum, to step, to attack. ISb-or, ISb-I, ISp-BUBBum, to glide. loqu-or. loqu-I, loclL-tuB Bum, to speak. mori-or. mor-I, mer-tu-u8 Bum, to die. nanc-Xsc-or, nanc-lBC-I, nao-tuB (nanc-tuB) Bum, to get. nSsc-or (guS-), uSbc-I, Fut. Part. nSscitllruB. nS-tu8 Bum, to be bom. nit-or, nit-l, nl-BUB (nIx-uB) Bum, I. ' nl-BtlruB, ) to stay one's self on. ob-UT-Xse-er, ob-lXy-Xsc-I, ob-lI-tuB sum. toforget. pac-lBC-or, pac-lBC-I, See pangO (ISO). pae-tuB Bum (pepigX), to drive (a bargain). pati-or, per-peti-or. pat-I, per-pet-I, pae-BUB Bum, per-peB-BUB Bum, to smffn. to endure to the end. pro-flc-Xso-or, pro-flc-lBC-I, pro-fec-tuB Bum, to (get forward) set out. quer-or, quer-I, ques-tuB sum, to complain. iequ-or. Bequ-I, Bectl-tuB Bum, tofollow. ulc-Xsc-or, ulc-Isc-I, ul-tuB sum, to avenge. SEHI-DEPONEKTS. 87 tlt-or, Teh-or, vesc-or, tlt-I, veh-I, yesc-I, tL-nM sum, ▼ec-toi Biuni to use. to (wagon) ride. fo/eed. 166. In the fourth conjugation : assenti-or, assentl-rl, assen-sas Bum, to assent. com-peri-or, comperl-rl, — to find out. Occasionally for comperiO, comperlre. But experior, experlrl, expertos BTUn, to try^ is regularly deponent. largi-or, larg^-rl, largl-tuB BTun, to bestow. menti-or, mentl-rl, mentl-tuB Bum, to lie. meti-or, xnetl-rl, mSn-BiiB Bnm, to measure. Ordi-or, Ordl-rl, Or-BOB Bom, to begin. ori-or, orl-rl, or-tnB Bum, to arise. parti-or, partl-rl, partl-tnB Bom, to share. poti-or, potl-rl, potl-tas sum, to get possession of. pfLni-or, pllnl-rl, ptLnl-tuB Bum, to punish. Borti-or, Bortl-rl, Bortl-tnB Bum, to cast lots. SEMI-DEPONENTS. 167. I. A few verbs form the Perfect forms only as deponents : aude-9. aud6-re, au-BUB Bum, to dare. fId-9, fIde-re, fl-BUB Bum, to trust. gaude-0. gaud6-re. gftv-lBUB Bum, to r^oice. Bole-9, Bol6-re, Bol-ituB Bum, to be wont. 2. The reverse usage is found in : re-vert-or, re-vert-I, re-vert-I, to turn back. So also dSvertl, but without Pf . Part. BeverBUB is also used actively, but rever- BUB Bum for revertl i^ post-classic. See also aBBentior, etc, 166. Notes.— 1. Some active verbs have a Perfect Participle passive with active mean- ing, as : cSnStuB, one who has dined^ from oSnSre, to dine ; prfiUBUB, Jiaving bi'eak- fastedj from prandeO, / brealtfast ; pOtuB, drunken^ from pOtO, / drink ; ifLrfitUB, having taken the oath^ sworn^ from itlrO, I swear ; conifLrfitUB, a conspirator^ from COnitLrO, / compire. Many such are used purely as Adjectives : cOuBlderfituB, cir- cumspect^ from cQiiBlderO ; cautuB, wary^ from caveO, I beware. 2. The Perfect Participle of many deponent Verbs has both active and passive mean, ing : adeptuB (adiplscor), having acquired^ or being acquired; comitfituB (comitor, I accompany); effiLtuB (effor, I speak out) ; ezpertuB (^ezperior, I try); exBecrfituB (ezseoror, I curse) ; imitStuB (imitor, I copy) : merit us (mereor, I deserve) ; opl- nfituB, neoopInStuB (opinor, / think) ; pactus (paclscor, / contract) : partltoB (partior, I distHbvte) : sortltus fsortior, least lottt) ; tueor, T protect ; tUtuB, safe. For others, sec the list of deponents. 88 IRREGULAR VERBS. IRREGULAR VERBS. (168) 169. Irregular in the conjugation of the Present stem : I. ori-or, ori-ri, or-tns sum, to arise. The Pr. Indie, is usually formed according to the third conjuga- tion ; the Impf. Subjv. always orerer; but the Put. Part, is oritfLras. The compounds follow the same usage except adorlrl, to rise up at^ attack, which follows the fourth conjugation. 2. i-re, to go. The stem is i, which, before a, o, u, becomes e. Prin. Parts : eO, Ire, ItI, (ID, itum. INDICATIVE. I go. Pres. Sg. — I. 6-5, Pl. — I-muB, 2. 1-8, I-tis, 3. i-t, eu-nt. Impf. I-ba-m, / went, FuT. l-b-o, / shall go. Pkrp. i-v-I (i-I), I have gone. Plupf. l-v-era-m (i-era-m), / hctd gone. FuT. Pp. i.y^r-O (i-er-5), / shall have gone. IMPERATIVE. SUBJITNCTIVE. / be going. So. — ea-m, Pl.— efi-mns, efi-8, efi-tis, ea-t, ea-nt. I-re-m, / were going, I-v-eri-m (i-eri-m). I-y-isse-m (i-isse-m, I-sse-m). So.— 2. I, 3- - Pl.— 2. I-te, 3. go thou, go ye. INFINITIVE. Pres. I-re. FuT. i-ttLr-um [esse], Perf. I-y-isse (I-8se). GERUND. eu-nd-L etc. Remarks. — 1. Like the simple verb are inflected most of the com- pounds, except in the Perfect system, where ^I is the regular form (see 131, 2). Vfin-eO, I a/m for sale, and per-eO, T perish, serve as passives to y6n-d0, / sell, and per-dO, / destroy. Amb-iQ, / solicit, follows the fourth conjugation throughout. I-tO, thou shall go. I-tO, he shall go. I-tOte, ye shall go. eu-ntO , they shall go. PARTICIPLES. Pres. ifi-ns (G. eu-nt-ls). FUT. i-tftr-nfl. SUPINE. i-tnm, to go. IRBEGULAB YEBBS. 89 2. The passive of the simple verb is found only in the impersonal forms ftnr, Ibfttnr, itiixn est, XrX (in combination with the Supine). But compounds mth transitive force are conjugated regularly ; so, prse- ter-e9 forms praeter-eor, -Iris, -Itor, -ImTir, -IminI, -eaxitiir, Ibar, etc, -itni sum, eram, erO, -euntor, -Itor, -Irl, -enndoi. 3. qui-re, to be able ; nequi-re, to be unable. 170. (^) qne-5, /am ctble, is found in the following forms, of which those in parenthesis are unclassical, occurring in early and late Latin and the poets ; Cjbsab uses no form of queO. Pb. Indic. que-0, (quIS), (quit), qnlmai, (qoZtlB), quennt. Pb. Subjv. queam, qneis, queat, qnefimnB, queStis, queant. Impp. (qulbam), (qnlrem). Fut. (qnibO). Pp. qolvl, etc.; qulyerim, etc. Plupp. qulveram, etc.; qulvissem, etc. Fur. Pp. qulyerO, etc. Pb. Inp. qnire. Pp. quIvisBe. Pabt. quifins. (b) neque-0, / am uiujibUy has the same forms, all of which seem to be classic excepting the Future Indicative, which is not cited. 4. fer-re, to bear. 171. The endings beginning with t, 8, and r are added directly to the root (132). Some parts are supplied by tul- (tol-, tla-). Pbin. Pabts : ferO, ferre, tuU, Ifitum. ACTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pbbs. Ihea/r. I he hearing. Sg. — I. fer-5, Pl. — fer-i-mns. Sg.- —fera-m, Pl. — ferS-mos, 2. fsr-i, fer-tis. ferfi-B, ferS-tis, 3. fer-t, for-u-nt. fera-t, fera-nt. Impp. fiBr9-ba-m, I was hearing. fer-re-m, 1 were hearing. Fut. fera-m, / shall hear. Pebp. tnl-I, / have home. tnl-eri-m. Plupp. tnl-era-m. tnl-isse-m. Fut. Pp. tnl-er-0. TMPEBATIVE. So.— 2. for, hear thou. fer-tO, thou shall hear. 3. fer-tO, he shall hear. Pl.— 2. fer-te, hear ye. fer-tOte, ye shall hear. 3. fer-u-ntO, they shall hear. 96 IBREGULAR VERBS. INFUirnVK. Fdt. Ift-tHr-vm [ Pkbf. tvl-iMe. GERUND. fMre-nd-I, etc. ]. So.— PASSIVE. INDICATIVB. lam borne. 1. to-o-r, Pl. — feri-mnr, 2. to-rii, tei-minl, 3. to-tnr, feru-iitiir. PABTICIPLBS. Pbm. ftrS-ni, bearing, FxiT. Ii-t11r-iii. SUPINE. SUBJUNCTIVE. I be borne. So.— fer»-r, Pl. — ^ferfi-mar» ferS-rii, ferS-minl, fisri-tiir, fera-ntnr. Impf. finrS-ba-r, te-re-r. Put. fera-r. Pxitr. li-tns film. li-tQiiim, Pluff. li-tQi eram. li-tns euem. Fur. Pf. li-tQi erO. IMPERATIVE. So. — 2. for-ra, be thou borne. fer-tor, thou ahalt be borne. 3- fer-tor, he ahall be borne. Pl.— 2. tei-minl, be ye borne. 3. ten-ntor, they shall be borne. INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. Pbbs. te-rX, to be borne. Pbbp. li-t-nB, -a, -urn, borne. Put. li-tumlrt GERUNDIVE. PSRF. li-tom eiM, to have been borne. COMPOUNDS. fere-nd-ni. af-fer-0, af-te-re, at-tul-I, al-lS-tnm, to hear to. au-fer-O, au-fer-re, abs-tul-I, ab-lS-tnm, to bear away, edn-fer-0, oOn-te-re, oon-tul-I, col-lS-tnm, to ooUect. dif-fer-0, dif-te-re, dia-tul-I, dl-lS-tnm, to put off. el-fer-0, «f-te-re, ex-tul-I, 6-lS-tnm, to carry out. (tf*for*0| oMer-ra, ob-tul-I, ob-li-tnm, to offer. Remarks. — 1. The Pf . tnll was originally reduplicated te-tnll. Traces of this are seen in rettnll. 2. 8nf-f«r0, / undergo, has the Pf . ini-tin-nX, because sni-tnl-I, snb-lft- haye been appropriated to toU-0. IRREGULAB VERBS. 91 5. ede^re, to eat 172. In certain forms the endings beginning with 8, t, and r are added directly to the root (132) ; d before 8 (r) is dropped or assimilated (as as) and before t becomes 8. Fbin. Pabts : edS, edere (AiBe), 6dl, team. mDICATIVE. ACTIVE. Present. SUBJUNCTIVE. I eat. So. — I. 6d-5, Pl.— odi-mns, edi-tis, 68-ti8| Ikpp. FUT. Pebf. Pluff. FuT. Pf. 2. edi-i, 8-8, 3. edi-t, 6^t, od6-ba-iii) eda-m. 6d-I, 8-dora-xii. 6d-er-8. / he eating. Sg. — eda-m, Pl. — edfi-mm, edS-8, edS-tis, eda-nt. eda-t, eda-nt. / ate, ede-re-m, Ss-Be-m, / were eating. 6d-eri-m. ed-isse-m. Sg. — 2. ede, 68, 3. mPERATTVE. eat thou. edi-tO, 68-tO, edi-tS, 88-t6, thou shalt eat. he shall eat. Pl. — 2. edi-te, 68-te, eat ye. 3. INFINITrVE. Pres. ede-re, 68-86, to eat. FUT. 68-tLr-lim 6886. Pebf. 6d-i886. GERUND. ede-nd-I, etc. 6di-tOt6, 68-tOte, ye shall eat. edu-ntO, they shall eat. PARTICIPLE. Pres. (ed6-ii8). FuT. 68-tlr-ii8. SUPINE. 68-am, 68-11. PASSIVE. In the passive voice the only peculiarities are as follows : Pr. Intlic. Sing. Third, editnr and 68tTir. Impf. Subjv. Sing. Third, eder6ttir and 6886tiir. The Pf. Part, is 63118 and the Gerundive 6dendu8. 6. fie-ri, to become. 173. Fl-5 is conjugated in the Present, Imperfect, and Future, according to the fourth conjugation, but in the Subjunctive Imperfect and in the Infinitive the stem is increased by e ; thus, fl-6-rem, I were becoming ; fl-6-rI, to become. Iii these forms the i is short, but else- where it is long even before another vowel. 92 IRREGULAR VERBS. The Inflnitire ends in -rl, and the whole Verb in the Present-stem is treated as the Passive to faoiO, / make. The rest of the Passive is formed regularly from fMid. Prin. Fabts : fio, flerl, fitetus sum. ACTIVE. PASSIVE. fMi-0, I make. INDIC. fi-^ I am made, I become. fl-B, fl-t (fi-miis, fi-tif ), fi-n-nt. fi-6-ba-m, Iioaamade, I became. fi-a-m, I shall be made {become). fM-toi sum. fftc-tos eram. fftc-tns erO. SUBJy. fi-a-m, fl-S-B, fi-a-t, etc. tie. fl-e-re-m, fl-e-rS^, etc. iMpr. fMi-9-ham, I made. FUT. / shall make. PXRP. ML Fluff. flo-era-m. FuT. Ft • fBo-er-0. IMPERATIVE, (fl), (fl-tC). (fl-te). INFINITIVE. Pbss. fle-rl. FxRF. fiko-tum esse, to have become. FuT. fa-tftr-um esse or fore. FuT. Pf. fiko-tnm fore. Remark. — ^The compounds of faciO with Prepositions change the a of the stem into i, and form the Passive in classical Latin regularly from the same stem : perfldO, / achieve. Pass, perficior ; interflein, Pass, interfieior, lam destroyed. When compounded with words other than prepositions, faciO retains its a, and uses HO as its Passive : pate&eiOi Hay open. Pass. pateflO; oale&ciOy I warm, Pass. oaleflO. For the accent, see 15, 2, r. 2. 174. 7. vel-le, to be willi7ig. nolle, to he u^iwilUng ; malle, to he loilling rather. Prin. Parts : volO, velle, Tolul ; nOlO, nOlle, nOluI ; mfilO, mSlle, mfilut INDICATIVE. Pbbs. T019, nSlO, mfilO, ▼IS, nOn vis, mSvIs, vnlt, nSn vult, mfivnlt, ▼olnmus, nOlnmus, mfilomns, vnltis, nOn vnltis, mSvoltis, ▼olnnt. nSlimt. mfilimt. Imff. TolSbam, nOlebam, mSlebam. FUT. ▼olam, nOlam, mfilam, ▼olte, etc. nOlOs, etc. mfilfti, etc DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 93 PiBT. YOloI, nOluI, Plupt. Yolaeram, ndaeram, milueram, etc. Put. Pp. YolnerO, nOluerO, mShierO, etc. SUBJUNCTIVE. Pbss. yelim, nOlim, mfilim, yellB, nOUi, mslli, veHt, nOlit, mSlit, yellmiui, nOUmiui, mSUmiui, yelltis, nOUtiB, mSUtis, yelint. nOlixit. mfilint. Imff. yellem, nOllem, mSllem. Pbrp. yolaerim, nOlaerim, milnerim, etc* Plupp. yoliiissem, n51ui88em, TIMPV. [fac yells], Sg. — n5ll, nXaitXi. Pl.- -n51Ite) nOUtOte, nOluntO. INF. Pr. yelle, nQlle, mille. Pp. yoloisse, nSluisse, milniiM. PART. yolens, nOlens. 175. DEFECTIVE VERBS. I. aid, I sat/ aye. INDIC. Pres. Sg.— I. 515, 2. als, 3. alt, Impp. SlCbam, etc. Perp. 3. alt. SUBJV. Pre8. Sg.— 2. SlSs, 3. Slat, PART. SleiiB (as adj.), affirmative. IMPV. at Pl. — 3. filunt. 3. Slant. 2. inquam, I sai/, quoth I. INDIC. Pres. Sg. — I. inquam, Pl. — I. InqnlmuB, Impp. So. — FuT. Sg. — Perp. So. — i. Inqnll, IMP^^ inque, inqnitO. 2. inqnls, 2. inqtdtls, 2. inqtdfii, 2. inqniitl, 3. inqoit. 3. inqoiunt. 3. inqtdebat. 3. inqoiet. 3. inqtdt. k 94 DEFECTIVE VERBS. 3. fiL-ri, to speak, INDIC. Prx8. f&tnr. FuT. f&bor, f&bitur. Pkrf. f&tus sum, etc. IMPV. ftro. PART. Pres. fftns, fantis, fiEUitl, fiEUitem. QER. fandl, fiind5. SUP. ftttL* 4. have-re (ave-re), salve-re. IMPV. have, salvC, salyebis, 7mt7 thou ! havCtG, salY6t5. havCte, salvfite, hail ye / INF. havfire, salvSre. Corresponding to these are the forms of valfire, viz. : valS, valfte, yalSre, farewell 5. coepi, meminl, ddi, ndvi. In use only in the Perfect-stem are ooepi, I have hegnUy which serves as a Perfect to indplG, and memini, I remember, OdI, I hate, n5Yl (from nOscO, see 181, 3, 157, d), I know, am aware, cOnsneyl (f rom oonsuSsoO), I am wont, which have the force of Presents. a, INDIC. ooepi, 1 have begun, SUBJV. ooeperim. coeperam. ooepissem. coeperG. INF. ooepisse, to have begun. Passive forms coeptus sum, etc., occur with tlie same meaning in combination with a Passive Infinitive. See 423, R. 3. b, INDIC. meminl, I remember. SUBJV. meminerim. memineram. meminissem. meminer5. INF. meminisse, to remember, IMPV. So. — mement5. Pl. — ^mementOte. c, INDIC. OdI, I hate. SUBJV. Oderim. Oderam. Qdissem. 5der5. INF. Odisse, to hate, FUT. PART. 5stLru8. Note.— For the Passive the phrase odi5 6886 is used. d, INDIC. nOvI. SUBJV. nSverim (nCrim). nQveram (nQram). " nGvissem (nOesem). n5YerO (nQrQ). INF. nSvisse (nOese), to know, 6. cedo, quaeso. Other defective forms are : So. — cedo, ^u'e .' (old Impv.) Pl.— cette. INDIC. Pres. quaesO, please (i. e., I seek, beg), quaetiimiui. FORMATION OP WORDS. 95 FORMATION OF WORDS. 176. By the formation of words is meant the way in which stems are made of roots, new stems of old, and in which words are compounded. 177. All roots of the Latin language are probably mono- syllabic. They can be ascertained only by scientific analysis. The difference between Root and Stem has been set forth in 25, nn. Sometimes the Stem is the same as the Boot ; so especially in the Boot Verbs (132). But it is usually different. 178. Words are either simple or compound. A simple word is one that is formed from a single root : sdl, sun; stare, stand, stay, A compound word is one that is made up of two or more roots : 80l-8titi-Tiiii, sun-staying, solstice, A.— Simple Words. 179. Simple words are partly j^rmiYtVe, partly derivative or secondary > 1. Primitive words come from the root, and as this usually appears in the simplest form of the verb-stem, primitive words are called verbals : scrlb-a (lorlbO, lufrite), scribe, 2. Derivative words are formed from a noun-stem ; hence called denominatives : vetui-tfis, a^e, from vetes- (N. vetui), old, 180. Substantives are generally formed by means of a suf- fix. A suffix is an addition to a stem, and serves to define its meaning or show its relations. So from the verbal stem acrib- {wrihOf I tvrite) comes scrip-tor, t^riV-er; scrip-ti6(n), wnY-tw^r. Suffixes are either primary or secondary, A primary suffix is one added to a root (or verb stem) to form primitive words. A secondary suffix is one used in the formation of derivative words. Thus, -tor in tcrlp-tor is a primary suffix ; -tfis in vetui-tfis is secondary. 181. FORMATION OF SUBSTANTIVES. The suffixes, as applied to various roots, have often special func- tions, and form words of definite meaning. The most important aro as follows : 96 FOBHATIOK OF WORDS. 1. Agency is iDdicated by "tor, "trie (N. tor, trlz) : ami-tor, lover ; vio-trlz, eonqueress; -on (X. 0, G. Onii) : com-bib-0 (fellow-drinker), boon companion; ~Of -a (N. -ui, -a) : lerv-of , slave ; lorlb-a, scribe^ occasionally ; -OnOf 'dna (N. Onu-s, -Ona) : ool-Onu-i, settler; -(i)f (N. 61, G. itii) : mll-ot, soldier, and a few others. 2. Action, Activity, and Event are indicated by a. "tu (N. tn-f, 8u-f, G. -Hi) : ad-yen-tui, arrival; "tri-na (N. trlna) : doo-trlna, instruction ; "in^a (N. Ina) : rap-Ina, rapine ; ^men (N. men, G. min-ii): ig-men, train; ~mento (N. mentnm) : tor-mentn-m, torture ; '■^'•la (eila) : loqu-6Ia, speech ; qaer-Oa, complaint ; -cinio (N. -a-m) : latrO-dnia-m, highway robbery ; ~mbniOf ^monia : qneri-mOnia, complaint ; tteti-mOnin-m, testi- mony, b. Abstracts, Masculine : -08 (N. -or, G. -Qr-ii) : ang-or, anguish. Feminine : ^an (S. dO, gO, G. in-ii) : imS-g5, image ; onp-I-dO, desire ; -ia : audftc-ia, boldness ; 'ion (N. 16) : leg-i5, legion ; "tia : avSri-tia, avarice ; collateral are some with Nom. in "ties, as dllri-tifii, hardness; •ti6n(^. tiO,8iO): ajah-i-tiH, ambition ; c0n-fll-fi5, confusion; •tat (N. tfis) : aequfili-tfis, equality ; "tura: T^o-tfink, painting ; "tut-' (X. tfl8, bub) : iuven-tllB, youth ; •tu ('8U) (N. tn-8, bu-b) : BSn-sus, perception ; 'tUddn (X. t1id-5, G. -inlB) : aegri-tlidO, sickness of heart. Neuter : -fio (N. tia-m) : seryi-tin-m, bmidage, 3. An Artisan or Tradesman is indicated by •drio (N. Srin-B) : argent-Sriu-B, money changer, 4. The Trade is indicated by •€tria : argent-Sria, silver mine, bank. 5. The Locality of the work (or trade) is indicated by ~drio (N. Sria-m) : sfimin-Srium, seed-plot ; -6nio (N. Onin-m) : fnll-Onin-m, fuller's shop ; •Ina : offio-Xna, workshop ; •crOf 'Culo (N. -om-m, -cula-m) : lavS-oru-m, bath ; •trtnOf 'trtna (N. trlna, trina-m) : BH-trlna, shoemaker's shop ; pIB-trlnu-m, mill. 6. Instrument and Means are indicated by "brOf-bra (N. bra, bru-m) : U-bra, balance; eri-brum, sieve; "CrOf "Culo (N. em-m, ctdu-m) : ba-onlu-m, walking stick ; FOBMATION OF WORDS. 97 'lOf --la (N. -la, -lu-m): yl-lAf pillar; tS-lu-m, weapon; 'VlOf ~tUa (N. ulu-f, Tila, ulu-m) : cap-tdu-i, handle ; rflg-ula, rule ; eing-ulu-m, girdle ; "tnento (N. mentn-m) : al-i-mentn-m, nourishment ; "tro, "tra (N. tra, tru-m) : fenes-tra, mndow ; arfi-trn-m, plow, 7. Relationship is indicated by "ter (N. tor, G. tr-ii) : pa-ter, father ; mfi-ter, mother, 8. Condition or Relation by 'tna : cUsdpl-Ina, discipline ; medio-Ina, medicine, 9. Function is indicated by "twra (sura) : cnl-ttLra, cultivation. 10. Office is indicated by ~atu (N. Stua, G. Stti) : oOnsul-Stiui, consulship ; "tura (rsura) : diotS-ttira, dictatorship. 11. Dense Growths are indicated by -c^o (N. etu-m) : mnrt-Ctu-m, myrtle grove ; '■to (N. tn-m) : virg^-tn-m, brushwood. 12. Diminutives are indicated by ~lo, '•la (N. In-f, etc.), before which a liquid is assimilated : (ager), a£^l-la-f, little field; (oorOn-a), oor5Ma, chaplet ; 'OlOf 'tUo : olo after e, i, y, otherwise -ulo (N. oln-s, ola, ula-s, ula) : (alve-us), alve-olu-B, little hollow ; (flli-a), flli-ola, little daughter ; 'CiflOf 'Cula (N. otda-f, etc.), after e, i, u, and consonant stems : (spSs), spS-oula, slight hope; (versa-i), versi-oaln-f, versicle ; (homS, homin-), homun-cula-s, manikin ; (cor, cord-), oor-culn-m, dear heart, 182. FORMATION OF ADJECTIVES. Tlie significance of the most important adjective suffixes, which are often identical with the substantive suffixes, are as follows : 1. Action is indicated by "bundOf "bunda : cunetS-bonda-s, lingering ; ~ulOf ~tUa (repeated action) : crfid-uln-s, quick to believe ; "bUi (passive action) : amS-bili-s, lovable, 2. Capacity and Inclination are indicated by ~cundo, 'Cunda : fft-onndu-i, of ready speech, -Ui (passive capacity) : ag-ili-i, movable ; doc-ili-s, teachable. The Capacity and Resulting Condition by "tili : duo-tili-f, ductile ; fic-tili-s, capable of being moulded, of clay, 3. Tendency is indicated by "dd (N. 93L) : aod-fix, bold ; rap-fiz, greedy, 7 98 FORMATION OF WORDS. 4. Likeness and Composition or Material are indicated by "dceOf ~dcea : amndin-fioen-i, reedy ; eret-Soeu-s, chalky ; -idOy "ida : later-idu-s, made of brick ; -nOf "Ua : aoer-nu-i, of maple ; "Ueo, "Uea : ae-nen-i, brazen, 5. Belonging to is indicated hj ~iOf "ia : imperStOr-iu-f, belonging to a general ; -iciOf ^leia : aedfl-ioin-s, belonging to an cedile ; -anOf 'dna: htlm-Sna-s, human; urb-finn-s, urbane^ city. 6. Appurtenance and Medium are indicated by "ticOf "tica: aquK-tiou-f, aquatic; 'till : aquK-tili-f, aquatic ; pltLxnfi-tili-s (embroidered) like feathers, 7. Origin is indicated by. -io, "ia : ComSl-ia (l6z), Corinth-iu-s ; "Uno, 'dna, -ino, ^Ina : BOm-fina-s, Lat-Inn-s. 8. Time is indicated by "tinOf "tina : erSi-tinn-s, of tomorrow ; "terno, sterna : het-temu-s, of yesterday ; 'UniOf -urna : noot-uma-s, by night ; 'tinOf 'tlna : mfttn-tlnn-i, of early morning, 9. Locality y where, whence, is indicated by "ia: Oalli-a, Qaul; "tlno: intes-tlna-f, inner, intestine; -ensi : cixc-Btud-B, from the circus; Sicili-6nsi-8, Sicilian, 10. Fullness is indicated by '68O, •'Osa : anim-Osn-f, full of spirit ; verb-Osn-s, wordy ; "lento, "lenta : sangnin-o-lenta-s, bloody. 11. Descent and Relationship are indicated in Latin mainly by Greek adjectives, made by the addition of Greek suffixes to proper names (Patronymics). These suffixes are M. -ides (G. idaeX F. ~i8 (G. idis), from Nominatives in ns, or, Os, and B preceded by a consonant : (Tantalus) Tantal-idfii, son of Tantalus; Tantal-ii, daughter of Tatitalus ; (Felope) Felopidfii. M. "ides (G. Idae), F. -eis (G. fiidis), from Nominatives in -ens: (Theseus) Thfis-IdSs, Thfisfiis. M. -ades (G. adae), F. -eis (G. Qidis), from Nominatives in Ss (G. ae) and -6s (G. ae) : (AenCSs) Aene-ad6s. M. -iades (G. iadae), F. -ias (G. iadis), from Nominatives in ius, 6s, 6n, : (Lfiert6s) Lfiert-iad6B. F. 'Inef from Nominatives in -us and -ens : (Nepttlnus) Neptfln-In6. F. 'ibne, from Nominatives in ins : (Acrisins) Aorisi0n6. FORMATION OF WORDS. 99 T2. Diminutive adjectives are formed by the same suffixes as diminutiye substantives (181, 12) : allmi, white, albu-lns, whitish; miMr, wretched, mii-ellui, |>oor {little) ; fioer, sharp, fieri-oolu-s, somewhat sharp. 188. SUBSTANTIVES WITHOUT SUFFIXES. (Root Substantives.) A few substantives are formed from roots without a suffix : 1. With weak root : duo-s (dux), leader, from root due, lead ; nee-s (nex), hilling, from root nee, kill, 2. With strong root : lllc-s (Iflx), light, from root lllc, light ; r6g-s (rfix), king, from root r8g, rule, 3. With reduplication : car-cer, jail ; mar-mor, marble; mur-mnr, murmur. (184-9) 190. FORMATION OF VERBS. 1. Primitives are confined to the Third Conjugation, to some forms of the Irregular verbs, and to some Inchoatives. The various stem- formations are shown in 183. 2. Derivatives comprise the verbs of the First, Second, and Fourth Conjugations, and some verbs of the Third Conjugation. They are all (except the Inchoatives and the Meditatives) formed in the same way, but certain classes of these verbs have obtained special names according to their various meanings : The Causatives, The Frequentatives, The Desideratives, The Inchoatives, The Meditatives, 191. A. Verhdlia (derived from verb-stems) : 1. Frequentatives or Intensives, denoting repeated or intense action. These verbs end in -tSre (sSre), -itfire, -titSre (-sitire), and follow the supine stem (perfect passive form). (a) cantire, sing ; compare oanO (cantum) : cursSre, run to and fro ; compare eurrO (onrsum) : dormltire, he sleepy ; compare donni5 (dorml- tum) : puIsSre, heat; compare pell5 (puLram). (h) agitSre (ago), nOecitfire (nOsoO). (c) cantitfire (cantfire), cnrsitSre (cunSre). 2. Inchoatives indicate entrance upon an action. For their for- mation see 188, V. 3. Desideratives denote desire or tendency. They arc formed by means of the suffix -tiiri5 (HiiiriO) : ftmrlre (for ed-t), to be sharp-set for eating, hungry ; 6m-p-tarlre, to be all agog for buying. 100 FORMATION OF WORDS. 4. Causatives signify the effecting of the condition indicated by their original verb. They are found mainly in the Second Conjugation, and show usually a change in the stem-vowel. Change: cadere, fcUlf and oaadere, fell; Uquere, melt (intr.), and liqufire, melt (trans.) ; neoSre, kill, and nootre, he death to. No change : fagete^flee, and fvLgSmfput to flight; iaoere, throw, and iaeSre, {lie) throum ; pendere, (Jiang) weigh, and pendfire, hang (intr.). 5. Meditatives : (verbs that look forward to an action). These end in -etaere : arcesf ere, to summon ; capeuere, to catch at ; fMawere, to do eagerly ; inoeisere, to enter; laoetfere, to irritate (136, 3, h), 192. B. Denominatives (derived from noun-stems) : 1. These are most commonly found in the First Conjugation, even though the stem- vowel of the noun is i or a. (a) acervfi-re, Jieap up (from aoervo-i) ; oorOnfi-re, wreathe (oorOna) ; levfi-re, lighten (levi-i) ; nOminfi-re, nams (nOmen, nOmin-ii). The Deponents signify condition, employment : andllft-rl, he maid (ancilla) ; aquK-rl, he a drawer of water (aqua) ; ftbrfi-rl, thieve (fOr). {h) alb9-re, he white (albuHi) ; flOrl-re, he in hloom (flOs, flOrii) ; frondl-ro, he in leaf (frOni, frondi-i) ; lfLo9-re, he light (Itbc, llie-ii). (c) argue-re (be hright, sharp), prove ; laede-re, hurt ; metne-re, he in fear (metu-s). (d) otlstOdl-re, guard (dUtfls, dUtOd-ii) ; finl-re, end (fini-i) ; l6nl-re, soften (iSni-s) ; vestl-re, clothe (vestiHi). 2. Noteworthy are the Diminutives formed by the suffix -illfire: 8t-illfire, drop (st-illa) ; sdnt-illare, sparkle (sdnt-illa). Similar in func- tion but of different formation are pnllu-lare, sprout (pnl-lns) ; fodic-fire, punch (fodere, dig) ; albicSre, whiten (albu-f). B.— Compound Words. 193. I. By composition words are so put together that a new word is made with a signification of its own. The second word is regularly the fundamental word, the first the modifier. 2. Composition is either proper or improper. Noun. 194. In Composition Improper there are either traces of con- struction or the fii*st part is still inflected : S-nOrmis = ex nOrmfi, out of all rule ; l6gis-lStor, lawgiver ; Senfitti-cOnsTiltam, decree of the Senate, Many of these compounds have gradually become inflectional : dfiU- rm (dl-lira), crazy from fear; figregiiis (l-grege), distinguished {from the crowd) ; prOoQnBul (for prO oQiuralo) ; trinm-vir (from trium vimm), etc. FORMATION OF WORDS. lOI 195. Composition Proper. — i. The first part of the compound may be a particle, as ne-fSr-iu-s, nefarious ; y9-iSnu-8, mad, out of one*8 sound senses : or a substantive. If it is a substantive — (a) The stems in -a, -o, -u regularly weaken these vowels into -i before the consonants of the second part, which i may vanish : 6aiui- dions, pleader, latoyer (caasa) ; slgni-fer, standard-hearer (signu-m) ; oomi-ger, horn-wearer (oornfl) ; man-ceps (mann- and cap-), one who takes in hand, contractor. The i-stems retain i or drop it : Igni-yoma-s, fire- vomiting (Igni-f) ; nau-firagu-i, shipwrecked (nSyi-f). (6) Vowel-stems drop their vowel before the vowel of the second part : mSgn-animaHi, great-souled ; tln-animu-s, of one mind. (c) Consonant-stems either drop their consonants or add i : homi- eld-a, mathslayer (homin-); lapi-cld-a, stone-cutter (lapid-); mStr-i-cId-a, mother-^murderer, matricide. 2. The second part of the composition is a substantive : tri-enn-ia-m, spa^ of three years (annus) ; miseri-oor-s, tender-hearted (cor). When the second part ends in a vowel, it adapts itself, if an adjec- tive, to changes of gender, as flSvi-comus, yellow-haired (coma, hair), but more often this final vowel becomes i and the adjective follows the third declension : ab-nOrmi-s, abnormal (nQrma, norm). When the second part ends in a consonant, the last term usually undergoes no change: bi-dSn-i, two-pronged; simplex (sim-plec-s), simple. Signification of Nouns. 196. Compound substantives and adjectives are divided according to their signification into two main classes : Determinative and Pos- sessive. In Determinative compounds one of the terms is subordinate to the other. They fall into two classes : Attributive or Appositional, and Dependent. 197. !• Attributive compounds. The first part is the attribute of the second. The first word is, (i) a substantive : Sli-p6s, wing-foot{ed) ; (2) an ad- jective : mSgn-animns, great-hearted ; ISti-fandium, large estate ; (3) a numeral: bi-enni-um (i. e., spatium), space of two years. 2. Dependent compounds. In these the second word is simply limited by the other, its signification not being altered. (o) The first word is : (i) an adjective : merl-diSs (from medl-difi = medio di«), midrday ; (2) an adverb : bene-ficus (well-doing), beneficent ; male-flooB, evil-doing ; (3) a numeral : ter-geminui, triple ; (4) a par- I02 FORMATION OF WORDS. tide: di»'90iMm^ harah-aounding ; per-migniif , v^ry lar^w / ia«dlg»H, unworthif ; (5) a verb-stem : horri-flem, horrible (harror-st%rr%f%g), (h) The first word gives a case relation, such as (i) the Accusative : armi-ger = arma gerSns , armor-bearer ; agri-eola = agnun eolftM i)and- i\Uer\ htubandman ; (2) the Genitive : lOl-ttitivm = sdUi itatUi (mmi- Btaying), aolstiee; (3) the Locative : alitai-gena (bom elaetoJtere), alien; (4) the instrumental : tibl-cen = UbiS eanSns , flute-player, 108. BosaMsive Compounds are adjectival only, and are so called because they imply the existence of a Subject possessing the quality indicated. The first term is, (i) a substantive : angui-mamii, {having a) anake- hand (elepTiant) : (2) an adjective : flSvi-eomui, (Jiaving) ydUno hair ; (3) a numeral : hi-frOni, (having) two front(a) ; (4) a particle : dii-oort, diaeordant; in-en, inactive. Verb. 109. In Compoaiiion Imp roper the verb is joined to a verb, substantive, or adverb. In C mp ait ion Proper the verb is combined with a preposition. 200. I. Composition Improper. — (a) Verb with verb: This only takes place when the second part of the compound is CmIO or flO (178, R.)- The first part of the compound is regularly an intransitive of the second conjugation : oale-fiaci5, cale-flO, warm, am warmed, (Jb) Verb with substantive : anim-advertO = aninmrn advertO, take notice ; mantl-mittO, set free ; nsft-capiO, acquire by use, (c) Verb with adverb : benoHlIcO, bless ; male-dlOO, curse ; milO, nOlO (for mage (magis) volO, ne- volO), satis-fociO, satisfy, 2. Composition Proper. — The verb combines with separable or in- separable prepositions. Compare 413, r. 3. (a) With inseparable prepositions : amb-iO, go about ; am-pleetor, en- fold ; an-hSlO, draw deep breath, pant ; dis-currO, run apart ; dir-imO, 153 ; por-tend5, hold forth, portend ; red-dO, give back ; re-tolvO, resolve ; f^iungO, separate, (6) With separable prepositions : ab-eO, go away ; ad-eO, come up; ante-earrO, ru/n in advance; com-p0n5, jpt^/ together ; d6-curr5, mn down, finish a course; ex-eSd5, overstep; in-clfld5, shut in; ob-dfloO, draw over ; por-agrO, wander through ; post-habeO, keep in the background ; prae-dloO, foretell ; praeter-eO, pass by ; prOd-eO, go forth ; prae-videO, foresee; mh'Mli, put un^r ; iubter-fogiO, flee from under ; iuper-fom, remain over; ttba-fpcMmf pass beyond. SYNTAX. 201. Syntax treats of the formation and combination of sentences. A sentence is the expression of a thought (sententia) in words. Sentences are divided into simple and compound, A simple sentence is one in which the necessary parts occur but once. The necessary parts of the sentence are the subject and the predicate. The predicate is. that which is said of the subject. The subject is that of which the predicate is said. LUna falget, the moon shines. LUna is the subject ; falget, the predicate. Remarks. — 1. The Interjection (16, r. 1) and the Vocative case (23, 5) do not properly belong to the sentence, and therefore do not enter as elements into Syntax, except that the Vocative is subject to the laws of Concord. 2. The Vocative differs from the Nominative in form in the second declension only, and even there the Nominative is sometimes used instead, especially in poetry and solemn prose. Almae fiUui HSiae, H., 0., i. 2, 43 ; son of mild Maia ! Audi ttl, popolnfl Albfinnfl, L., i. 24, 7 ; hear thou, people of Alba ! 6 is prefixed to give emphasis to the address : fOrmOse puer, nimium ne crfide colOrl, V., Ec. 2, 17 ; shapely boy ! trust not complexion all too much. % SYNTAX OF THE SIMPLE SENTENCE. 202. The most simple form of the sentence is the finite verb : su-m, I am ; doc6-s, thou teachest ; scribi-t, he writes. I04 SUBJECT — PREDICATE — COPULA. 203. Subject. — The subject of the finite verb is in the Nominative Case. The use of the Xom. in Latin is the same as in English. Remark. — The subj. of the Infinitiye is in the Accusative (343, 2). 204. The subject may be a substantive or a pronoun, or some other word, phrase, or clause used as a substantive : Deu mundiim gubemat, God steers the universe. Ego rfigSs aieol, [C] ad Her., it. 53, 66 ; I drove out kings. Sapiens rfis adversSs nOn timet, the sage does not fear adversity. Victl in ■ervitfltem redignntnr, the vanquished are reduced to slavery. ContendisM decOmm est, Ov., M., ix. 6; to have struggled is honar^ able. Remarks. — 1. Masculine and feminine adjectives, and participles, are often used as substantives : panperfii, tJie poor ; dlvitSt, the rich. This is very rare in the Nom. Sing., where the substantive should be expressed : vir pauper, a poor man ; mnUer peregrlna, a foreign iDoman. So I'egularly, if a proper name is added ; FlatO, doetlMimiui homS, the learned Plato. 2. Neuter adjectives and participles are freely employed as substan- tives in both numbers : medium, the midst; extrSmom, the end; fdtlL- rum, the future ; benum, good ; bona, blessings, possessions ; "^^^yw^^ evil ; mala, misfortunes. 3. Adjectives of the Second Declension are sometimes used as neuter substantives in the Gen. , after words of quantity or pronouns : aliquid boni, something good ; nihil mall, nothing had. 4. Instead of the neuter adjective, the word r6i, thing, is frequently used, especially in forms which are identical for different genders, and consequently ambiguous ; so bonSram rOnim, of blessings, rather than bonOmm (masc. and neut.). 5. In Latin the PI. of abstract substantives occurs more frequently than in English ; adventtls imperfttOmm, the arrivals) of the generals (because there were several generals, or because they ariived at different times). Abstract substantives often become concrete in the plural : fortitfldinSs, gallant actions ; formldinfii, bugbears ; Irae, quarrels. 205. Predicate and Copula. — When the predicate is not in the form of a verb, the so-called copula (i. e. coupler) is generally employed, in order to couple the predicate with the subject. The chief copula is the verb sum, I arru ForttLna oaecaest, C, Lael. 15, 54 ; fortune is blind. Usnfl magister est optimns, C, Rab, Post., 4, 9 ; practice is the best teacher. SUBJECT OMITTED — IMPERSONAL VEBBS. 10$ NoTB.— Strietlj speaking, the copala is itself a predicate, as is shown by the trans- lation when it stands alone or with an adverb : ett Dens, ther€ Ut a God^ Ood exiiU ; r9et9 temper enint r6i, things will always be {go on) well ; sic vita hominum est, C, Bosc. Am.t 30, 84 ; such is human l\fe ; " So runs the world away.'' • 206. Other copulative verbs are : videri, to seem ; nftsci, to be bom; fieri, to become; evadere, to turn out ; creari, to be created ; deligi, to be chosen ; putari, to be thought j haberi, to be held; dici, to be said; appell&ri, to be called ; ndmin&ri, to be named. Hence the rule : Verbs of seeming, becoming, with the passive of verbs of making, choosing, shotoing, thinking, and calling, take two Nominatives, one of the subject, one of the predicate : N6m8 nSscitur dives, Sen., E.M., 20, 13 ; no one is bom rich. Aristldfis ittstus appeUStnr, Cf. Nep., iii. i, 4 ; Ariatidea is called just. Thllcj^didfis nnmqiiain est nnmerStxis OrStor, C, 0., 9, 31 ; Thucydides has never been accounted an orator. Remarks. — 1. All copulative verbs retain the Nom. with the Inf. after auxiliary verbs (423). Befttus esse sine virtflte n6m8 potest, C, N.D., i. 18, 48 ; no one can he happy without virtue. 2. On the Double Ace. after Active Verbs, see 340. 207. Subject Omitted. — The personal pronoun is not expressed in classical prose, unless it is emphatic, as, for example, in contrasts, or when the subject changes : AmSmiis parentSs, We love (our) parents. Ego rfigSs aiScl, vOs tsrrannOs intrOdflcitis, [C.]adEer., iv. 53, 66 ; I drove out kings, ye are bringing in tyrants. 208. Impersoistal Verbs. — Impersonal Verbs are verbs in which the person is not expressed. Chief of these are : 1. Verbs pertaining to the state of the weather : tonat, it thunders, the thunder thunders, or rather, the Thunderer thu/nders; falget, it lightens; pluit, it rains; ningit, it snows, etc. Koete pltdt tOtft, V., (Poet. Lat. Min., iv. 155, B.) ; all night it (he, Jupiter) rains. 2. The passive of intransitive verbs is often used impersonally ; so regularly of verbs which in the active are construed with the Dat. (217) : vlvitnr, people live ; earritnr, there is a running ; pttgnStnr, there is a battle ; mihl invidctnr, I am envied. The subject is contained in the Verb itself : pOgnfitnr = pfLgpia ptlgnStnr, a battle is {being) fought. I06 AGREEMENT OF PREDICATE WITH SUBJECT. 209. Copula Omitted.— Eft or lont ie often omitted in proverbs, in short statements and questions, and in tenses compounded with participles : Bnmmiiai ifti inmma inillria, C, Ojf., i. lo, 33 ; the height of right (is) the height of wrong, Klmo malnfl ftUs, Juv., iv. 8 ; no had man (is) happy. So also atM, with participles and the like : Ca«8ar ttatoit exipectandain olinem, Caes., B.G,, iu. 14, 1 ; Caesar resolved that the fleet must be waited for, CONCORD. 210. The Three Concords. — There are three great concords in Latin : 1. The agreement of the predicate with the subject (211). 2. The agreement of attributive or appositive with the substantive (285, 321) . 3. The agreement of the relative with antecedent (614). 211. Agreement of the Predicate with the Subject. The verbal predicate agrees with its subject j ( in number. The adjective predicate agrees with its subject ■< gender, and ( case. The substantive predicate agrees with its subject in case. Sabstantlva mSbilia (21, 2) are treated as adjectives, and follow the number and gender of the subject; as C, Or,, i. 4, 13 (321). Ego (207) rflg&i aiSel, vOs tyrannOs intrOdtLoitis, [C] ad Her., ly. 53, 66 ; / drove out kings, ye are bringing in tyrants, Verae amldtiae lempitemae ixint, C, Lael, 9, 32 ; true friendships are abiding. DOS Mt decern talenta, Ter., And,, 950 ; the dowry is ten talents. Remarks. — 1. The violation of the rules of agreement is due chiefly to one of two causes ; either the natural relation is preferred to the artificial (construction according to the sense), or the nearer is preferred to the more remote. Hence the following Exceptions. — (a) Substantives of multitude often take the predi- cate in the Plural : pan, part ; vli (power), quantity ; moltitUdO, crowd ; organized bodies more rarely. Fart mftior reoBperant bObS, L., xxxiv. 47, 6 ; the greater part had re- tired. OmniB moltittLdO abeunt, L., xxiv. 3, 15 ; all the crowd depart. FORMS OF THE VERBAL PREDICATE. 10/ (b) The adjective predicate often follows the natural gender of the subject ; so especially with mllia. Capita oonillrfttiOnis virgis oaesZ sunt, L., x. i, 3 ; the heads of the conspiracy were flogged. Sanmltiam caetl tria mHia, Cf, L., x. 34, 8 ; of the Sammtes (there) were slain three thousand. The passive verb often agrees in gender with the predicate : N5n omnis error stultitia dioenda est, C, Div., 11. 43, 90 ; not every false step is to he called folly. (c) The copula often agrees with the number of tlie predicate (" the wages of sin is death ") : Amantinm Irae (204, r. 5) amOris integrfttiO est, Ter., And.^ 555 ; lovers* quarrels are love*s renewal. 2. A superlative adjective defined by a Partitive Gen. follows the gender of the subj. when it precedes : Indus, qui est omnium flilminum mfiximns, C, N.D., 11. 52, 130 ; the Indus, which is the greatest of all rivers. (3) 4. The neuter adjective is often used as the substantive predicate of a masculine or feminine subject : Tnste lupus stabulls, V., Ec, 3, 80 ; the wolf is a "baleful thing to the folds. Valium et mtLtftbile semper f6mina,y., A.^iy, 569 \*^a thing of moods a/nd fancies " is woman ever. 5. The demonstrative pronoun is commonly attracted into the gen- der of the predicate : £a nOn media sed ntUla via est, L., xxxii., 21, 33 ; that is not a middle course, but no course at all. But in negative sentences, and when the pronoun is the predicate, there is no change. So in definitions : (tuid aut quSle est Denst Cf. C, N.D., 1. 22, 60 ; what or what man- ner of thing is Qod 9 6. The adjective predicate sometimes agrees with a substantive in apposition to the subject. So especially when the appositive is oppidum, dyitSs, and the like : CorioU oppidum eaptum est, L., it. 33, 9 ; Gorioli-toum was taken. Forms of the Verbal Predicate. VOICES OF THE VERB. 212. There are two voices in Latin — Active and Passive. 218. Active. — The Active Voice denotes that the action process from the subject. Verbs used in the Active Voice fall into two classes^ as follows : I08 VOICES OF THE VEBB. Verbs are called Transitive when their action goes over to an object (trftnaed, I go over) ; Intransitive when their ac- tion does not go beyond the subject: occidere, to fell = to kill (Transitive); ocoidere, to fall (Intransitive). Remark. — (a) Transitive verbs are often used intransitively, in which case they serve simply to characterize the agent. This is true especially of verbs of movement; as dScUnfire, incUnfire, movSre, mfltSre, vertere, and the like. (6) On the other hand, many intransitive verbs are often used tran- sitively. In this case the Ace. is usually the inner object (832). 214. Passive. — The Passive Voice denotes that the sui- ject receives the action of the verb. The instrument is put in the Ablative. VirglB oaedfitur, C, Ycrr., in. 28, 69 ; he shall he beaten with rods. Ignii IfLmine prOditur luO, Ov., ffer.^ 15, 8 ; the fire is betrayed by its own light. The agent is put in the Ablative with ab (a). Ab amiols prOdimnr, C, Oluent,^ 52, 143 ; we are betrayed by friends, Virgil oaMi tribllnl ab iSgStO innt, L., xxix. 18, 13 ; the tribunes were beaten with rods by the lieutenant. Remarks. — 1. Intrans. verbs of passive signification are construed as passives : famS perfre, C, Inv. , n. 57, 172, ^0 perish of hunger. So vSnlre, to be sold ; vSpnlSre (chiefly vulgar), to be beaten^ ab aliquO, by some one, 2. When the instrument is considered as an agent, or the agent as an instrument, the constructions are reversed : Vinci S VolnptSte, C, Off,, i. 20, 68 ; to be overcome by Dame Pleasure, Patricils invenibns laepierant latera, L., in. 37, 6 ; they had flanked him unth a guard of patrician youths. Animals, as independent agents, are treated like persons. A eane nOn mfignO saepe tenfitnr aper, Ov., Rem. Am., 422 ; a boar is often held fast by a little dog. Animals, as instruments, are treated like things. Compare equC vebl, to ride a horse (to he borne by a horse), with in eqnO, on horseback, 215. The person in whose interest an action is done is put in the Dative. Hence the frequent inference that the person interested is the agent. See 354. VOICES OP THE VEBB. lOQ 1. With the Perfect passive it is the natural inference, and common in prose. Carmina nfOla mihl lont sorlpta, Ov., Tr., v. 12, 35 ; poems — I have none written (I have written no poems). 2. With the Gerundive it is the necessary inference, and the Dative is the rule. Kihil est homini tarn timendnm quam invidia, C, Clu&nt., 3, 7 ; tliere is nothing that one has to fear to the same extent as envy, 216. The Direct Object of the Active Verb (the Accusa- tive Case) becomes the Subject of the Passive. Alexander DSrenm yldt, Alexander conquered Darius, DSrfiiu ab Alexandre yictns est, Darius was conquered by Alexander, 217. The Indirect Object of the Active Verb (Dative Case) cannot be properly used as the Subject of the Pas- sive. The Dative remains unchanged, and the verb be- comes a Passive in the Third Person Singular (Impersonal Verb). This Passive form may have a neuter subject corresponding to the Inner object (333, i). Active : Miserl invident bonis, The wretched envy the well-to-do. Passive : mihi inviddtnr, / am envied^ tibi invidetor, thou art envied, el inviddtnr, he is envied, nobis inviddtnr, we are envied, vObls inviddtnr, you are envied, ils invidfitur, they are envied, Kibil facile persoSdfitnr invltls, Quint., iy. 3, 10 ; people are not easily persuaded of anything against their will. innlls nostrls plfls qnam animis crSditnr, Sen., Ben., in. 15, 3 ; our seals are more trusted than our souls, 218. Reflexive. — Reflexive relations, when emphatic, are expressed as in English : Onme animal s6 ipsmn dlligit, C, Fin., v. 9, 24; Every living creature loves itself. But when the reflexive relation is more general, the pas- sive is employed : lavor, / lathe, I bathe myself. PUrgSrl neqnlvenint, Cf. L,, xxiv. 18, 4 ; they could not clear them- selves. ab aliqnO, by some one. I lO TENSES. S19. The passive in its reflexive sense is often used to express an action which the subject suffers or causes to be (lone to itself : trahor, / let myself be dragged; tondeoTy / have myself shaved. Sine gemitll adtLnintiir, C, Tiiac., v. 27, 77 ; they let themaelves he burned without a moan. Ipsa dooet quid again ; fka eat et ab hoita dooirX, Oy., M., iv. 428 ; he himself teaches (me) what to do; it is {buf) right to let oneaelf be taught even by an enemy (to take a lesson from a foe). 220. Deponent. — The Deponent is a passive form which has lost, in most instances, its passive (or reflexive) signifi- cation : hortor, I a7n exhorting (trans.) ; morior, lam dying (intrans.). 221. Reciprocal. — Reciprocal relations (^^ one another '*) are expressed by inter, among, and the personal pronouns, nos, us ; yob, you ; sd, themselves. Inter 16 amant, C, Q.F. ill. 3, 1 : t?iey love one another. TENSES. 222. The Tenses express the relations of time, embracing: 1. The stage of the action (duration in time). 2. The period of the action (position in time). The first tells whether the action is going on, or finished. The second tells whether the action is past, present, or future. Both these sets of relations are expressed by the tenses of the Indicative or Declarative mood — ^less clearly by the Subjunctive. 223. There are six tenses in Latin : 1. The Present, denoting continuance in the present. 2. The Future, denoting continuance in the future. 3. The Imperfect, denoting conti?iuance in the j^a^^. 4. The Perfect, denoting completion in the present, 5. The Future Perfect, denoting completion in the future. . 6. The Pluperfect, denoting completion in the past. TABLE OF TEMPOBAL BELATIONS. Ill 224. An action may further be regarded simply aa at- tained, i.e. as an occurrence without reference to its con- tinuance or completion. This is the aoristic or indefinite stage of the action, which has no especial tense-form. It is expressed by the Present tense for the present ; by the Future and Future Perfect tenses for the future ; and by the Perfect tense for the past. Of especial importance are the Indefinite or Historical Present and the Indefinite or Historical Perfect (Aorist), which differ materially in syntax from the Definite or Pure Present and Perfect. 225. The Tenses are divided into Principal and Histori- cal. The Principal Tenses have to do with the Present and Future. The Historical Tenses have to do with the Past. The Present, Pure Perfect, Future, and Future Perfect are Principal Tenses, The Historical Present, Imperfect, Pluperfect, and His- torical Perfect are Historical Tenses. 226. Table of Temporal Relations. Continuance. Pres. icrlbO, lam writing. FuT. Borlbam, I ahail he writing. Past. BcrlbSbam, I was writing. Continuance. Pres. icrlbitur (epiitnla), The letter is written (writing), FuT. lorlbfitur, The letter mil be written {writing). Past. icrlbfibStur, The letter was writ- ten (writing). ACTIVB. Completion. icrlpBl, / have tcritten, ■crIpierO, I shall have tcritten. I shall write. icrlptaram, sorlpil, I had tvritten. I wrote. Attainment. fcrlbO, I vorite. Mrlbam (scrlpBerO), PASSIVE. Completion. Bcrlpta est, has been written, is written. icrlpta exit, will have been, will be written. ■orlpta erat, had been umtten, was written. Attainment, icnbitnr, is written. Borlbetur, will be written, icrlpta eat, was written. 112 PBESENT TEXSE. Rkmi rk. — The English passiye is ambiguous. The same form is our- rently used for continuance, attainment, and completion. The context alone can decide. A convenient test is the substitution of the aotiTe. ( Continuance, Some one woe writing a letter. A letter teas written : -j Completion, Some one had vfritten a letter. ( Attainment, Some one wrote a letter. Present Tense, 227. The Present Tense is used as in English of that which 18 going on now (Specific Present), and of state- ments that apply to all time (Universal Present). Specific Present : Auribus teneO Inpam, Teb., Ph,, 506 ; I am liolding a wolf hy the ears. Universal Present : Probitis laudfttur et alget, Juv., i. 74 ; honesty is hepraised and freezes, 50 regularly of the quoted views of authors, the inscriptions of books, etc. : D6 invennm amOre serlbit Aloaeus, C, Tusc,, iv. 33, 71 ; Aleaeus writes concerning the love of youths. Remark. — 1. The Pr. like the Impf. (288) is sometimes used of attempted or intended action {Present of Endeavor), But do not mis- take the Endeavor that lies in the verb for the Endeavor that lies in the tense, Perlcnlnm vXtant, C, Rose, Am,, 1. 1 ; tliey are trying to avoid danger, 2. The Pr. when used with a negative often denotes Resistance to Pressure (238) ; this is, however, colloquial : Tad: nOn taoeO, Pl., Cas,, 826 ; keep quiet I I won't. 228. The Present Tense is used more rarely than in Eng- lish i7i anticipation of the future, chiefly in compound sentences : 51 vincimus, omnia tflta enmt, S., C, 58, ^ \ if we conquer ( = shaU haw conquered) everything itnll be safe, 229. The Present Tense is used far more frequently than in English, as a lively represeiitation of the past (Historical Present) : Cohortis inoSdere inbet, S., C, 60, 1 ; ^ orders the cohorts to advance. IMPERFECT TENSE. II3 230. The Present is used in Latin of actions that are con- tinued into the present, especially with iam, now ; iam din, now for a long time; iam pridem, now long since. In Eng- lish we often translate by a Progressive Perfect. Xithridfitai annum iam tertitim et vIcSBimnm rSgnat, C, Imp,, 3, 7 ; Mithridates Tias been reigning now going on twenty-three years, LIberSre vOi S FhilippO iam dill magis vnltiB qnam audstis, L., xxxii. 21, 36 ; you have this long time had the wish rather than (= though not) the courage to deliver yourselves from Philip. *' How does your honor for this monj a daj ? ^* Shak., Hiam.t m. i, 91. Imperfect Tense. 231. The Imperfect Tense denotes continuance in the past : pugnabam, I was fighting. The Imperfect is employed to represent manners, cus- toms, situations ; to describe and to particularize. The Imperfect and the Historical Perfect serve to illus- trate on^ another. The Imperfect dwells on the process ; the Historical Perfect states the result. The Imperfect counts out the items j the Historical Perfect gives the sum. 232. The two tenses are often so combined that the gen- eral statement is given by the Historical Perfect, the par- ticulars of the action by the Imperfect : Verres in forum vfinit ; firdfibant ocuU ; tOtO ez Ore oradfiUtfiB fiminSbat, C, Verr,f v. 62, 161 ; Verres came into the forum, his eyes were blazing j cruelty was standing out from his whole countenance, 233. The Imperfect is used of attempted and interrupted, intended and expected actions {Imperfect of Endeavor). It is the Tense of Disappointment and (with the nega- tive) of Resistance to Pressure, (Mere negation is regularly Perfect.) Cllriam reUnquSbat, Tac, Ann., 11. 34, 1 ; ^ was for leaving the senate-house, LSz abrogfibStur, Cf L., xxxiv. i, 7 ; the law was to be abrogated. AditumnOndabat, Nep., iy. 3, 8 ; ^ would not grant access (nOn dedit, DID not), 8 1 14 PERFECT TEN'SE. Reiueks.— 1. With definite numbers, however large, the Hist. Pf. must be used, unless tliere is a notion of continuance into another stage (overlapping). Gergili oentnm et noTem Tlzit annOi, Quint., hi. i, 9 ; Oorgias lived one hundred and nine yearn, 2. As the Tense of Disappointment, the Impf. is occasionally used, as in Greek, to express a startling appreciation of the real state of things {Imperfect of Aicakening), Greek influence is not unlikely. TfL aderii, Ter., Ph., S5S ; (so it turns out that) you were here (nil the time). 234. The Imperfect is used as the English Pluperfect, which often takes a progressive translation ; especially with iam, iam din, iam dudnm. lam dUdnm tiU adTenfthar, Pl., Men,, 420 ; 1 had long been opposing you. ArohiSt domioiliiim BQmae moltOt iam annOs hablbat, Cf, C, Arch., 4, 7 ; Archiaa had been domiciled at Rome now these many years. Remark. — As the Ilist. Pr. is used in lively narrative, so the Hist. Inf. is used in lively description, parallel with the Imperfect (647). Perfect Tense. The Perfect Tense has two distinct uses : I. Pure Perfect. 2. Historical Perfect (Aorist). 1. PURE PERFECT. 235. The Pure Perfect Tense expresses completion in the Present, and hence is sometimes called tlie Present Perfect. 236. The Pure Perfect is used : 1. Of an action that is now over and gone. yizimiis, C, Fam., xiv. 4, 5 ; M?e have lived {life for us lias been). TOjnfn tlnienm habeO, Immo habnl, Teb., Ileaut., 94 ; I have an only son — nay, have had an only son, 2. Far more frequently of the present result of a more remote action {resulting condition) : Aetimift, ptrlitl, Ter., Eun., 54 ; it is all over; you're undone, Eqniim et mlilnm Bnmdiiil tibi rellqnl, C, Fam., xvl 9, 3 ; / h was (Impersonal), ( the Subjunctive. In eO erat nt PansaniSs comprehenderStur, Nep., iv. 5, 1 ; it was on the point that Pausa/niaa should he {Pausanias was on the point of being) arrested. B.— Of Past Relations. 250. The Perfect Participle passive is used in combina- tion with sum, / am, and fui, / have been, I was, to express the Pure Perfect and Historical Perfect of the Passive Voice. Eram, / was, and fneram, / had been, stand for the Pluperfect ; and erO, / shall be, and fuero, / shall have been, for the Future Perfect. Remarks. — 1. FnI is the favorite form when the participle is fre- quently used as an adjective : convlyium ezOmStum fait, ths ba>nquet was furnished forth ; fal is the necessary form when the Pf . denotes that the action is over and gone : amStns fal, / have been loved (but I am loved no longer). Arma quae fiza in parietibns faerant, ea sunt humi inventa, C, Div.j i. 34, 74 ; the arms which had been fastened to the walls, were found on the ground. Quod tibi faerit persoSsum, hnio erit persoSsum, C, Rose. Com,, i, 3 ; what is {shall have proved) acceptable to you will be acceptable to him, 2. To be distinguished is that use of the Pf . where each element has its full force, the Participle being treated as an adjective. In this case the tense is not past. OaUia est omnis dlvlsa in partSs trSs, Caes., ^.6^., i, 1 : Gaul as a whole is divided into three parts. C— Periphrastic Conjugratlon— Passive Voice. 251. I. The combination of the Tenses of ease, to be, with the Gerundive (verbal in -ndiu)^ is called the Periphrastic Conjugation of the Passive, and follows the laws of the simple conjugation (129). The idea expressed is usually one of necessity, PraepOnenda est dlvitils gl8ria, C. , Top., 22, 84 ; glory is to be preferred to riches. I20 TENSES IN LETTBES— MOODS. 2. According to the rule (217) the Gerundive of intransi- tive verbs can be used only in the Impersonal form. Farcendiim att viotls, The vanquished must he spared, TENSES IN LETTERS. 252. The Eoman letter-writer not unfrequently puts himself in the position of the receiver, more especially at the beginning and at the end of the letter, often in the phrase Nihil erat (habebam) quod scriberem, / have nothing to write. This permutation of tenses is never kept up long, and applies only to temporary situations, never to general statements. Table of Permutations. icnbO, I am writing, becomes lorlbfibam. Itorite, ** lerlpBl. BorlptX, I have toritten, ** lerlpMram. I wrote, ** serlpBeram or is unchanged, fcrlbam, / shall write, ** serlptHnu eram. The adverbial designations of time remain unchanged — or herX, yesterday, becomes pridifi. hodiS, to-day, ** quO di6 hSs UtterSs dedl, dabam. erfis, to-morrow, *' posterO di6, postrldifi. nnnc, now, ** tnm. Forxnifis m6 oontinnO reoipere cOgitSbam, C, Att., vn. 15, 3 ; I am thinking of retiring forthwith to Formiae. LitterSs eram datllms postrldie el qui xnihi prlmiii obviam vSnistet, C, Att., II. 12, 4 ; I will give the letter to-m>orrow to the first man that com^s my way. MOODS. 253. Mood signifies manner. The mood of a verb signi- fies the manner in which the predicate is said of the subject. There are three moods in Latin : 1. The Indicative. 2. The Subjunctive. 3. The Imperative. Note.— The Infinitive form of the verb is generallj, bat improperly, called a mood. INDICATIVE MOOD. 121 The Indicative Mood. 254. The Indicative Mood represents the predicate as a reality. It is sometimes called the Declarative Mood, as the mood of direct assertion. The use of the Latin Indicative differs little from the English. Remarks. — 1. The Latin language expresses po««t6t7% and j^ower, obligation and necessity , and abstract relations generally, as facts; whereas, our translation often implies the failure to realize. Such expressions are : debeO, / ought ^ it is my duty ; oportet, it hehooves ; necesse est, it is absolutely necessary ; possum, / can^ I have it in my power ; convenit, it is fitting ; pfir, aeqaum est, it is fair ; Infinitum, endless; difficile, hard to do; long^im, tedious; and many others ; also the Indie, form of the passive Periphrastic Conjuga- tion. Possum persequi permnlta oblectSmenta rfimm rOsticSmm, C, Cat.M., 1 6, 55 ; I might rehearse very many delights of country life. Observe the difference between the use of the Inf. in Eng. and in Latin after past tenses of dfibeO, possum, oportet, etc. Ad mortem t6 dtlcl oportSbat, C, Cat,^ i. i, 2 ; it behooved you to be (you ought to have been) led to execution (you were not). Volumnia dfibuit in t6 offioiOsior esse, C, Fam., xiv. i6 ; it was Volume nia*s duty to be ( V. ought to have beeii) more attentive to you. 2. The Impf. as the Tense of Disappointment (233) is sometimes used in these verbs to denote opposition to a present state of things : dfibfibam, / ought (but do not) ; poterSs, you could (but do not). These may be considered as conditionals in disguise. (See R. 3.) Poteram morbOs appellSre, sed nOn convenlret ad omnia, C, Fin., in. lo, 36 ; I might translate (that Greek word) ** diseases/' but that would not suit all the cases (poteram si convenlret). 8. The Impf. Indie, is sometimes used in unreal conditional Apodo- ses like the Periphrastic Impf. and the Plupf. like the Periphrastic Plupf . : so ISbfibar = ISpstlrns eram ; TloerSmns = victtlrl faerSmns. (See 597, E. 2.) 4. In general relative expressions, such as qnisquis, wo matter who, quotquot, no matter how many, and all forms in -comque, -ever, the Indie, is employed in classical Latin where we may use in English a Subjv. or its equivalent : qnisquis est, no matter who he is, be, may be; qnSlecamque est, whatever sort of thing it is, be, may be, Quidquid id est, timeO DanaOs et dOna ferentSs, V., A., ii. 49 ; whatever it {may) be, I fear the Danai even when they bring presents. 122 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Subjunctive Mood. 255. The Subjunctive Mood represents the Predicate as an idea, as something merely conceived in the mind. Remark. — The Latin Subjv. is often translated into English by the auxiliary verbs may, can, must, might, could, would, should. When these verbs have their full signification oi possibility BXidi power, obligti- tion and necessity, they are represented in Latin by the corresponding verbs, thus : may, can, might, could by the forms of potM, to be able, licet, it is left free ; tuill and would by velle, to will, to he willing ; must, by debeO or oportet (of moral obligation), by neoaeie att (of absolute obligation). 256. I. The realization of the idea may be in suspense, or it may be beyond control. The first, or purely Ideal Subjunctive, is represented by the Present and Perfect Tenses ; the second, or Unreal, is represented by the Im- perfect and Pluperfect. 2. The idea may be a vieiv, or a wish. In the first case the Subjunctive is said to be Potential, in the second case Optative. The Potential Subjunctive is nearer the Indica- tive, from which it differs in tone ; the Optative Subjunc- tive is nearer the Imperative, for which it is often used. Potential Subjunctive. 257. I. The Potential Subjunctive represents the opinion of the speaker as an opinion based on the character of the action. The tone varies from vague surmise to moral cer- tainty, from "may^^ and ^^ might ^^ to ^^must.*^ The negative is the negative of the Indicative, non, 2. The Potential of the Present or Future is the Present or Perfect Subjunctive. The proof of the action is in suspense, and so future ; the action itself may be present or future : with Perfect sometimes past. Velim, I should wish ; nOliiii, I should he unwilling : mSlim, I should prefer ; dlcfii, you would say ; crfidSs, you would helieve, you must he- lieve ; dfoat aliqtiiB, some one may undertake to say ; dixerit aliquis, some one may go so far as to say, may prove to have said. Caedl dlBoipalOf minimfi velim, Quint., i. 3, 13 ; I should by no means like pupils to he flogged, ' OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 1 23 TH PlatOnem neo nimii yaldfi neo nimis saepe laudSvedb, C, Leg,, iii. I, 1 ; you canH praise Plato too much nor too often, 268. The Potential of the Past is the Imperfect Subjunc- tive, chiefly in the Ideal Second Person, an imaginary ^^you/' YeUem, / 5^01^ have wished; nOllem, I should have been unmlling; mfillem, I should have preferred (it is too late). GrSderSs victOe, L., 11. 43, 9 ; you would, might, have thought them beaten, MirSrfitiir qnl tnm cemeret, L., xxxiy. 9, 4 ; any one who saw it then must have been astonished. 269. The Potential Subjunctive is used in questions which serve to convey a negative opinion on the part of the speaker. Qnis dubitet (= n6m6 dubitet) qnln in ▼irtUte divitiae sint 1 C, Farad,, Yi. 2, 48 ; w?io can doubt that tme wealth consists in virtue f (No one.) Quia tnlerit OraochOB d6 sSditiOne querentfli 1 Juv., 11. 24 ; who could bear the Gracchi complaining of rebellion f (No one.) Optative Subjunctive. 260. The Subjunctive is used as an Optative or wishing mood. The negative is ne. The Pr. and Pf. Subjv. are used when the decision is in suspense, no matter how extravagant the wish ; the Impf. and Plupf. are used when the decision is adverse. The Pf. is rare and old. Stet haeo orbs, C, Mil., 34, 93 ; may this city continue to stand / Ita dl fEudnt (= fScerint), Pl., Poen., 911 ; the gods gra/nt it ! Ks iBtuc Itlppiter optimns mfiximns slrit (= siverit) ! L., xxxiv. 24, 2 ; may Jupiter, supremely great and good, suffer it not ! 261. The Optative Subjunctive frequently takes utinam, wotild that; utinam ne, utinam non, would that . • . not, si, oh if, is poetical and very rare; ut is mainly archaic. YaleSs beneque ut tibi sit, Pl., Boen,, 912 ; farewell ! God bless you ! Utinam revlylscat frSter! Gell., x. 6, 2 ; would that my brother would come to life again ! niud utinam n6 yflrfi sorlberem, C, Fam., v. 17, 3 ; would that what 1 am writing were not true f Utinam suiceptuB nOn euem, C, Att,, m. 11, 8 ; would I had not been bom! 124 OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE. 5 mihi praeteritOt refarat si I1lppit«r annOt, V., A., viii. 560 ; if Jove were to bring me bciek the years that are gone by ! Remark. — For the wish with adverse decision, vellem and mlUem (theoretically also nOllem) may be used with the Inipf. and sometimes (especially yellem) with the Pliipf. Subjunctive. Yellom adene pottet Panaetins ! C., Tuar,,, i. 33, 81 ; toould that Pa- TMetius could be present ! Yellem mH ad etaam invltfiitfig, C, Fam., xii. 4, 1 ; would that you had invited me to your dinner-party. So velim, nOlim, etc,^ for the simple wish (546, r. 2). Taam mihl darl velim Aoquentiam, C, N.D,, 11. 59, 147 ; I could wish your eloquence given to me. 262. The Optative Subjunctive is used in asseverations : Ita vivam ut mKTlinai ifLmptlls iiEudO, C, Att,fY.is,2 ; as Hive (liter- ally, so may I live as), I am making very great outlay. Moriar, si magis gauderem si id mihl acddisset, C, Att., viii. 6, 3 ; may I die if I could be more glad if that had happened to me. 263. The Subjunctive is used as an Imperative : 1. In the First Person Plural Present, which has no Im- perative form : Amflmns patriam, C, Sest.^ 68, 143 ; let us love our country. K6 difflnilia optSmns, C, Verr., it. y, 15 ; let us not desire what is hard to do . 2. In the Second Person. (o) In the Present chiefly in the Singular, and chiefly of an imaginary ^^ you '^ : IstO bono Htfire, dnm adsit, com abtit, nS reqoIrSs, C, Cat.M., 10, 33 ; you must enjoy that blessing so long as His here, when it is gone you must not pine for it, (5) In the Perfect negatively : KB trSnsieriB Hibflmm, L., xxi. 44, 6 ; £?o not cross the Ebro. Ks yOs mortem timuerltis, C, Tusc, i. 41, 98 ; have no fear of death ! 3. In the Third Person Present (regularly) : Suum quisqne nOscat ingeninm, C, Off., i. 31, 114 ; let each one know his oum mind. DOnls impil nH plficSre audeant deOs, C, Leg., u. 16, 41 ; let the wicked not dare to try to appease the gods with gifts. IMPERATIVE MOOD. 12$ 264. The Subjunctive is used as a Concessive : Sit fflr, C, Verr., v. i, 4 ; (grcmted that) he he a thief, Fuerit xnaliui civis, C, Verr,, i. 14, 37 ; {mppoae) that he was a had citizen. For other examples with ut and n8, see 608. 266. The Subjunctive is used in Questions which expect an Imperative answer (cdniunctivus deliber&tiYiu). Genuine questions are commonly put in the First Person, or the representative of the First Person : TJtmm BTiperbiam prins commemorem an crtLdSlitStem, C, Yerr,, i. 47, 122 ; shall I mention the insolence first or the cruelty f MSgna fait contentiO TLtrnm moenibiu 86 dfifenderent an obviam Xrent hostibus, Nep., i. 4, 4 ; there was a great dispute whether they should defend themselves hehind the walls or go to meet the enemy. (Utmm nOt dfifendSmus an obviam eSmiu 1) Imperative Mood. 266. The Imperative is the mood of the will. Its tone varies from stern command to piteous entreaty. It may appear as a demand, an order, an exhortation, a permission, a concession, a prayer. AM in malam rem, Pl., Copt,, 877 ; go to the mischief. Gompesce mentem, H., 0., i. 16, 22 ; curb your temper^ D5 mihi hOc, mel menm! Pl., Trin.^ 244 ; give me this, honey dear / 267. The Imperative has two forms, known as the First and the Second Imperative (also, but less accurately, as the Present and Future Imperative). The First Impera- tive has only the Second Person ; the Second Imperative has both Second and Third Persons. The First Person is represented by the Subjunctive (263, i). Remark. — Some verbs have only the second form : so seltO, know thou ; memento, remember thou ; hab6t0, in the sense of know, remember. 268. I. The First Imperative looks forward to immediate fulfilment (Absolute Imperative) : Special: Patent portae; profioXscere, C, Cat., i. 5, 10 ; open stand the gates ; depart. General: lOstitiam cole et pietStem, C, Bep., vi. 16, 16; cultivate justice and piety. 126 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2. The Second Imperative looks forward to contingent fulfilment (Relative Imperative), and is chiefly used in laws^ legal documents, maxims, recipes, and the like ; like- wise in familiar language. COmnlOs nSminl pftrentO, C, Leg.^ in. 3, 8 ; the constUs tihaU obey no one. PeroonUtOrem fagitO, nam garrulns Idem eft, H., Ep., 1. 18, 69 ; avoid your questioner^ for he is a tell-tale too, (209) 270. Negative of the Imperative. — i. The reg- ular negative of the Imperative is nh (neve, nen), which is found with the Second Imperative ; with the First Impera- tive, it is poetical or colloquial. Hominem mertuum in nrbe n6 lepelltO n9ye nritO, C, Leg,, n. 23, 68 ; one shall not biiry nor bum a dead man in the city, in n6 cede malli, led oontrft andentior ItO, V., A,, vi. 95 ; yield not thou to misfortunes, but go more boldly {tha/n ever) to meet them. Remarks. — 1. KOn may be used to negative a single word : Opus poliat lima, nOn exterat, Cf, Quint., x. 4, 4 ; let the file rub the work up, not rub it out. • 2. Instead of n6 with the First Imperative was employed either nOU with the Infinitive (271, 2) ; or occasionally nS with the Pf. Subjv. (2d3, 2, b). The Pr. Subjv. with nO is the Ideal Second Persons see 263, 2, a. 271. Periphrases. — i. For the Positive Imperative may be used cura (curatd) ut, take care that ; fete (&citO) nt, cause that J fiu5 (facitO), do, with the Subjunctive. CllrS Tit quam primnm (303) veniSs, C, Fam,, iv. 10, 1 ; manage to come as soon as possible, Fac cOgitSB, C, Fam,, xi. 3, 4; do reflect t 2, For the Negative Imperative (Prohibitive) noli, he un- willing, with Infinitive is the rule : Cave and cav§ (cavetO) n6, beware lest, and also fiac n6, do not, with the Subjunctive are also found. KOlI verberSre lapidem, Pl., Cure, 197 ; don*t beat a stone, CavS fSstlnOs, C, Fam, xvi. 12, 6 ; do not be in a hurry, Ym n6 qnid alind cfLrSi hOc tempore, C, Fam,, xvi. 11, 1 ; see that you pay no attention to anything else, at this time. IMPERATIVE MOOD. ' 12/ 272. Eepresentatives OF THE Imperative. — i. Instead of the Positive Imperative, may be employed : (a) The Second Person of the Present Subjunctive (268, 2). lb) The Second Person of the Future Indicative (243). (c) The Third Person of the Present Subjunctive (263, 3). 2. Instead of the IN'egative Imperative (Prohibitive), may be employed : (a) The Second Person of the Present Subjunctive, with nO (263, 2, a), {b) The Second Person of the Perfect Subjunctive, with nS (263, 2). (c) The Second Person of the Future, with nOn (248). (d) The Third Person of the Present or Perfect Subjunctive, with nS (263, 3). Remark. — The Pr. Subjv. is employed when stress is laid on the continuance of the action; the Pf., when stress is laid on the comple- tion. Hence the use of the Pf. Subjv. in total prohibitions and pas- sionate protests. 3. The Imperative of the past is expressed by the Im- perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive (unfulfilled duties). DOtem darStis; quaereret alium vimm, Ter., Ph., 297 ; you should have given her a portion; she should have sought another match. K6 pop9eoi8868 librOB) C, Att,y ii. i, 3 ; you ought not to have asked for the books, 278. Passionate questions are equivalent to a command : KOn taoOs 1 Pl., Am., 700 ; won't you hold your tongue 9 Qaln tH taoAi 1 Pl., Men., 561 : why don't you hold your tongue 9 (274) 276. Summary of Imperative Constructions. Positive. Neflratlve. SECOND PEKSON. audi, hear thou, nOU audire, hear not, nS audlverb (occasional). andltO (legal or contingent), n6 audltO (legal). audiSs (ideal 2nd Person chiefly), nS audiSs (ideal 2nd Pers. chiefly). andiSs (familiar), nOn audiSs (familiar). n6 audi (poetic). THIRD PERSON, audiat, let him hear, n6 audiat, let him not hear, n0 audlverit. audits (legal), nO audltO (legal). 128 TENSES OF THE MOODS. Tenses of the Moods and Verbal Substantives. 276. The Indicative. — The tenses of the Indicative alone express with uniform directness the period of time. 277. The Subjunctive. — i. The Present and Imperfect Subjunctive have to do with coiitmued action, the Perfect and Pluperfect with completed action. The Perfect Sub- juctive is also used to express the attainment, 2. In simple sentences Present and Perfect Subjunctive have a Future force because the Future alone can tell whether the action is realized. The action itself may be Present or Future for the Present Subjunctive ; Present, Past, or Future for the Perfect Subjunctive. Credat, he may believe (now or hereafter). Grediderit, let him "have had the belief (heretofore), he may have come to the belief (now), he may come to the belief (hereafter). 3. In simple sentences the Imperfect and Pluperfect Sub- junctive are Past Tenses, and regularly serve to indicate unreality. (See 597.) 4. In dependent sentences the Subjunctive is future if the leading verb has a future signification (515, b. 3) ; otherwise the tenses of the Subjunctive represent corre- sponding tenses of the Indicative according to the law of sequence (509). 278. The Imperative is necessarily Future. 279. The Infinitive has two uses : 1. Its use as a Substantive. 2. Its use as a representative of the Indicative. 280. The Infiyiitive as a Substantive, — As a Substantive the Infinitive has two tenses. Present and Perfect. (See 419.) I. The Present Infinitive is the common form of the Infinitive, used as a Substantive. It has to do with con- tinued action. TENSES OF THE MOODS. 1 29 {a) The Present Infinitive is used as a subject or predi- cate. (See 422, 424.) Qnilnudaiii tOtnxiL hOo digplioet philosophSrl, C, Fin,^ i. i, 1 ; to some this whole htmness of metaphysics is a nuisance, (b) The Present Infinitive is used as the object of Verbs of Creation (often called Auxiliary Verbs, see 423.) CatO tervlre qnam pflgnfire mSvult, C, Att., vii. 15, 2 ; Cato prefers to he a slave rather than to fight {being a slave to fighting), 2. The Perfect Infinitive is comparatively little used as a Substantive. It has to do with completed action, and is also used to express attainment, {a) As a subject, it is used chiefly in fixed expressions or in marked opposition to the Present. KOn tarn torpe fait vind qnam contendisse deoOmm est, Ov., Ji/., ix. 5 ; Hwas not so much dishonor to be beaten as His an honor to have struggled* (i) As an object, the Perfect Infinitive is seldom found in the active in prose, except after velle, to wish, KOminem notft strennl ant IgnSvI mlUtis notfisse volul, L., xxiy. 16, 11 ; I wished to have marked {to mark finally, to brand) no soldier with tJie mo/rk of bravery or of cowardice. In the poets it is not uncommon, perhaps for metrical reasons ; but it occurs usually with the Pf. and Plupf. tenses, volnl, etc., potul, dsbueram (dobnl). FrStrSs tendentSe opSoO Felion impoBniste OlympO, H., 0,, in. 4, 52 ; the brothers striving to pile Pelion on shady Olympus for good and all, (c) In the Passive, the Perfect Infinitive is used after verbs of Will and Desire, to denote that entire fulfilment is demanded or desired. See 537. Fatriain exstinctam cupit, C, Fin,, it. 24, 66 ; he desires his country blotted out. Here the Infinitive esse is seldom expressed. 281. Tlie Infinitive as the representative of the Indica- tive. — As the representative of the Indicative, the Infini- tive has all its Tenses : Present, Past, Future, and Future Periphrastics. 9 130 TENSES OF THE MOODS. 1. The Present Infinitive represents contemporaneous action — hence : the Present Indicative after a Principal Tense, and the Imperfect after a Historical Tense : DIoO eum venire, I say that he is coming. DIedbam eum venlrei / said that he w tria milia qnlngenti eqnitOs, tria mHia eqaitnm et qnlngenti, but eqnitai tria mIlia qnlngenti, or eqnitnm tria mIlia qnlngenti. But dno mIlia qnlngenti hostinm periSre, L., xxii. 7, 3 ; S500 of the enemy perished. 294. Ordinals. — The Ordinals are used more often in Latin than in English ; thus always in dates : annd ducente- simo qu&rtd, in the year 204, Sometimes they are carelessly used for the cardinals : Qnattnor anni sunt, ex qnO to nOn vldl. It is four years, that I have not seen you {since I saw you), QnSrtns annus est, ex quO t6 nOn vidl. It is the fourth year {four years, going on four years). 295. Distributives. — The distributives are used wher- ever repetition is involved, as in the multiplication table. Bis bXna quot snnti C, N.D,, ii. i8, 49 ; how many are tufice two f Scrlptnm ecnlenm cnm qnlnque pedibus, pnllOs galUnSceOs tris cum temis pedibns nStOs esse, L., xxxii. i, 11 ; a letter was written to say that a colt had been foaled with five feet, (and) three chickens hatched with three feet {apiece). Comparatives and Superlatives. 296. Comparative. — The comparative degree generally takes a term of comparison either with quam, than, or in the Ablative : IgnOrStiO fatflrOmm malQmm Utilior est qnam scientia, C, Div., n. 9, 23 ; ignorance of future evils is better than knowledge {of them). Kihil est virttlte amSbilins, C, Last., 8, 28 ; nothing is more lovahle tha/n virtue, Remarks. — 1. (a) The Abl. is used only when the word with qnam would stand in the Nom. or Ace. (644). Caesar minor 6st j ^ *^ * f- Caksar is younger tham, Pompey. Caesarem pins amSmns, \ ^"^ ^o"^P«i^ I ^^ ^^ve Caesar more than \ PompfiiO, ) Pompey. In the second example the adverb makes the Ablative construction ambiguous, for pills FompfiiO may mean *^more than Pompey does." Hence the comparatiye adverb with the Abl. is avoided Yac%iT«l\i\^TQ^fe. 136 COMPARATIVES. (b) With cases other than Nom. or Ace, qnam is regularly used to avoid ambiguity. Anulls noftrXi plfU quam animlf orOditnr, Sen., Ben,, iii. 15, 3 ; our seals are (217) more trusted than our souls. 2. The Abl. is very common in negative sentences and is used ex- clusively in negative relative sentences. Folybinm seqafimiir, quO n6m8 fait dlligentior, C, Eep., 11. 14, 27 ; let us follow PolybitiSy than whom no one was more careful. 3. Measure of difference is put in the Ablative (403). 4. Qnam is often omitted after pins, amplins, more^ and minns, less, and- the like, without affecting the construction : PlfU quIngentOB colaphte InfrOgit mihl, Teb., Ad., 199 ; he has dealt me more than five hundred boxes on the ear, Spatinm est nOn amplins pednm sflscentOram^CAES., B.C., i. 38, 5 ; the space is not more than (of) six hundred feet. But the normal construction is not excluded : FallU nOn Ifitior pedibnt qnlnqnftgintfi, Caes., B.O,, yii. 19, 1 ; a swamp not broader than fifty feet (or pedfis qalnqnSgintfi). 5. Age may be variously stated ; thus, more than thirty years old may be : 1 . Kfitns plus (quam) trlgintft annOt. 3. Mfiior (quam) trlgintfi annOt nfitna, 2. KStns plOfl trlgintfi annis (rare). 4. Mfiior trlgintfi anniB (nStns). 6. Mfiior trlgintfi annOnim. 297. Standard of Comparison omitted, — When the stand- ard of comparison is omitted, it is supplied : i. By the context ; 2. By the usual or proper standard ; 3. By the opposite. 1. By the context : Solent reges PersSrnm pltlres nxOrSs habSre, Cf, C, Verr., in. 33, 76 ; tlie kings of Persia usually have more wives [than one]. 2. By the proper standard : SenectfU est nfitllrfi loqnficior, C, Cat,M., 16, 55; old age is by nature rather (or too) talkative. 3. By the opposite : QniSsse erit melins, L., in. 48, 3 ; it will be better to be-perfectly, quiet (than to make a disturbance). COMPARATIVES. 1 37 298. Disproportion. — Disproportion is expressed by the comparative with quam pro, than for, and the Ablative; or with quam ut, than that or quam qui, than who, and the Subjunctive : Xinor eaedOs quam prO tantS yiotGrii fait, L., x. 14, 21 ; ths loss was {too) small for so great a victory. Quia nOn inteUegit Canaohl ilgna rigidiOra etie quam ut imitentnr ySri- tSteml C, Br,, 18, 70 ; who does not perceive that Ca/na^hus^ figures are too stiff to imitate the truth {of nature) f Xfiior sniii quam col postit Fortllna noeOre, Oy., M., yi. 195 ; I am too great for Fortune possibly to hurt me, 299. Two Qualities compared. — When two qualities of the same substantive are compared, we find either magis and quam with the positive, or a double comparative : Celer tuns disertaB magis est quam sapiBiis, C, Att,, x. i, 4 ; your (friend) Celer is eloquent rather than wise — more eloquent than wise. ActtiOrem s6 quam OmStiOrem yult, C, Opt. Gen,, 2, ^ \ he wishes to Jk acute rather tha/n ornate, 300. Restriction to the Comparative, — The Latin uses the Comparative more exactly than the English. So regularly when only two objects are compared. KStU mSior, the eldest (of two), the elder; nStU minor, the youngest, the younger. Prior, the first ; posterior, the last. FosteriOrSs oOgitfttiOnSs, at fiiunt, sapientiOrSs solent esse, C, Ph., xii. 2, 6 ; afterthoughts, as the saying is, are u^stmlly the tvisest. Remark. — The same rule applies to the interrogative uter, which of two f {whether f) : Ex duObiis uter dlgnior 1 ez plttribus, qnis dlgnis- simnsl Quint., vii. 4, 21 ; of two, which is the worthier f of more (than two), which is the worthiest f 801. Comparative Strengthened, The comparative is often strength- ened by the insertion of etiam, even; adhtlc, still j mnltO, (Py) much/ longB, far : Dfo etiam clfirius, C, Verr,, in. 75, 175 ; speak even more clearly ! 802. Superlative, — The Latin superlative is often to be rendered by the English positive, especially of persons : Qnlntus Fabins MSzimns, Quintus Fahius the Great. KSzimO impetU mSiOre fbrttlnS, L., xxvui. 36, d ; with great vigor ^ tvith greater luck. 138 PB0N0UN8. 303. Superlative Strengthened. — The superlative is strengthened by mnltO, (by) much; long«, hy far ; yel, even; ttniis, tUms omniam, one ahove all others, PrOtagorSs lophistSi ilUi temporlbni yel mfizixniiB, C, iV^.Z)., i. 23, 63 ; Protagorae, the very greatest sophist in those times. Urbem flnam mihl ainlciiilmam dSoUnfiyl, C, Plane., 41, 97 ; I turned aside from a city ahove all others friendly to me. Quam (with or without a form of posfum) and the superlative is the regular form for as — as possible. Caesar quam aeqnissimO looO potest oastra commttnit, Caes., B.G., v. 49, 7 ; Caesar fortifies a camp in as favorable a position as possible. PRONOUNS. 1. Personal Pronouns. 304. I. The personal Pronoun is usually omitted when it is the subject of a verb ; see 207. 2. The Genitive forms, mei, tui, sui, nostri, vestri, are used mainly as Objective Genitives. MSrcelUnns 80 ficerrimnm tnl dfifSnsOrem fore ostendit, C, Fam., 1. i, 2 ; Marcellinus showed that he would be your keenest defender. Remark. — The Possessive pronouns sometimes are found in place of this Genitive : Vester oOnspectns refidt et reoreat mentem meam, C, Plane, I, 2 ; tJie sight of you refreshes and renews my spirits. " If I be a master, where is my fear ? " Mal., i. 6. 3. The Genitive forms, nostrum and vestrum, are used partitively ; see 364, R. T« ad m6 venire nterqne nostnun eupit, C, Att., xiii. 33, 2 ; each of us two desires that you should come to me. 2. Demonstrative Pronouns. 306. Hie, this (the Demonstrative of the First Person), refers to that which is nearer the speaker, and may mean : 1. The Speaker himself : hic hom6 = ego, Pl., Trin., 11 15. 2. His friends : si ego hOe n(JvI, if I know these men (= my friends, the Gentlemen of the Jury). 3. His subject : hie BapiSns d« quO loquor, C, Ac, 11. 33, 105 ; this (imaginary) wise man of whom I am speaking, 4. Ilis hobby ; h5o Btudiam, this pursuit of mine, of ours. 5. That which has just been mentioned : haec hSoteniui, these things thus far = so much for that. PRONOUNS. 139 6. Very frequently, that which is about to be mentioned r lilii con- dieiOnilniB, on the follomng terms. 7. The current period of time : hic difls, to-day ; haec noz, the night just past ox just coming ; hIc minsii, the current month. 306. Iste, that (of thine, of yours), refers to that which belongs more peculiarly to the Second Person (Demonstra- tive of the Second Person) : Adyenttl tuO ista Bnbsellia YacnifMta Bunt, C, Cat., i. 7, IG ; at your approach the benches in your neighborhood were vacated. 807. Hie, that (the Demonstrative of the Third Person), denotes that which is more remote from the speaker, and is often used in contrast to hic, this. Catalus nOn antXqnO illO mOre sad hOc nostrO firudltus, C, Br., 35, 132 ; Catulus, a cultivated man, not after the old-fashioned standard of a by-gone time (iU5) but by the standard of to-day (hOc). nie may mean : 1. That which has been previously mentioned (often iUe qnidem) : illud quod initio ySbls prOposnl, C, Font., 7, 17 ; that which I propounded to you at first, 2. That which is well known, notorious (often put after the substan- tive) : tflstula ilia, that (notoriovi^) potsherd = institution of ostracism ; iUnd SolOnis, that (famous saying) of Solon*s. 3. That which is to be recalled : iUud imprlmlB mIrSbile, tJiat (which I am going to remind you of) is especially wonderful. 4. That which is expected : nia difls yeniet mea quS Illgubria pOnam, Ov., Tr., iv. 2, 73 ; the day will come when I shall lay aside (cease) my mournful strains. Remarks. — 1. Hic and iUe are used together in contrasts : as, the latter — the former, the former — the latter. (a) When both are matters of indifference the natural signification is observed : hic, the latter ; ille, the former, IgnSvia corpus hebctat, labor flrmat; ilia mSttLram senectntem, hic longam adolflscentiam reddit, Cels. ,1.1; laziness weakens the body, toil strengthens it ; the one (the former) hastens old age, the other (the latter) prolongs youth, (b) When the former is the more important, hic is the former, iUe, the latter : Melior ttltiorqne est certa pSx quam spfirSta Victoria ; haec in nostrS, ilia in deOmm mantl est, L., xxx. 30, 10 ; better and safer is certain pea>ce than hoped for victory; the former is in our hand{s), the latter in the hand{s) of the gods. 140 PROXOUXS. d. Hio ft lilt; lilt •! lilt; Ql* ami flit, this man and (or) thai man = oiM or tyro, VftidlomliOeiIgB«MablItaA«Metillnd; liOe dioO, ntlliM t8 ilgBiim rnHplMO, C, T err., i. 20, 58 ; / fciU not say that this statue teas taken off and thai; (what) I say (is) thiSj that you If ft no statue at ail. 8. The deriTed adverbs retain the personal relations of hlto, iite, iUe : hio, here (where I am) ; hine, hence (from where I am) ; htle, hither (where I am); iatk, there (where von are); illlo, there (where he is), etc. 3. Determinative and Reflexive Pronouns. 808. Is^ ihaty is the determinative pronoun, and serves as the lacking pronoun of the Third Person. It furnishes the regular antecedent of the relative : mhl Yinit ohriam tam puar ; ii mihi lltterSs abi ti reddidit, C, Att., II. I, 1 ; / was met by your servant; he delivered to me a letter from you. Ii minims 9gei mortfUi qjal minimum eapit, Syrus, 286 (Fr.) ; th4»t mortal is in want of least, who wanteth least. Remarks. — 1. Ii, as the antecedent of the relative, is often omitted, chiefly in the Nom., more rarely in an oblique case (619). Bii dat qnl dat eeleriter, Strus, 235 (Fr.) ; Tie gives twice who gives in a trice. Often it has the force of tfiUs (631, i) in this connection : Ego if inm qnl nihil nmqnam mefi potins qnam meOrnm elvinm canaS fSeerim, C, Fam.^ v. 21, 2 ; I am a man never to have done anything for my own sake, rather than for the sake of my fellow-citizens, 2. Ii, with a copulative or adversative particle, is used as he or that in English, for the purpose of emphasis. Such expressions are : et is, atqne is, isqne, and he too, and that too ; neque is, et is nOn, and he not ; and that not ; sed is, hut he, Exempla quaerimns et ea nOn antlqna, C, Yerr., iii. 90, 210 ; we are looking for examples^ and tJwse, too, not of ancient date. 3. Is does not represent a substantive before a Gen., as in the Eng- lish that of. In Latin the substantive is omitted, or repeated, or a word of like meaning substituted. HOn ifidiciO dXseipnlOnun dicere dSbet magister sed dlscipnll magistrl. Quint., n. 2, 13 ; ths master is not to speak according to the judgment of the pupils ; hut the pupils according to that of the master, HtUla est celeritSs qnae possit onm animi celeritste contendere, C, Tusc, I. 19, 48 ; there is no speed that can possibly vie with that of the mind. PBONOUNS. 141 Coelins tribflnal luum iOxtfi TrebOnX sellam oollooSyit, Caes., B.C.y in. 20, 1 ; Coelius placed his chair of office next to that of Trehoniua. Of course hlo, ille, and iste can be used with the Qen. in their proper sense. 309. Eeflexiye. Instead of forms of is, the Reflexive Pronoun sul, sibi, se, together with the Possessive of the Reflexive sans, sna, sutun is used. (See 521.) 1. Regularly when reference is made to the grammatical subject of the sentence. Ipse 16 quisque dlligit quod sibi qnisque oSmi est, C, Last., 21, 80 ; every one loves himself because every one is dear to himself. The subject may be indefinite or (occasionally) impersonal. ContentnxiL suIs rSbni esse mfiTimae snnt divitiae, C, Par., vi. 3, 51 ; to he content with one*8 ovm things {what one hath) is the greatest riches. ^' Pare religion and undeflled is this . . . to keep AimM(r luwpotted from the world/' Jambs, i. 27. 2. Frequently when reference is made to the actual sub- ject (521, R. 2) : Gscolfitur tigrim suns cflstOs, Sen., E.M,, 85, 41 ; her own keeper hisses the tigress {the tigress is kissed by her ovm keeper). This is especially common with snns, which when thus employed has usually its emphatic sense : own, peculiar, proper, 3. Sui, sibi, se are the reflexive of the Infinitive and its equivalents. BOmSnl sul colligendX hostibus faoultfitem nOn relinquunt, Caes., 3,0.^ in. 6, 1 ; the Romans do not leave the enemy a chance to get themselves together, to rally. 86 is also used with prepositions ergS, inter, propter, per in reflexive or emphatic phrases ; as inter s6, among one another, per s6, by itself, 4. Suus is also used in prepositional phrases, especially after cum and inter ; more rarely after in, intrft, and ad. MSgOnem cum clSsse sua in HispSniam mittunt, L., xxiii. 32, 11; they sent Mago toith his fleet to Spain, So the phrases suO tempore, at the right time ; suO looO, at the right place, COmoediae quem flsum in puerls putem suO looO dicam, Quint., i. 8. 7; what I consider to be the good of comedy in the case of boys I will men* tion in th^ proper place. i 142 PRONOUNS. 810. Idem, the same, serves to unite two or more attri- butes or predicates on a person or thing ; it is often to be translated hj at the same time; likewise, also; yet, not- withstanding, CimOn inoidit in eandem invidiam qnam pater inna, Nep., t. 3, 1 ; Cimon fell into the same odium as his father, Diffioilis faoilii, itLcnndns acerbns, es Idem, Mart., xii. 47, 1 ; crabbed {atuJ) kindly f sweet (and) sour, are you at once. Remarks. — 1. When a second attribute is to be added to a substan- tive it is often connected by Idemqne, et Idem, atqne Idem. Vir doctissimns Plato atque Idem graviafimns phUoiophOnun omninm, C, Leg., II. 6, 14 ; Plato, a most learned man, and at the same time weightiest of all the philosophers. 2. The sams a>s is expressed by Idem with qnl, with atqne or Se, with nt, with onm, and poetically with the Dative. See 359, N. 6, 642, 643. TibI mScnm in eMem est pIstrInO yXvendnm, C. , Or,, n. 33, 144 ; you have to live in the same treadmill mth me. 3. Idem cannot be used with ii, of which it is only a stronger form (ia + dem). 311. I. Ipse, self, is the distinctive pronoun, and separates a subject or an object from all others : Ipse fBcI, I myself did it and none other y I alone did it, I did it of my own accord, I am the very man that did it, Knno ipsnm, at this very instant, at this precise moment, Valyae snbitO sS ipsae apernfimnt, C, Div,, i. 34, 74 ; the folding- doors stiddenly opened of their own cuxord. Cats mortnns est annis octOgintS sex ipsIH ante CioerOnem cfinsnlem, C, Br,, 15, 61 ; Cato died just eighty-six years before Cicero* s consulship. Remarks. — 1. Owing to this distinctive character, ipse is often used of persons in opposition to things ; riders in opposition to horses; in- habitants in opposition to the toums which they inhabit ; the master of the house in opposition to his household, etc. Ipse dixit, C, N.D,, i. 5, 10 ; the master said (avro? ^^)* M6 ipsa misit, Pl., Gas,, 790 ; mistress sent me, 2. Et ipse, likewise, as well, is used when a new subject takes an old predicate : Locrl urbs dfisclyerat et ipsa ad PoenOs, L., xxix. 6, 1 ; Locri-city had h'Aemse (as well as the other cities) revolted to the Carthaginians. PRONOUNS. 143 2. Ipse is used to lay stress on the reflexive relation ; in the Nominative when the subject is emphatic, in the Oblique Cases when the object is emphatic. 86 ipse laudat, he (and not another) praises himself. 86 ipsom laudat, he praises himself {&nd not another). Figer ipse sibi obstat, Prov. (Sen., E.M., 94, 28) ; the lazy man stands in his own way, is his own obstacle. Exceptions are common : QuXque aUb eftvit, nOn oavet ipse sibi, Ov., A. A,, i. 84 ; and he who cared for others, cares not for himself, 4. Possessive Pronouns. 312. The Possessive Pronouns are more rarely used in Latin than in English, and chiefly for the purpose of con- trast or clearness. MantlB lays et cSnS, C, Or., 11. 60, 24G ; wash (your) hands and dine, Praedia mea ttl possidfls, ego aUSnfi xnisericordiS yXvO, C, Rose. Am., 50, 145 ; you are ifi possession of my estates, {while) I live on the charity of others. Remarks. — 1. Observe the intense use of the Possessive in the sense of property, peculiarity, fitness : suum esse, to belong to one*s self, to be on£s own man. Tempore tuO ptLgnSstl, L., xxxviii. 45, 10 ; you have fought at your oum time (= when you wished). HOe honOre m6 adffioistis annO meO, C, Leg.Agr., 11. 2, 4 ; you visited me with this honor in my own year (= the first year in which I could be made consul). 2. On the use of the Possessive Pronouns for the Gen., see 364. 5, Indefinite Pronouns. 313. Qnldam means oney a, a certain one; the speaker may know but he does not tell. In the Plural, quidam means some, sundry, without emphasis. Interea muUer quaedam commigrSvit hILc, Ter., And,, 69 ; meanwhile a certain woman took up her quarters here. Remarks. — 1. With an adjective quidam often heightens by adding vagueness and mystery. (Gr. ri5.) Est quOdam inerSdibiU rObore animi, C, Mil., 37, 101 ; really he is en- dowed with a certain (strange, indescribable) strength of mind that is past belief. 144 PRONOUNS. 2. Qnldam is often nsed with or without qoAii, S., i. 2, 31 ; in- creased be thou in virtue = heaven speed thee in tKi^ high, career. 148 APPOSITION. 2. VietONt reditmnt may mean, tJie conquerors returned, or, tJiey re- lumed conquerors; Mem, the same, is similarly used. Udem abennt qui Yflneraat, C, Fin,, it. 3, 7 ; they go away just as they had come (literally, the same persons as they had come). 8. Predicative Attribution and Apposition are often to be turned into an abstract substantive : Dflfendl rem ptlblioam adnlfitoSni, nOn dfiteram senex, C, Ph,, u. 46, 118 ; / defended the state in my youth, I will not desert her in my old age. So with prepositions : Ante CieerOnem oOninlem, lefore the consulship of Cicero ; ante urbem oonditam, "before the building of the city. 4. Do not confound the ** as " of apposition with the " as "(= as if) of comparison — ut, qnaiii tamqnam, ileut, yelut (602, 642). (5) 6. The English idiom often uses the adverb and adverbial ex- pressions instead of the Latin adjective : so in adjectives of inclination and disinclination, knowledge and ignorance, of order and position, of time and season, and of temporary condition generally : LibSns, unth pleasure ; yolSns, vnllingijy) ; nOUns, unwiUing{ly) ; in- Yltus, against one^s will ; prftdBns, aware ; imprUdSns, unawares ; scifinB, knowingQy); prXmns, prior, first ; ttltimuB, last; medim, in, cibout the middle ; hodiemus, to-day ; mftttLtlnus, in the momitig ; freqnins, fre- quent{ly); subllmis, aloft; tOtns, wholly; sOliii, fLnns, alone; and many others. Ego eum ft m6 invXtlBsimiiB dlmbl, C, Fam., xni. 63, 1 ; I dismissed him most unwillingly, PltUi hodiS boni ftcl imprndSns quam scifins ante hnno diem umquam, Ter., Hec, 880 ; I have done more good to-day unawares than I have ever done Jcnotvingly before, Adcnrrit, mediam mnlierem compleotitnr, Ter., And,, 133 ; he runs up, puts his arms about the woman's waist, VespertlniiB pote tSctnm, H., Ep., i. 6, 20 ; seek thy dwelling at even- tide. SOU hoc contingit sapientl, C, Par,, y. i, 34 ; this good Itick happens to the ufise man alone = it is only the toise man who has this good luck, 7. Carefully to be distinguished are the uses of prXmus, and the ad- verbs prlmum, first, for the first time, and prImO, at first, PrXmnm means first in a series ; prImO, first in a contrast. Primus sententiam dixit, C, Ph., x. 3, 6 ; he was the first to express his opinion, SamothrSciam tS prlmum, post Thasom oontnlisti, C, Pis., 36, 89 ; you betook yourself to Samothrace first, afterwards to Thasos. ImprobOmm facta prImO sflspIoiO Insequitor, tum accflsfiter, C, Fin., i, 16, 50 ; the deeds of the reprobate a/re attacked at first by suspicion, then b^ the public prosecutor. EXTEENAL CHANGE — ACCUSATIVE. 1 49 B. 1. Multiplication of the Predicate. 326. The Multiplication of the Predicate requires no fur- ther rules than those that have been given in the general doctrine of Concord. 2. Qualification of the Predicate. 827. The Qualification of the Predicate may be regarded as an External or an Internal change : I. External change : combination with an object. I. Direct Object, Accusative. 2. Indirect Object, Dative. II. Internal change : combination with an attribute which may be in the form of 1. The Genitive Case. 3. Preposition with a case. 2. The Ablative. 4. An Adverb. I, External Change, Accusative. 328. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object. 1. (a) The object may be contained in the verb (Inner Object, Object Effected) : DeuB mnndum crefiyit, Ood made a creation — the universe, (b) Akin to this is the Accusative of Extent : i rSctS oOnscientifi trfivennxn nngnem nOn oportet disofidere, C, Att., XIII. 20, 4 ; one ought not to swerve a nailbreadth from a right con- science. Decern annOe (TrOia) oppUgnSta est, L., y. 4, 11 ; ten years was Troy besieged. M&ximam partem lacte ylTont, Caes., B.G,, iv. i, 8 ; for the most part they live on milk, 2. The object may be distinct from the verb (Outer Object, Object Affected) : Beni mnndum gnbernat, Ood steers the universe. 1 50 ACCUSATIVE. DIRECT OBJECT (Inner and Outer). (329) 880. Active Transitive Verbs take the Accusative case : SOmTiliu Urbem BOmam condidit, C/. C, Div., i. 17, 80 ; Romulus f minded the City of Rome. (Object Effected.) • MSns regit oorpiu, C, Rep., vi. 24, 26 ; mind governs body, (Object Affected.) Remark. — Many verbs of Emotion which are intrans. in English are trans, in Latin, as : dolttre, to grieve {for) ; dBfpttrire, to despair (of) ; horrSre, to shudder (at) ; mlrfirl, to wonder {at) ; ridttre, to laugh (aQ. HonOrfls dflspSrant, C, Gat,, 11. 9, 19 ; they despair of humors {give them up in despair), COnsda mfins rOctI Ffiznae mendfida rlsit, Ov., J\, it. 311 ; con>scious of right, her soul (but) laughed {at) the falsehoods of Rumor, 831. Verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, circTim, con, in, inter, ob, per, praeter, sub, subter, super, and trans, when they become transitive, take the Accusative : All with circum, per, praeter, tr&ns, and subter. Many with ad, in, and super. Some with ante, con, inter, ob, and sub. See 347. Pythagorfis PenSmm magOs adiit, Q,, Fin,, y. 29, 87 ; Pythagoras applied to {consulted) the Persian magi, Stella Venerif antegreditnr sOlem, C, K,D., 11. 20, 53 ; the star Venus goes in advance of the sun. Onmfls Domitiiim circimuiiBtant, Caes., B,C,, i. 20, 5 ; all surround Domitius. Earn, Bl opns esse yidsbitur, ipse conYeniam, C, Fam,, v. 11, 2 ; I will go to see her, myself ^ if it shall seem expedient. Conylvla emu patre nOn inlbat, C, Rose. Am., 18, 52 ; he would not go to "banquets vrith his father, Fretum, quod Kaupactum et PatrSs interfluit, L., xxvii. 29, 9 ; the frith that flows between Naupactus and Patrae, Alexander tertiO et trIcflsimO annO mortem obiit, C, Ph., y. 17, 48 ; Alexander died in his thirty-third year. Caesar omnem agmm PleSnnm percurrit, Caes., B.C., i. 15, 1 ; Caesar traversed rapidly all the Picenian district. Popnlns solet dIgnOe praeterire, C, Plane., 3, 8 ; the people is wont to pass by the worthy. EpamlnOndSi poenam subiit, Cf. Kep., xy. 8, 2 ; Epaminondas sub- mitted to the punishment. ACCUSATIVE. 151 Crfmlnmn vim subterftigere nfLllO modO potent, C, Verr»y i. 3, 8 ; he could in no way evade the force of the charges, KgrntnT rnlnSs mflrl BuperySdebant, L., xxxn. 24, 5 ; the Romans marched over the ruins of the wall. Crasros EuphrStem nfillfi belli caaeS trSiuditi Cf. C, Fin.^ iii. 22, 75 ; Crassus crossed the Euphrates tvithout any cause for war. Remarks. — 1. If the simple verb is trans., it can take two Accusa- tives : Equitam mSgnaiu partem fliimen trfiificit, Caes., B,C.,i. 55, 1 ; Ae threw a great part of ihe cavalry across the river, 2. "With many of these verbs the preposition may be repeated ; but never oiroam : COpiSs trfiificit Shodannm, or trSns Bhodanum, he threw his troops across the Rhone, 3. Sometimes a difference of signification is caused by the addition of the preposition ; so, adlre ad aliquem, to go to a man ; adire aliquem, to apply to (to consult) a man, INNER OBJECT. 332. Any verb can take an Accusative of the Inner Object, when that object serves to define more narrowly or to explain more fully the contents of the verb. 333. I. Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives are often used to define or modify the substantive notion that lies in the verb. XenophOn eadem ferS peocat, C, N,D,f i. 12. 31 ; Xenophon makes very much the same mistakes. With trans, verbs an Ace. of the person can be employed besides : DbcipTilOs id llnum moneO, Quint., ii. 9, 1 ; I give pupils this one piece of advice. Remarks. — 1. The usage is best felt by comparing the familiar English it after intrans. verbs, **to walk it, to foot it," etc., where "it" represents the substantive that lies in "walk, foot," etc, 2. In many cases the feeling of the case is lost to the consciousness, so especially with the interrogative quid, which has almost the force of cfLr. Quid ndfls t what (laughter) are you laughing = what means your laughter f Why do you laugh f 2. Cognate Accusative. — When the dependent word is of the same origin or of kindred meaning with the verb, it is called the Cognate Accusative, and usually has an attribute. Xlmm atqne Insoltum BomniSvI somniom, Pl., Rvd., 597 ; a marvel- lous and uncanny dream Tve dreamed. 1 52 ACCUSATIVE. Remark. — After the analogy of the Cognate Ace. are many phrase- ological usages, such as rem eertire, to fight a ease; feadu telra, to mctke a treaty (compare, to strike a bargain) ; illi rwpondttra, to render an opinion ; eamam Tinoere, to win a ease, etc. Also the phrases with Ire : exiequili fire, to attend a funeral; lailtiii fire, to deny, etc. Accusative of Extent. The Accusative of Extent has to do with Degree, Space, or Time. 334. The Accusative of Extent in Degree is confined to neuter adjectives and pronouns used substantively, mnltmn, plus, tanttun, qaantum, etc. 81 m« amSs tantnm quantum profeetO amis, C, Att., 11. 20, 5 ; if you love me as much as in fact you do love me, Remakks. — 1. The number of adjectives and pronouns so used is large, and in many cases the form is felt more as an adverb than as a substantive. 2. Ilere belong the adverbial Accusatives mSgnam, etc., partem, to a great extent, in great part ; perhaps meam, etc., vicem, on my side, in my turn, in my stead, 336. The Accusative of Extent in Space is used properly only with words that involve a notion of space. When space is not involved in the governing word the idea of extent is given by the use of per, through. TrabSs, dlstantSs inter ■« bInOe pedfls, in solO coUoeantur, Cabs., B.O,, VII. 23, 1 ; beams two feet apart are planted in the ground. PhoebidSs iter per ThSbSi ftcit, Nep., xvi. i, 2 ; Phoebidas marched through Thebes, Mllitfls aggerem iStum pedfls trecentOs trlgintfi altum pedfls octOgintS oxstrOxOrunt, Caes., B.O., vii. 24, 1 ; the soldiers raised an embankment three hundred and thirty feet wide (and) eighty feet high. Remarks. — 1. The adjectives in most common use with this Accusa- tive are longus, long, istus, tDidCy altus, deep, high, 2. AVith abesse and dlstSre, an Abl. of Measure may also be used : MIlibuB pasBUum quattuor et viginti abesse. Gabs., ^.6^., i. 41, 5 ; to be twenty -four miles from. . . . Noteworthy also is ab (ft) : ab mllibus passuum duSbus, Cabs., B, G., ii. 7, 8 ; two miles off. ACCUSATIVE, 153 336. The Accusative of Extent in Time, with or without per, answers the question. How long f DnodequadrSgintft annOs tyranniui SyrScflsSnOmm fait Dion^iinB, C, Tu8c. , V. 20, 57 ; thirty-eight years was Dionysius tyrant of Syractise. Llldl per decern diss faotX rant, C, Cat., iii. 8, 20 ; games were per^ formed for ten days. Sedet aetemnmqne sedSbit Inftllx Thfteiu, V., A,, vi. 617 ; there sits and shall forever sit unhappy Theseus, Remarks. — 1. In giving definite numbers with iam, iam din, iam dfldum, etc., the Latin often employs the ordinal where the English prefers the cardinal. Compare the Ablative of Measure (403). HithridStAi annum iam tertium et vIcAumnm rSgpiat, C, Imp., 3, 7 ; Mithridates has been (230) reigning now going on twenty-three years, 2. Per with the Ace. is frequently used like the Abl. of Time Within Which. Per ilia tempera = illlB temporibns, in those times. So especially with the negative : NtQla r6s per trienninm iUdicSta est, C, Verr,, i. 5, 13 ; no matter was decided during {in) three years, 3. The Dating Point may be given by abhinc, ago, which usually precedes the Accusative. Demosthenes abhinc annOs prope trecentOs fait, C, Div,, 11. 57, 118 ; Demosthe7ies lived nearly three hundred years ago. 4. NStos, old {born), may also take Accusative of Extent. For other constructions see 296, r. 5. Puer decem annOs nStos est, the boy is ten years old. 5. Here belong the colloquial phrases id temporis, at that time, id aetStis, at that age. Accusative of the Local Object. Terminal Accusative. 337. Names of Towns and small Islands, when used as limits of Motion Whither, are put in the Accusative. So also rus, into the country, domum, domds, home. Hiss! legStl AthenSs snnt, L., in. 31, 8 ; envoys were sent to Athens. LStOna cQnfOgit D6lnm, Cf. C, Verr., i. 18, 48 ; Latmia took refuge in Delos. Ego rlis IbO atqne ibi manSbO, Ter., Eun., 216 ; J shall go to the country and stay there. InnnmerSbilSs pldlosophl nnmqnam domum revertenmt, 0., Tusc, v. 37, 107 ; irmumerahle philosophers never returned home. 154 ACCUSATIVE. Remarks. — 1. Countries and large Islands require prepositions, such as : in, into ; ad, to ; vemui, -ward ; in Chraeoiam proflolioX, to set out for Greece. 2. When urbem, cxty^ or oppidnm, toum, precedes the name of the city or town, the preposition in or ad is prefixed ; if orbem or oppidnm follows, in or ad may be omitted : in (ad) oppidnm Cirtam, to, in (cti) ths town (of) Cirta, When nrbom or oppidnm is qualified by an adjective, it regularly fol- lows the name of the town, and has the preposition : Ingnrtha Thalam pervfinit in oppidnm mftgnnm et opnlentnm, S., lug., 75, 1 ; Jugurtha arrived at Thala, a great and wealthy town. 3. Ikminm, with a possessive pronoun, or Gen., may mean house as well as home, and accordingly may or may not have in before it : domnm meam, or, in domnm meam, to my house ; domnm Fompfiil, or, in domnm FompSil, to Pompey's house ; also domnm ad FompSinm. Other- wise : in mftgnificam domnm venire, to come into a grand house. 4. Ad means to the neighborhood of, often before, of military op- erations : ad Xntinam, to the neighborhood {siege of) Mutina (Modena). 5. The simple Ace. will suffice even for extent : Omnia ilia mOnidpia, qnae sunt 5 Yib^e Bmndisinm, C, Plane. , 41, 97 ; all the free towns from Vibo to Brundisium. 6. Motion to a place embraces all the places mentioned : Fhalara in sinnm Xfiliacnm prOcetMerat, L., xxxt., 43, 8 ; he had ad- vanced to Phalara on the Maliac Gulf. Tarentnm in Italiam InferiSrem profiolBCl, to set out for Tarentum in Lower Italy. 7. The poets and later prose writers occasionally omit the preposi- tion also before Countries and large Islands. OUTER OBJECT. Accusative of Respect. 338. The Accusative of the object aif ected is sometimes used with a passive or intransitive verb, or an adjective. It is called the Accusative of Respect f sometimes the Greek Accusative. 1. Definite : The Accusative of the part affected (chiefly poetic). FercuBsa noyfi mentem formldine, Y., G., iv. 857 ; her mind stricken {stricken in her mind) with a new dread. SanciuB pectus. Quint., e^. 3, 17 ; ^^breast-wounded." 2. Indefinite : cStera, alia, reliqna, omnia, plSraqne, cUncta ; in other respects, in all respects, in most respects. CStera adsentior CrassO, C, Or., i. 9, 85 ; in all other points I agree with Crassus. Omnia XercnriO similis, V., A., rv. 558 ; in all respects like unto |. Mercury. ACCUSATIVE. 155 DOUBLE ACCUSATIVE (Inner and Outer). 339. Active verbs signifying to Ask, Demand, Teach, and Conceal take two Accusatives, one of the Person, and the other of the Thing. PtUiOnem qnendam SOcratSs interrogat quaedam geOmetrica, C, Tusc, I. 24, 57 ; Socrates asks an urchin sundry questions in geometry. CaesSr AednOs framentnm flSgitftbat, Caes., ^.^., i. 16, 1 ; Caesar kept demanding com from the Aedui. Quid nunc t6, asine, UtterSs dooeam? C, Pis,, 30, 73 ; why should (265) I now give you a lesson in literature, you donkey f NOn te cSlfiyl sermOnem Ampil, C, Fam,, 11. 16, 8; I did not keep you in the dark about my talk with Ampius, Bemarks. — 1. The expressions vary a good deal. Observe : This then is not the only way, FQscO, I claim, and flSgitO, For it is also right to say, And always pet9, pOstulO, DocSre and cClSre d6, Take aliqnid ab aliqnO, InterrogSre d6 quS r6. While qoaerO takes ez, ab, d6, qnO. Adherbal SOxnam legStOs mXserat, qui senfitimi doofirent d6 caede frfitris, S., lug,, 13, 3 ; Adherbal had sent envoys to Rome to inform the senate of the murder of his brother. Aquam fi pflmice nunc pOstulSs, Pl., Pers,, 41 ; you are now asking water of a pumice-stone (blood of a turnip). 2. With doceO the Abl. of the Instrument is also used : doofire fidibiiB, equO, to teach the lyre, to teach riding ; with 6radlre, the Abl., or Abl. with in. The Participles doctns and emdltiiB generally take the Abl. : doctus GraeclB Utterto, a good Grecian. 3. With the Passive cSlSrI, we find either : aIiqiiidm6c61fitar,some/^m^ is being concealed from me ; or, c6lor d6 aliqnS rB, J am kept in the dark about something. 4. The Passive of docOre is usually dlsoere, to learn. 340. Verbs of Naming, Making, Taking, Choosing, Showing, may have two Accusatives of the same Person or Thing : Iram bene Ennins initinm dixit InsSniae, C, Tusc., iv. 23, 52 ; well did Ennius call anger the beginning of madness, Ancnm Xftrdnm rfigem popoliiB crefivit, L., i. 32, 1 ; the people made Ancus Marcius king, Cat9 Yalerinm Flaoonm habnit ooUfigam, Cf, Nep., xxiv. i, 2 \ Caio had Valerius Flaccus (as) colleague. 156 ACCUSATIVE. Athtaiflniilroa Pfthia praaoipit at Kiltiadem libl imperitOrem idmarent, Nep., I. I, 3 ; tfie Pythia iimtructed the Athenians to take Miltiadea (as) their commander. PrMfti M earn qui mihl ef oOgnitu, C, Fam., i. 6, 2 ; show yourself the man that I know you to he. Remarks. — 1. The Double Ace. is turned into the Double Nom, with the Passive (206). SaddO, / render, is not used in the Passive, but, instead thereof, 110, / become, HabeO, with two Accusatives, commonly means to have; in the sense of hold, regard, other turns are used ; usually pr5. Utmm pro ancUUL m6 habfii an prO fUift 1 Pl., Pers., 341 ; do you look upon me as a maid-servant or as a daughter 9 Similarly habere servOrnm locO, (in) nnmerO deOnim, to regard as slaves, as gods, 2. With verbs of Taking and Choosing the end or purpose is indi- cated by the Dat. or ad with Accusative. SOmulni treoenKta armltOs ad cILitOdiani corporis habnit, L., i. 15, 8 ; Romulus had three hundred armed men as a body-guard, ACCUSATIVE AS A GENERAL OBJECTIVE CASE. (341-2) 343. I. The Accusative is used in Exclamations : M9 miienun, C, Fam,, xiv. i, 1 ; poor me / M9 caeenm qnl haec ante nOn yiderim, C, Ait,, x. 10, 1 ; blind me f not to have seen all this before. So in Exclamatory Questions : QnO mihi fortlinam, si nOn ooncfiditor Utll II., Fp., i. 5, 12 ; what (is the object of) fortune to me if Fm not allowed to enjoy it f The Interjections heu, alas ! 6, oh ! ^ro, for, are sometimes used. Hen ni6 miflenun I Ter., Ph., 187 ; Alas ! poor me / miserSs bominum mentfis, pectora caeca, Lucb., ii. 14 ; oh, the wretched minds of men, oh, the blind hearts ! Pro denm fldem, C, Tusc, y, 16, 48 ; for heaven*s sake ! So, in apposition to a sentence, see 324. Hem ABK. — ^Ecoe, behold ! takes only the Nom. in classical Latin ; so usually 6n, lo ! 2. The Accusative with the Infinitive is used : {a) In Exclamations. (See 534.) \h) As an Object. (See 527.) (c) As a Subject. (See 535.) DATIVE. 157 DATIVE. 344. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object, and always involves a Direct Object, which may be expressed in the Accusative case or contained in the verb itself. Tib! ezercitam patria prO s6 dedit, C, PA., xiii. 6, 14 ; your country gave you an army for its oum defence. N6mS errat Unl sib!, Sen., E,M,^ 94, 54 ; no one errs (makes mis- takes) to {for) himself alone. Dative with Transitive Verbs. 345. The Indirect Object is put in the Dative with Tran- sitive verbs, which already have a Direct Object in the Accusative. Translation to, for, from. This Accusative becomes the Nominative of the Passive. The Dative remains unchanged. Active Form : To : Facile oninfis, cum valemus, rflota oOnsilia aegrOtIs damns, Tee., And. , 309 ; readily all of ua, when well, give good coufisel to the sick. For : I^angam tOnsOrl crtbra manHsque simul, Mart., xi. 58, 10 ; rd break the barber's legs for him mitor aliquem, / accompany a man ; comitor alicul, I act as com^ pa?non to a man; praastOlor alicaX (better) or aUqnem, I wait for. DATIVE. 159 3. Some words with meaning like to the above take the Ace. ; the most notable are : aeqnSre, to he equal; decSre {to distinguish) ^ to be becoming ; dfifioere, to be wanting ; dSlectfire, to please ; invfire, to be a help ; inbfire, to order ; laedere, to injure ; and vetfire, to forbid, Aequfire and deficere have also the Dative. Earn pictHram imitsti sunt nrnltl, aequSvit nSmS, Pun., N,H.y xxxY. II, 126 ; that style of painting many have imitated, none equalled. FOrma virOs neglficta decet, Ov., A. A., i. 509 ; a careless beauiy is becoming to men. M6 difis defidat, Gf. C, Verr., 11. 21, 52 ; the day would fail me. PortSs forttLna adinvat, Ter., Ph.^ 203 ; fortune favors the brave. Dative with Verbs Compounded with Prepositions. 347. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante, con, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, and saper, take the Dative, especially in moral relations. Transitive Verbs have an Accusative case besides. F16b6s cUncta comitils adfait, C, Plane,, 8, 21 ; the entire commonalty was present at the election, Omnis sSnsiis hominum nrnltO antecellit sensibiu bSstifimin, C, N.D., II. 57, 145 ; every sense of man is far superior to the senses of beasts, Ennins equi fortis senecttltl comparat snam, C, Cat.M., 5, 14 ; Ennius compares his {old age) to the old age of a gallant steed. Imminent dno r6gS8 tOtX Aiiae, C, Imp,, 5, 12 ; two kings are menaces to all Asia, Interes oOnsilils, C, Att,, xiv. 22, 2 ; you are in their cov/nailsy are privy to their plans, Figer ipse sibl obstat, Sen., E.M,, 94, 28 ; the lazy man stands in his own way. OmnibiiB DruidibiiB praeest tUrns, Caes., B,G,, vi. 13, 8 ; at the head of all the Druids is one man, Anatnm Ova galllnis saepe snppQnimns, C, N,D,, 11. 48, 124 ; we often put ducks' eggs under hens (for them to hatch). Neqne dSesse neqne snperesse rel pUblicae volO, C. (Pollio), Fam,, X. 33, 5 ; no life that is not true to the state, no life that outlives the staters — that is my motto, Kemares. — 1. The Dat. is found, as a rule, only when these verbs are nsed in a figurative sense. In a local sense the preposition is usually employed, except in poetry and later prose. So incnmbere in gladinm, C, Inv., n. 51, 154, to fall upon one^s sword, (2, 3, 4) 5. Some trans, verbs compounded with d6 and ez (rarely with ab) sometimes take the Dative of Separatioii \ ^e ^4^, ^A« l6o DATIVE. Dative with Verbs of Givingr and Puttinfir- 348. A few verbs, chiefly of Giving and Putting, take a Dative with an Accusative, or an Accusative with an Abla- tive, according to the conception. Praedam mllitibiiB dOnat, Caes., B.O., vii. ii, 9 ; he presents tJhe booty to the soldiers. But Bnbrinm oorOnfi dOnfiitl, C, Verr., in. 80, 185 ; tlum didst present Bubrius with axroton, Nfitfira oorpns animO drcnmdedit, Sen., ^.itf., 92, 13 ; Nature has put a body around the mind. But Dans anlTmiin drotundedit oorpore, Cf, C, Tim,f 6, 20 ; Ood has surrounded the mind with a body. Dative of Possessor. 349. Esse, to he, with the Dative, is commonly translated by the verb to have : ContrOvenia mihi fait com aYuncnlO tuO, C, Fin,, iii. 2, 6 ; / had a debate with your uncle. An nefcls longSs rfigilms etse mantis 1 Ov.^'Her,, xvi. 166 ; or perhaps you do not know that kifigs have lotig arms f Remarks. — 1. The predicate of esse, with the Dat., is translated in the ordinary manner : Caesar amicus est mihl, Caesar is a friend to me (amicus mens, mt friend, friend of mine). 2. The Dat. is never simply equivalent to the Genitive. With the Dat. the Possession is emphatic ; with the Gen. the Possessor is em- phatic. The Gen. is the permanent Possessor, or owner ; the Dat. is the temporary Possessor. The one may include the other : Latlnl concfidnnt SOmam caput LatiO esse, Cf. L., viii. 4, 5 ; the Latins concede that Latium has its capital in Rome. (Latil : that Latium's capital is Rome). 3. Possession of qualities is expressed by esse with in and the Abl., by inesse with Dat. or with in, or by some other turn : Puit mirificus in CrassO pudor, C, Or., i. 26, 122 ; Crassus had a marvellous modesty. CunOn habfibat satis eioquentiae, Nep., v. 2, 1 ; Cimon had eJoqueyice enough. 4. Abesse and dSesse, to be wanting, to fail, take also the Dat. of Possessor. 5. The Dat. of the person is regular with the phrases nOmen est, cOg- nOmen est, etc. Ilere the name is regularly in the Nom. in apposition to nOmen ; occasionally in the Dative. FOns aquae dulcis, cul nOmen Arethtlsa est, C, Terr., iv. 53, 118 ; a fountain of sweet water named Arethusa. HGmen ArctflrO est mibl, Pl., Hud., 5 ; my name is Arcturus. DATIVE. l6l Dative of Personal Interest. 350. The Dative is used of the person in whose honor, or interest, or advantage, an action takes place, or the reverse {Dativiis Commodi et Incommodl) : COnsorrexisBe omnSs L^sandrd dlenntur, C, Cat. M., i8, 63 ; all are said to have risen up together in honor of I/ysander, DeO nostra altfiria fOmanti Y., ^c, i. 43 ; our altars smoke in honor of the god. Ethical Dative. 351. The Ethical Dative indicates special interest in the action. It may be called the Dative of Feeling, and its use is confined to the personal pronouns {Datlvus Ethicus). £co6 tibi SebOsns! C, Att., 11. 15 ; here^s your Sehosus ! Ttl mihl istliiB andfidam dOfendial C, Verr,, in. 91, 213 ; do you de- fend me (to my face) that felloto's audacity f *■'' She^s a civil modest wife, one (I tell you) that will not miss you morning nor evening prayer."— Suaks., Merry WiveSy 11. 2, 201. Dative- of Reference. 352. This indicates the person in whose eyes the state- ment of the predicate holds good {Datlvus ludicantis). Tit mihl dfifOnnis, sic tibi mSgnificus, Tag., H.^ xii. 37; to me a monster ^ to yourself a prodigy of splendor, Qnlntia fOrmOsa est nrnltls, Cat., 86, 1 ; Quintia is a beauty in the eyes of many. 353. Noteworthy is the use of this Dative in combination with par- ticiples. VBre aestimantX, L., xxxvir. 58, 8 ; to one whose judgment was true, HOC est oppidnm primiim TliessaUae venientibns ab SpIrO, Caes. , B.C., III. 80 ; this is the first tourn of Thessaly to those coming (as you come) from Epirus, Dative of the Agrent. 354. The Dative is used with Passive Verbs, in prose chiefly with the Perfect Passive, to show the interest which the agent takes in the result. Hibf rSs tOta prOvIsa est, C, Ferr., iv. 42, 91 ; I have had the whole matter provided for. Col nOn sunt andltae Bemosthenis vigiliael C, Tusc, iv. 19, 44 ; ^0 whom are not Demosthenes* long watchings a familiar liearsa'y ? n l62 DATIVE. 355. The agent of the Gerund and Gerundive is put in the Dative, at all periods. Dflfpfiranda tibi talvfi oonoordia locni, Jvv., vi, 231 ; you must despair of harmony while Mother-in-law^ s alive. Kemark. — To avoid ambiguity, especially when the verb itself takes the Dat., the Abl. with ab (S) is employed : Clyibus fi vSblJB oOnsulendnm, C, Imp.f 2, 6 ; t?ie interest of the citi- zens must he consulted by you. Dative of the Object For Which. 356. Certain Verbs take the Dative of the Object For Which (to what end), and often at the same time a Dative of the Personal Object For Whom, or To Whom. NSminl mens adventiiB labOrl ant sttxnptol fait, C, Yerr.^ i. 6, 16 ; to no one was my arrival a burden or an expense. Habere quaettnl rem pflblicam turpe eft, C, OjT., n. 22, 77 ; it is base to have the state for &ne*s exchequer. Dative with Derivative Substantives. 357. A few derivative substantives take the Dative of their primi- tives : Iflstitia est obtemperStiO ISgibus, C, licg.y 1. 15, 42; justice is obedience to the laws. Local Dative. 358. The Dative is used in poetry to denote the pla^e whither. It caelO clSmorqne yimm clangorqne tubSrum, V., ^., xi. 192 ; mounts to high Heaven warriors^ shout and trumpets' blare. Dative with Adjectives. 359. Adjectives of Likeness, Fitness, Friendliness, Near- ness, and the like, with their opposites, take the Dative : Canis similis lup5 est, C, N.D., 1. 35, 97 ; the dog is like unto the wolf. CastrlB idOnens Iocob, Oaes., B,0., yi. 10, 2 ; a place suitable for a camp. 9tile est reX pflblicae nObilfis liominfis esse dXgnOe mfiiOribus sols, C, Sest., 9, 21 ; it is to the advantage of the state that men of rank should de worthy of their ancestors. GENITIVE. 163 Yir mihi amIoissiiiiiiB, Fabridui, C, Seat., 35, 75; my very great frieiid, FabriciiLS, Onml aetftti mors eet oommtlniB, Cf. C, Cat.M,, 19, 68 ; deathia cmnmon to every time of life. ProxamiiB sun egomet mihl, Ter., And.^ 636 ; myself am nearest tome. Testis id dldt qnod illl causae mSzime est aliennm, C, Case, 9, 24 ; the witness says what is especially damaging to that case (side). Remarks. — 1, Many adjectives which belong to this class are used also as substantives, and as such are construed with the Genitive : ajnloxM f friend ; aeqoSlis, contemporary ; cQgnfitns, kinsman ; oommfUiis, common; oontrSrins, opposite; pfir, match; proprins, peoUlifiris, own^ peculiar ; similis, like (**we ne'er shall look upon his like again"). nie, coins pancOs parSs hMC clvitSs tnlit, C, Pis., 4, 8 ; (^ was) a man few of whose peers the state hath home, 2. The object toward which is expressed by the Ace. with in, er^ adversni : Manlini fait sevfims in filinm, C, Off., lu. 31, 112; Mardius was severe toward his son. M9 esse sdt s6s6 er^ benivolnm, Pl., Capt., 350 ; he knows that lam kindly disposed toward him, 3. The object for which may be expressed by the Ace. with ad, to : HomS ad nfUlam rem tltilis, C, Off., ni. 6, 29 ; a good-for-nothing fellow. This is the more common construction with adjectives of Fitness. II. Internal Change, Genitive. 360. I. The Genitive Case is the case that fills out or com- pletes the meaning of the word with which it is construed. It may be defined as the Case of the Complement (compled, T fill out). The chief English representatives of the Genitive are : (a) The Possessive case : domns rfigis, the king^s palace. (b) The Objective case with of: domns rSgis, t?ie palace of the king. (c) Substantives used as adjectives or in composition : arber abietis, fir-tree. Remarks. — 1. Other prepositions than of are not unfrequently used : Patriae qnis ezsnl s« qnoqne fOgit ? R., 0., 11. 16, 19 ; what exile from his country ever fled himself as well f BoiOmm trinmphi spem coUegae rellqnit, L., xxxiii. 37, 10 ; he left the hope of a triumph over the Boii to his collea^ut. 164 GENITIVE. 2. An abstract substantive with the Gen. is often to be translated as an attribute : Yeml temperis snftvitfis, C, CaLM., 19, 70 ; the sweet spring-time. Fontium gelidae perennitfttM, C, N,D., 11. 39, 98 ; cool springs that never fail. And, on the other hand, the predicative attribute is often to be translated as an abstract substantive with of: Ante BOmam oonditam, before the founding of Rome. (325, r. 3.) Notice also hlo mettui, this fear = fear of this, and kindred expres- sions. 2. The Genitive is employed : I. and II. Chiefly as the complement of Substantives and Adjectives. III. Occasionally as the complement of Verbs. I. GENITIVE WITH SUBSTANTIVES. Adnominal Genitive. Apposltive Genitive, or Genitive of Specification. 361. The Genitive is sometimes used by way of Apposi- tion or Explanation, thus : 1. Appositiondl Genitive. — Genitive after such words as, v8r, expres- sion ; nOmen, name^ noun ; yerbnm, word^ verb ; rSs, thing, etc. NOmen amlcitiae, C, i^m., 11. 24, 78 ; the name friendship. 2. Explanatory (Epeocegetical) Genitive, — Genitive after such words as geniiB, class ; vitinm, vice ; culpa, faulty etc, Yirttltfis oontinentiae, gravitStiii iflstitiae, fidel, C, Mur,, 10, 23 ; the virtues of self-control , earnestness, justice^ honor. Possessive Genitive, or Genitive of Property. 362. The Person to whom ^ thing belongs is put in the Genitive. This is called the Possessive Genitive and is often parallel with the adjective. BomiiB regis = domns rSgia, the palace of the king, the hinges palace = the royal palace ; donrns fiins, his house. Remarks. — 1. The Possession in the First and Second Person (and in the Reflexive) is indicated by the Possessive Pronouns : amicus mens, a friend of mine; gladins tuns, a sword of thine. But when omnium is added, yeBtmm and nostrum are used (864 r.). Sometimes the adjec- tive form is preferred : canis aUSnuf, a strange dog, another man's dog; JXUaa erUia, master's son. GENITIVE. 165 2. The attention of the student is called to the variety of forms which possession may take. Statna MyrOnis, MyrorCs statue, may mean : i. A statue which Myron owns ; 2. Which Myron has made ; 3. Which represents Myron. 3. Sometimes the governing word is omitted, where it can be easily supplied, so especially aedem or templnm, after ad, and less often after other prepositions : peollnia ntinam ad Opis maneret, C, PA., i. 7, 17 ; would that the money were still at Ops'a (temple). Active and Passive Genitive. 363. When the substantive on which the Genitive de- pends contains the idea of an action (nomen dx^tiOnis), the possession may be active or passive. Hence the division into 1. The Active or Subjective Genitive : amor Del, the love of God, the love which God feels (God loves) ; patriae bene- ficia, the benefits of {conferred by) one's country, 2. Passive or Objective Genitive : amor Dei, love of God, love toward God (God is loved). Remarks. — 1. The English form in of is used either actively or pas- sively : the love of women. Hence, to avoid ambiguity, other preposi- tions than of are often substituted for the Passive Genitive, such as for, toward, and the like. So, also, sometimes in Latin : YolnntSs'ServXlil ergS Caesarem, Cf C, Q,F,, ni. i. 6, 26 ; the good- will of Servilius toward Caesar, Odium in benOs inveterStnm, C, Vat., 3, 6 ; deep-seated hate toward the conservatives, 2. Both Genitives may be connected with the same substantive : YeterSs HelvetiOnuiL inillriae popoU BOmSnl, Gf. Gaes., B,0,, i. 30, 2 ; the Helvetians' ancient injuries of the Roman people, 364. The Subjective Genitive, like the Possessive, is used only of the Third Person. In the First and Second Persons the possessive pronoun is used. Amor mens, my love {the love which I feel), Beslderium tuum, your longing {the longing which you feel). Additional attributives are put in the Genitive (321, r. 2) : Ifirfiyl hano orbem meS ftnlus operS salvam esse, C, Pis., 3, 6 ; / swore that this city owed its saUvation to my exertions aloue. 1 66 GEXITIVE. Remark. — Hottmm and ▼Mtmin are used as Partitive Genitives. Mfigpm pan neetnun, a great part of us ; nterqne veetnini, either (JtotK) of you. Noftrl melior pan means the better part of our being, our better part. With omnium, the forms nostrum and vestrnm must be used (362, r. 1). Genitive of Quality. 365. The Genitive of Quality must always have an adjective or its equivalent. Yir mfignae anctOritStis, Caes., B^G,, v. 35, 6 ; a man of great tnflu- ence. HomS nihill (= nfUlItui pretil), Pl., /?., 1188 ; a fellow of no account. Trldul via, Caes., B,G., i. 38, 1 ; a three days' journey. Remark. — The Genitive of Quality is less common than the Abla- tive, being used chiefly of the essentials. The Genitive always of Number, Measure, Time, Space ; the Ablative always of externals, so of parts of the body. Often the use seems indifferent. (400.) Genitive as a Predicate. 366. The Genitives of Possession and Quality may be used as Predicates. HIc versus Flantl nOn est, hlo est, C, Fam., ix. 16, 4 ; this verse is not by Plauius, this is. YirtHs tantfinun virinm est nt 86 ipsa tneStnr, C, Tusc, v. i, 2 ; vir- tue is of such strength as to he her own protector. Remarks. — 1. The Possession appears in a variety of forms, and takes a variety of translations : HUiiiB erO vlvus, mortnus hfLius erO, Prop., ii. 15, 35 ; hers I shall be, living ; dead, hers I shall be. BamnStiO est iUdicnm, poena ISgis, C, Suit., 22, 63 ; condemning is the judges* (business), punishment the law^s. Faaperifl est nnmerSre peons, Ov., M., xiii. 823 ; *tis only the poor man that counts his flock (His the mark of a poor man to count the flock). Observe this Genitive with facere, to make {cause to he). SOmSnae diciOnis facere, L. , xxi. 60, 3 ; /o bring under the Roman sway. 2. Stultitiae est, it is the part of folly may be used, as well as stultX eft, it is the part of a fool. So, too, stultnm est, it is foolish. But L when the adj. is of the Third Declension, the neuter should not be * used, except in combination with an adj. of the Second. GENITIVE. 167 Some combinations become phraseological, as : oOnsuflttldinis, mOrit eft, it 18 the custom. 3. The same methods of translation apply to the Possessive Pro- noun in the Predicate (** Vengeance is mine") : menm est, it is my property, businesSf way. NOn est mentlrl meum, Teb., Heaut., 549 ; lying is not my (nature). His tantis in rebns eet taam videre, quid agStnr, C, Mur., 38, 83 ; in this important crisis it is your (business) to see what is to be done. Partitive Genitive. 367. The Partitive Genitive stands for the Whole to which a Part belongs. 368. The Partitive Genitive is used with substantives of Quantity, Number, Weight. MSzimiiB vlnl nnmenu fait, permSgnnm pondns argenti, C, Ph., 11. 27, 66 ; there was a large amount of urine, an enormous mass of silver. Camp&nOmm Slam ezcSdere aci6 inbet, L., x. 29, 2 ; he orders a squad- ron of Campanians to leave the line. Remark. — Whether the conception be partitive or not, depends on circumstances. Xedimnns tntici, a m^dimnus of wheat, may be a medimnus of WHEAT (OenitvDus Generis) or a medimnus of wheat (Partitive). 369. The Partitive Genitive is used with the neuter Sin- gular of the following and kindred words, but only in the Nominative or Accusative. tantnm, so much, qnantum, as (how much), aliquantum, somewhat, nmltum, much, pltls, more, plflrimum, most, paulum, little, miniiB, less, TniniTnum, least, satis, enough, parum, too little, nihil, nothing, hoc, this, id, iUud, istud, that, idem, the same, qnod and quid, which and what f with their compounds. Is I0C118 ab omnI tnrbfi id temporiB (336, s. 5) vacuus erat, C, Fin., v. I, 1 ; that place was at that (point of) time free from anything like a crowd. Satis Sloquentiae, sapientiae parum, S., (7., 5, 4 ; enough (of) eloquence, of wisdom too little. Remarks. — 1. Neuter adjectives of the Second Declension can be treated as substantives in the Gen. ; not so adjectives of the Third, except in combination with adjectives of the Second, but here usually the Second Declension adjective is attracted ; fi^q)od.^\Km?QJXk^C)ixVs&\^ l68 GENITIVE. something good; aliqnid memorfibile, something memorctble; aliqnid bonl et memorSbilii, something good and memorable (better aliqnid bonvm et memor&bile). 2. A familiar phrase is : Nihil reliqnl fEioere. i. To leave nothing (not a thing). 2. (Occasionally), to leave nothing undone, 370. The Partitive Genitive is used with numerals, both general and special. Special ; Centum mflitnm, a hundred {of tJie) soldiers, a hundred (of) sol" diers. (Centum mllitSs, a, the hundred soldiers.) QuIntuB rS^um, the fifth (of tJie) king(s), (Qulntiu rex, the fifth king.) General : Mnltl mflitum, many of the soldiers, many soldiers (Mnltl mflites, many soldiers.) Remarks. — 1. The English language commonly omits the partition, unless it is especially emphatic : Mnltl civium adsnnt, many citizens are present. Mnltl clySs adsnnt, MANY are the citizens present. 2. When all are embraced, there is no partition in Latin : KOs trecenti conifLrSvimnB, L., 11. 12, 15 ; three himdred of us have hound ourselves by an oath. Qnl omnSs, all of whom. Qnot estis 1 Jww many are (there of) you f So always qnot, tot, totidem. 3. On mflle and mllia, see 203. On prepositions with numerals, see 872, E. 2. 371, The Partitive Genitive is used with Pronouns. II mllitnm, those (of the) soldiers. II mflitSs, those soldiers. 111! GraecOmm, those (of the) Greeks. FIdSnStinm qnl Bnpennnt, ad nrbem FldenSs tendnnt, L., iv. 33,40; ihe surviving Fidenates take their way to the city of Fidenae. Remarks. — 1. Uterqne, either (both), is commonly used as an adjec- tive with substantives : nterqne cOnsnl, either consul = both consuls ; as a substantive with pronouns, unless a substantive is also used : nterqne hOrnm, both of these ; but nterqne iUe dnz, both of those leaders. 2. On the use of prepositions instead of the Genitive, see 372, n. 2. GENITIVE. 169 372. The Partitive Genitive is used with Comparatives and Superlatives : Prior hQnim in proeliO ceddit, Nep., xxi. i, 2 ; tJie former of these fell in an engagement. Indus est omnium flOminnm mSzimns, C, N,D,, 11. 52, 130 ; tJie Indtts is the greatest of all streams. Remarks. — (1) 2. Instead of the Partitive Genitive with Numerals, Pronouns, Comparatives, and Superlatives, the Abl. may be employed with ex, out of d6, /rom, or the Ace. with inter, among, apnd : OaUns prOvocat Unnm ex BOmSniB, ths Gaul challenges one of the Romans; Unns de mnltlli, one of the many (the masses) ; Croesns inter rfigSs opnlen- tissimuB, Croesus, wealthiest of kings. ' With Unns, ex or d6 is the more common construction, except that when Unns is first in a series, the Gen. is common. 3. On the concord of the Superlative see 211, r. 2. 4. The Partitive Genitive with positives belongs especially to poetry. Seqnimnr t«, Bfincte deOmm, V., A., iv. 576 ; we follow thee, holy deity, 5. The use of neuter adjectives as su'bstantives with the Genitive is also mainly poetical. Ardua dnm metnont, Smittont yflra viSI (29, b. 3), Lucr., i. 660 ; the while they fear the steeper road, they miss the true. So amSra cUrSmm, H., 0., iv. 12, 19; hitter elements of cares, hitter cares; BtrSta viSmm, Y., A,, i. 422 = BtrStae viae, the paved streets. 6. The Partitive Genitive is also used with Adverbs of Quantity, Place, Extent, as : ubi terrSmm, gentium 1 where in the world f Ob- serve also its colloquial uses with hllc, e0, as htlo, eO arrogantiae prOcOMit, he got to this, that pitch of presumption. Genitive with Prepositional Substantives. 373. Causa, gratift, ergO, and instar are construed with the Genitive. Sophifltae qaaettfUi caoBS philoBopliSbantar, Q., Ac, 11. 23, 72 ; the pro- fessors of wisdom dealt in philosophy for the sake of gain. AmOris magiB quam honOriB grStiS, Enn., F., 287 (m.) ; more for love's (sake) than for honoris sake. VirtlltiB ergO, C, Opt. Gen., 7, 19 ; on account of valor. Instar mentis equns, V., A,, 11. 15 ; a Jwrse the higness of a mounr tain. I JO GENITIVE, 11. GENITIVE WITH ADJECTIVES. 374. Adjectives of Fulness and Want, of Participation, of Power, of Knowledge and Ignorance, of Desire and Disgust, take the Genitive. F10niui rlmSniiii, Teb., Eun., 105 ; full of chinks (**a leaky vessel "). Farticeps cOnsilil, C, SiUl., 4, 12 ; a sharer in the plan. MentiB compos, C, Ph., 11. 38, 97 ; in possession ©/(one's) mind, Mnltfimm rSmin perltuB, C, Font., 11, 25 ; versed in many things. Cupidiui pooftniae, Cf. C, Verr., i. 3, 8 ; grasping after money. Omnium remm ImMdiUi C, Br., 85, 292 ; a universal ignoramus. Sltque memor nostrl necne, referte mihl, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 10 ; bring me ha^k (word) whether she thinks of us or no. OmnSs immemorem beneflcil Odfimnt, C, Off., 11. 18, 63 ; all hate a m^n who has no memory for kindness. BSstiae Bont ratiOnis et OrStiOnis expertSs, C, Off., i. 16, 50 ; beasts are devoid of reason and speech (lack discourse of reason). Omnia plena cOnsiliOrum, inSnia yerbOnim yidemns, C, Dr., i. 9, 87 ; we see a world that is full of wise measures, void of eloquence. Gallia frtLgom fertilis foiti L., v. 34, 2 ; Gaul was productive of grain. Remark. — The seat of the feeling is also put in the Gen., chiefly with animi and ingenil. Aeger animi, L., i. 58, 9 ; sick at heart, heart- sick. AudSz ingenil, Stat., /S., iu. 2, 64 ; daring of disposition. The PI. is animli. Genitive with Verbals. 375. Some Present Participles take the Genitive wh^n they lose their verbal nature ; and so occasionally do verbals in -£x in poetry and later prose. EpamlnOndSs erat ade0 veritStis dlligSns at n6 iocO qnidem mentXretnr, Nep., XV. 3, 1 ; JEpaminondas was so careful {such a lover) of the truth as not to tell lies even in jest. Omninm cOnsensIl capSx imperil nisi imperSsBot, Tag., E., i. 49 ; by general consent capable of empire, had he not become emperor. III. GENITIVE WITH VERBS. Genitive with Verbs of Memory. 376. Verbs of Eeminding, Eemembering, and Forgetting, take the Genitive. T6 yeteris amicitiae commonef6cit| [C.]adjffer., iv. 24, 33 ; h^ reminded you of your old friendship. GENITIVE. 171, Ipse iubet mortiB tB meminisse dens, Mart., ii. 59 ; a god himself bids you remember death. Est proprinm Btnltitiae aliOrom vitia cernere, obllvlscl BuOmxn, C, Tusc, III. 30, 73 ; the fact w, it shows a fool to have keen eyes for the faults of others, to forget one^s ottm. Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Reminding take more often the Abl. with de and the Ace. neiit. of a pronoun or Numeral adjective. OrO at Terentiam moneStis de tSstfimentO, C, Att.y xi. 16, 5; Ibeg you to put Terentia in mind of the totU, BlBcipalOs id Unaxn moneO, Quint., n. 9, 1 ; I give pupils this one (338, i) piece of advice. 2. Verbs of Remembering and Forgetting also take the Ace, espe- cially of Things : Haec 51im meminisse iuvSbit, V., ^., i. 203 ; to remember these things will one day give us pleasure. ObllylMl nihil soles nisi iniUrifis, C, Lig., 12, 35 ; you are wont to for- get nothing except injuries. Becordor (literally = I bring to heart, to mind) is construed with the Ace. of the Thing ; de is found with Persons. Et vOcem AncliXSae xnSgnl voltnmque recorder, V., ^., yiii. 156 ; and I recall (call to mind) the voice and countenance of Anchises the Great. Meminl, I bear in mind, I (am old enough to) remember, takes the Accusative : Antipatnim tU probe meministl, C, Or,, iii. 50, 194 ; you remember Antipaier very well. Genitive with Verbs of Emotion. 377. Misereor, miseret, paenitet, piget, pndet, taedet, and pertaesam est take the Accusative of the Person and the Genitive of the Thing.* Xisereminl sodOnmi, C, Verr,, i. 28, 73 ; pity your allies ! Suae quemque forttUiae paenitet, C, Fam., vi. i, 1; each man is dis- contented vyith his lot. M6 nOn sOlum piget stnltitiae meae, sed etiam pudet, C, Dom.^ 11, 29 ; Jam not only fretted at my folly, but actually ashamed of it. Remarks. — 1. Pndet is also used with the Gen. of the Person : Pudet deOnim hominaxiiqae, L., m. 19, 7; it is a shame in the sight of gods and msn, * misereor, / pity ; misereti it moves to pity ; paenitet, U repents ; ^\%«<.^ Vt irks,' pndeti it makes ashamed; taedet and pertaetTUa Mt, it Urea. k 1 72 GENITIVE. (2) 8. Other constructions follow from general rules. So the Inf. (422) and quod (542). KOn m6 TlzifM paenitet, C, Cat.M,, 23, 84 ; 7 am not sorry for having lived, Qnlntnm paenitet quod animnm tnnm offendit, Cf, C, Att,, xi. 13, 2 ; Quintita is sorry that he has wounded your feelings. Genitive with Judicial Verbs. 878. Verbs of Accusing, Convicting, Condemning, and Acquitting take the Genitive of the Charge. ICiltiadfis aoeOiCtas est prOditiOnii, Nep., i- 7> 5 ; Miltiades was ac- cused of treason. Fannios Verrem Imimalat avSritiae, C, Verr.y i. 49, 128 ; Fannius charges Verres with avarice. Video nOn t6 absollltiim esse improbitStis sed iUOs damnStOs esse caedis, C, Verr,, i. 28, 72 ; I see not that you are acquitted of dishonor, but that they are convicted of murder. Remarks. — 1. For the Gen. of the Charge may be substituted (a) no- mine or erimine with the Gen., or (b) the Abl. with d6 : nOmine (erimine) ooniflrStiOnii damnSre, to find guilty of conspiracy ; acctUfire d6 vl, of violence ; d6 venOftciO, of poisoning ; d6 rebns repetundls, of extortion. 2. Verbs of Condemning an^ Acquitting take the Abl. as well as the Gen. of the Charge ; the definite Fine is put in the Ablative ; the indefinite Fine, quantl, dupll, qnadrupU, etc., is in the Genitive. AoctlsSre oapitii, or oapite, to bring a capital charge ; damnSre capitis, or capite, to condemn to death ; damnSrI decern mllibiui, to be fined ten thousand. MnltSre, to mulct, is always construed with the Ablative : MnltSre pectLniS, to mulct in (of) money. Manliiu virtfLtem fllil morte multSvit, Quint., v. ii, 7 ; Manlius pun- ished the valor of his son with death. Genitive with Verbs of Rating: and Buyingr- 379. Verbs of Rating and Buying are construed with the Genitive of the general value or cost, and the Ablative of the particular value or cost. (404. ) Verbs of Rating are : aestimSre, exIstimSre, to value ; putSre, to reckon; dllcere, to take; habere, to hold; pendere, to weigh; facere, to make, put ; esse, to be (worth) ; fieri, to be considered. Verbs of Buying are : emere, to buy ; yQndere, to sell; venire, to be for sale ; stSre and cOnstSre, to cost, to come to ; prOstSre, Ucere, to be eipposed, left {for sale) ; condtLcere, to hire ; locSre, to let. GENITIVE. 173 380. I. Verbs of Eating take : M&gnl, much, plOris, more, plliriinl, mizimi, moat, Farvl, little, minOriB, less, minimi, least, TantI, tantldem, so quantl (and compounds), nihill, naught, much, how much, Dum n6 ob malefacta, peream ; parvl exIstnmO, Pl., Copt., 682 ; so long as it be not for misdeeds, let me die ; little do I care, VoluptStem yirtfU minimi fi^it, C, Fin,, 11. 13, 42 ; virtue makes very little account of the pleasure of the senses, Itldicfis rem ptlblicam flocci nOn feudont, Cf, C, Att., iy, 1$, ^ *, the judges do not care a fig for the State. Remarks. — 1. TantI is often used in the sense of operae pretinm est = it is worth while. Est mihi tanti hfLins invidiae tempestStem snblre, C, Cat,, 11. 7, 15 ; it is worth while {the cost), in my eyes, to hear this storm of odium, 2. AestimO is found with the Abl. as well as with the Genitive. So aestimSre mSgnl and mSgnO, to value highly, 2. Verbs of Buying take tanti, qnanti, plUris, and minoris. The rest are put in the Ablative. V6nd0 menm frfimentnm nOn pltlris quam ceterl, fortaue etiam minOris, C, Off,, III. 12, 51 ; I sell my com not dearer tha/n everybody else, per^ haps even cheaper. Emit Canius bortOs tantI quantl Pythins voluit, C, Off,, ni. 14, 59 ; Canius bought the gardens at the price Pythius wanted, Emiti peril berde: quantll—VIgintI minis, Teb., Eun., 984; he bought her f Pm undone ; for how much f — Twenty minae, Quantl c6nS8 1 What do you give for your diniver f Quantl babitSs 1 What is the rent of your lodgings t But : FarvO fames constat, mSgnO fSstldium, Sen., E,M,, 17, 4 ; hunger costs little, daintiness much, E.EMARK. — Bene emere, to buy cheap; bene vendere, to sell dear; male emere, to buy dear ; male vCndere, to sell cheap. So, too, other adverbs : melius, optim6, p6ius, pessime. Genitive with Interest and RSfert. 381. I. Interest and Eefert take a Genitive of the Person, seldom of the Thing, concerned. Interest omnium r6ot6 facere, C, Fin., n. 22, 72 ; it is to the interest of all to do right. Efifert compositiOnis quae quibus antepOnSs, Quint. , ix. 4, 44 ; it is of importance for the arrangement of words, which you put before -wK-vcK* 174 ABLATIVE. 2. Instead of the Genitive of the personal prononns, the Ablative Singular feminine of the possessives is em- ployed. Mac interest, xneC rSfert, Tam concerned, 382. The Degree of Concern is expressed by an Ad- verl), Adverbial Accusative, or a Genitive of Value. Id meS minnrne rSfert, Ter., Ad., 88 1 ; (Jiai makes no difference at aU to me. TheodOrX nihil intereet, C, Tilsc., i. 43, 102 \ It is no concern of Theo- dorus. "K&gnl interest meC Onfi nOs esse, C, Att., xiii. 4 ; it is of great im-- portance to me that we be together. Occasional Uses. 383. Tho Genitive is found occasionally with certain Verbs of Fulness, but the Ablative is the rule : FIsO multOs oOdiofls impl6vit efinim renun, C, Verr., i. 46, 119 ; Piso filled many hooks full of those things, VirtOs plUrimae commentStiOnis et exercitStiOnis indiget, Cf. C, Fin.^ III. 1 5, 50 ; virtue stands in need of much (very mucA) study and prcictice. ABLATIVE. 384. The Ablative is the Adverbial, as the Genitive is the Adjective case. It contains three elements : A. Where ? B. Whence ? C. Wherewith ? In a literal sense, the Ablative is commonly used with prepositions ; in a figurative sense, it is commonly used without prepositions. A. The Ablative of the Place Where appears in a figurative sense as the Ablative of the Time When. B. The Ablative of the Place Whence appears as : I. The Ablative of Origin. 2. The Ablative of Measure. C. The Ablative of the Thing Wherewith appears in a figurative sense, as : I. The Ablative of Manner. 2. The Ablative of Quality. 3. The Ablative of Means. To these we add : D. The Ablative of Cause. E. The Ablative Absolute. ABLATIVE. 175 I. The Literal Meanings of tlie Ablative. A. ABLATIVE OF THE PLACE WHERE. AbiatTvus Loc&Iis. 385. The Ablative answers the question Where f and takes as a rule the preposition in. In porttL nSvigO, Ter. , And, , 480 ; I am sailing in harbor, FOns in HibSrO, prope effectuB erat, Caes., B.C,^ i. 62,3 ; the bridge OVER the Ehro was nearly finished, HistriO in BoaenS est, Pl., Poen.^ 20 ; the alitor is on the stage, Haeret in equO senex, Cf. C, Dei.^ 10, 28 ; the old man sticks to his horse. Remarks. — 1. Verbs of Placing and kindred significations take the Abl. with in, to designate the result of the motion : Plato ratiOnem in capite poBoit, Xram in peetore locSvit, C, Tusc,y i. 10, 20 ; Plato has put reason in the head, haspUiced anger in the breast, FoedoB in columns aSneS inolBom, C, Balb., 23, 53 ; a treaty cut upon a brazen column. The same observation applies to Bub : FOne sub cnrrtL niminm propinqnl bOIIb, H., 0., i. 22, 21 ; pat (me) under the chariot of the aZl-too neighboring sun, 2, Verbs of Hanging and Fastening take ex, ab, or d6. 8p6B onmlB pendet ex fortllnfi, C, Par,, u. 17 ; aU his hopes are sus- pended on fortune, 3. The Ablative of Place without in is confined to a few words and phrases, except in poetry and later prose. So terrS, on land ; marl, by sea ; terrS marlque, on land and sea, LocO and IocIb, especially when used with adjectives, usually omit in. Also parte and partibnB; so regularly dextrS (parte), BinistrS, laevS, etc., on the right, on the left, 386. Names of Towns in the Singular of the Third De- clension, and in the Plural of all Declensions, take the Ablative of Place Where without in. Ut BOmae cOnBnlSB bXo CarthSgine quotannlB binl rfigfiB oreSbantnr, Nep., XXIII. 7, 4 ; as at Rome (two) consuls, so in Carthage two kings, were created yearly. TSliB KOmae FabridaB, quSliB AriBtldSB AtheniB, fait, C. Off., in. 22, 87 ; Fabricius was just such a man at Rome as Aristides was at Athens, 176 ABLATIVE. Remarkr.—!. Appositions are put in the Abl. commonly with in. KeCpoU, in eeleberrimO oppidO, C, Rah. Post,, 10, 26 ; at Naples, a popu- lous town. 2. In the iieighhorhood of, at, is ad with Ace., especially of mili- tary operations : pQni ad Oenftyam, Caes., B.O,, i. 7; the bridge cU OeneiHi. 387. In (citations from Books and in Enumerations^ the Abhitivo of the Place Where is used without in. LibrO tertiO, ih ird hook ; ventL decimO, tenth verse ; alio looO, elsewhere. But in is necessary when a passage in a book and not the whole book is meant. Agrieultllra laudfttor in 60 lihrO qui eft d6 tnendS r6 ftunlUlrf, C, Cat.M., 17, 50 ; agriculture is praised in the work on domestic eeon- omy. 388. In designations of Place^ with tdtos, canctfu, whole ; omnis, all ; mediiUy middle, the Ablative of the Place Where is generally used without in. Menippu, meO iUdiciOi tOtft Aiift diiertiMimiui, C, Br., 91, 315 ; 3fenip- pus, in my judgment f the inost eloqueiit man in all Asia (Minor). 389. AVhen Place is looked upon as Cause, Manner, or Instrument, the Ablative is used without a preposition. Arioviftos exercitnm oastrls continnit, Caes., B.O., i. 48, 4 ; Ariovis- tu8 kept his army within the camp, KfimO Ire qnemqaam ptLblicS prohibet viS, Pl., Cure, 35 ; no man for- hiddeth (any one to) travel hy the puhlic road. So redpere aliqnem tSotO, oppidS, porta, to receive a man into one's house, town, harhor, B. ABLATIVE OP THE PLACE WHENCE. AbiatTvus SeparatTvus. 390. I. The Ablative answers the question Whence? and takes as a rule the prepositions ex, out ofy de, froniy ab, off, Arfinefis deiciam de pariete, Pl., St., 355 ; I will get the cohwehs down from the wall. D6o6dit ex GalliS SOmam Kaeyins, C, Qwinct., 4, 16 ; Naevius with- drew from Oaul to Rome. ABLATIVE. 177 2. The prepositions are often omitted with Verbs of Ab- staining, Removing, Relieving, and Excluding ; so regu- larly with domo, from home, rure, from the country. With Persons a preposition (chiefly ab) must be used. VerrSs omnia doxnO fiius abitnlit, C, Verr., u. 34, 83 ; Verrea took everything away from his house. Ego, oam Tnllios rtire redierit, mittam enm ad t6, C, Fam,, v. 20, ; when Tullius returns from the country y I will send him to you. Compare AlienO mannm abstineant, Cato, Agr., 5, 1 ; let them keep their hand{s)from other people's property, with Alexander vix S 86 manOs abitinoit, C, Tusc, iv. 37, 79 ; Alexander hardly kept {could hardly keep) his hands from himself (from laying hounds on himself). Compare Lapldibne optimOs yirOs forO peUis, C, Har.Ees,, 18, 39 ; you drive men of the best classes from the forum with stones, with Istum aemnlnm ab eS peUitO, Teb., Eun., 215 ; drive that rival from her. Compare Omninm renim nStllrS oOgnitS llberfimor mortis metO, C, Fin. , I. 19, 63 ; hy the knowledge of universal nature we get rid of the fear of death, with TS ab e5 UberO, C, Q.F., in. i. 3, 9 ; I rid you of him. Compare Amicitia nfUlO looO excltLditnr, C, Lasl., 6, 22 ; friendship is shut out from no place, with Ab ills excltLdor, hOc concltLdor, Cf. Ter., And., 386 ; / am shut out from her (and) shut up here {to live with hee). Remarks. — 1. In classical Latin the preposition is usually employed in local relations, and omitted in metaphorical relations ; though there are some exceptions. 2. It is to be noted that in the vast majority of cases the separation is indicated by a verb ; hence this Abl. is found commonly with verbs compounded with prepositions.. The poets use it more freely. (3, 4, 5) 6. The Place Whence gives the Point of View from which. In English a different translation is often given, though not always necessarily : S tergO, in the rear ; ex parte dextrS, on the right side ; ab oriente, on the east ; S tantO BpatiO, at such a distance ; ex fagS, on the flight ; S r6 frtlmentSriS labOrSre, to he embarrassed in the matter of provisions, 3. The prepositions are also omitted with kindred Adjec- tives. Animas excelsos omnI est liber cflrS, C, Fin,, i. 15, 49 ; a lofty mind is free from all care, CatO omnibus htlmSnls vitib immflnis fait, Yell., n. 35, 2 ; Cato was exempt from all human failings, Remabk. — Frooal, far from, regularly takes the preposition ab, ex- cept in the poets and later prose. 12 i 178 ABLATIVE. 391. Names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Ablative of the Place AVhence. BamarStos fOgit TarquiniOs CorinthO, C, Tu8e., t. 37, 109 ; DemarcUu8 fled to Tarquinii from Corinth. Dolfibella B610 proflclsoitnr, C, Verr.y i. 18, 46 ; DolaheUa sets out from Delos, Remarks. — 1. The prepositions ab (S) and ex (6) are sometimes used for the sake of greater exactness. LibO diictesit S BnmdiiiO, Caes., B.C., iii. 24, 4 ; Libo departed from Brundisium, When the substantives urbe, city, and oppidO, town, are employed, the use of the preposition is the rule, as also when not the town, but the neighborhood is intended. Anlide, ex oppidO BoeOtiae, from Aulia, a toum of Boeotia. Ex oppidS OergoviS, Caes., B.C., vii. 4, 2 ; from the town of Oergovia, 2. The Place Whence embraces all the places involved. AgrigentO ex Aescnlfipil fSnO, whereas we should say, from the temple of Aesculapius at Agrigentum. Unde domOl V., A., viii. 114 ; from what home f 3. Letters are dated from rather than at a place. C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH, Abl&tTvus Soci&tTvus. 392. The Ablative of Attendance takes the preposition (sum, with. Cum febri domnm rediit, C, Or., iii. 2, 6 ; he returned home with a fever. Cnm bacolO perSqne Benex, Mart., iy. 53, 3 ; an old man with stick and wallet. Remarks. — 1. In military phrases, the troops with which a march is made are put in the Ablative, with or without cum : Caesar com equitibiu BCCCC in castra perv6nit, Caes., B.C., i. 41, 1 ; Caesar arrived in camp with nine hundred cavalry. AlbSnl ingentl exercitll in agnun SOmfinnm impetom fBcfire, L., i. 23, 3 ; the Albans attacked the Roman territory urith a huge army. 2. Not to be confounded with the above is the Instrumental Abla- tive : Kfivibns profectns est, C, Fam., xv. 3, 2 ; ^c set out by ship. So also with verbs which denote other military actions : Hasdmbal mediam aoiem HispSnls firmat, L., xxiii. 29, 4 ; Hasdrubal strengthens the centre udth Spanish troops. ABLATIVE. 179 II. The Figurative Meanings of tlie Ablative. A. The Place Where is transferred to the Time When. Ablative of Time. AblStivus Temporis. 393. Time When or Within Which is put in the Ahlative. QuS noete nStus Alexander est, eSdem BiSnae Ephesiae tempLnm dfifla- g^Svit, Cf. C, N,D,y II. 27, 69 ; on the same night on which Alexander was homy the temple of Diana of Ephesua burned to the ground. SStnml Stella trigintft fer6 annis cannm swim cOnficit, C, N,D.^ 11. 20, 52 ; the planet Saturn completes its period in about thirty years, Remarks. — 1. Time Within Which may be expressed by per and the Accusative : Per eOs ipsOs dies Fhiloeles saltnm CithaerOnis trSnscendit, L., xxxi. 26, 1 ; during those very days Philocles crossed the range of Cithaeron, 2. Time Within Which may embrace both extremities ; so usually with tOtus, all, whole : Kocte pluit tots, V. (P. L. M. , iv. 155 B) ; all night (Jupiter) rains. So with definite numbers ; but rarely in model prose. Apnd Fythagoram dlsdpalls qtilnque axmis tacendom erat, Sen., JE,M., 52, 10 ; in Pythagoras' school the disciples had to keep silence Jive years, 3. When the notion is negative, the English Time For Which is the Latin Within Which. BOscius SOmam mnltls axmIs nOn venit, C, Rose, Am., 27, 74 ; Hos- cius has not come to Rome in (for) many years. 4. Especially to be noted is the Abl. of Time with hlc, this ; ille, that : KarthSginem hOc biexmiO evertSs, C, Rep.y vi. 11, 11 ; Carthage you ufill overturn in the next two years. Transferred to OrStiO Obllqua, hie becomes ille (660, 3) : DiodOnifl respondit illud argentnm 86 panels ilUs diebns mlsisse Lily- baenm, C, Verr., iv. 18, 39 ; Diodorus answered that^ he had sent that silver plate to Lilybaeum within a few days {a few days before), 394, The Ablative with the preposition in is used of points within a period of time, or of the character of the time. Bis in diS, twice a da/y ; in pneritifi, in boyhood; in adnlSscentifi, in youth. KfLUO modO mibl plaonit bis in die satonun fieri, C, Tusc, v. 35, 100 ; it did not suit me in a/ny way to eat my fill twice a day. F6cl ego istaee itidem in adolfiicentiS, Pl., B., 410 ; 1 did those things too in my youth. l80 ABLATIVE. Remark. — The use or omission of in sometimes changes the mean- ing. So bellO FenioO, at the time of the Persian war; but In bellO, in war times ; in pCoe, in peace times. B. The Place Whence is transferred : I. To Origin. 2. To Respect or Specification. 1 . Ablative of Oriflrin. 396. Participles which signify Birth take the Ablative of Origin ; sometimes witli the prepositions ex and de. Amplissimfi familift nStI adulBsoentSs, Caes., B.G,, yii. 37, 1 ; youfig men horn of a great house. Sate sangnine dlyom! V., A., vi. 125 ; seed of blood divine ! Ex me atque ex hOo nStns es, Teb., Heaut., 1030 ; you are his son and mine. OdSmnt nStOe de paelice, Juv., vi. 627 ; they hate the offspring of the coihcuhine, Ab, and occasionally ex, are employed of remote progenitors : Fierlque Belgae sunt orti ab Oermftnli, Gf, Caes., B.G., 11. 4, 1 ; Bel- gians are mostly of Oermaji descent, 396. The Ablative of Material takes ex in classical Latin. Ex animO cOnstftmns et corpore, Cf C, Fin,, iv. 8, 19 ; we consist of mind and body, Statua ex aorO, ex aere, facta, a statue made of gold, of bronze. Often an adjective is used : anreus, golden ; Ugnens, wooden, Kemarks. — 1. With fieri the previous state is given also by de : Be temple carcerem fieri ! C, Ph,, v. 7, 18 ; from a temple to become a jail. Ex OrStSre arStor fiMtiu, C, Ph,, m. 9, 22 ; a pleader turned plowman, 2. Otherwise the simple Ablative of Material is poetic or late. MSyors caelStiu ferrO, V., A,, viii. 700 ; Mars carven of iron, 2. Ablative of Respect. 397. The Ablative of Respect or Specification is put in answer to the questions From What Point of View ? Ac- cording to What ? By What ? In Respect of What ? BlBcrlptus popnlus censll, Qrdinibiu, aetStibuB, C, Leg., in. 19, 44 ; a people drawn off according to income, rank^ (and) age. EnniuB ingeniO mSximus, arte mdis, Ov., Tr,, 11. 424 ; JEJnnitis in genius great, in art unskilled. ABLATIVE. 1 8 1 AnimO IgnSvus, procfiz Ore, Tag., H., n. 23, 18; coward of soul, saucy of tongue. Noteworthy are the phrases : orlne mber, red-haired ; captiu oohUb (literally, caught in the eyes), blind ; captiu xnente, insane ; meS Ben- tentiS, according to my opinion ; itlre, by right ; I6ge, by law, etc. ; and the Supines in -ttl (436). Remark. — Prepositions are also used, to show the conception : Ca^saris adyentus ex colore vestltfU cOgnitiu, Cf. Caes. B.O., vii. 88, 1 ; the arrival of Caesar was known by the color of his clothing. D6 gestll intellegO quid respondefis, C, Vat., 15, 35 ; I understand by your gesture what answer you are giving. Similarly ex IfigCi according to law ; ex pactO, according to agree- ment ; ex (de) mOre, a>ccording to custom ; ex animi sententiS, cbccording to (my) hearVs desire ; ex llsfL, useful. 398. The Ablative of Respect is used with the Compara- tive instead of qnam, than, with the Nominative or Accusa- tive. {Abldtlvus Compardtionis.) Tunica propior paUiOst, Pl., Trin., 1154 ; the shirt is nearer than the cloak. Nihil est virtllte amSbilius, C, Lael., 8, 28 ; nothing is more at- tractive than virtue. So also after adverbs, but not so freely in prose : LacrimS nihil citius SrSscit, C, Inv., i. 56, 109 ; nothing dries more quickly than a tear. Remark. — When the word giving the point of view is a relative, the Abl. must be used. See 296, R. 2. Fhldiae BimulScra quibus nihil perfectiuB videmus, C, Or., 2, 8 ; the statues of Pheidias, than which we see nothing more perfect. C. ABLATIVE OF THE THING WHEREWITH. Abl&tTvus SociHtTvus. Ablative of Attendance. 1 . Ablative of Manner. 399. The Ablative of Manner answers the question How? and is used with the Preposition cum when it has no Adjec- tive ; with or without cum when it has an Adjective or its equivalent. {Abldtlvus Modi,) Stellae circulOs suOs orbSsque cOnficiunt celeritftte mIrSbill, C, Rep., vi, 15, 15 ; the stars complete their orbits mth wonderful smftness, BeSte vlvere est honeste, id est cum virtllte, vlvere, C, Fin., lu. 8, 29 ; to live happily is to live honestly, that is, virtuou^lx^. l82 ABLATIVE. 2. Ablative of Quality. (Descriptive Ablative.) 400. The Ablative of Quality has no Preposition, and al- ways takes an Adjective or an equivalent. AgesiUtis statUrS fait hnxnill, Nep., xvii. 8, 1 ; Agesildua was (a man) of low stature. lata tnrpionlO pueUa nSsO, Cat., 41/3 ; that girl of yours tpith (he ugly nose, Kemarks. — 1. External and transient qualities are put by prefer- ence in the Ablative ; Measure, Number, Time, and Space are put in the Genitive only ; parts of the body in the Ablative only. Otherwise there is often no difference. 2. Of unnatural productions com may be used : Sgnos earn inillS capita, L., xxxi. 12, 7 ; a lamb with a swine* s head, 3. Ablative of Means. 401. The Means or Instrument is put in the Ablative without a Preposition. The Agent or Doer is put in the Ablative with the Preposition ab (a). The Person Through Whom is put in the Accusative with per. ^ ^. - . . ( !• ntlntiO, by a message. Xerxes certior factus est, \ , « /.. r "u- •J' J ■{ 2. fi ntLntiO, by a messenger. Xeroses was informed, j ^ :. t ^ •^ ^3. P«r ntLntiom, by means of a messenger. YirgJa oaesi tribllnl ab legfitO sunt, L., xxix. 18, 13 ; the tribunes were beaten with rods by the lieutenant. DIscite BSnSrl per queni didicistis axnfire, Ov., Bern. Am., 43 ; learn to be healed by means of (him by) whom you learned to love, Remarks. — 1. W^hen the Instrument is personified and regarded as an Agent, or the Agent is regarded as an Instrument, the constructions are reversed ; when an adjective is used, the construction may be doubtful ; see 354, and 214, e. 2. . So iacent boIb tSstibiu, C, Mil,, 18, 47 ; they are cast by their ouyn witnesses ; or, they are cast, their own men being witnesses. 2. A quality, when personified, has the construction of the person. So dfiserl S mente, S spe. V5bl8 animus ab IgnSviS atque sQcordiS conmptns est, S., lug., 31, 2 ; you have had your soul{s) debauched by sloth and indifference. ABLATIVE. 183 (3) 4. Verbs of sacrificing have the Abl. of Means. QoInqnSgmtS caprXs BacrificSYfinmt, L., xly. 16, 6 ; they sacrificed fifty she-goats. (5) 6. Nltor, / stay myself; fldO, cOnfldOi I trust, rely on, have the Abl. DifEIdO, I distrust, always has the Dat. in model prose. Conten- tus, satisfied, and firfitus, supported, relying, have the Ablative. SalfU omniam nOn yfiritSte sOlnm sed etiam fSmS nltitnr, Cf. C, Q.F,, I. ii. I, 2 ; the welfare of all rests not on truth alone, hut also on repute. OmnSs mortSlfis dis sunt frfiti, Pl., Cas., 348 ; all mortals rely upon the gods. 4. Ablative of Standard. AbldtTvus Mensurae. 402. The Standard of Measure is put in the Ablative with verbs of Measurement and Judgjnent. KSgnOB hominSs virttlte metlmur, nOn fortUnS, Nep., xviii. i,\', we measure great men by worth, not by fortune. Bonis hominSs ut aera tinnltH dlgnOscimiiB, Quint., xi. 3, 31 ; toe dis- tinguish men by sound, as coppers by ring. Remark. — ^£x with the Abl. is frequently found with these verbs ; so regularly with aeetimSre, ezIstimSre, speotSre, in the sense of judge, value. Sic est vnlgns: ex vfiritSte pauca, ex opIniOne molta aestimat, C, Rosc»Com., 10, 29 ; this is the way of the rabble : 'they value few things by (the standard of) truth, ma/ny by (the standard of) opinion. 403. Measure of Difference is put in the Ablative. SOI moltls partibus mSior est qoaiii terra finiversa, C, N.D., 11. 36, 92 ; the sun. is many parts (a great deal) larger than the whole earth. Perfer et obdflrS: moltO graviOra tnlistli Ov., TV., v. 11, 7 ; bear to the end and be firm : you have borne much heavier burdens. Remark. — ^Especially to be noted is the use of the Abl. of Measure with ante, before, and post, after : Pands ante difibus, panels difibns ante, a few days before. Panels post difibns, pands difibns post, a few days after, afterward. DnObns annls postqnam BOma condita est, two years after Boms was founded. PanlO post TrOiam captam, a little while after the taking of Troy. The Ace. can also be employed : post pancOs annOs, after a few years ; ante pancOe annOs, a few years before ; and the ordinal as well as the cardinal numbers (but only when qnam follows) : two hundred years after{ward) may be : Dncentis annls post or DncentSsimO annO post, Post dnoentOs annOs or Post dncentSsunum. aniL'QiSiL. 184 ABLATIVE. 6. Ablative of Price. 404. Definite Price is put in the Ablative. £riph3rla anrO Yirl yltam vendidit, C, Inv., i. 50, 94 ; Eriphyle sold her hvshand'a life for gold, Ylgintl talentis linam OrStiOnem ItoeratSi yindidit, Plin., N.H., vn. 31, 110 ; Isocrates sold one speech for twenty talents. Emit morte immortfilitStem, Quint., ix. 3, 71 ; he purchased deathless- ness with death. Remark. — KfitSre, to eocchange, is sometimes Give, sometimes Get ; sometimes Sell, sometimes Buy ; the latter in poetry and later prose. NSmS nisi victor pSoe bellnm mfltSyit, S., C, 58, 15 ; no one unless victorious {ever) exchanged war for peace, Misera pCx vel bellO bene mlltStnr, Cf. Tac, Ann,, m. 44, 10 ; a wretched pea>ce is well exchanged even for war, 6. Ablative with Verbs of Plenty and Want. 405. Verbs of Depriving and Filling, of Plenty and Want, take the Ablative. Dfimocritos dldtar ocnlls sfi prlvfiise, C, Fin.y t. 29, 87 ; Democritus is said to have deprived himself of his eyes. Dens bonis omnibus ezplOyit mundnm, Cf, C, Univ,, 3, 9 ; God has filled the universe with all blessings. Capua fortissimOrum virOrum multitlidine redundat, C, Pis., 11, 25 ; Capua is full to overflowing with a multitude of gallant gentlemen. Remarks. — 1. EgeO and indigeO also take the Genitive : NOn tam artis indigent quam labdris, C, Or,, i. 34, 156 ; they are not so much in need of skill as of industry. So implfirl, V., A,, i. 214. 2. Adjectives of Plenty and Want take the Gen., but some of them follow the analogy of the verb. Asellus onustus aurO, C, Att,, i. 16, 12 ; a donkey laden with gold, Pollicitis dives quilibet esse potest, Ov., A. A,, i. 444 ; anybody can he rich in promises, 406. Opus and tlsus take the Dative of the Person and the Ablative of the Thing. Opus may be used as a predicate with the thing wanted as a subject. Novo cOnsiliO mihi nunc opus est, Pl., P^., 601 ; a new device is what Tm needing now. Ylgintl iam flsust fOiO argenti minis, Pl., Asin., 89 ; my son has ur- gent need of twenty silver minae. ABLATIVE. 185 NOn opoB est verbis sed fQstibns, C, Pis., 30, 73 ; th^re is need not of words, but of cudgels. Quod nOn opus est asse cSnxm est, Cato (Sen., E.M., 94, 27) ; what you do not want (have no use for) is dear at a penny. So with the Perfect Participle Passive. Quod parStO opus est, pars, Teb., And., 523 ; what must he got ready , get ready, YlotnO conventOst opus, Pl., Cos., 502 ; the neighbor must be called on. 7. Ablative with Sundry Verbs. 407. The Deponent Verbs utor, abutor, fimor, fungor, potior, and vescor, take the Ablative. YictOriS lltl nescXs, L., xxu. 51, 4 ; how to make use of victory you know not. Quo Usque tandem abfitSre patientiS nostrS, C, Cat., i. i, 1; how long, tell me, mil you abtise our patience f LUx quS fruimur S DeO nObXs datur, Cf. C, Rose. Am., 45, 131 ; the light which we enjoy is given to us hy Ood. Funguntur officio, C, Casl., 9, 21 ; they acquit themselves of their duty. TUtius esse arbitrSbantur sine 11110 vulnere victOriS potlrl, Caes., B.O., III. 24, 2 ; they thought it safer to make themselves masters of (gain) the victory without a/ny wound. Numidae lacto vescebantur, S., lug., 89, 7 ; the Numidians made their regular food of milk (fed on milk). Remarks. — 1. Potior has occasionally the Genitive. 2. On the Personal Gerundive of these verbs see 427, e. 5. 3. 9tor is a favorite word, and has a most varied translation : ^tl aliquO amIcO, to avail one*s self of (to enjoy) a man^s friendship (to have a friend in him) ; Utl cOnsiliO, to follow advice; lltl bonO patre, to have the advantage of having a good father ; Utl I6gibus, to obey the laws. See the Lexicons. D. ABLATIVE OF CAUSE. 408. The Ablative of Cause is used without a preposition, chiefly with Verbs of Emotion. Ahldtlvus Causae, In culpS sunt qui offida dfiserunt mollitiS animl, C, Fin., i. 10, 33 ; they are to blame who shirk their duties from effemina^iy of temper. Oderunt peccSre boni yirtutis amOre, H., Ep., i. 16, 52 ; the good hate to sin from love of virtue. 1 86 ABLATIVE. DfilietO doUre, oorr0otiOne gaudSre oportet, C, Lad., 24, 90 ; one ought to be sorry for sin, to be glad of chastisement. Remarks. — 1. The moving cause is often expressed by a participle with the Abl., which usually precedes : adduotns, led; Srdftis, fired; oommOtui, stirred up; indtStoSi egged on; incfiniiu, inflamed; impul- •UB, driven on; mOtiu, moved, and many others ; amOre, by love; Irfi, by anger ; odiO, by hate ; metll, by fear ; ip0, by hope, etc. Ketfl perter- ritos, sore frightened ; yerfioandifi dfiterritos, ahashed, etc. 2. Instead of the simple Abl. prepositions are often used ; especially, d8 and ex with the Abl. , or ob and propter with the Accusative. 3. The preventing cause is expressed by prae, for: Prae gaudiS nbi lim needO, Ter., Heaut., 308 ; I know not where I am for joy, E. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 409. The so-called Ablative Absolute is an Ablative com- bined with a participle, and serves to modify the verbal predicate of a sentence. Instead of the participle, a predi- cative substantive or adjective can be employed. 410. The Ablative Absolute answers to the English so- called Nominative Absolute, but for purposes of style, it is often well to vary the translation. Xerxe rSgnante (= com XerxSe rfignfiret), Xeroses reigning. When Xeroses was reigning. In the reign of Xerxes. Xerxe victO (= com XerxSs victus e8Bet)i Xerxes defeated, being, hav- ing been, defeated. When Xerxes had been defeated. After the defeat of Xerxes. Xerxe r6ge (= cnm XerxSs r6x esset), Xerxes \being^^ king. When Xerxes was king. Patre vIvO, while father is, was alive (in father'' s lifetime). Urbe expOgnStS imperStor rediit : Passive Form : Hie city [being] taken {after the city was taken), the general returned. Active Form : Having taken the city (after he had taken the city), the general returned. Abstract Form : After the taking of the city. After taking the city, KSximfis virtlltfie iacfire omnSs necesse est voluptste dominante, C, Fin., II. 35, 117 ; aU the great(est) virtues must necessarily lie prostrate, IF (or when) the pleasure (of the senses) is mistress. BOmfinI veterSe rSgnSrI omnSs volfibant UbertStis dnlcSdine nOndma ex- perts, L., I. 17, 8 ; the old Roma'ns all wished to have a king over them (because they had) not yet tried the sweetness of liberty. LOCATIVE. 1 87 Remarks. — 1. As the Latin language has no Pf. Part, active, except when the Deponent is thus used, the passive construction is far more common than in English : luvenfis Teste posits corpora oleO pertLnxenmt, C, Tusc, i. 47, 113 ; the youthSy (having) laid aside their clothing ^ anointed their bodies with oil; or, laid aside their clothing, and anointed their bodies with oil, (2) 3. As a rule, the Abl. Abs. can stand only when it is not identical with the subject, object, or dependent case of the verbal predicate. Manlius slew the Gaul and stripped him of his necklace is to be ren- dered : KSnlius caesum Oallom torque spoliSvit. This rule is frequently violated, for the purpose either of emphasis or of stylistic effect. The shifted construction is clearer, more vigorous, more conversational. Neque ilium mfi vlv5 oornunpl sixiam, Pl., ^., 419 ; nor toill I suffer him to de debauched while I am alive. The violation is most frequent when the dependent case is in the Genitive : lognrtba firStre meO interfectO rfignom 6ius sceleris snl praedam f!Bcit, S., Tug., 14, 11 ; Jugurtha killed my brother y and (= after killing my brother) made his throne tbs booty of his crime, LOCATIVE. 411. In the Singular of the First and Second Declensions, names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the Locative of the Place Where. PompSius hiemSre Dyrrhachil, ApollOniae omnibusque oppidls cQnstitu- erat, Caes., B.C., m. 5, i ; Pompey had determined to winter at Dyr- rhachium, Apollonia, and all the towns. BhodI ego nOn ful, sed ful in BithyniS, C, Plane. , 34, 83 ; I was not at Rhodes, but I was in Bithynia. Remarks. — 1. Other Locative forms are, domi, at home (61, r. 2), humi, on the ground, belli, and mllitiae, in the combinations domI mlli- tiaeque, belli domlque, in peace and in war, at home and in the field ; rfW, in the country (but rtre meO, on my farm). So perhaps animl, at heart (374, r.). Parvl sunt forli arma nisi est consilium domI, C, Off., i. 22, 76 ; of little valus are arms abroad unless there is wisdom at home, lacSre homl, C, Cat,, i. 10, 26 ; to lie on the ground. 2, Appositions are put in the Ablative, commonly with in, and regu- larly follow when qualified by an attribute : MflitSs Albae oOnstitOnuit in orbe opportlinS, C, Ph., iv. 2, 6 ; the sol. diers halted at Alba, a conveniently situated town. 1 88 PBEPOSITIONS. Areh^ AntioehlM nitui est oeleM quondam nrbe, C, Arch., 3, 4 ; Archi4M WCLS horn at Antioch, once a populous city. When nrbe, city, oppidO, toum, or Inaulft, island, precedes, the prep- osition is always employed : In nrbe BOmS, in the city (of) Rome, In oppidO CitiOi in the ioum of Citium. In IniolS 8am0) i?i the island (of) Samos. 3. DomI takes the possessive pronoun in the Genitive : DomI suae lenex est mdrtniU) C, N,D., iii. 32, 81 ; the old man died at his oum house* Metnii at meae domi dlrStnr dlligenter, Tkk., Hec., 257 ; you fear that she will not be carefully nursed at my house. Also aliftiae domni (61, r. 2), C, Tusc., i. 22, 51 ; in a strange house; domI ililns, C, Div. m Caec, 18, 58 ; m his house. But in domO PericU (05), Nep., vii. 2, 1 ; in the housei^iold) of Pericles. In domO oaatS, in a pure house. In domO, in the house (not, at home). PREPOSITIONS. 412. The Prepositions serve to define more narrowly the ideas of place involved in the cases. The analogy of the local adverbs is followed by other adverbs, which are not so much prepositions as preposi- tional adverbs. The cases used with Prepositions are the Accusative and Ablative. The Accusative, as the case of the Direct Object, represents the relation whither? the Ablative represents the relations wheiice f and where 9 PrepoBitions derive their name from the fact that they are prefixed in composition. Many of the Latin Prepositions are not used in composition, and these may be called improper Prepositions. The prefixes amb- (am- an-), die (dl), por- (porr-, pol-), red- (re-), sSd- (b6-),' and yS- are sometimes called inseparable prepositions. 413. Position of the Preposition, — The Preposition gen- erally precedes the case. Remarks. — 1. Com always follows a personal pronoun, and may or may not follow a relative pronoun : m6cnm, with me ; qnOcxun or com qu5, ufith whom. DO is not uncommonly placed after qu5 and qu5, rarely after qnibns. Dissyllabic Prepositions are postponed more often. Tenus, cw far as, and yerans, -ward, always follow. 2. When the substantive has an attribute the Preposition may come between : hanc ob oauiam (C, Br., 24, 94), for this reason. In poetry and later prose both Preposition and attribute are some- times postponed : mettl in mSgnOi L., ix. 37, 11; in great fear. PREPOSITIONS. 189 3. The Preposition may be separated from its case by a word or two : post YfirO Sullae yiotOriam, but after Sulla*8 victory; ad befttO Ylvendnm, for living happily. 414. Repetition and Omission of the Preposition. — With different words, the Preposition is repeated, (a) when the Preposition is emphatic, or (h) when the individual words are to be distinguished ; as is the case after aut — aut, et — et, nee — nee, vel — ^vel, ndn modo — sed etiam, sed, nisi, quam, and in comparative clauses with ut. Otherwise it is omitted ; so always with que. Et ez urbe et ex agrXs, C, Cat.f 11. 10, 21; both from (the) city and from (the) country, De honOre aut dfi dignitste contendimus, C, Tuac.t iii. 21, 50 ; u;e are striving about office, or about position. Remarks. — 1. When a relative follows in the same construction as its antecedent, the Preposition is usually omitted. C^On inddit in eandem invidiam (in) quam pater lauB, Nep., v. 3, 1 ; Cimon fell into the sam^e disrepute into which his father had fallen, (2, 3) 4. Two Prepositions are rarely used with the same word. Either the word is repeated, a form of is used, or one Pi*ep. turned into an adverb : PrQ ScIiaOne et adversus ScIpiOnem, L., xxix. 19, 10 ; for and against Scipio, Ante ptlgnam et post earn, before and after the battle, Et in corpore et eztrfi, C, Fin.^ 11. 21, 68 ; both in the body and outside, 1. Prepositions Construed witli the Accusative. 416. The Prepositions construed with the Accusative are : Ad, adversnSy ante, apud, circft, circnm, circiter, cis, citrft, contra, erga, extra, infra, inter, intra, iuxta, ob, penes, per, (pone) post, praeter, prope, propter, secundum, supra, trans, tdtra, usque, versus. 1. Ad. Of Motion Whither, to, up to. Of Direction, towards. Of Respect, for, with regard to. Of Manner, afteVy according to. Of Place, at. Of Time, at. With Numerals, about. Of Purpose, for» 2. Adversus (-xim), [i.e., turned /o]. Towards, over against, against. 3. Ante [i.e., over against, facing']. Of Place Where, before. Of Time, before ; the most frequent use. 4. Apnd is used chiefly of Persons. At the house of (characteristic locality). In the presence of. In the vmtings of. In the view of. Of Place, at, in (= in). In phrases like apod b6 esiM) to be iuooiu^ & Eeu%&. 1 90 PREPOSITIONS. 5. Cirefi, oironm. Around, dronm is exclusively local. Giroft also means about, of Time or Number. 6. Cirdter. Usually of Time, about, especially with numerals. 7. Gil, dtrfi, of Place, this side, short of, Citri, of Time, within, this side of. Without {stopping short of). (8) 9. ContrS. Opposite to, over against, opposed to, against, 10. ErgS. Opposite, towards. Usually of friendly disposition ; rarely of Place. 11. EztrS. Without, outside of, beside, 12. InfrS. Beneath, lower dotvn; of Space, Rank, or Grade. 13. Inter. Between; of Place Where, rarely of Place Whither. Of Time, during, 14. Intrfi. Within. Of Place and Time. 15. IlixtS [i.e., adjoining]. Bard by, near, next to. Usually of Place. 16. Ob [i.e,, over agaifist, opposite to]. Rarely of Place, right before. Usually of Cause, for. 17. Penes. With = in the hands of; usually of Persons. 18. Per. Of Space, through; of Time, during ; of Cause, owing to; of Instrument, by (both persons and things) ; of Manner, by, in. It is also used in oaths, by, 19. PQne. Behind, only of Place, and rare. 20. Post. Of Place, behind; rare. Of Time, after. Of Rank, sub- ordinate to. 21. Praeter. Of Place, in front of, on before, past. Also, except ; contrary to. Of Rank, beyond. 22. Prope. Usually of Place, near, Propius and prozimns also occur occasionally as prepositions. 23. Propter. Of Place, near. Of Cause, on accotmt of, 24. Secandnm \i.e,, following]. Of Time, immediately after. Of Series, next to. Of Reference, according to. 25. Snprfi. Of Place, above, beyond. Of Grade, above, 26. TrSns. On the other side, beyond, across ; only of Place. 27. UltrS. Of Space and Measure, on that side, beyond, (28) 2"^. Versus, -ward. Usually with names of Towns, and small Islands ; otherwise with the prepositions ad or in. 11. Prepositions Construed with the Ablative. 417. Prepositions construed with the Ablative are a (ab, abs), coram, com, de, e (ex), prae, prd, sine, tenus. I. A (ab, abs). Of Place Whence, from; so in phrases, S tergO, from (on) the rear, S caiate, etc. Of Cause, from. Of Agent, by. Of Re- mote Origin, from,. Of Time, from. PREPOSITIONS. 191 Note.— The fonn before vowels and h is always ab ; before consonants usually S, though ab is not uncommon before consonants other than the labials b| f| P| Y) and is frequent before 1, n, r, s, and i ( j) ; abs is found only before tfi. (2) 3. coram. Face to face tuith, in the presence of, 4. Cnm. With ; of Accompaniment in the widest sense. 5. D6. Of Place, down from, and then /row; especially with com- pounds of dfi and ex. Of Source, from. Of Origin. Of Object, con- ceming. Of the Whole from which a part is taken. 6. £ (ex). Of Place, out of from. Of Time, from. Of Origin, from. Of Reference, accordijig to. Note.— E is used before consonants only, ez before both vowels and consonants. (7) 8. Palam, in the sense of oOrani) in the presence of, is very rare. 9. Prae. Of Place, in front of. Of the Preventive Cause, for. Of Comparison, in comparison with. 10. Pro, Of Place, before; rare and in phrases. In behalf of. Instead of. In proportioti to, (11, 12) 13. Sine, without, is opposed to earn. 14. TenuS) to the extent of Of Space (actual and transferred), as far as. It is regularly put after its case. 111. Prepositions Construed witli the Accusative and Ablative. 418. Prepositions construed with the Accusative and Ab- lative are in, sub, subter, super. 1. In. (a) With Accusative : Of Place, into, into th^e midst of. Of Disposition and Direction, towards. Of Time, into, for. Of Purpose or Destination, for. Of Manner, in, after. With Distributives, to, among, (&) With Ablative : Of Place, in, on. Of Time, within. Of Refer- ence, in the case of, in regard to, in the matter of. Of Condition, in, 2. Sub. (a) With Accusative : Of Place Whither, under. Of Time Approaching, about; just Past, immediately after. Of Condition, under, {b) With Ablative : Of Place Where, under. Of Time When, about. Of Position, under. Of Condition, under, 3. Subter, tinder, (a) With Accusative ; rare, and locally equal to sab. (J) With the Ablative ; more rare and almost wholly poetical. 4. Super, (a) Usually of Place, over, above. Post-classical. (&) With the Ablative : Of Space, above. Of Time, dur-iug. 192 INFINITIVE. INFINITIVE. The Infinitive as a Substantive. 419. The Infinitive is the substantive form of the verb. It corresponds to the English Infinitive and to the English verbal substantive in -ing : AmSre, to love ; t?ie loving. The Infinitive differs from a verbal substantive in that it may take an adverb and has voice and the construction of the verb : AmSre, to love ; valdfi amfire, to love hugely ; amfirl, to be loved ; amSre aliquem, to love a man; nocSre alicnl, to hurt a man, 420. The Subject of the Infinitive, expressed or unex- pressed, is in the Accusative Case, and the Predicate of* that Subject is, of course, in the Accusative Case. BSgein esse, to he king. Bonom esse, to he good. Quid stnltius qnam aliquem sibi plaeftre 1 Sen., E.M., 74, 17 ; what is more foolish than for a man to he pleased with himself f So in the paradigm of the verb : AmfttUmm esse, to he ahout to love, 421. The Infinitive, as a substantive, is used regularly in two cases only — Nominative and Accusative. The other cases are supplied by the Gerund and the Supine. Remarks. — 1. The Inf. is occasionally used to express Design, par- ticularly in the poets, never in good prose. Semper in Ooeanom znittit mS qnaerere gemxnSs, Prop., ii. 16, 17 ; she is always sending me to the Ocean to look for pearls, 2. Similarly after some adjectives of capability^ ability, necessity, etc. , especially in the poets, where model prose requires Sup. in -til or a Final clause. The Infinitive as a Subject. 422. The Infinitive, as a Subject, is treated as a neuter substantive. Indpere moltO est quam inpetrSre facilios, Pl., Foen., 974 ; beginning is much easier (work) than winning, NOn tarn torpe fait vincI quam contendisse decOmm est, Ov., ilf., ix. 6 ; *twas not so . much dishonor to be beaten, as His an honor to have struggled. INFINITIVE. 193 The Infinitive as an Object. 423. I. The Infinitive is used as the Object of Auxiliary Verbs. 2. Such verbs denote Will, Power, Duty, Habit, Inclination, Re- solve, Continuance, End, and the Uke, with their opposites. Smorl cnpiO, Ter., Heaut., 971 ; I want to die, Sed precor at posBim tutiiis esse miser, Ov., Tr., v. 2, 78 ; but I pray that I may he more safely wretched, Vincere scIS, Hannibal ; victOriS lltl nescls, L., xxii. 51 ; how to wi7i vic- tory, you knoWy Hannibal ; how to make use of victory, you know not. Qui mentlrl solet, pSierSre cOnsnSvit, C, Rose. Com,, 16, 46 ; he who is wont to lie is accustomed to swear falsely, Vnlnera qnae ftcit dfibnit ipse patl, Ov., Am., n. 3, 4 ; the wounds he gave he should himself have suffered. Miser CatuUe, dfisinfis ineptXre, Cat., viii. i ; poor, poor Catullus, prithee cease to play the fool. So habeO, I have (it in my power). Tantnm habeQ pollicSrI mS tibi cnmnlSte satisfACtllnim, C, Fam., i. 5A, 3 ; so much I can promise, that 1 will give you abundant satisfaction. Remarks. — (1, 2) 3. Notice that coepi, / have begun, and dfisinO, 1 cease, are used in Pf. pass, with passive Infinitives. BeUO AthenifinsSs nndiqne premi sunt coeptli Nep., xiii. 3, 1 ; the Athenians began to feel the pressure of war on {from) all sides. VeterSs OrStiOnSs legl sunt dSsitae, C, Br,, 32, 123 ; the old speeches have ceased to be read. When the passives are really reflexives or neuter, the active forms may be used. 4. Verbs of Will and Desire take nt as well as the Infinitive. So regularly optO, I choose, in classical prose. See 546. 5. Verbs which denote Hope, Promise, and Threat take the same tenses as verbs of Saying and Thinking (530). SabraptfLmm paUam prOmlsit tibI, Pl., Asin,, 930; he promised to steal the mantle from you. But they are also treated occasionally as in English. 6. DoceO, I teach, iubeO, Ibid, vet5, 1 forbid, sinO, I let, take tlie Inf. as a Second Accusative (339) : Dionysins tondSre ffliSs suSs docoit, C, Tusc, v. 20, 58 ; Dioiiysius taught his daughters to shave (taught them shaving). Ipse inbot mortis tfi meminisse dens, Mart., ii. 59 ; a god himself bids you remember (376) death, Yltae snmma brevis spem nOs vetat incboSre longam, H., 0,, i. 4, 15 ; life's brief sun forbids us open (a) long (account with) ho^e. 13 194 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. Nea linlf KSdOs eqnitfire innltte, H., 0., i. 2, 51 ; nor let the Median ride and ride unpunished. The Infinitive as a Predicate. 424. The Infinitive, as a verbal substantive, may be used as a Predicate after the copula ease, to be, and the like. DoctO homini et SrndltO Ylvere est oOgitSre, C, Tvac., t. 38, 111 ; ^o a learned and cultivated man to live is to think, living is thinking, GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 425. The other cases of the Infinitive are supplied by the Gerund. With Prepositions, the Gerund, and not the In- finitive, is employed. N. Legere difficile est, reading (to read) is hard to do, G. Ars legendl, the art of reading, Puer stadiOsus est legendl, the hoy is zealous of reading. D. Puer operam dat legendO, the hoy devotes himself to reading, Ac. Puer cupit legere, the hoy is desirous to read. Puer prOpensus est ad legendum, the hoy has a hent toward reading, Ab. Puer discit legends, the hoy learns hy reading. Remark. — The Infinitive is sometimes quoted : Kultum interest inter " dare'* et "aedpere,*^ Sen., Ben., 5, 10 ; there is a vast difference between ** Give " and ^^ Receive.'^ 426. The Gerund, like the Infinitive, takes the same case as the verb. HominSs ad delta ntUlS rfi propius aocSdunt, quam saltltem hominibus dandO, C, Jjig,^ 12, 38 ; men draw nearer to the gods hy nothing so much as hy bringing deliverance to their fellouym^ti, 427. Gerundive for Gerund, — Instead of the Gerund, with an Accusative Object, the object is generally put in the case of the Gerund, with the Gerundive as an Attribute. G. Plficandl Del, of appeasing God. D. PlficandO DeQ, for appea>sing God, Ab. PlficandO DeO, hy appeasing God. In model prose this construction is invariably employed with Prep- ositions. Ad plSoandOs Belta, for appeasing the gods (C, Cat,, iii. 8, 20). In plScandls BiXs, in appeasing the gods. GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 1 95 Remarks. — (1, 2) 3. Neuter adjectives and pronouns are not at- tracted : aliqnid faoiendl ratio, C, Inv., i. 25, 36 ; method of doing some- thing. But when the neuter adjective has become a substantive (204, R. 2), the Gerundive form may be used : cupiditSs vfirl videndl, C, Fin., 11. 14, 40 ; the desire of seeing the truth. 4. The Gerundive with personal construction can be formed only from Transitive Verbs, like other passives (217). Hence the impersonal form must be used for all verbs that do not take the Accusative. Ad nOn pfirendma senStnl, L., xlii. 9 ; for not obeying the senate. 5. Note as an exception to the foregoing rule that the Gerundives from lltor, fraor, fangor, potior, vescor (407), have the personal construc- tion, but usually only in the oblique cases. Genitive of thie Gerund and Gerundive. 428. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is used chiefly after substantives and adjectives which require a complement. Sapientia an Ylvendl putanda est, C, Fin,, i. 13, 42 ; philosophy is to he considered the art of living. Trlste est nOmen ipsnm carendl, C, I'usc., i. 36, 87 ; dismal is the mere word " carSre " {go without), NOn est plScandl spSs mihi nUlla Del, Ov., TV., v. 8, 22 ; I am not without hope of appeasing God, Ignorant cnpidl maledlcendl plfls invidiam quam oonvlcinm posse, Quint., VI. 2, 16 ; those who are eager to abuse know not that envy has more power than billingsgate, Nenter sni prOtegendl corporis memor (erat), L. , 11. 6, 9 ; neither thought of shielding his oum body. Remarks. — 1. As mel, tul, snl, nostrl, vestrl, are neuter singulars, from menm, my being , tnum, thy being , snnm, one^s being, etc,, the Ger- undive is put in the same form : cOnservandl snl, of preserving them- selves ; vestrl adhortandl, of exhorting you ; and no regard is had to number or gender. COpia plScandl sit mode parva tnl, Ov., Her. 20, 74 ; let (me) only have a slight chance of trying to appease you (feminine). 2. The Gen. of the Gerund and Gerundive is used very commonly with cansS, less often with grStiS, and rarely with (antiquated) ergO, on account of, to express Design : Bissimnlandl cansS in senStnm vOnit, S., C, 31, 52 ; ^6 came into the senate for the purpose of dissimulation. With many substantives and adjectives the Infinitive is also allow- able (422). Sometimes there is a difference in meaning ; thus tempns with Gerund, the proper time {season)^ with Int, ?ixgli time. 196 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE, Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive. 429. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used chiefly after words that denote Fitness and Function. The more common construction is ad with the Accusative. Lignum firidum mfiteria est idOnea filioiendls Ignibui, Cf. Sen., N.Q,, II. 22, 1 ; dry wood is a Jit substance for striking fire {dravnng out sparks). So particularly after esse : SolvendO clyitStSs nOn erant, Cf, C, JVzm., III. 8, 2 ; ths communities were not {the people) to pay, {ready to pay, solvent). Scit s6 esse onerl ferendO, Sen., E.M., •ji,26 ; he knows that he is {man enough) to bear the burden. Similarly oomitia decemvirls ereandls, C, Leg.Agr., 2, 8 ; assemblies for creating decemvirs. Accusative of the Gerundive. 430. The Accusative of the Gerundive is used after such verbs as Giving and Taking, Sending and Leaving, Letting, Contracting, and Undertaking. BlvitI hominl id aunim servandum dedit, Pl., B,, 338 ; he gave that gold to a rich man to keep. ConOn mflrOs reficiendOs c1lrat| Nep., ix. 4, 5 ; Conoji has tlie walls rebuilt. Patriam dlripiendam reUqnimuS) C, Fam,^ xvi. 12, 1 ; we have left our country to be plundered, Carvilius aedem fiacieiidam loeSvit, L., x. 46, 14; Carvilius let the (con- tract of) building the temple. The passive form has the Nominative : Bemfitrius ad patrem redtLcendus l^tls datus est, L., xxxvi. 35, 13 ; Demetrius was given to the envoys to be taken back to his father. Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive. 431. The Ablative of the Gerund or Gerundive is used as the Ablative of Means and Cause, seldom as the Ablative of Manner or Circumstance. Unus homo nOhXs ounotandO restitnit rem, Ennius (C, Cat.M., 4, 10) ; one man by lingering raised our cause again, Plausum meO nOmine recitandO ded6nmt, Cf, C, Att., iv. i, 6 ; they clapped when my name was read. SUPINE. 197 Prepositions with the Gerund and Gerundive. 432. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive fol- lows the preposition ad, seldom ante, circa, ergft, in, inter, ob, propter, and super. See 427. NtUla r6B tantmn ad dlcendnm prOfldt qoantam scrlptiO, C, Br,, 24, 92; nothing is so profitable for speaking as is tpriting. Inter spoliandam corpus hostis ezspfrSviti Cf, L., 11. 20, 9 ; while in the a^t of stripping the body of the enemy he gave up the ghost, 433. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive takes the prepositions ab, de, ex, often in, but seldom cum, pro, and super. librX dfi contemnendfi glOriS, C, Tusc, i. 15, 34 ; books on the con- tempt of glory, Ez dlsoeiidO capiimt voluptstem, Cf, C, Fin., y. 18, 48 ; they receive pleasure from learning, Brutus in Uberandfi patriS (= dum Uberat) est interfeetus, C, Cat.M., 20, 75 ; Brutus was slain in the effort to free his country, SUPINE. • 434. The Supine is a verbal substantive, which appears only in the Accusative and Ablative cases. The Accusative Supine. 435. The Supine in -turn is used chiefly after verbs of Motion, to express Design. OaUiae IfigfitI ad Caesarem grfitulfitum conv6n6runt, Caes., B,G,, i. 30, 1 ; the commissioners of Gaul waited on Caesar to congratulate him, SpectStum veniunt ; veniunt speetentur ut ipsae, Ov., A.A.,j.()g; they come to see the show ; they come to be themselves a show, OaUI cum sOle eunt cubitum, Plin., N,n.y x. 24, 46 ; cocks go to roost with the sun ijat sunset). Remark. — The Fut. Inf. passive is actually made up of the passive Inf. of Ire, to go, W (that a movement is made, from Itur ; 208, 2), and the Supine : Bllmor venit datum Irl gladifitOrSs, Tea., Ilec., 39 ; the rumor comes that gladiators {gladiatorial shows) are going to be given. The consciousness of this is lost, as is shown by the Nom. (528). Beus danmStum Irl vidSbStur, Quint., ix. 2, 88 ; the accused seemed to be about to be condemned. 198 PARTICIPLE — ADVERB. The Ablative Supine. 436. The Supine in -tu is used chiefly withAdjectives, as the Ablative of Respect (397). It never takes an object. KlrSbile dietii, wonderful {in the telling) to tell, ylfell, to hehdld. Id dictft quam r6 fiudliui est, L., xxxi. 38, 4 ; that ia easier in the saying than in the fact (easier said than done), PARTICIPLE. 487. The Participle may be used as a substantive, but even then generally retains something of its verbal nature. Hihil est mSgn^nm somniantl, C, Div,, 11. 68, 141 ; nothing is greai to a dreamer {to a man, when he is dreaming). SSgia r6s est succnrrere Ifipsis, Ov., Pont., 11. 9, 11 ; it is a kingly thing {to run to catch those who have slipped), to succor the fallen. Remark. — The Attribute of the Participle, employed as a sub- stantive, is generally in the adverbial form : rSoM facta, right actions ; facets dictum, a witty remark, 438. The Participle, as an adjective, often modifies its verbal nature, so as to be characteristic, or descriptive. EpamlnOndSs erat tempcribus sapienter fttfins, Nep., xv. 3, 1 ; Upa- minondas was a man who made (to make) wise use of opportunities (= is qui ftteretur). SenectlU est operOsa et semper agSus aliquid, Cf, C, Cat.M., 8, 26 ; old age is busy, arid always doing something. Remarks. — 1. Especial attention is called to the parallelisni of the participle or adjective with the relative and Subjunctive : Kflxiera nOn ad deliciSs muliebrfis quaeslta nee quibus nova nftpta eOmC- tur, Tag., Oerm., 18 ; gifts not sought out for woman's fancies, nor those hy which a bride adorns herself, 2. Tlie Fut. Part is used after verbs of motion to express Design ; but this is rare in model prose; see 670, 3. ADVERB. 489. Adverbs qualify verbs, adjectives, and other adverbs, also sometimes substantives, when they express or imply verbal or adjective relations. Kale vlvit, h>e lives ill; bene est, it is well; ADVERB. 199 ferfi omnfif, almost all ; admodnm adnlSicSiui, a mere youth ; nimis Baepe, too often; lst6 r6x (V., A., i. 21), wide-ruling ; bis consul, twice consul; duo sizniil bella, two simultaneous wars. 440. Position of the Adverb. — Adverbs are commonly put immediately before the words they qualify. They occasionally follow the verb. IniOstfi facit, he a^ts unjustly, Admodnm pnloher, handsome to a de- gree, very handsome. Valde dlligenter, very carefully. Remark. — Exceptions occur chiefly in rhetorical passages, in which great stress is laid on the adverb, or in poetry : Iram bene Ennins initinm d&dt InsSniae, C, Tusc, it. 23, 52 ; well did Ervnius call anger the beginning of madness. Visit dnm vlxit bene, Tee., Hec, ^61 ; Tie lived while Tie lived (and lived) well, Neg^ative Adverbs. 441. There are two original negatives in Latin, ne and hand (hanty han). From ne is derived n5n. 442. Won (the absolute not) is the regular Negative of the Indicative and of the Potential Subjunctive. Qnem amat, amat; qnem nOn amat, nOn amat, Petr., 37 ; whom she HTceSf sTie liTces ; whom sTie does not liJce, she does not liTce. HOn ansim, 1 should not venture. Remarks. — 1. HOn, as the emphatic, specific negative, may negative anything. (See 270, r. 1.) 2. HOn is the rule in antitheses : HOn est vlvere sed valOre vita. Mart., VI. 70, 15 ; not living, hut being well, is life. 448. Hand is the negative of the single word, and in model prose is not common, being used chiefly with adjec- tives and adverbs : hand qnisqnam, not any ; hand magnns, not great ; hand male, not badly. 444. I. Ke is the Negative of the Imperative and of the Optative Subjunctive. Til no code malls, V., A,, vi. 95 ; yield not thou to misfortunes. Ho trSnsierls HibOrnm, L., xxt. 44, 6 ; do not cross the Ehro. HO vlvam, si sciO, C, Att,, rv. 16, 8 ; may I cease to live (strike me dead), if ITcnow. 200 ADVERB. 2. ITe is continued by neve or neu. H6 illam vSndit, neu m6 perdfis hominem amantom, Pl., JPb, , 322 ; donU sell her, and don't ruin me, a fellow in love. 446. Stihdivision of the Negative. — A negative may be 8u])divided by neqne — neque, as well as by ant — ant, or strengthened by ne — qnidem, not even, Hihil nmqnam neque Ixuolfins neque glOriOtom ez Ore TIimolooiitiB prO- cSssit, Xep., XX. 4, 2 ; nothing insolent or boastful ever came out of the mouth of Timoleon. COnBdOnuiL n6m$ aut latnit aut fOgit, L., xxiv. 5, 14 ; of the aeeom' plices no one either hid or fled. Hoinqnam ScIpiOnem 116 minimfi quidem r6 offendl, C, Lasl., 27, 103 ; I never wounded Scipio*8 feelingay no, not even in the slightest maiter. ** I will give no thousand crowns, n«i/A«r. "—Shaks., As Tou Like //, i. x, 78. 446. Negative Combinations. — In English, we say either no one ever, or, never any one ; nothing ever, or, never any- thiyig ; in Latin, the former turn is invariably used ; ndmO nmqnam, no one ever. Verrfii nihU nrnqoam ftoit sine aliquO quaestft, C, Verr., v. 5, 11 ; Ver- res never did anything without some profit or other. Remark. — No one yet is nOndnm quisquam ; no more, no longer, is iam nOn. 447. ITegd {I say no, I deny) is commonly used instead of died n5n, / say — not. Vel al vel negS, Accius, 125 (e.) ; say yes or say no ! Assem sfiiS dattlrum negat, C, Quinct., 5, 19 ; he says that he will not give a copper. 448. Position of the Negative. — The Negative usually stands immediately before the Predicate, but may be placed before any emphatic word or combination of words. H6— quidem, not even, bestrides the emphatic word or group. Fotes nOn revertl, Sen., E.M., 49, 10 ; possibly you may not return (n5n potes revertl, you cannot possibly return). Saepe virl faUunt ; tenerae nOn saepe pueUae, Ov., A. A., iii. 31 ; often do men deceive ; soft-hearted maidens not often. HOn omnis aetSs, Lyde, lUdO oonvenit, Pl., B., 129 ; not every age, (good) Lydus (Playfair), sorts with play. H6 obsidibus quidem datis pficem redimere potti6nmt, Cf. Caes., B.G., I* 37» 2 ; they could not buy back peace, even by giving, hostages. INCOMPLETE SElrt'ENCE. 20I 449. Two negatives in the same sentence destroy one another, and make an affirmative, but see 445 : HOn negO, I do not deny (I admit). Remarks. — 1. HOn poisnin nOn, I cannot "but (I must) : Qui mortem in malls pOnit nOn potest earn nOn timSre, C, Fin,, in. 8, 29 ; he who classes death among misfortunes ccmnot but (must) fear it, (2, 3) 4. Of especial importance is the position of the Negative in the following combinations : Indefinite Affirmative, General Affirmative. nOnnihil, somewhat; nihil nOn, everything; nOnnSmS, some one, some ; n8mS nOn, everybody ; nOnnfOU, some people; ntUU nOn, all; nOnnnmqnam, sometimes; nnmqnamnOn, always; nOnnOsqnam, somewhere ; nOsqnam nOn, everywhere. In ipsS ottris nOnnimS hoetis est, C, Mur., 39, 84 ; in the senate house itself there are enemies (n6m8 nOn hoetis est, everybody is cm enemy). HOn est plScandl spOs mihi ntQla Del, Ov., Tr,, v. 8, 22 (428) ; I have some hope of appeasing Ood (nlllla spOs nOn est, I have every hope). HOmS nOn didicisse mSvnlt qnam discere, Quint., hi. i, 6 ; everybody prefers having learned to learning, INCOMPLETE SENTENCE. Interrogative Sentences. 460. An interrogative sentence is necessarily incomplete. It is completed by the answer. 461. A question may relate : {a) To the verb : Predicate Question : Vlvitne pater t Pl., Gapt., 282 ; is my father alive f {h) To some other part of the sentence, such as Subject, Object, Adjective, Adverb : Nominal Question. Quis est t Who is it f Qnid ais t What do you say f Qnl hio mOs t What sort of way is this f Clir nOn disoOdis t Why do you not depart f For a list of Interrogative Pronouns see 104. 462. I. Interrogative sentences are divided into simple and compound (disjunctive). Am 19 (simple) ; Am /, or am I not 9 (disjunctive). 2. Interrogative sentences are further divided into direct and iiidirecty or independent and dependent. Am 19 (di- rect) ; He asks whether I am (indirect). 202 DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS. « DIRECT SIMPLE QUESTIONS. 468. Direct simple questions sometimes have no inter- rogative sign. Such questions are chiefly passionate in their character, and serve to express Astonishment, Blame, Disgust. Inftllx est Falnrieiuf quod rlli innm foditt Sen., Dial., i* 3* 6 ; Fahri- cius 18 unhappy because he digs his own field 9 (Impossible I) Heui, inqnit, lingaam vis meam praeclndere t Phaedb., i. 23, 5 ; Ho ! ho ! qtwth he, you wish to shut my mouth, you do f (You shall not.) Tnnm paratltnm nOn nOviitlt Pl., Men,, 505 ; you dont know your own parasite f (Strange !) 464. Interrogative Particles. Ke (enclitic) is always appended to the emphatic word, and generally serves to denote a question, without indicating the expectation of the speaker. This emphatic word usually begins the sentence. OnmiBiie peclLnia diisolftta esti Q., Verr., iii. 77, 180; is all the money paid out f (Estne omnii pecOnia dissoltlta t is all the money paid out f) 466. ITOnne expects the answer Yes, HOnne meministi t C, Fin,, 11. 3, 10 ; do you not remember? HOnne is generOeissimiif qui optimuf t Quint., y. ii, 4 ; is he not the truest gentleman who is the best man f So the other negatives with -ne : nSmOne, nihilne, and the like. 456. ITum expects the answer No, Hnrnqais est hlc alius praeter m6 atqne t6 1 H6m0 est, Pl., Tr., 69 ; is anybody here besides you and me f No, 457. I. An [or) belongs properly to the second part of a disjunctive question. Sometimes, however, the first part of the disjunctive question is left out. The second alternative with an (or, then) serves to indicate Re- monstrance, Expostulation, Surprise, or Irony. HOn mannm abstinfis t An tibi iam mfivls cerebrnin disperg^am hic t Ter., Ad,, 781; are you not going to keep your hands off f Or would you rather have me scatter your brains over the place 7iow f An nescis longSs rSgibus esse manUs t Ov., Her., 16, 166 ; (my hus- band keeps guard, though absent. Is it not so ?) or perhaps you do not know {you do not know, then) that kings have long hands (arms). INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 203 2. Especially to be noted, in connection with an, are the phrases, nesdO an, liand idO an, I do not know hut; dubitO an, I doubt, I doubt hut = I am inclined to think. Hand idO an ita sit, C, Tusc, ii. 17, 41 ; I do not know hut it is so. DubitO an ThrasybfUnm prfmnm omnium pOnam, Nep., yiii. i, 1 ; / doubt but I should (= I am inclined to think I should) put Thrasybulus first of all, DIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 458. Direct Disjunctive Questions have the following forms : First Clause. Second and Subsequent Clauses. utrnm, whether ^ an (anne), or -ne, an, an (anne). ITtnun nescis qnam altS ascenderis, an prO nihilO id pntSs! C, Fam., X. 26, 3 ; are you not aware how high you have mounted^ or do you count that as nothing f VOsne Domitinm an vOs Domitini dSsendtl Caes., B.C., 11. 32, 8 ; have you deserted Domitius, or has Domitius deserted you f Eloqnar an sileamt Y., ^., in. 39 ; shall I speak, or hold my peace f 459. In direct questions, or not is anndn, rarely necne; in indirect^ neone, rarely anndn. Isne est quem quaerO, annOnI Tee., Ph., 852 ; is that the man lam looking for, or not f Sitque memor nostrl neone, referte milil, Ov., Tr., iv. 3, 10 ; bring me hack (word) whether she thinks of us or no, INDIRECT QUESTIONS. 460. Indirect questions have the same particles as the direct, with the following modifications. 1 . simple Questions. (a) ITam loses its negative force, and becomes simply whether, SpeeulSrI itUwOnint nam soUicitStl animl BoeiOrnm essent, L., xlii. 19, 8 ; they ordered them to spy out whether the allies had been tampered with. 204 MOODS IN INTERUOGATIVB SENTENCES. (J) Si, iff is used for whether^ chiefly after verbs and sen- tences implying trial. Compare 5 si (261). TemptftU r6f est si prlmO impettl oapl Ardoa posaet, L., i. 57, 2 ; an attempt was made (in case, in hopes that, to see) if Ardea cotUd be taken by a dash, 2. Disjunctive Questions. In addition to the forma for Direct Questions (458), a form with -ne in the second clause only is sometimes found in the Indirect Question. Tarquiniuf Prliel Tarqninil rSgii fUiiu nepOene faerit panun liquet, L., I. 46, 4 ; whether Tarquin was the son or grai^dson of King Tarquin the Elder does not appear, SUMMARY OF DIRECT AND INDIRECT DISJUNCTIVE QUESTIONS. 461. Direct. la the last syllable short or long f Cf, C, Or., 64, 217. Foetrema syllaba utrnm hrevis est an longa t hrevisne est an longa t Indirect. In a verse it makes no difference whether the last syllable be short or long : ' ntmm postrOma syllaba brevis sit an longa. postrSma syllaba brevisne sit an longa. In verstl nihU rfifert j pogtrfima syUaba brevis an longa sit (Cicero). postrema syllaba brevis sit longane. MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 1. In Direct Questions. 462. The Mood of the question is determined by the Mood of the answer. 463. Indicative questions expect an Indicative answer, when the question is geiiuine. A. Qnis homi est t B. Ego stun, Ter., And,, 965 ; who is that f It is I, A. VIvitne pater t B. yivnmUqmmus, Pl., Cap/., 282 ; is his father living f We left him alive. MOODS IN INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. 20$ 464. Indicative questions anticipate an Indicative answer in the negative when the question is rhetorical and no answer is expected. Qnis nOn panportfitem extimfiicit 1 C, Tusc, v. 31, 89 ; who does not dread poverty f 465. Subjunctive questions which expect Imperative an- swers are put chiefly in the First Person, when the ques- tion is deliberative, A. Abeam t B. Abl, Pl., Merc, 749 ; shall I go away 9 Oo. TTtTum Buperbiam prius commemorem an crildfilitfitem t C, Verr,^ i. 47, 122 ; shall I mention the insolence first or the cruelty f Remark. — So in the representative of the First Person in dependent discourse (265). 466. Subjunctive questions anticipate a Potential answer in the negative, when the question is rhetorical. Quia hoc crSdat 1 who would believe this f [No one.] Quid faceret aliud t what else was he to do f [Nothing.] Quia dubitet quln in virttlte dlvitiae sint 1 C, Parad., yt. 2, 48 ; who can doubt that trv^ wealth consists in virtue f [No one.] Kemabe. — On the Exclamatory Question see 534, 558, 2. In Indirect Questions. 467. The Dependent Interrogative is always in the Sub- junctive. The Subjunctive may represent the Indicative. GOnsIderSbimus quid ftcerit (Indie, ftoit), qnid feudat (Indie, faeit), qnid factUrus sit (Indie, fooiet or faotHrus est), Cf. C, Inv,, i. 25, 36 ; we will consider what he has done, what he is doing, what he is going to do (mil do), EpamlnOndSs quaeslvit Balvusne asset oUpens, C, Fin,, 11. 30, 97 ; Upaminondas asked whether his shield was safe, (Salvnsne est 1) The Subjunctive may be original. See 265. Ipse docet qnid ag^am ; Ov., M,, iv. 428 ; he himself teaches (me) what to do (Qnid again 1 what am I to do f) QnaerO £ t6 ctLr Cornfilinm nOn dsfenderem, C, Vat., 2, 5 ; I inquire of you why I was not to defend Cornelius. (Clir nOn dtfenderemi why was I not to defend f) 206 ANTICIPATION OF THE SUBJECT. Remarks. — 1. HeidO qnii, naieiO qnid, neidO qui, naioiO quod, I know not whOy what, which, may be used exactly as indefiDite pronouns, and then have no effect on the construction. Hesdo qnid mfiius niidtiir Iliade, Prop., it. 32, 66 ; something^ 1 know not what, is coming to the birth, greater than the Iliad, 2. The Relative has the same form as the Interrogative except in the Nom. and Ace. Sing. ; hence the importance of distinguishing between them in dependent sentences. Interrogative : die quid rogem, tell me what it ia I am oMng, Relative : die quod rogO, Ter., And., 764 ; teU me that which lam asking (the answer to my question). Anticipation of the Subject. 468. The subject of the dependent clause is often treated as the object of the leading clause by Anticipation (Pro- lepsis). HOstI KfiroeUum quam tardus lit, Caelius (C, Fam., yni. 10, 8) ; you know Marcellus, what a slow creature he is. Yes and No. (469-70) 471. {a) Yes is represented : 1. By sfinS, (literally) soundly, sfinS quidem, yes indeed, etiam, even (so), vfirO, of a truth, ita, so, omnInO, by all means, oertS, surely, oertO, for certain, admodiun, to a degree, etc. Aut etiam aut nOn respondSre potest, C, Ac, 11. 32, 104; he can answer either yes or no, 2. By oSnseO, I think so; lollicet, to be sure. Quid Bl etiam occentem hymenaeumi CfinseO, Pl., Ccts., 806 ; what if I should also sing a marriage-song f I think you had better, 3. By repeating the emphatic word either with or without the con- firmatory particles, vfirO (principally with pronouns), sfinS, prOrrai, etc, Estisne 1 Sumui, are you 9 We are, DSsnel DO afinS, C, Leg,, i. 7, 21 ; <2o you gra/nt f I do indeed, {b) No is represented : 1. By nOn, nOn y6r0, nOn ita, minim6, by no means, nihil, nothing, minime vfirO, niMl sSnS, nihil minui. 2. By repeating the emphatic word with the negative : HOn IrSta est HOn sum IrSta, Pl., Cas., 1007 ; you are not angry f I am not. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 20/ (c) Yea or Nay. — ImmO conveys a correction, and either removes a doubt or heightens a previous statement : yes indeed^ nay rather, Eoquid placeant aedfii m6 rogSsI ImmO perplaoent, Pl., Moat.t 907 ; do I like the house, you ask me f Yes indeed, very much, CaoBa igitnr nOn bona est! ImmO optima, C, Att., ix. 7, 4 ; the cause, then, is a bad one f Nay, it is an excellent one. Remark. — Yes, for, and no, for, are often expressed simply by nam and enim. Tnm AntOnius: Herl enim, inquit, hOc mihi prOpotueram, C, Or,, n. 10, 40 ; then quoth Antony : Yes, for I had proposed this to myself yesterday. SYNTAX OF THE COMPOUND SENTENCE. 472. I. A compound sentence is one in which the neces- sary parts of the sentence occur more than once ; one which consists of two or more clauses. 2. Coordination (Parataxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to which the different clauses are merely placed side by side. 3. Subordination (Hypotaxis) is that arrangement of the sentence according to which one clause depends on the other. He became poor and we became rich ; the second clause is a coordinate clause. He became poor that we might be rich ; the second clause is a subordinate clause. 4. The clause which is modified is called the Principal Clause, that which modifies is called the Subordinate Clause. ** He became poor" is the Principal Clause, ^* that we might be rich " is the Subordinate Clause. COORDINATION. 478. Coordinate sentences are divided into various classes, according to the particles by which the separate clauses are bound together. Remark. — Coordinate sentences often dispense with conjunctions {Asyndeton). Then the connection must determine the character. 208 COOKDINATION. Copulative Sentences. 474. The following particles are called Copulative Con- junctions : et, -que, atqne (&c), etiam, qnoqiie. 475. £t is simply andy the most common and general par- ticle of connection, and combines likes and unlikes. PSnem et aqnam nfitflra dfltlderat) Sen., ^. Jf., 25, 4 ; hrectd andwcUer (is whut) nature calls for, ProbiUs laudfttnr et alget, Juv., i. 74 ; honesty ia hepraised and — freezes. Both — a7id is et — et : et vita et fortfLna, C, PA., x. i, 3 ; both life and fortune, 476. -flue (enclitic) unites things that belong closely to one another. The second member serves to complete or ex- tend the first. Senfitns populiuique SOmftniif, C, Plane, 37, 90 ; t?^e Senate and people of Rome. Ibi mortaoB sepultiuqae Alexander, Ij., xxxvi. 20, 5 ; there Alexander died and was buried. Que — que ; both — and, is found mainly in poetry and later prose. 477. Atque (compounded of ad and -que) adds a more important to a less important member. Ac (a shorter form, which does not stand before a vowel or h) is fainter than atque, and almost equivalent to et IntrS moenia atque in sintl urbis sunt hostfie, S., C, 52, 35 ; toithin the walls, ay, and in the heart of the city, are the enemies. A. Servusi Egol B. Atque meui, Pl., Cos,, 735 ; a slave f If And mine to boot, 478. Etiam, even {now), yet, still, exaggerates (height- ens), and generally precedes the word to which it belongs. HObIs r6i familiSris etiam ad neoessSria dSest, Cf. S./ C, 20, 11 ; we lack mea/ns even for the necessaries of life. 479. fluoque, $0 also, complements (compare que) and always follows the words to which it belongs. Cum patrl T¬hel populus statuam posuisset, fUiO quoque dedit, Cf, Nep., XIII. 2, 3 ; the people, having erected a statue in honor of the father of Timothetis, gave one to the son also (likemse). COORDINATION. 2O9 Remark. — The difference between etiam and quoque is not to be insisted on too rigidly : Grande et oOnspiounmnostrO qaoque tempore xnOnBtmm, Juv., iv. 115 ; a huge and conspicuoua prodigy, even in our day. 480. Copulation ly means of the Negative, — Instead of et and the negative, neque (nee) and the positive is the rule in Latin. OpIniOnibuf vtdgl rapimnr in errOrem neo vSra oemimni, C, Leg., 11. 17, 43 ; by the prejudices of the rabble we are hurried into error, and do not distinguish the truth. Remarks. — 1. Et — nOn, and — not, is used when the negation is con- fined to a single word, or is otherwise emphatic. 2. In combination with the negative we have the following Paradigms : And no one, neqae quisqaam, nor any one. And no, neqne tUlui, nor any. A'nd nothing, neque quidqaam, nor anything. And never, neque umquam, nor ever. Iste neque dfielderSvit quemquam, C, Ph., 11. 42, 109 ; and he missed no one, 481. I. Insertion and Omission of Copulatives. — When mnltns, much, many, is followed by another attribute, the two are often combined by copulative particles : many re- nowned deeds, mvlto, et praed&ra facinora ; many good qual- ities, multae bonaeque artfis. 2. Several subjects or objects, standing in the same rela- tions, either take et throughout or omit it throughout. The omission of it is common in emphatic enumeration. Fhrygfii et Fbidae et CilioAi, C, Div., i. 41, 92 ; or, Fhrygfie, PIsidae, Cilicfii, Phrygians, Pisidians, and Cilicians. 3. Et is further omitted in climaxes, in antitheses, in phrases, and in formulce. Virl nOn eet dfibilitfirl dolQre, frangi, Buccumbere, C, Fin., it. 29, 95 ; it is wnmanly to allow one*s self to be disabled (unnerved) by grief, to be broken-spirited, to succumb, Difficilis &cilis, ificundus acerbui, es Idem, Mart., xii. 47, 1 ; crabbed (and) kindly, sweet (and) sour, you are at once (310). Patrfie COnierlptI, Fathers (and) Conscript (Senators). Iftppiter Optimui Mfiziniuf, Father Jove, supremely good i^xa^ great, 14 210 COORDINATION. Other Particles Employed. 482. Other particles are sometimes employed instead of the copulative in the same general sense. 1. Temporal : turn — tnm, then — then; aliSs — alila, other. SUBORDINATION. 215 SUBORDINATION. Moods in Subordinate Sentences. (504-7) 508. I. Final and Consecutive Clauses, always take the Subjunctive. Others vary according to their con- ception. Especially important are the changes produced by Or&tid Obliqna. 2. OratiO Obliqua, or Indirect Discourse, is opposed to Or&tid Becta, or Direct Discourse, and gives the main drift of a speech and not the exact words. Or&tiO Obliqua, proper, depends on some Verb of Saying or Thinking expressed or implied; in it the Principal Clauses are put in the Infinitive, the Dependent in the Subjunctive. SOcratfti dieere solSbat : 0. TL Omnfti in eO quod sciont satis sunt eioqnentfti. Socrates used to say : **All men are eloquent enough in what they UNDERSTAND." 0. 0. OmnM in eo quod solrent satis esse 6loqnent6s, C, Or,, i. 14, 63. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what they UNDERSTOOD. 3. The oblique relation may be confined to one clause and not extend to the whole sentence. This may be called Partial Obliquity, See 541, 628. 9. B. Hova nllpta dicit : FleO quod Ire necesse est. The bride says : I weep because I must needs go. 0. 0. Hova nllpta dIcit se flSre quod Ire necesse sit. The bride says that she weeps because she must needs go, 0. B. Hova nllpta flet quod Ire necesse est, Cf, Cat., lxi. 81. The bride weeps because she must go, P. 0. Hova nllpta flet quod Ire necesse sit. The bride is weeping because ** she must go " (quoth she). 4. Akin to 0. 0. is the so-called Attraction of Mood, by which clauses originally Indicative are put in the Subjunc- tive because they depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives. (629.) HOn dubitO qoln nova nllpta fleat quod Ire necesse sit. I do not doubt that the bride is weeping because she must go (sit is attracted f roia eatV 2l6 SEQUENCE OF TENSES, Sequence of Tenses. 509. I. In those dependent sentences which require the Subjunctive, Principal Tenses are ordinarily followed by Principal Tenses ; Historical, by Historical. 2. This rule is subject to several modifications : 1. Tense means time, not merely tense-form, so that (a) The Historical Present may be conceived according to its sense as Past or according to its tense as Present. (220.) (b) The Pure Perfect may be felt as giving the past starting-point (Past), or the present completion (Present). (235.) 2. The effect of a past action may be continued into the present or the future of the writer (513). 3. The leading clause may itself consist of a principal and dependent clause, and so give rise to a varying Sequence (511, R. 2). 4. An original Subjunctive (467) of the past (265) often does not change, especially in the Indirect Question. 510. All forms that relate ' to the Present and Future (so especially Principal Tenses) are followed by All forms that relate to the Past (so especially Historical Tenses) are followed by ' the Present Subjunctive (for continued action) ; the Perfect Subjunctive (for completed action). ' the Imperfect Subjunctive (for continued action) ; the Pluperfect Subjunc- tive (for completed ac- tion). Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the lead- ing verb may be in itself a continued action. So in English : I do not know what he has been doing , I did not know what he had been doing. The Latin is unable to make this distinction, and so the Impf. Indie. (J was doing) is represented in this dependent form by the Perfect and Pluperfect, when the action is completed as to the leading verb. 511. Pr. (Purb cOgnOsoO, OR Hist.), FuT., cOgnOscam, Pure Pr., oOgnOvI, FuT. Pf., cOgnOverO, I am finding out, I shall (try to) find out, I have found out (I know), I shall have found out {shall know). qnid fadtbi, what you are doing ; qnid fBoerln, what you have done, what you have been doing (what you did), what you were doing (before). SEQUEIS^CE OF TENSES. 217 Hist. Pr., cOgnOsoO, / am (was) finding out, iKPT.y cOgnO8o0bam, I was finding out. Hist. Pp., cOgpiOvX, I found out, Plupp., eOgnOyeram, / had found out (I knew), qnid facerfii, what you were doing; qnid fSclBsAi, what you had done, what you had been doing, what you were doing (before). When the Subjunctive is original, we have : .._«-. T ^ J- 2 { qtiid fiEudSs, what you are to do, cOgnOscO, etc, lam finding out, 4.^- . ,. ., ''J qnid fsMorhBf what you were to do. cOgnOvI, etc., I knew, quid Ikoeres, what you were to do. Principal Tenses. Hihil r 6f ert postrSma syUaba brevis an longa sit, Cf. C, Or., 64, 217 (4G1). TTbil Caesarem r a n t (historical), nt sibi p a r a t , Caes. ,B.0., vi. 9, 7 (546, I). Hem5 adeO ferns est nt nOn xnlt6scere possit, H., Ep., i. i, 39 (552). Kec mea qnl digitis ItLmina oondat erit, Ov., Her., 10, 120 (631, 2). BfLsticns exspectat dnm def Inat amnis, IT., Ep,, i. 2, 42 (572). Ardeat ipsa Hcet, tormentls gandet amantis, Juv., vi. 209 (607). TJtmin nescXs qnam alt6 ascenderls an prO nihilO id pntSsI C, Fam., X. 26, 3 (458). Laud at AfrioSnnm Panaetins qnod fnerit abstinens, C, Off., 11. 22, 76 (542). HOn is e s nt t6 pndor nmqnam S tnrpitUdine revooSrit,C., Gat., i. 9, 22 (552). Historical Tenses. EpamlnOndSs qnaesXvit salvnsne e s s e t olipens, C. , Fin. , 11. 30, 97 (467). Hootll ambnlSbat in pllblioO ThemistoclSs qnod somnnm capore nOn posset) C, Tusc., iv. 19, 44(541). AthOniensfis creant deeem praetOrSs qnl exercitnl praeessent, Nep., I. 4, 4 (545). Accidit nt llnS nocte omn6s Hermae deicerentnr, Nep., vii. 3, 2 (513, R.). Hannibal omnia prinsqnam exo6deret pOgnSerat expertns,L.^ XXX. 35, 4 (577). Tanta opibns Etrllria erat nt iam terrSs fSmS nOminis sni implfis- set, L., I. 2, 5 (521, r. 1). Cnm Caesar AncOnam occnpSvisset, nrbem relXqnimns, C, Fam.f XVI. 12, 2 (585). 2l8 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. Orlfirlnal Subjunctive Retained. IpM docet quid agam (original, agam); fSi est et ab horte dooSrI, Ov., 3/., IV. 428 (219). QuaerO S t6 cttr ego Comeiiam nOn dfifenderem (original, d9- fenderem), C, Vat., 2, 5 (467). MlsSriixit DelphOe oOnixiltam quid faoerent (original, faeiSmos), Nep., II. 2, 6(518). Remarks. — 1. The treatment of the Hist. Pr. according tq its sense (Past) is the rule in classical Latin, especially when the dependent clause precedes. But there are many exceptions. Agunt grfitiSs quod sibi peperdssent ; quod anna com hominibos cOn- gangninelB oontuleriiit qnenmtiir, Caes., B.C., i. 74, 2 ; /Aey return thanks to them for having spared them, and complain that they had crossed swords with kinsmen. (2) 3. The Pure Pf. is usually treated as a Hist. Pf. in the matter of sequence : Quae lubsidia babfirfti et babSre possfis, expoeul) Q. Cicero, 4, 13 ; what supports you have or can have, I have set forth. 512. Sequence of Tenses in Sentences of Design, — Sen- tences of Design have, as a rule, only the Present and Im- perfect Subjunctive. at Ylvant, ^that they may live (to live). Pr., edunt, they are eating , Pure Pp., fidfirunt, they have eaten, FuT., edent, they will eat, FuT. Pp., fiderint, they will have eaten, iMPT., edebant, they were eating, 1 ut vXyerent, Plupp., ederant, they had eaten, > that they might live (to Hist. Pp., Cderimt, they ate, J live). SpectStum veniunt, yeninnt spectentnr at ipsae, Ov.,^.^., i. ^ (435). OalUnae pennls fovent pnUOs nefrXgore laedantnr, Cf. Q., N>D., II. 52, 129 (545). Legem brevem esse oportet quO faciliiuB ab imperltis teneStnr, Sen., km,, 94, 38 (545). M6 praemlsit domtim baeo at ntLntiem oxOrl soae, Pl., ^m., 195 ; he has sent me home ahead of him, to take the news to his wife, Laelios yeniSbat ad cSnam at satiSret deslderia nSttlrae, C, Fin., n. 8, 25 (545). FhafithOn optftyit at in corrani patris toller Star, C, Off,, m. 15, 94 (546, I). SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 2I9 Remark. — Parenthetical final sentences like at ita dicam, n6 erretis, are really dependent on the thought or utterance of the speaker, and have the present sequence everywhere. Ne long^or sim, vale, C, Fam., xv. 19 ; not to he tedious, farewell ! Ne Ignores, virttLte NerOnis Armeniiu cecidit, H., Ep., i. 12, 25 ; that you may not fail to know it, it was by the valor of Nero that the Armenian fell. 513. Exceptional Sequence of Tenses i7i Sentences of Re- suit. — In sentences of Result, the Present Subjunctive is used after Past Tenses to denote the continuance into the Present, the Perfect Subjunctive to imply final result. This Perfect Subjunctive may represent either the Pure Perfect or Aorist, the latter especially with the negative : Present Tense : Siciliam VerrSs per trienninin ita vexfivit ut ea restitul in antiquum statum ntlUO modO possit, C, Verr,, I. 4, 12 ; Verres so harried Sicily for three years as to make it utterly impossible for it to be restored to its original condition. Perfect Tense (Pure) : Mflrena Asiam sic obilt ut in eS neque avSritiae neque ItLzuriae vesti- gium rellquerit, C, Mur., 9, 20 ; Murena so administered Asia as not to have {that he has not) left in it a trace either of greed or debauchery (there is no trace there). Perfect Tense (Aorist) : Equites hostium ficriter cum equitSttl nostrO o0nfllz6runt tamen ut nostrl e5s in silvSs coUesque compulerint, Caes., B.G., \. 1$, 1 ; the cavalry of the enemy engaged the cavalry on our side briskly^ and yet (the upshot was that) our men forced them into the woods and hills. Remark. — After accidit, oontigit, and other verbs of Happening, the Impf . is always used, the result being already emphasized in the Indic. form. Accidit ut fLnS nocte omnes Hermae deicerentur, Nep., vii. 3, 2 ; it happened that in one night all the Hermae were thrown doum. Representation of the Subjunctive In the Future and Future Perfect Tenses. 514. The Subjunctive has no Future or Future Perfect, and these relations are represented either by the other Sub- junctives, or in the Active by the Subjunctive of the Peri- phrastic Conjugation ; as follows : 220 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. BuLE I. — (a) After a Future or Future Perfect Tense, the Future Perfect is represented by the Perfect Subjunc- tive ; but the Future is represented by the Present Sub- junctive, only when the action occurs at the same time as that of the leading verb. COgnOteam, / sJuUl (try to) find out, COgnOverO, I shall have found out (shall know), quid faeUs, what you are doing (will be doing). " quid fteerib, what you have done (will have done). {b) But whenever the dependent Future occurs after the leading Future, the Periphrastic Tense must be employed. COgnOteam, I shall (try io)find out, COgnOverS, I shall have found out (shall know), quid &ct1lrui sla, >■ what you are going to do (what you will do). [COoflderSMmus]) [we shall consider], A. Quid floerit aut quid ipil acoiderit aut quid dixerit, wJiat he has done, or what has happened to him, or what he has said. B. Aut quid faeiat) quid ipel aocidat, quid dioat, or, what he is doing^ what is happening to him, what he is saying, C. Aut quid fftCttLruB lit, quid ipel cfisttrum sit, quS lit tUillrui QrStiOne, C, Inv., I. 25, 36 ; or what he is going to do (will do), what is going to (will) happen to him, what plea he is going to employ (will employ). 615. Rule II. — After the other Tenses, the Future rela- tion is expressed by the Active Periphrastic Subjunctive, Present or Imperfect. COgnOtoO, 1 / am finding out, I qi^jd fitctlirus sis {what you are going to COgnOvI, I do), ivhat you tvill do. I have found out (know), quid factHrus essfis (what you were going to do), what you would do. COgnOecSbam, / wa>s trying to find out, COgnOveram, I had found out, Tam ea rBs est focilis ut innumerfibills nfitflra mundOs effecttlra sit, ei&- dat, efE»oerit, Cf C, N.D., i. 21, 53 ; tJie thing is so easy that nature mil make, is making, has made, innumerable worlds. SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 221 Xncertum est qaam longa otLiusque nostnun vita fatUra lit, C, Verr,, i. 58, 153 ; it is uncertain how long the life of each one of us is going to be (will be). Antes dubitfibam ventflraene essent legilhifiB ; nirno mihi nOn est dnbium quln ventHrae nOn sint, C, Fam.^ 11. 17, 5; before, I was doubtful whether the legions would come (or no) ; now I have no doubt that they will not come. Remark. — (1, 2) 3. When the preceding verb has a future character (Fear, Hope, Power, Will, etc.), the simple Subjv. is sufficient. OalU, nisi perfrfigerint mtliiltiOnfis, d6 omnl salute dfispfirant ; BQmfinI, si rem obtinuerint, flnem labOnun omnium exspectant, Caes., B,0., yii. 85, 3 ; the Gauls despair of all safety unless they break through {shall have broken through) the fortifications ; the Romans look forward to an end of all their toils, if they hold their own {shall have held). 516. Sequence of Tenses in Oratid Obliqua: In Or&tio Obli- qua and kindred constructions, the attraction of tenses ap- plies also to the representatives of the Future and Future Perfect Subjunctive. In olSvS erat scrlptnm nisi domnm reverteretur s6 capitis eum damnS- tflrOs, Nep., IV. 3, 4 ; it was urritten on the staff that if he did not re- turn ho7ne, they would condemn him to death, (OrStiO Bteta: nisi domnm revertfiris, t6 capitis damnSbimns, unless you (shall) return home, we will condemn you to death), FytMa praecSpit at Miltiadem sibi imperStOrem sOmerent ; id si fBcissent (0. B., fBcerltis) incepta prOepera fatflra (0. B., emnt), Nep., i. i, 3 ; the Pythia instructed them to take Miltiades for their general ; that if they did that, their undertakings would be successful. Lacedaemonil, FhilippO minitante per UtterSs se omnia quae cOnfirentur (0. B., cOnfibiminI) prohibitOrum, quaeslverunt num s6 esset etiam morl prohibitUrus (0. B., prohibsbis), C, Tusc, v. 14, 42 ; the Lacedasmo- nians, when Philip threatened them by letter that he would prevent everything they undertook {should undertake), asked whether he was going to {would) prevent them from dying too, 517. Sequence of Tenses after the other Moods, — The Im- perative and the Present and Perfect Subjunctive have the Sequences of the Principal Tenses ; the Imperfect and Plu- perfect have the Sequences of the Historical Tenses. H6 compQne comSs quia sis ventfirus ad illam, Ov., Rem. Am., 679 ; do not arrange (your) locks because (forsooth) you are going to see Tier. Excellentibus ingenils citius dofuerit ars quS clvem regant quam quS hostem superent, L., 11. 43, 10 ; great geniuses would be m.ore likely to lack the skill to control the citizen than the skill to overcome tKe eue.m'^. 222 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. Quid mfi prohibflret Epiollrfiam esse, si probSrem quae ille diceret ! C, Fin,y I. 8, 27 ; what would prevent me from being an Epicurean if I approved what he said (says) ? Quae Yita faisset PriamO si ab adnlfiscentiS solsset qnOe eyentfiLs senec- t&tis esset babitHms ! C, Z>/i'., ii. 9, 22 ; what sort of life would Priam have led if he had known, from early manhood, what were to he tJie closing scenes of his old age 9 Kkmarks. — 1. Of course, when the Pf. Siibjv. represents an Histor- ical Tense, it takes the historical Sequence : MSgna culpa Felopis qui nOn docuerit fllium quStenns esset quidque cfLrandum, C, Tusc, i. 44, 107 ; greatly to hlameis Felopsfornot having taught his son hoic far each thing teas to be cared for, 518. Sequence of Tejiaes after an Infinitive or Participle, — When a clause depends on an Infinitive or Participle, Gerund or Supine, the sequence is Historical, if either the Finite verb is Past or the dependent verb represents a Past ; otherwise the sequence is that of the Primary tenses. DIcit se interrog^re (original interrogO), He says that he is asking, DIcit se interrogSsse (original interrogSvI), lie says that he asked, Dixit s6 interrogSre (original interrogO), lie said that he was asking, Mib! interroganti, wlien I ask him, (literally : to me asking). f quid agfis, quid 6geri(s, quid SctHrus sis, I what you are doing, what you have done, what you are going to do (will do). quid agerSS) quid figissSs, quid SctHrus what you were doing, what you had dons, es86S) what you were going to do (would do). { quid agat, i quid figerit, ■I quid fictHrus sit, ' quid ageret, Mihl interroganti, when I asked him, (literally : to me asking), what he is doing, what he has done, •{ ivhat he is going to do (will do), ichat he was do- ing, quid egisset, what he had done, quid SctfLrus esset, what he was go- ing to do, nOn re- spondet, he gives no an- swer, nOn re- spondit, he gave no an- swer. REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 223 Apud Hypanim flnvium AriBtotelSs ait bSstiolSs qufiBdam nSsoI quae fLnnmdiem vivant, C, Tusc, i. 39, 94 (650). Satis mihi malta verba f 6 c i s s e videor quSrS e s s e t hOc bellum ndces- Bfirium, C, Imp,, 10, 27 ; I think I have said enough (to show) why this war is necessary. ApellSs piotOrfti eOs pecefire dXo6bat qui nOn sentXrent quid eiset satiS) C, Or., 22, 73 ; Apelles used to say that those painters blundered who did not perceive what was (is) enough. MlsSrunt DelphOs cOnsultum quid faoerent) Nep., ii. 2, 6 ; tJiey sent to Delphi to ask the oracle what they should do. See 265. 519. Original Subjunctives in Dependence. — The Poten- tial of the Present or Future after a Past tense goes into the Past ; the same is true of Deliberative Questions (465). On the other hand, the Potential of the Past must be re- tained even after a Present tense (467). See also 597, r. 4. Video oausSs esse permultSs quae Titum BSsoium impellerent, C, Rose. Am,, 33, 92 ; I see that there are very many causes which might have impelled Titus Roscius. QuaerO S t6 ollr ComSlium nOn defender em, C, Vat,, 2, 5; / inquire of you, why I was not to defend Cornelius ! USE OF THE REFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. 520. In subordinate clauses, the Reflexive is used with reference either to the subject of the principal, or to the subject of the subordinate, clause ; and sometimes first to the one and then to the other. 521. The Reflexive is used of the principal subject when reference is made to the thought or will of that subject ; hence, in Infinitive Sentences, in Indirect Questions, in Sentences of Design, and in Sentences which partake of the Oblique Relation. Sentit animus s6 vl suS, nOn aliens movflrl) Q,, Tusc, i. 23, 55 ; ths mifid feels that it moves by its oum force, (and) not by that of another. FompSius S m9 petlvit ut sSoum et apud s6 essem oottIdi6) Cf. C, Att,, V. 6, 1 ; Pompey asked me to be with him, and at his house, daily. Faetus omn6s librOs quOs frSter suus rellquisset mibf dOnfivit, C, Att,, n. Ii 12 ; Faetus presented to me all the books (as he said) that his brother had left (quOs frSter eius rellquerat, would be the narrator's statement). 224 KEFLEXIVE IN SUBORDINATE SENTENCES. Remarks. — 1. Sentences of Tendency and Result have forms of ii , wlien the subj. is not the same as that of the leading verb ; otherwise the Reflexive : Tarquinini sic Servium dlligSbat at is Bias vul^ habflrStnr fflios, C, Bep., II. 21, 38 ; Tarquin loved Servius so that he was commonly con- sidered his son. But Tanta opibus EtrtLria erat at iam terrSs flbnfi nOminis sol implSwet, L., I. 2, 5 ; so great in meatis (= so powerful) was Etruria that she had already filled tlie land with the reputation of her name. 2. The Reflexive may refer to the real agent, and not to the gram- matical subj. of the principal clause. (309, 2.) A Caesare invXtor sibi at sim lOgStas, C, Att., 11. iS, 3 ; I am invited by Caesar (= Caesar invites me) to be lieutenant to him. Note the freer use of laas (309, 4), The other forms are employed chiefly in reflexive formulae (309, 3), as 80 recipere, to unthdraw, etc, BOmfinl sal colligendl hoftibas feumltStem nOn relinqaant, Caes., B.O., III. 6, 1 ; the Romans do not leave the enemy a chance to rally, 3. The Reflexive is used in general sentences, as one, one^s self, etc. (309, i) : DefSrme est d6 80 ipsam praedicSre) C, Ojf., i. 3S, 137 ; it is unseemly to be bragging about one*s self. 4. In Indie, relative sentences, which are mere circumlocutions, is is the rule. SScratSs inboneetam sibi credidit OrfitiOnem qoam el LysiSs reO compo- suerat, Quint., ii. 15, 30 ; Socrates believed the speech which Lysias had composed for him when he was arraigned, dishonoring to him, Eius and SuT. 522. Alexander moriens finolam saom dederat Ferdiccae) Nep., xyiii. 2, 1 ; Alexander, [when] dying, had given his ring to Perdiccas. Ferdiccfis accSperat fiias finolam, Perdiccas had received his ring. QuSrfi Alexander dSclfirfiverat sfi rfignam el commendSsse, thereby, Alexander had declared that he had committed the kingdom to him. Ex quO Ferdiccfis coniScerat earn rfignam sibi commendfissO) from this, Perdiccas had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him. Ex qaO omnes coniSoerant earn rCgnam eX commendfisse, from this, all had gathered that he had committed the kingdom to him, Ferdiccfis pOstalSvit at sfi rSgem habfirent cam Alexander finalam sibi dedisset, Perdiccas demanded that they should have him for king, as Alexander had given the ring to him, AmIoX pOstalfivfirant at omnSs eam rSgem habfirent cam Alexander fina- lam el dedisset, (his) friends demanded that all should have him for king, as Alexander had given the ring to him. (Lattmann and Mtiller.) Ita 86 gesserat Ferdiccfis at eX rSgnam ab Alexandre commendfirfitar, Perdiccas had so behaved himself that the kingdom was intrusted to him by Alexander. OBJECT SENTENCES. 225 OBJECT SENTENCES. 623. Verbs of Doing, Perceiving, Conceiving, of Think- ing and Saying, often take their object in the form of a sentence. I. Object Sentences introduced by QTJOD. (524) 525. I. Quod, the fact that, the circumstance that, in that, introduces explanatory clauses, after verbs of Adding and Dropping, and after verbs of Doing and Happening with an adverb. Adde hfio quod perferri lltterae ntUlS condiciOne potufinint, Pollio (C, Fam.y X. 31, 4) ; add to this the fact that letters could under no cir- cumstances he got through, Pra,etere0 qnod earn sib! domum dfilegit, C, Cluent., 66, 188 ; I pass over the fact that site chose that h 25 ; Thaies said that water teas the first principle of things, Madiel canift morbl invents cllrfitianim etie inyentam pntant, C, Tuse., III. lo, 23 ; physicians think that, (when) the cause of disease (is) dis- covered, the method of treatment is discovered, Volucrfti yidemus fingere et oOnstmere nIdSt, C, Or., n. 6, 23 ; tpesee that birds fashion and build nests. Tlie sentence very often passes over into the Ace. and Inf. (O. 0.) witliout anv formal notice. Remarks. — (1, 2) 3. When the subj. of the Inf. is a personal or reflex- ive ijronoun, that sul)j. may be omitted — chiefly with Fut. Inflnitive. BefrSctllrOe carcerem minShantnr, L., ti. 17, 6 ; they threatened to break open the jail. 4. Tlje simple Inf. is often used in English, where the Latin takes Ace. and Infinitive. This is especially true of verbs of Hoping and Promising. SperO m6 hOc adepttLmm etse, I hope to (that I shdU) obtain this, PrOmittfibat b$ yentfimm esse, he promised to {thai he would) come. 5. In some authors Verbs of Perception and Representation take the Participle to express the actual condition of the object perceived or rep- resented (53C). Folyphfimum Honi6nis cum ariete conloquentem fadt, C, Tuse.y y. 39, 115 ; ITomer represents Polyphemus (as) talking vrith the ram. But the Inf. is the rule for the language, and must of course be used, when the Participle is lacking. OctSyinin dolOre cOnfioI yidl, C, Fin., 11. 28, 93 ; I have seen Oeia- vius (when he was) wearing out with anguish. Nominative with Infinitive. 528. Passive verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Per- ceiving may be construed either personally or impersonally : 1. In the Simple tenses personal construction is pre- ferred ; except crfiditur, it is believed, 2, In the Compound tenses the impersonal construction is preferred. TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. 22/ Thus, instead of TrSdont Homflrom caecum foisse, they say that Homer waahlifid, we should have, Trftditor Homerns caecus fiiiBse, Homer is said to have been blind, or, Traditum est HomSrom caecum fuisse) C, Tttsc, v. 39, 114 ; there is a tradition that Homer was blind. Aristaeus inventor oleX esse dicitur, C, Verr., iv. 57, 128 ; Aristaeus is said to be the inventor of oil, TerentI fSbellae putfibantur S LaeliO serlbX, C, Att., yii. 3, 10 ; Ter- ence's plays were thought to be written by Laelius. But: Venerem AdOnidI nUpeisse prOditum est, C, N,D., iii. 23, 59 ; it is re- corded that Venus married Adonis, PhilOnem existimandum est disertum fnisse, C, Or,, i. 14, 62 ; we must suppose that Philo was eloquent. Tenses of the Infinitive with Verba SentiendT et DSclS- randT. (529) 530. After verbs of Saying, Showing, Believing, and Perceiving, and the like. The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action ; The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ; The Future Infinitive expresses future action. Remark. — The action which is completed with regard to the lead- ing verb may be in itself a continued action. So in English : I have been studying, I had been studying. Hence, the Impf. Indie. {I was studying) is represented in this dependent form by the Pf. Inf., be- cause it is prior to the leading verb. See 510, r. It^" In this table the Present is taken as the type of the Principal, the Imperfect as the type of the Historical, Tenses. 531. Contemporaneous Action. Active. Passivx. P. T. DIcit : t6 errfire, t6 decipl. He says, that you are going wrong^ that you are {being) deceived (226, b.). H. T. BlcSbat : t9 errSre, t6 decipl, Be was saying^ that you were going that you were {being) deceived, wrong. 228 ACCUSATIVE AKD IXFIXITIVB. Prior Action, P. T. Didt : t« errisM, ti daoeptum mm, He says, thai you hat€ gone wrong, thai you have been {are) deeetoed^ that you utnt wrong, that you were deceived (Hist Pf .), that you have been going {that people havebeemdeeeMng you), wrong. U. T. Dlo^bat : t6 erriase, ti dtoeptnm ene, Jit ivotf saying, that yon had gone that you had been deceived^ wrong, that you wfnt wrong, that you were deceived (Hist. Pf .), that you had been (that people had been decHvin/g you), gs come. Vereor ut amldu veniat, I fear {how my friend can come) lest my friend come not, that he is not coming, will not come. {I wish he may come.) Vereor ut amicufl vfinerit, I fear lest my friend have not come, that he has not come. KOn vereor ne amicus nOn veniat, / do not fear that my friend is not coming, will not come. KOn vereor n6 amicus nOn vSnerit, I do not fear that my friend has not come, TimeQ ne tibi nihil praeter lacrimSs queam reddere, C, Plane, 42, 101 ; / am afraid that I can give you nothing in return save tears. TimeO ut sustineSs labOrCs, C, Fam., xiv. 2, 3 ; I fear that you will not hold out under your toils, KOn vereor n6 tua virttLs opIniOnI hominum nOn respondeat, Cf. C, Fam., II. 5, 2 ; I do not fear that your virtue will not answer to (come up to) public expectation, HetuO n6 id cOnsilil cSperlmus quod nOn facile ezplicfire poss&nus, C, Fam., XIV. 12 ; 1 fear that we have formed a plan that we cannot readily explain. 238 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. Sentences of Tendency and Result, 551. I. Consecutive Sentences are those sentences which show the Consequence or Tendency of Actions. 2. Consecutive Sentences are divided into two classes : I. Consecutive Sentences in which the Tendency is ex- pressed by the Particle : Pure Consecutive Sentences. II. Consecutive Sentences in which the Tendency lies in the leading Verb : (a) after verbs of Effecting ; (V) after negative verbs of Preventing, Doubt, and Uncertainty ; {c) after words and phrases requiring expansion. I. Pure Consecutive Sentences. 552. Pure Consecutive Sentences are introduced by 1. Ut (uti), that J so that, and other relative pronouns and adverbs (G31). 2. Ut — non, thaty so that, as — not, continued by neqne, nee (543, 4). 3. ftuin = nt non, after a negative sentence (555). NOn Ib es ut tS pudor umquam S tarpitlldine revocSrit, C, Cat,, i. 9, 22 ; you are not the man for shame ever to have recalled you (= ever to have been recalled by shame) from baseness, Tanta vis probitstis est, ut earn in hoste etiam dlUgftmus, C, Lael., 9, 29 ; 50 great is the virtue of uprightness, that we love it even in an enemy, N6m§ adeO ferus est ut nOn mltSscere possit, H., Ep., i. i, 89 ; no one is so savage that he cannot {be made to) soften. Nil tSm difficUe est quin quaerendO inyOstlgSrl possit, Ter., ffeaut,, 675 ; 7iaught is so hard but it can (= that it cannot) be tracked out by search. Remarks. — 1. Notice especially the impersonal tantum abest, fifoit (rarely aberat) — ut— ut. Tantum abest ab eO ut malum mors sit ut verear nS homini sit nihil bonum aliud, C, Tusc, i. 31, 76 ; so far is it from death ( = so far is death from) being an evil that I fear man has no other blessing. The personal construction is extremely rare. AgfisilSus tantum Sfnit ab Insolentifi glOriae ut oommiierStus sit forta- nam Oraeciae, Nep., xvii. 5,2; Agesilaus was so far from the insolence o/fflory that he pitied the {mis)forttme of Greece. CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 239 The second nt may be omitted, and a declarative sentence follow independently ; Tantnm aberat ut bInSs librOs lorlberent : yiz singnlOi oOnfMnmti C, Att,, xiii. 21, 5 ; so far were they from writing two copies of each hooky they with difficulty jiniehed up one. 2. Blgntui, worthy, indlgnns, unioorthy, aptus, idSnens, jit, take a con- secutive sentence with qui. Occasionally dlgnoB and ixidlgnuB take nt. Qui modestS p&ret, vidstur qui aliquandS imperet dIgnuB ene, C, Leg.^ III. 2, 6 ; he who obeys duly seems to be worthy to command some day. 3. Ita (and slo) are sometimes used to give a restriction or a condi- tion ( =z provided, on condition); in this case the negative is n6. Ita probanda est mftnsuStfLdS ut adbibeStur rel pUblicae causft sevfiritSs, C, Off.f I. 25, 88 ; mildness is to be approved, so that {provided that) strictness be used for the sake of the commonwealth. Ita tU istaec tua mIscetO nS m6 admlsceSs, Ter., Meant., 783 ; mix up your mixings so you mix me not ujithal. 4. Ut nOn is often = without, and the English verbal in -ing ; Hfilet ezIstimSrI bonus yir nt n5n sit quam esse ut nOn putstur, C, Fin.y II. 22, 71 ; he will certainly prefer being thought a good man with- out being such, to being (a good man) without being believed (to be such). II. Complementary Consecutive Sentences. A. Verbs of Effecting. 653. Verbs of Effecting belong partly to the Consecutive, partly to the Final Sentence. The negative is non or n6 ; the sequence varies between final and consecutive. Such verbs are : I. Verbs of Causation : facere, efficere, perflcere, / make, effect, achieve ; asseqni, cdnsequi, / attain, accomplish, and many others. (Sequence Final.) Effidam ut inteUegStis, C, Cluent., 3, 7 ; I will cause you to under- stand. Sad perfioe, ut Graisns baeo quae coartfivit nObls ezplioet, C, Or., i. 35, 163 ; but bring it about that Crassus {make Crassus) unfold to us what he has condensed. Negatives : Potestis efficere nt male moriar, nt nOn moriar n5n potestis, Plin., Ep,, in. 16, 11 ; you may make me die a hard death, keep me from dying you cannot. Efficiam potthfic nS quemquam vOce laeessSi, V., Ec, 3, 51 ; I will bring it about that you challenge no one hereafter in song. 240 CONSECUTIVE SENTENCES. Faoere nt is often little more than a periphrasis ; especially in the forms fM ut and fsLxO, fudt (both peculiar to Comedy). Forttina vestra facit nt Irae meae temperem, L., xxxti. 35, 3 ; your for- tune causes that I {makes me) restrain my anger (put mstes to my anger), Invltna (325, r. 6) faciO nt recorder rnlnfii rel pUblicae, C, Vat,-, 9, 21; (it is) against my will that I {am doing so as to) recall the ruined con- dition of the commonwealth, 2. Verbs of Compelling and Permitting (Sequence Final): Tenfimns memoriS Catnlnm esse cofietnm nt yltS b9 ipse prlvSret, C. , Or., ni. 3, 9 ; M>e remember that Catulus was forced to take his own life. Hind nSttlra nOn patitnr, nt aliOmm spolils nostrfis oOpifis angeSmns, C, Off.y III. 5, 22 ; nature does not allow us to increase our wealth by the spoils of others, 3. Passive verbs of Effecting, and their equivalents, namely, many Impersonal Verbs of Happening and Fol- lowing (Sequence Consecutive, but see 513, R.). Such verbs are oOnficitnr, effidtnr, fit, accidit, contingit, 6yenit| it hap- pens, Ostl venit, it occurs, seqnitnr, it follows, and many others. So also est, it is the case, £z qnO effioitnr, nOn nt volnptSs n6 (the design of the arguer) sit vo- Inptfis, sed nt volnptfis nOn (the result of the argument) sit snmmnm bo- nnm, C, Fin., 11. 8, 24 ; from which it results, not that pleasure is not pleasure, but that pleasure is not the supreme good. Potest fieri nt is nnde te andlsse dlds IrStns dXzerit, (j.,Or,, n. 70, 285; (it) may be (that) he from wTiom you say you heard (it) said it in anger, Persaepe evenit nt tLtiUtfis cnm honestSte certet, C, Part. Or,, 25, 89 ; it very often (so) happens that profit is at varia7ice urith honor. 4. Very many impersonal verbs and combinations of neuter adjectives with est, after the analogy of the imper- sonals just mentioned (Sequence Consecutive). The Infinitive is much more common after neuter adjectives. Ad AppI Clandl senecttLtem accedfibat etiam nt caecns esset, C, Cat.M,, 6, 16 ; to the old age of Appius Claudius was further added his being blind, EI ne integmm qnidem erat nt ad iOstitiam remigrSret, C, Tusc, v. 21, 62 ; for him it was not even an open question to go back to justice. Remark. — Kecesse est, it is necessary, generally, and oportet, it be- hooves, always omit nt : Lenctrica pQgna immortSlis sit necesse est, Nep., xv. 10, 2 ; the battle of Leuctra must needs be immortal. tfdcnm moriSris oportet, Pkop., ii. 8, 25 ; you must die unth me. COKSECUTIVE SENTENCES. 24I B. Verbs of Hindering. (554) 655. Qnin is used when Verbs and Phrases of Pre- venting, Omitting, Refraining, Refusing, and Delaying, Doubt, and Uncertainty, are negatived or questioned. 1. Verbs of Preventing and the like (Sequence Final). Viz nirno obBlBtitor ilUi qnln lament mnndimi, Ov., M., i. 58 ; they are now Jiardly to be kept {that they should not rend) from rending the universe. AntiodmB nOn s6 tenoit qnln oontrS snnm dootOrem libmm fideret, C, ACf II. 4, 12; Antiochus did not refrain from publishing a book against his tea>cher, 2. Verbs of Doubt and Uncertainty (Sequence of the Interrogative Sentence). KQn dnbinm est qnln nzOrem n51it filins, Ter., And,, 172 ; there is no doubt that (my) son does not wa/nt a wife, Qnis dnbitet (=n6m$ dnbitet) qnln in virtnte divitiae sint % C, Farad., VI. 2, 48 ; who can doubt that true wealth consists in virtue f KOn dnbitfirl dSbet qnln faerint ante HomSnun poStae, C, Br., 18, 71 ; it is not to be doubted that there were poets before Homer, Remarks. — 1. Of course dnbitO and nOn dnbitO may have the ordinary interrogative constructions (467). On dnbitO an, see 457, 2. 2. N5n dnbitO, with the Inf., usually means I do not hesitate to : KOn dnbitem dicere onmfit sapientM semper esse beStSs, C, Fin., v. 32, 95 ; I should not hesitate to say that all wise men are always happy. 556. Quin, equivalent to ut non, may be used after any negative sentence (Sequence Consecutive). Here it may often be translated " without." KIl tarn difflcUe est qnln quaerendO inv6stlgsn possit, Ter., Heaut,, 675 ; naught is so hard but it can be tracked out by search. KtQlnm adhllc intermlsl diem qnln aliqnid ad t6 Utterfimm darem, C, Att.f VII. 15, 1 ; Ihavethus far not allowed a day to pass but I dropped you {without dropping you) something of a letter {a line or two). Remark. — Note the combination (fiaoere) nOn possnm qnln, / cannot but, and similar combinations, such as nOn abest qnln, etc. KOn possnm qnln ezolfimem, Pl., Trin,, 705 ; / cannot but {I must) cry out. Panlnm Sfait qnln Fabins VSmm interfloeret, Caes., B.C., 11. 35, 2 ; there was Utile lacking but Fabius (had) killed Varus ( = Fabius came near killing Varus), 16 242 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Explanatory Ut. 557. A Consecutive Sentence with ut is often used to give the contents or character of a preceding substantive, adjective, or pronoun. An quoiqnamflt Osiis hominl s6 nt erocdet? Teb., HeauL, 8i ; of what good 18 it to any man to torture himself f Est miserOrum nt malevolentAi sint atqne invideant bonis, Pl., Capt,, 583 ; the wretched have a way of being ill-natured and envying the well- to-do. Kec menm ad tS ut mittam grfitils, Pl., Asin., 190 ; nor is it my style to let her go to you as a gracious gift. Id est proprinm cIvitStis nt sit libera, C, Off,, 11. 22, 78 ; it is the peculiar privilege of a state^ to he free. TOtnm in eO est, nt tibi imperfis, C, Tusc,, n. 22, 53 ; all depends upon this (one thing), your self-command. Exclamatory Questions. 558. Ut with the Subjunctive is used in Exclamatory Questions, usually with the insertion of -ne. Egone nt te interpeUem 'i C, Tusc, 11. 18, 42 ; I interrupt you f DI mSgnl, nt qnl civem EOmSnnm occldisset, imptinitStem aodperet, Sen., Ben., v. 16, 3 ; Oreat Oods ! that one who had slain a Roman citizen, should escape unpunished ! TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 659. The action of the Temporal or Dependent clause may stand to the action of the Principal clause in one of three relations : I. It may be antecedent. Conjunctions : Postqnam (PosteS qnam), after that, after; nt, as; nbi, when (literally, where) ; simnlSo, as soon as ; nt primnm, cnm primnm, the first moment that. II. It may be contemporaneous. Conjunctions : Dnm dOnec, while, until; qnoad, up to (the time) that; qnamdill, as long as; cnm, when. III. It may be subsequent. Conjunctions : Anteqnam, prinsqnam, before that, before. A special chapter is required by IV. Cum (quom), when. TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 243 I. ANTECEDENT ACTION. (560) 561. Ut, ut primum, ubi, ubi primom, cum, com primnm, simiil aCy simnl atque, and postqnam (posteaquam), in the sense of after y as soon as, take the (Historical) Perfect, rarely the Historical Present Indicative. The English translation is not unfrequently the Pluperfect. Fostqaam Caetar peryfinit, obsides popOscit, Caes., B.O,, i. 27, 3 ; after Caesar arrived, he demanded hostages. Fomp6iii8 ut eqnitfitiim siiiim pTdsam vldit, adO exofiuit, Caes., B.C., ni. 94, 5 ; a8 Pompey saw his cavalry beaten, he left the line of battle. FelopidSs nOn dubitSvit, simid fie oOnspezit hostem, cOnfllgere (555 2, k. 2), Nep., XVI. 5, 3 ; as soon as he (had) caught sight of the enemy, JPelopidas did not hesitate to engage him. Subjunctive in Or&tid Obliqaa. Arioviitiim, ut semel (Hllltnim oOpifis vicerit (d. B. vicit), fnperb^ im- perSre, Caes., B.O., i. 31, 12 ; ** that Ariovistus, as soon as he had once beaten the forces of the Oauls, exercised his rule arrogantly. ^^ 662. The Imperfect is used to express an action continued into the time of the principal clause (overlapping). TJbi nfimS obviiu Ibat, ad oastra bostiiim tendont, L., ix. 45, 14 ; when (they saw that) no one was coming to meet them, they proceeded to the camp of the enemy. Subjunctive in Or&tid Obliqna. Sorlpsistl enm postefiquam nOn audfiret (0. B. nOn audfibat) reprebendere, laudfire ooepiBse, C, Att., i. 13, 4 ; you wrote that, after he could not get up the courage to blame, he began to praise. 663. I. The Pluperfect is used to express an action com- pleted before the time of the principal clause ; often of the Resulting Condition. FosteSquam multitlldinem collfigerat emblSmatum, Instituit offlclnam, C, Verr.y iv. 24, 54 ; after he had got together a great number of figures, he set up shop. 2. The Pluperfect is used with postqnam when a definite interval is mentioned. Fost and quam are often separated. With an Ablative of Measure, post may be omitted. Notice posterO diO quam, the day after. Foit didm tertium gesta res est quam dixerat, C, Mil., 16, 44 ; the matter was accomplisTied three days after Tie said it toould 6e. 244 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Hamllcar nOnO axmO postqaam in KiipBnlftm yfinerat 000I1118 est, Nep., XXII. 4, 2 ; Ha/milcar was hilled nine years after he came to Spain, Subjunctive in Or&tid Obliqna. Scrlptom ft FosIdOniO est trigintfi annls ylxiise Fanaetinm potteSquam lilirOs de offlcils fididisset, C, Off., in. 2, 8 ; it is recorded by Posidoniits that Panaetius lived thirty years after he put forth his hooks on Duties, The attraction is sometimes neglected. 664. Fostqnam and the like, with the Present and Perfect Indicative, assume a causal signification (compare quoniam, now that = since). CtLria minor mihl vidstur potteSqnam est mfiior, C, Fin,, v. i, 2 ; ths, senatC'Tiouse seems to me smaller now that it is (really) greater. Iterative Action. (565) 666. EuLE I. — When two actions are repeated con- temporaneously, both are put in tenses of continuance. Hnmiiee labOrant nbi petentM dissident, Phaed. , i. 30, 1 ; ths lowly suffer when the powerful disagree, TJbi frUmentO opus erat, cohortSs praesidinm agitSbant, S., lug,, 55, 4 ; when there was 7ieed of corn, the cohorts would serve as an escort. The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person. Bonos sfignior fit nbi neglegSs, S., ^^^g-» 31. 28 ; a good man become more spiritless when you neglect him, 667. Rule II. — When one action is repeated before an- other, the antecedent action is put in the Perfect, Pluper- fect, or Future Perfect ; the subsequent action in the Pres- ent, Imperfect, or Future, according to the relation. Observe the greater exactness of the Latin expression. Compare 244, R. 3. Quotiens ceoidit, snrgit, As often as he falls, he rises. Qnotiens ceciderat, snrgebat, As often as he fell, he rose. Quotiens ceciderit, snrget, As often as he falls (shall have fallen), he will rise. Simul Xnflfivit tiblcen ft perltO carmen fignOscitnr, C, Ac, 11. 27, 86 ; as soon as the fluter blows, the song is recognized by the connoisseur. DociliOra sunt ingenia prinsqoam obdOrufirnnt, Quint., i. 12, 9 ; minds are more teachable before they (have) become hardened. Gum pSlam eins Snnll ad palmam converterat OygSs ft nlUlO vidSbfitnr, C, Off., III. 9, 38 ; wheniever) Gyges turned the bezel of the ring toward ihej)alm {of Ma hand), he was to be seeu hy no one. TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 245 81 p68 oondolnit, si dOns, ferre nOn possuiniuiy C, Tuac, 11. 22, 52 ; if a foot, if a tooth ache{8)y we cannot endure it. Stomachfibfitnr senex, si qnid asperius dlxeram, C, N.D., i. 33, 93 ; the old man ttsed to he fretted, if I said anything {that was) rather harsh. The Subjunctive with the Ideal Second Person. TJbi cOnsulnerlb, mfitfUrS factO opus est, S., C7., i, 6 ; when you have deliberated f you want speedy action. The Subjunctive in Oratid Obliqna. Cats mIrSrI b9 Sifibat quod nOn ridfiret liamspex hanuipioem cum vidis- set, C, Div., II. 24, 51 ; Cato said that he wondered that an haruspex did not laugh when he saw (another) haruspex. (NOn ridet cum vidit.) The Subjunctive by Attraction. QuSrfi flObat, ut omnium oculOs, quotiSscunque in publicum prOdlsset, ad 86 conyerteret, Nep., vii. 3, 5 ; whereby it happened that he attracted the eyes of all every time he went out in public (quotiAscunque prOdierat, convertobat). Remark. — The Subjunctive in Iterative sentences instead of the In- dicative becomes increasingly common from Livy on. II. CONTEMPORANEOUS ACTION. 668, Conjunctions used of Contemporaneous Action are : Dnm, donee, while, so long as, luitil : quoad, tqj to (the time) that ; qnamdiu, as long as j cum, tvhen. An action may be contemporaneous in Extent — so long as, ivhile. An action may be contemporaneous in Limit — tuitil. 1. Contemporaneous In Extent. (So long as, while.) 569. Complete Coextension, — ^Dum, donee, quoad, quamdiu, 80 long as, while, take the Indicative of all the tenses. YIta dum superest, bene est, Maecenas (Sen., E.M,, ioi, 11) ; while {so long as) life remains^ His well, Tiberius Gracchus tam ditl laudSbitur dum memoria r6rum BQmSnSrum manSbit, C, Off,, 11. 12, 43 ; Tiberius Gracchus shall be praised so long as the memory of Roman history remains (s/iaW remam^. 246 TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Fait hMC gSni fortif dam LyollrgI Iflgft yigAMUit, C, Tusc., i. 42, 101 ; this nation was brave so long as the laws of Lycurgus were in force. IMtneo grStai eram tibi, Fenfiram yigol rflge beStior, H., 0., ni. 9, 1 ; while I was pleading in your sights 1 throve more blessed tharry where (= whom) they please^ if but the dowry do not go with them, DnmmodO mOrfita rSotO veniat, dOtSta est satis, Pl. , Aul., 239 ; provided only she come with a good character, she is endowed (= her dowry is) enough, III. SUBSEQUENT ACTION. Anteqnam and Prinsqnam with the Indicative. 574. Antequam and priosquam, lefore, take the Present^ Perfect, and Future Perfect Indicative, when the limit is stated as a fact. The Present is used in anticipation of the Future. Kemark. — The elements ante, antes, prins, and qnam are often sepa- rated. 248 TEMPORAL SEKTENCE8. 676. The Present Indicative is used after positive sen- tences. Anteqnam ad sententiam redeO, d6 m6 panoa dloam, C, Cat.y iv. 10, 20 ; hefore I return to the subject, I will say a few things of myself Omnia experlrl certnm est prioB qoam pereO, Ter., And., 311 ; I am determined to try evei*y thing hefore I perish, (Priiu quam peream = sooner than perish, to keep from perishing,) 676, The Perfect (Aorist) and Future Perfect Indicative are used both after positive and after negative clauses, chiefly the latter. Observe that nSn prinsqaam = nOn dum. HSracUO, aliquantO ante qoam est mortuns, omnia trfididerat, C, Verr., II. 18, 46 ; some time hefore he died he had handed over everything to Ueraclivs. LegStI nOn ante profecti qoam impositOs in nSv6s mllitM yXdemnt, L., XXXIV. 12, 8 ; the envoys did not set out until they saw the soldiers on board. Subjunctive in Oratid Obliqua. ThemistoclSs sols praedlzit, nt n6 prins LaoedaemoniOnun IfigfitOs dlmit- terent qnam ipse esset remissns, Nep., ii. 7, 3 ; Themistocles told his colleagues beforehand not to dismiss the Laceda^emonian envoys hefore he had been sent bach. (NOn prins dimittetis qnam ego erO remissns.) Anteqnam and Prinsqnam with the Subjunctive. 677. Anteqnam and priusqnam are used with the Subjunc- tive when the action is expected, contingent, designed, or deprecated. The translation is often before, and the verbal in -ing ; the limit in these sentences is said to be ideal. Ante videmns folgOrem qnam sonnm andiSmus, Sen., N.Q., 11^ 12, 6 ; %ve see the flash of lightning before hearing the sound (we may never hear it). In omnibns negOtils prins qnam aggrediSre adMbenda est praeparStiO dlligens, C, Off't I. 21, 73; in all affairs, before addressing yourself (to them), you must make use of careful preparation (Ideal Second Person). GoUem celeriter priusqnam ab adversSrils sentifitnr commUnit, Caes., B,C., I. 54, 4 ; he speedily fortified the hill before he was (too soon to he) perceived by the enemy (prins qnam = prins qnam nt). Hannibal omnia prinsqnam ezcSderet ptlgnS erat expertns, L., xxx. 35, 4 ; Hannibal had tried everything before withdrawing from the fight (= to avoid withdrawing from the fight). TEMPORAL SENTENCES. 249 IV. CONSTRUCTIONS OF CUM (QUOM). (578) 679. There are two great uses of cum : I. Temporal cum {when, then), with the Indicative, to give the date. II. Circumstantial cum {as, whereas), with the Subjunc- tive, to give the situation. Of the latter there are three varieties : (a) Historical cum, as, giving the circumstances under which an action took place. (b) Causal cum, as, whereas, since, indicating that the main action proceeded from the subordinate one. {c) Concessive cum, whereas, although, indicating that the main action was accomplished in spite of that of the subor- dinate clause. I. Gum v6r appetit, mllites ex hlbernls movent, when spring ap- proaches, soldiers move out of winter-quarters, II. (a) dim v6r appeteret, Hannibal ex hlbernls mOvit, as spring was approaching (spring approaching), Hannibal moved out of winter- quarters, (b) Com v6r appetat, ex hlbemls movendtim est, as {since) spring is ap- proaching, we must move out of unnter-quarters. (c) Com v6r appeteret, tamen hostOs ex hibernis nOn mOvOront, whereas {although) spring was approaching, nevertheless the enemy did not move out of winter-quarters, 1. Temporal Gum. 680. Cum, when, is used with all the tenses of the Indica-* tive to designate merely temporal relations. Animus, neo onm adest neo cum discfidit, appSret, C, Cat.M,, 22, 80 ; the soul is not visible, either when it is present, or when it departs. Sex librOs d6 r6 pGbUcS tnm scrlpBimns com gnbemScnla rel pGblicae tenObSmuB, C, Div,, 11. i, 3 ; I wrote the six books about the State at the time when I held the helm of the State. BecordSre tempos illnd com pater CtLriO maerens iacSbat in lectO, C, Ph., II. 18, 45 ; remember the time when Curio the father lay abed from grief lam dI11lc98c6bat onm slgnnm cOnsnl dedit, L., xxxvi. 24, 6 ; by this time day was beginning to dawn, when (581) the consul gave the signal. Ideal Second Person with the Subjunctive : InfSmia etiam tnm vlvit qnom esse crCdSs mortuam, Pl., Pers., 355 ; iU-fame lives on even when you think that it is dead. 2 so TEMPORAL SENTENCES. Remarks. — 1. Fuit cam commonly follows the analogy of other characteristic relatives (631), and takes usually the Subjunctive : Fait tempnf com (= fait earn) rllra oolerent homines, Varro, R.R,, in. 1,1; there was a time when all mankind tilled fields = were countrymen, 2. Keminl cam, I remember the time when, takes the Indie, but aadire earn takes the Subjv. parallel with the participle : Meminl earn mihl dteipere vidObfire, C, Fam., vn. 28, 1 ; I remember the time when you seemed to me to show the worst possible taste, AadlYl KStrodOmm oom dO ill ipsis rfibos disputfiret, C, Or., n. 90, 365 ; I have heard Metrodorus discuss{\u^ these very matters, 3. Peculiar is the use of oom with Lapses of Time. Lapses of Time are treated as Designations of Time in Accusative or Ablative : Kaltl anni sunt oom (= moltOs axmOB) in aere meO est, C, Fam., xv. 14, 1 ; {it is) many years (that) he has been (230) in my debt, NOndam centum et decem annI sunt oom (= ex qaO = abhine annOs) dO peeflnils repetondls icta I6x est, C, Off., n. 21, 75 ; it is not yet one hundred and ten years since the law concemirhg extortion was proposed, 681, Cum Inversum, When the two actions are indepen- dent, cum is sometimes used with the one which seems to be logically the principal clause, just as in English. lam dIltlo6sc6bat oom slgnom oOnsol dedit, L., xxxvi. 24, 6 ; by this time day was beginning to dawn, when the consul gave the signal, (582-3) 684. Iterative cum. — Cum in the sense of quo- tiens, as often as, takes the Tenses of Iterative Action. See 566. Solet oom s6 ptLrgat in m6 cOnferre onmem oolpam, C, Att.y ix. 2 A, 1 ; he is accustom^dy when he clears himself, to put off all the blame on me, 2. Circumstantial Cam. 686. Historical cum. — Cum, when, as, is used in narrative with the Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive to give the circumstances of a past action. The Imperfect is used if the action of the corn-clause occurs at the same time as that of the leading verb ; the Pluperfect if it precedes it. AgOsilfias cam ex AegyptO reverterfitar dec6ssit, Nep., xvu. 8, 6; Agesi- laus died as he was returning from Egypt. ZOnOnem com AthOnIs essem aadisbam frequenter, C, N.D., i. 21, 59 ; when I was (being) at Athens, I heard Zeno {lecture) frequently. Com Caesar AncOnam occupSvisset, orbem reUquimos, C, Fam., xvi. 12, 2 ; when (as) Caesar had occupied Ancona (Caesar having occupied Ajicona), Heft the city. CONDITIONAL SENTEKCBS. 25 1 Attains moritnr alterO et leptuSgteimO axmO, onm qoattuor et qnadrS- gintfi axmOs regnSsiet, L., xxxttt. 21, 1 ; Attains died in his seventy- second year, having reigned forty-four years. 686. Causal cum. — Cum, when, whereas, since, seeing that, is used with any tense of the Subjunctive, to denote the reason of an action. Quae enm ita sint, eflEbctom est nihil esse malum quod tnrpe nOn sit, C, Fin.y ni. 8, 29 ; since these things are so, it is made out (proved) that nothing is had that is not dishonorable. DolO erat pttgnandom, enm pfir nOn esset armis, Nep., xxiii. 10, 4 ; he had to fight by strata>gem, as he (seeing that he) was not a match in arms, 687. Concessive and Adversative cum. — Cum, whereas, al- though, is used with any tense of the Subjunctive, to ex- press concession or opposition. Nihil m9 adillvit, onm posset, C, Att., ix. 13, 3 ; he gave me no assist- ance, although {at a tims when) he had it in his power. Ferire artem pntSmns nisi appSret, onm dSsinat ars esse, si app&ret, Quint., iv. 2, 127 ; we think that (our) art is lost unless it shows, whereas it ceases to be art if it shows. 688. Cum — ^tum. When cum, when, turn, then, have the same verb, the verb is put in the Indicative. Cum — ^tum then has the force of loth — and especially. FansaniSs eOnsiUa onm patriae tnm sibi inimloa eapiebat, Nep. , iv. 3, 3 ; Pausanias conceived plans that were hurtful both to his country and especially to himself. Remark. — When they have different verbs, the verb with enm may be in the Subjunctive, especially if there is an idea of concession. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES, 689. In Conditional Sentences the clause which contains the condition (supposed cause) is called the Protasis, that which contains the consequence is called the Apodosis. Logically, Protasis is Premiss ; and Apodosis, Conclusion. Grammatically, the Apodosis is the Principal, the Protasis the Dependent, clause. 690. Sign of the Conditional. — The common conditional particle is 8l» if. - I 252 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 591. Negative of sL — The negative of si is si ndn or nisL (a) Si non means if not, and is the rule : 1. When the positive of the same verh precedes. 81 ftoerii, mlgnam habSbO grStiam; si nOn fBoerib, IgnOsoam, C^Fam., V. ig ; if you do it, I will be very grateful to you ; if you do not, I will forgive (you). 2. When the Condition is concessive ; in this case the principal clause often contains an adversative particle. 81 mihl bonft r6 pUblieS frul nOn licnerit, at carfibO xnalS, C, Mil., 34, 93 ; if I shall not be allowed to enjoy good government, I shall at least be rid of bad. (b) Hisi means unless, and is used when an exception or restriction is made to the leading statement. Compare the general use of nisi, except (r.). Visi molestnmft, paucls percontfirier (130, 6) volO ego ex t6, Vl,, Rud., 120 ; if it is not disagreeable, I wish to a^k you a few questions. So especially after negatives. KOn potMxn vlvere nisi in Utterb ylverem, C, Fam., ix. 26, 1 ; I could not live unless I lived in study. Kemoria minnitnr nisi earn exeroefis, C, Cat.M., 7, 21 ; memory wanes unless (except) you exercise it. (SI nOn exercefis, in case you fail to ex- ercise it.) Remark. — Nisi, after negative sentences or equivalents, has often the signification of but, except, besides, only : Nihilhlc nisi triste videbis, Ov., Tr., iii. i, 9 ; you mil see nothing here except (what is) sad. Falsns honor iuvat et mendSx Inf&mia terret, qnem nisi mendOsnm et medicandnml H., Fp., i. 16, 39 ; '^ false honor charms and lying slan- der scares," whom but the faulty and the fit for physic ? 692. Two Conditions excluding each the other. — When two conditions exclude each the other, si is used for the fii'st ; sin, if not {but if), for the second. Sin is further strengthened by autem, verd (rare), hut ; minus, less {not) ; secns (rare), otherwise ; aliter, else. ICereStfbra, si tennis est, sordida pntanda est ; sin mftgna et oOpiOsa, nOn est vitnperanda, C, Off., i. 42, 151 ; mercantile business, if it is petty, is to be considered dirty (work) ; if (it is) not (petty, but) great and ahund- ant (= conducted on a large scaled it is not to be found fault urith. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 253 Remark. — If the verb or predicate is to be supplied from the con- text, Bl miniu, if less {not), sin minuB, sin aliter, if otherwise^ are com- monly used, rarely si nOn : Edtlc tficnm onmAs tuOs; si miniui, quam pltLrimOB, C, CaU^ i. 5, 10 ; take out imth you all your (followers) ; if not , as many as possible, Odero si poterO; si nOn, invltus amfibO, Ov., Am,, iii. 11, 35 ; Ivjill hate if I can, if not I shall love against my mil. 693. Other Forms of the Protasis. — i. The Protasis may be expressed by a Eelative. Qui yideret, urbem captam diceret, C, Verr., iv. 23, 52 ; w7h>so had seen it, had said that the city was taken, 2. The Protasis may be contained in a Participle. SI latet ars, prOdest ; affert dCprensa pudOrem, Oy., A.A., ii. 313 ; art, if concealed, does good ; detected, it brings shams. 3. The Protasis may be involved in a modifier. F6c6rnnt id servl MilOnis quod buOb qoisque seryOB in t£ll r6 faeere Toln- Isset, Q., Mil,, 10, 29 ; the servants of MUo did what eash man would have wished his servants to do in such case (si quid tSle accidisset). 4. The Protasis may be expressed by an Interrogative, or, what is more common, by an Imperative or equivalent. ImmtltS verbOmm collocfitiSnem, perierit tOta rAs, C, Or,, 70, 282 ; (if you) change the order of the words, the whole thing falls dead. Classification of Conditional Sentences. 594, Conditional sentences may be divided into three classes, according to the character of the Protasis : I. Logical Conditional Sentences: si, with the Indicative. II. Ideal Conditional Sentences : si, chiefly with Present and Perfect Subjunctive. III. Unreal Conditional Sentences : si, with Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. I. LOGICAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 696. The Logical Conditional Sentence simply states the matter, according to the formula : if this is so, then that is so ; if this is not so, then that is not so. The Protasis is in the Indicative : the Apodosis is gener- ally in the Indicative; but in future relations any equivalent of the Future (Subjunctive, Imperative) may be \i%ftd\ 254 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. Pbotaiu. Apodoiu. 81 id orSdis, trrb, If you believe that, you are going wrong, SI id crMSbfis, errSbfis, If you believed that, you were going wrong. 81 id crfididisti, errfisti, If you (have) believed that» you went (have gone) varong. 81 id cr6d6s, errSbii, If you (shall) believe that, you will (be) fl'iKlng) wrong (242). SI id crOdideris, errfiveris, If you (shall have) believeiA) that, you will have gone (will go) wrong. SI quid orOdidistl, errSs, If you have believed anything (= when yon belieTe anything), you go wrong. Comp. 669. 81 qnid orfididerSs, errftbfis, J(f you had believed anything (= when yon believed anything), you went wrong. 81 Bplritam dndt, vlyit, C, Inv.y i. 46, 86 ; if he 19 drawing (his) breath (breathing) he is living. 81 occldl, recte fSoI ; Bed nOn oecldl, Quint., iy. 5, 13 ; if I killed him, I did right ; but I did not kill him. KStUraxn si sequfimiir duoem, nnmquam aberrftbimiu, C, Off., i. 28, 100; if we (shall) follow nature (as our) guide, we shall never go astray. Flectere si nequeO snperOB, Acberonta moTSbO, V., A.y yu. 312 ; if I can't bend the gods above, Til rouse {all) hell below. BSsinAs timSre, si sperSre dOsierib, Sen., E.M., i. 5, 7 ; you will cease to fear, if you {shall have) cease{d ) to hope. Feream male, si nOn opUmam erat, H., S., 11. i, 6 ; may I die the death if it was not best. Remarks. — 1. After a verb of Saying or Thinking (OrStiO ObUqna), the Protasis must be put in the Subjv., according to the rule. (81 id credis, errSs.) DicO, t6, si id crfidSs, errfire. BIxI, t6, 8l id or6der68, errSre. (SI id cr6d6B, errSbis.) DicO, t6, si id crSdSs, errStttmm eese. DIxI, te, 8l id cr6der6e, errfitOmm esse. (SI id crfididisti, errSstl.) DIcQ, t6, si id crfididedb, errSsse. BIxI, te, Bl id crfididissSs, errSsse. For examples, see QrfitiO Obllqoa, 657. 2. The Subjv. is used by Attraction : ArSneolae rSte tezmit ut si quid inhaeserit cOnficiant, C, N.D,, n. 48, 123 ; spiders weave webs (507) to despatch anything that gets caught, (SI quid inhaesit cOnficiont.) 3. The Ideal Second Person takes the Subjv. in connection with the Universal Present : Senectlis plena est voluptStis si iUfi soiSs tltl, Sen., E.M., 12, ^\ old age is full of pleasure if you know iyf one knows) how to enjoy it CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 255 4 SiTe— ilye (sen — sen) almost invariably takes the Logical form. (496, 2.) Sea Tldt, ferOdter Instat Tictls ; sen viotiis est, Instaurat enm ▼ictOribus oertSmen, L., xxtii. 14, 1 ; if he vanquishes (567), he presses the van- quished furiously ; if he is vanquished, he renews the struggle with the vanquishers. II. IDEAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 696. The Ideal Conditional Sentence represents the mat- ter as still in suspense, according to the formula : if this should be so, then that would be so. Nothing is indicated as to the reality of the actions. The point of view is usually the Present. I. The Protasis is put in the Present Subjunctive for continued action, and in the Perfect Subjunctive for com- pletion or attainment. The Apodosis is in the Present or Perfect Subjunctive. The Imperative and Future Indicative or equivalents are often found. The Universal Present is frequently used, especially in combination with the Ideal Second Person (595, R. 3). Protasis. Apodosis. 81 id crSdfis, errOs, J(f you should (were to) believe that^ you would be going wrong, SI id crMSs, errfiveris, If you should (were to) believe that^ you would go wrong. 81 id crSdideris, err6e, 1. ^you should (prove to) have believed that (Perfect ; Action Past or Fatare), you would be going wrong, 2. If you should (come to) believe that (Aor.; Action Future), you would be going wrong. 81 id crediderb, errSverb (rare), j^you (should have) believe{d) that^ you would (have) go(ne) wrong. Hanc viam si asperam esse negem, mentiar, C, Sest., 46, 100 ; ifl should say that this way is not rough] I should lie. 81 gladinm qois apud t6 sSnfi mente deposuerit, repetat InsSniOns, red- dere peocStom sit, offlcinm nOn reddere, C, Off., iii. 25, 95 ; if a man in sound mind were to deposit {to have deposited) a sword unth you, (and) reclaim it (when) mad, it would he wrong to return it, right not to return it. 81 valeant homines, ars tna, Phoebe, iacet, Ov., Tr., rr., 3, 78 ; should men keep well, your art, Phoebus, is naught. KlUla est exoOsStiO peooStI, si amid cansfi peocfiyeris, C, Lad., 11, 87 ; it is no excuse for a sin to have sinned for the sake of a frieud. 2S6 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 2. The Point of View is occasionally the Past. In that case the Protasis is found in the Imperfect, very rarely the Pluperfect Subjunc- tive, and the Apodosis has corresponding forms. 81 AlfBniis torn itLdidiim accip«re yellet, quid as^tel C, Quinet., 26, 83 ; in case Alfenua was willing then to undertake the trial, what were you to do f (Present : si nunc velit . . . agfis 1) Remark. — The lively fancy of the Roman sometimes employs the Ideal where we should expect the Unreal. This is more common in early Latin. Til il hlo 8lB, aliter sentifis, Ter., And., 310 ; if you were /(put your- self in my place), you would think differently, III. UNREAL CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 697. The Unreal Conditional Sentence is used of that which is not or was not true, according to the formula : if this were so, then that would be so ; if this had been so, then that would have been so. The Imperfect Subjunctive is used to express continued action — generally, in opposition to the Present ; the Pluper- fect Subjunctive, to express completed action — uniformly in opposition to the Past. Protasis. Apodosis. 81 id or6der68y errSres, If you believed (were believing) tfiat^ [you do not,] you would be going wrong. SI id cr6didis866, errfiviues, If you had believed that^ [you did not,] you would have gone wi'ong. Sapientia nOn expeteretur, si nihil effioeret, C, Fin., i. 13, 42; wisdom would not he sought after, if it did no practical good. Gaederem t6, nisi Irfiscerer, Sen., Ira., i. 15, 3 ; I should flog you, if I were not getting angry. 81 ibi te esse sclssem, ad tS ipse venissem, C, Mn., i. S ;if had knoum you were there, I should have come to you myself. Ego nisi peperissem, BQma nOn opptLgnSretnr ; nisi ffliom habfirem, libera in UberS patriS mortna essem, L. , 11. 40, 8 ; had I not become a mother, Rome would not he besieged ; had I not a son, I should have died a free woman in a free land. Eemares. — (1) 2. After a negative Protasis, the Apodosis is some- times expressed by the Irapf. Indie, when the action is represented as interrupted (233). Lfibebar longios, nisi me retinnissem, C, Leg., i. 19, 52 ; I was letting (should have let) myself go on too /ar, had I not checked myself CONDITIOKAL SENTENCES. 2$/ 3. The Indicative is the regular construction in the Apodosis with verbs which signify Possibility or Power, Obligation or Necessity — so with the active and passive Periphrastic — vix, paene, scarcely , hardly j and the like. consul esse qui petui, nisi enm vltae cnrsnm tenuissem 1 C, Rep., i. 6, 10 ; how could I have been consvX, if I had not kept that course of life f EmendStlinis, si lionisset, eram, Ov., Tr,, i. 7, 40 ; I should have re- moved the faults, if I had been free (to do it). 4. In (hrStiO Obllqoa the Protasis is unchanged ; the Apodosis is formed by the Periphrastic Pr. and Pf. Inf. (149), for the Active, futtl- mm (fore) nt, fdttLriim faisse nt for passive and Supineless verbs. A. DloO (dIzX), to, si id crOderOs, errfittLnun esse. B. BIoO (dizl), to, si id crOdidissOs, errStHmm faisse. A, DicO (dizl), si id crOderOs, fore ut dOoiperOris. B. DIOO (dixl), si id crOdidissOs, fatfbrom faisse nt dOciperOris. 5. When the Apodosis of an Unreal Conditional is made to depend on a sentence which requires the Subjv., the Plupf. is turned into the Periphrastic Pf. Subjv. ; the Impf. form is unchanged. The passive form is unchanged. KOn dnbitO, I do not doubt. qnln, si id crOderOs, errSrOs, ihat^ if you believed that, you would be going wrong. KOn dnbitfibam, \ qnln, si id crOdidissOs, errattLms faerls, I did not doubt, J that, if you had believed that, you would have gone wrong. Honestnm tSle est nt, yel si IgnOrSrent id hominOs, esset laudSbile, Of. C, Fin., II. 15, 49 ; virtue is a thing to deserve praise, even if men did not know it. BIc qoidnam factflms fderb, si eO tempore cOnsor faissOs 1 L., ix. 33, 7 ; tell (me) what you would have done, if you had been censor at that time f Similarly potnl (r. 3) becomes potnerim, and fal with the Periphrastic passive in -dus becomes faerim after all tenses. INCOMPLETE CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 698. Omission of the Conditional Sign. — Occasionally the members of a Conditional sentence are put side by side without a Conditional sign. FOscit, dandnm est; vocat, veniendnm est, C, Parad., 5, 2 ; she asks, he must give ; she calls, he must come. Onum oOgpiOris, omnis nOrls, Tee., Ph., 265 ; you know one, you know all. 17 258 CONCESSIVE SENTEKCBS. 699. Omission of the Verb of the Protasis. — ^When the verb of the Protasis is omitted, either the precise form or the general idea of the verb is to be supplied from the Apodosis. 81 qniiqiiam ( = il qaiflquam fkdt), CatO lapieni fkdt, Cf. C, Lad.f 2, 9 ; if any one was wisCf Cato was. Edilo tficnm omnSs tnOs; iI minni, qnam pltLriinSt, C, Cat., i. 5, 10 ; talce out with you all your (followers) ; if not {take out) as many as possible. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES OP COMPARISON. (600-1) 602. Tit si, ac si, quasi, qnam si, tamqnam, tamqnam si, velut, and velut si, meaning as if take the Subjunctive. The tenses follow the rule of sequence, rather than the ordinary course of the conditional. KOU timfire quasi [ = quam tixnefis il] assem elephantO dSs, Quint., yi. 3, 59 : do7iH be afraid, as if you were giving a penny to an elephant. Me invat, velnt ipse in parte labOrii Sc perlonll faerixn, ad finem beUI PflnicI pervenisie, L., xxxi. i; 1 am delighted to have rea^hsd the end of the Punic war, as if I had shared in the toil and danger {of it). Tantni patrSs metns c6pit velnt iI lam ad portfis hostis eeset, L., xxi. 16, 2 ; a great fear took hold of the senators, as if the enemy were already at their gates. Remarks. — 1. Qnasi is used to soften or apologize for a single word ( = nt ita dicam). Mori est qnaedam qnasi migrStiO conunlitStiOqne vltae, Cf C, Tuse., I. 12, 27 ; death is as it were a shifting of lifers quarters. 2. As in the ordinary Conditional sentence, so in the Comparative sentence, the Protasis may be expressed by a participle : Tamqnam occIenB relictnB est, Cf. C, Verr., v. 11, 28 ; hewcis leftfbr (as if) slain (dead). CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. (603) 604. Etsi, etiamsi, and tametsi, even if although, take the Indicative or Subjunctive, according to the gen- eral principles which regulate the use of fd, if The In- dicative is more common, especially with etsi. D6 fntHrls r6bns etsI semper difficile est dicere, tamen interdnm oon- iecttLrS possis aoc6dere, C, Fam.y vi. 4, 1 ; although it is always difficult to tell about the futwre, nevertheless you can sometimes come near it by ffuessing. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES. ^59 Inopi ille etiaiiiil refarre grfitiam nOn potest, habSre o«rt0 poteit, C, Ojf., n. 20, 69 ; ths needy man {spoken of)^ if he ecmnot return a favor y ca/n at least ful it, 605. Quamqnam {to what extent soever), although, is a generic relative (254, r. 4), and, in the best authors, is construed with the Indicative. Medici qnamqnam intellegimt saepe, tamen nnmqiiam aegrli dlount, illO morbO eOi eese moritflrOe, C, Div,y 11. 25, 54 ; although physicians often know, nevertheless they never tell their patients that they will die of that (particular) disease. Remark. — The Potential Subjv. (257) is sometimes found with quamqiiaiii* Qnamqnam exeroitnm qui in VoIbcIi erat mfiUet, nihil recliBftyit, L., VI. 9, 6 ; although he might well ham preferred the army which was in the Volscian cowntryy nevertheless he mxide no objection. So especially with the Ideal Second Person. 606. Quamvis {as much as you will), although, is con- strued with the Subjunctive. QnamvlB sint inb aqnfi, inb aqnfi maledlcere temptant, Ov., M,y vi. 376 ; although they he under the water^ under the water they try to revile. QnamvlB iHe niger, qnamvli ttl candidnB essSs, V., Ec^ 11. 16 ; although he was black, although you were fair. Remark. — QnamvlB is sometimes found with the Indicative in the poets and later prose. 607. Licet {it is permitted) retains its verbal nature, and, according to the Sequence of Tenses, takes only the Pres- ent and Perfect Subjunctive : Lieet irrldeat bI qnl vnlt, C, Parad., i. 1,8; let any one laugh who tvill. Ardeat ipsa lieet, tormentiB gandet amantis, Juv., vi. 209 ; though she herself is aglow, she rejoices in the tortures of her lover, 608. Tit, granted that, and n6, granted that {not), are also used concessively for the sake of argument. Ut dSeint vIiSb, tamen est landanda volnntSs, Ov., Pont., in. 4, 79 ; granted that strength he lacking, nevertheless you must praise {my) good will, H8 Bit Bnmmnm malnm dolor, malum oerte eet, C, Tusc, n. 5, 14 ; granted that pain he not the chief evil, an evil it ccr(a/Cul'ij ia. 2fc ccssiTe sectence mav !>e re icatiTfr Attribute. Mattarm tf Milt « /A« t^t4 and tart of ma»ty in«V ktftp it not wjTHOCT yjHr ptre^nrim^ iff. 6M. O^Aifr f^smu of tke Csmoemrt Semiemee, — ^The Con- br a Futiciple or Pred- C, Cai., I. 2, 6 ; over fom^ thomgh you perceive RELATIVE SENTENCES. 610. The Latin language uses the relatire construction far more than the English : so in the beginning of sentences, and in combination with Conjunctions and other Relatives. Hem AKJL«. — 1. The awkwardness, or impossilHlitT, of a literal trans- lation may generallT Ije relieved bj the substitution of a demonstrative with an appropriate conjunction, or the emplojinent of an abstract fe-uWtantive : Qnae enm ita nnt, now sin^e ffuse things are bo (Ciceronian formula). Jatttra modo ezspeetaat ; qnae quia eota eae afia pommt, cQaAdimtiir et aagOre et metft, C, Fin., i. i3, 60 ; they only look forward to the future; arid because that cannot he certain, they wear themselves out tcith difftreHH and fear. Epicftnii ndn latii politns ib artibos quia qui teneat, inidttl appellantar, C, Fin., I. 7, 26 ; Epicurus is not sufficiently polished by those accom- plishments, from the possession of which people are eaUed cultivated. 2. Notice eHfjecially quod in combination with il, niai, and nl, with nbi, quia, quoniam, and the like, in which quod means and as for thai, and is s^jinetirnes translated by and, hut, therefore, whereas^ sometimes not at all. At the beginning of a sentence it is often convenient to translate quod '* as for the fact tliat." See 525, 2. Quod nl fuistem incSgitftni ita eum exipectSrem ut pSr fnit, Teb., Ph., 155 ; whereas, had I not been heedless, I should he avjaiting him in proper mood. Quod mftgnum dolOrem brevem etie dicitis, id nOn intellegO, qufile nt, ('., Fin,, II. 29, 94; as for your saying that great grief is short, I do not understand what that means. (f)l 1) 612. Position of Relatives. — The Relative and Rela- tive forms are put at the beginning of sentences and clauses. Th(3 i)reposition, however, generally, though not invariably, l)rocode8 its Relative (413). 613. Antecedent. — The word to which the Relative refers is called the Antecedent, because it precedes in thought even when it does not in expression. ££LATIV£ S£NT£NC£S. 261 CONCORD. 614. The Eelative agrees with its antecedent in Gender, Number, and Person. Uxor oontenta est quae bona est tInO virO, Pl., Merc, 812 ; a vyife who is good 18 contented with one husband. HOC illlB nSrrO qui m6 nOn intellegiint, Phaedr., 3, 128 ; I tell this tale for those who understand me not. Ego qui te oOnfinnO, ipse m6 nOn possum, C, Fam., xiv. 4, 5 ; 7 who reassure you, cannot reassure myself. Remarks. — 1. The Relative agrees with the Person of the true An- tecedent, even when a predicate intervenes ; exceptions are very rare : TU as is, qui m6 snmmls laudibos ad caelum extnlistl, C, Fam., xv. 4, 11 ; you are he that hasif) praised me to the skies, (2) 3. The gender and number of the Relative may be determined : (a) By the sense, and not by the form ; Caesa sunt ad sex mllia qui Pydnam perfOgerant, L., xliv. 42, 7 ; there were slain up to six thmisand who had fled to Pydna. EqnitStnm omnem praemittit, qui videant, Caes., E.G., i. 15 ; he sent aHl the cavalry ahead, who should see (that they might see, to see), (b) By the predicate or the apposition, and not by the antecedent ; Thtfbae, qnod BoeOtiae caput est, L., xlii. 44, 3 ; Thebes, which is the capital of Boeotia. ntimen Scaldis, quod Influit in Mosam, Caes., B,0,, vi. 33, 3 ; the river Scheldt, which empties into the Maas, (4) 5. When the Relative refers to the combined antecedents of dif- ferent gender, the strongest gender is preferred, according to 286 : 5tium atque dlvitiae, quae prima mortSlSs putant,S., C, 36, 4 ; leisure and money, which mortals reckon as the prime things. Or, the nearest gender may be preferred : £ae frUgSs atque frfLctOs quOs terra gignit, C, N,D,, 11. 14, 37 ; those fruits of field and tree which earth bears, 6. Combined Persons follow the rule, 287. 616. Repetition of the Antecedent, — The Antecedent of the Relative may be repeated in the Relative clause, with the Relative as its attributive. Caesar intellfixit diem InstSre, quO die frflmentum mllitibus metlrl oporte- ret, Caes., B,0., i. 16, 5 ; Caesar saw that the day was at hand, on which day it behooved to measure com (corn was to be measured out) to the soldiers. 262 KELATIVE SENTENCES. 616. Incorporation of the Antecedent. — i. The Antece- dent substantivre is often incorporated into the Relative clause ; sometimes there is a demonstrative antecedent, sometimes not. In qnem prlmnm figressi sunt locnm TrOia vooStnr, L., l i, 3 ; the first place they landed at was called Troy. 2. An appositional substantive, from which a Relative clause depends, is regularly incorporated into the Relative clause. Ambms Syriam ft CiliciS dividit, qui mOns erat hostinm plfinni, C, Att,, V. 20, 3 ; Syria is divided from Cilicia by Amanus, a mountain which was full of enemies. 3. Adjectives, especially superlatives, are sometimes transferred from the substantive in the principal clause and made to agree with the Relative in the Relative clause. ThenuBtoclSs d6 seryli sols qnem habnit fldSliMimnm ad rfigem mlsit, Nep., II. 4, 3 ; Themistodes sent the most faithful slave he had to the king. 617. Attraction of the Relative. — The Accusative of the Relative is occasionally attracted into the Ablative of the antecedent, rarely into any other case. HOC cOnfXrmSmns 1110 angnriO qnO dIximnB, C, ^^/., x. 8, 7 ; tre con- firm this by the augury which we mentioned. 618. Correlative of the Relative, — The usual Correlative of qui is is, more rarely hie, ille. Is minimO eget mortSlis, qui minimnm cnpit, Stbus, 286 (Fr.) ; that mortal lacketh least, who wanteth least. HIc sapiens, de qnO loqnor, C, Ac^ 11. 33, 105 ; this wise man of whom I am speaking. lUa diss veniet, mea qnfi ItLgnbria pOnam, Ov., TV., iv. 2, 73 ; the day will come when I shall lay aside my mournful strains. 619. Absorption of the Correlative. — The Correlative is is often absorbed, especially when it would stand in the same case as the Relative. Postnme, nOn bene olet, qnl bene semper olet. Mart., u. 12, 4 ; Jb^/u- muSf (he) smells not sweet, who always smells sweet. Qnem dl dlligantadalOscOns moritnr, Pl., B., 816 ; (he) whom the gode love dies yotmg. RELATIVE SENTENCES. 263 620. Position of the Correlative clause, — The Relative clause naturally follows its Correlative, but it often pre- cedes ; absorption also is common. Male 18 res habet cum quod virttLte effici debet id temptstur peotLniS, C, Off,, n. 6, 22 ; it is a bad state of affairs when what ought to hea/xorrir- plished "by worth, is attempted by money, duod nOn dedit fortfbia, nOn eripit, Sen., F.M,, 59, 18; what fortune has not given (does not give), she does not take away, 621. Indefinite Antecedent. — The Indefinite Antecedent is generally omitted. filige enl dlcSe : ttL mihi sOla places, Ov., J..^., i. 42 ; choose some one to whom you may say : You alone please ms, TENSES IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 622. Future and Future Perfect, — The Future and Future Perfect are used with greater exactness than in cur- rent English (242, 244). Sit liber, domiiius qui volet esse meus, Mart., n. 32, 8 ; he must be free who mshes (shall wish) to be my master, Qui prior strinxerit ferrum, 6ius Victoria erit, L., xxiv. 38, 5 ; who first draws (shall have drawn) the sword, his shall be the victory. 623. Iterative Action. — Kelative sentences follow the laws laid down for Iterative action (566, 567). I. Contemporaneous action : Ore trahit quodcumque potest, atque addit acervO, H., S., I. i, 34 ; drags itfith its mouth whatever it can, and adds to the treasure (heap), QuSeuxnque incCdebat Sgmen, legStl oocurrebant, L., xxxiv. 16, 6; in whatever direction the column advanced, ambassadors came to meet them, II. Prior action : Terra numquam sine OstlrS reddit^quod aoc6pit, C, Cat,M., 15, 51 ; the earth never returns without interest what it has received {receives), Haerebant in memoriS quaeoumque audierat et viderat Tbemistooies, Q., Ac., II. I, 2 ; whatever Themistocles heard and saw (had heard and seen), remained fixed in his memory, Sequentur te quOcumque pervCnerls vitia, Sen., E.M., 28, 1 ; vices wiU follow you whithersoever you go, Bemakk. — On the Subjy. in Iterative SentenceSj see 567, r. 264 KELATIVE SENTENCES. MOODS IN RELATIVE SENTENCES. 624. The Relative clause, as such — ^that is, as the repre- sentative of an adjective — takes the Indicative mood. Uxor quae bona est, 'PL.^Merc, 812 ; a wife who is good (a goodtoife). 625. Indefinite and Generic Relatives. — Oaicmnque, qois- qtds, and the like, are Iterative in their nature and take the Indicative according to the principles of Iterative action ; see 623. Remark. — The Subjv. is used : (i) In OrStiO ObUqua (Total or Partial) : MfirtI Gain quae bellO c6perint (Pf . Subjv.) dfivovent (= b6 datttrOs vovent), Cf. Caes., B.G., vi. 17, 3; the Oauls devote {promise to give) to Mars whatever they (shall) take in war (0. B., Quae oOperimni, dabimni). (2) By Attraction of Mood (Complementary Clauses) : Quis enm dlligat qaem metnat! C, Lael., 15, 53 ; wJio could love a man whom he fears f (3) In the Ideal Second Person : Bonus i6gnior fit ubi neglegSs, S., lug,, 31, 28 ; a good man becomes more spiritless when you neglect him. (62G) 627. The Subjunctive is employed in Eelative clauses when it would be used in a simple sentence. Potential: HabeO quae velim, C, Fin., i. 8, 28; / have what I should like. Optative : Quod faustum sit, rSgem creSte, L., i. 17, 10 ; blessing be on your choicey make ye a king. Remark. — Notice the Subjunctive in restrictive phrases like quod sciam, so far as I know, 628. The Subjunctive is used in Eelative clauses which form a part of the statement or opinion of another than the narrator, or of the narrator himself when indirectly quoted. So especially in Oratid Obliqua and Final Sen- tences. B6ct6 Graecl praecipiunt, nOu temptanda quae effici nOn pondnt, Quint., IV. 5, 17 ; right are the Greeks in teaching that those things are not to be attempted which cannot be accomplished. SenStus cfinsuit uti quicumque Oalliam prOvinoiam obtinSret, HaednOs defenderet, Caes., B.G., i. 35; the senate decreed that whoever obtained Gaul as his province should defend the Haedui, RELATIVE SENTENCES. 265 Rekabk. — Even in SrStiO Obllqua the Indie, is retained : (a) In explanations of the narrator : Htlntifitnr AfirfiniO xnSgnOs commefitlls qui iter habsbant ad Caeiarem ad fliimexi cOnstitisse, Gaes., B^G.^ i. 51, 1 ; it is (was) announced to Afra- nitLS that large sfiippliea of provisions (which were on their way to Caesar) had halted at the river, (b) In mere circumlocutions : FrOvidendmn est 116 quae dioniitnr ab eO qui dicit dissentiant, Quint., ni. 8, 48 ; «^e must see to it that the speech he not out of keeping toith the speaker. 629. Attraction of Mood, — Relative sentences which depend on Infinitives and Subjunctives, and form a neces- sary part of the thought, are put in the Subjunctive. Pi^ est ingenil contentum esse ils quae sint ab alils inventa, Quint., X. 2, 4 ; it is the mark of a slow genius to he content with what has heen found out hy others. 81 sOlOs e(to dlcerSs miserOs qnibus moriendmn esset, nemiiiem eOnun qui vlverent ezdperes; moriendmn est enim omnibus, C, Tusc, i. 5, 9 ; «/ you called only those wretched who had {have) to die, you would except none who lived {live) ; for all have to die. Remark. — The Inclic. is used : (a) In mere circumlocutions ; so, often in Consecutive Sentences : Efficitur ab OrStOre, ut il qui audiunt ita adfidantur ut Orfitor velit, Cf. C, Br., 49, 185 ; it is hrought ahout hy the orator that those who hear him (= his auditors) are affected as he wishes {them to he), {b) Of individual facts : Et quod vidSs perlsse perditum dtLcSs, Cat. , viii. 2 ; and what you see (definite thing, definite person) is lost for aye, for aye deem lost. (Quod videSs, anybody, anything.) 630. Relative Sentences of Design. — Eelative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Design, when qui = ut is, in order that he. Sunt multl qui firipiunt alils quod alils largiantur, C, Off., i. 14, 43 ; many are they who snatch from some to lavish on others, 631. Relative Sentences of Tendency, — Eelative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Tendency, when qui = ut is, 80 that he {Subjunctive of Characteristic), The notion is generally that of Character and Adaptation, and we distinguish three varieties : I. With a definite antecedent, when the character is emphasized ; regularly after iddneus, suitable ; aptus, f,t ; 266 BELATIYE SENTENCES. dignnfl, worthy ; indlgnni, unworthy; after is, talis, diiuanodi, tarn, tantiis, and the like ; after anus and sdlna Est innocentia adfeetiO tSlis animi, quae nooeat nSminl, C, Tuac., m. 8, 16 ; harmleaanesa (innocence) is that state of mind that does harm to no one (is innocuous to any one), SOlnB 68, Caesar, ctLioB in victOriS ceoiderit nSmS, C, Dei., 12, 34 ; thou art the only one, Caesar , in whose victory no one has fallen, 2. With indefinite antecedents such as : Eft qui, sunt qui, there is, there are some who ; nSmS est qui, thsre is none to; nihil est qnod, t?iere is nothing to; mnltl, nOnnlilll snnt qui, there are m^ny, some, to ; liabeO qnod, / have to ; reperinntnr f^al^persons are found who (to) . . .; (^oiMmiXf^^ whoistherewho(to) , , . f est ofLr, there is reason for, etc. So, also, fait cnm, there was a time when (580, E. 1). Snnt qnl discSssnm animI S oorpore pntent esse mortem, C, Tusc, i. 9, 18; there are some who (to) think that death is the departure of the soul from the body. Post mortem in morte nihil est qnod metnam mall, Pl., Capt., 741 ; after death there is no ill in death for me to dread, Kec mea qnl digitis IfUnina oondat erit, Ov., ITer., 10, 120 ; and there will he no one to close mine eyes with his fingers, Miserrimns est qnl qnom Ssse onpit qnod edat nOn habet, Pl., Capt., 463 ; he is a poor wretch who, when he wants to eat, has not anything to eat (nOn habet qnid edat would mean does not know what to eat). Remark. — The Indicative may be used in affirmative statements of definite facts, and not of general characteristics : Mnltl snnt qnl 6ripiant, Mnltl snnt qnl firipinnt, TTiere are many to snatch away. Many are they who snatch away. Snnt-qnl (= qnldam) qnod sentinnt nOn andent dicere, C, Off., i. 24, 84 ; some dare not say what they think. Snnt-qnibns ingrSte timida indnlgentia servit, Ov., A. A., n. 435 ; to some trembling indulgence plays the slave all thanklessly, 3. After comparatives with quam as an object clause. MftiOra in dfifectiOne deUqnerant, qnam qnibns IgnOscI posset, L., xxvi. 12, 6 ; (in that revolt) they had been guilty of greater crimes than could be forgiven (had sinned past forgiveness), 632. ftnin in Sentences of Character. — After negative clauses, quln is often used (556) for qui non. Snnt certa vitia qnae n6m8 est qnin effagere cnpiat, C, Or., ni. it, 41 ; there are certain faults which there is no one but (= everybody) desires to escape. COMPARATIVE SEKTBNCES. 26/ 633. ReHaiive in a Causal Sense. — ^When qui = cum is, as he, the Subjunctive is employed. CanlninB fait mlrifiofi vigilantiS qui 8u0 tOtO cOnsnlStfL sonmnm nOn ▼!- derit, C, Fam.^ vii. 30, 1 ; Caninius has shown marvellous watchful- neas, not to have seen ( = taken a wink of) sleep in his whole consul- ship, 684. Relative in a Concessive or Adversative Sense, — When qui = cum is, although, whereas he, the Subjunctive is employed. Ego qui leviter OraecSs UtterSs attigissem, tamen cum vSnissem AtheaSs oompltLrSB ibi diss lum commorfitus, C, Or., i. 18, 82 ; although I had dabbled but slightly in Greek, nevertheless, having come to Athens, 1 stayed there several days, (635-6) 687. Relative Sentence represented hy a Participle. — The Relative sentence may be represented by a Participle. OmxiSB alind agentCs, aliad sixnidaiites perfidi sunt, C, Off,, iii. 14, 60 ; all who are driving at one thing and pretending another are treacher- ous, COMPARATIVE SENTENCES. 688. Comparative Sentences which are introduced in English by as or than, are introduced in Latin : (a) By correlatives ; {b) by atque or ac ; (c) by quam. 689. Moods in Comparative Sentences, — ^The mood of the Dependent clause is the Indicative, unless the Subjunctive is required by the laws of oblique relation, or by the condi- tional idea (602). Remark. — On potius qnam with the Subjv., see below, 644, r. 3. 640. The dependent clause often borrows its verb from the leading clause. Compare 602. Servl mOriboB Xsdem erant qaibus dominni, Cf C, Verr., iii. 25, 62 ; ths servants had the sams character as the master. 641. When both clauses have the same verb and are both dependent upon a verb of Saying or Thinking, they have the same construction. Ita lentiO Latlnam lingnam looapletiOrem esse qnam Oraecaxn, C, Fin., I. 3, 10 ; it is my opinion that the Latin language is richer than iM Greek, 268 COMPAKATIVE SENTENCES. Ego CKiun euMuntm nOn eadem d6 r6 publics lentlre quae 1116 sdO, C, Pis., 32, 79 ; I know that Oaiua Caesar has not the same political views thai /(have). I. Correlative Comparative Sentences. 642. Correlative Sentences of Comparison are introduced by Adjective and Adverbial Correlatives : I. Adjective correlatives : tot, totidem qnot, (so) as many ^ tantns quantns, (so) flw great tSUs qofilis, such " as. Idem qui, the same Adverbial correlatives : tarn qnam, (so) as much (so) as much . ^ tantopere qnantopere, totiens qnotieni, as often tamdm quamditL, as long ita, sic at, atl, ilcut, item, itidem qnemadmodnm, qnOmodo, ^ ► so (as) = as. k Qnot hominSs, tot sententiae, (as) many men^ (so) many miiids, Ter., Ph., 454. Frflmentum tantl fait qaantl iste aestimSvit, C, Verr,, in. 84, 194; com was worth as much as he valued it. Plerlqae habere amlcom tfilem volant, qaSlCs ipsi esse nOn possant, C, Lael,, 22, 82 ; m^st people tvish to have a friend of a character such as they themselves cannot possess. Kihil est tam popalfire qaam bonitfis, C, Lig., 12, 37 ; nothing is so winning as Tcindness. Sic de ambitiOne qaOmodo d6 amiofi qaerantor, Sen., E,M., 22, 10; they complain of ambition as they do of a sweetheart, TamditL reqaifitcO qaamditL ad t6 sorlbO, C, Att., ix. 4, 1 ; I rest as long as I am writing to you. 3. The Correlative is sometimes omitted. HomS, nOn qaam istl lont, glOriOsas, L., xxxy. 49, 7 ; a man, not (so) vainglorious as they are. DIicSs qaamditL yoISb, C, Off., i. i, 2 ; you shall learn (as long) as you wish. COMPARATIVE SENTBKCE8. 269 II. Comparative Sentences with ATQUE (AC). 648. Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness may take atque or ac. VirtUs eadem in homine Sc deO est, C, Leg., i. 8, 25 ; virtue is the same in man as in god. DiflsimnlStiO est cum alia dICimtur Sc sentifis, C, Or., 11. 67, 269 ; dis- simulation is when other things are said than what you mea/n, (some- thing is said other than what you mean). KOn dizl seons Sc sentiebaiii, C, Or,, 11. 6, 24 ; I did not speak other- wise than I thought, III. Comparative Sentences with QTFAM. 644. Comparative Sentences with quam follow the com- parative degree or comparative expressions. The Verb of the dependent clause is commonly to be supplied from the leading clause, according to 640. In Comparative Sentences quam takes the same case after it as before it. Melior est certa pSz quam spCrSta Victoria, L., xxx. 30, 19 ; better is certain peace than hoped-for victory. Potius amicum quam dictum perdidi, Quint., yi. 3, 20 ; I preferred to lose my friend rather than my joke. Remarks. — 1. When the second member is a subject, and the first member an oblique case, the second member must be put in the Nom., with the proper form of the verb esse, unless the oblique case be an Accusative : Vlclnus tuus equum meliOrem liabet quam tuus est, Cf. C, Inv., i- 3T) 52 ; your neighbor has a better horse thafi yours. Ego hominem callidiOrem vldl nSminem quam PhormiOnem, Ter., Ph., 591 ; I have seen no shrewder rnan than Phormio (= quam PhormiO est). 2. On quam prO, and quam qui, see 298. On the double comparative, see 299. 3. (a) When two clauses are compared by potius, rather, prius, be- fore, citius, quicker, sooner, the second clause is put in the Pr. or Impf. Subjv. (512), with or without ut. DepOgnS potius quam servias, C, A it., vii. 7, 7 ; fight it out rather than be a slave. (b) If the leading clause is in the Inf., the dependent clause may be in the Inf. likewise. 86 ab omnibus dSsertOs potius quam abs t6 defSnsOs esse mfilunt, C, Div. in Case, 6, 21 ; they prefer to be deserted by all rather than defended by you. 270 THE ABRIDGED SEKTEKCE. THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 646. The compound sentence may be reduced to a simple sentence, by substituting an Infinitive or a Participle for the dependent clause. 646. The practical uses of the Infinitive and its kindred forms, as equivalents of dependent clauses, have already been considered : Infinitive after Auxiliary Verbs : 423. Gerund and Gerundive : 425-433. Supine : 434-436. Infinitive in Object Sentences : 526-531. Infinitive in Complementary Final Sentences : 532, 546, Infinitive in Relative Sentences : (635), 655, K. 1. HISTORICAL INFINITIVE. 647. The Present Infinitive is sometimes used by the his- torians to give a rapid sequence of events, with the subject in the Nominative ; generally, several Infinitives in succession. VerrSs minitSri DiodOrO, vOciferfirl paiam, laorimSs interdum vix tenSre, C, Verr.f iv. 18, 39 ; Verres threatened (w&s for threatening) Dtodortts, bawled out before everybody ^ sometimes could hardly restrain his tears, ORATIO OBLTQUA. 648. The thoughts of the narrator, or the exact words of a person, as reported by the narrator, are called OrfttiO Eecta, or Direct Discourse. Indirect Discourse, or Oratid Obliqua, reports not the exact words spoken, but the general impression produced. Remarks. — 1. Under the general head of OrStiO Obllqua are em- braced also those clauses which imply Indirect Quotation (Partial Ob- liquity). See 508. 2. Inqaam, quoth I, is used in citing the OrStiO BScta ; fiiO, I say, generally in OrfitiO Obllqna. Inqoam never precedes the drStiO Obllqna, but is always parenthetic ; Sid may or may not be parenthetic. THE ABEIDGED SENTENCE. 2^1 649. Or&tiO Obliqua differs from OratiO Becta, partly in the use of the Moods and Tenses, partly in the use of the pronouns. Moods in OrStio OblTqua. 650. In OratiO Obliqua the principal clauses (except In- terrogatives and Imperatives) are put in the Infinitive, the subordinate clauses in the Subjunctive, OrStiO B6cta : Apnd Hypanim flavinm, inqnit AristotelSs, OrfitiO Obliqua : Apad Hypanim fiuvinm Aristotelfii ait 0. B. : bSstiolae qaaedam nSscimtur, 0. 0. : bSBtiolSs qaSidam nSscI, 0. B. : quae ftnum diem vlvunt, 0. 0. : quae tlnum diem vlvant, C, Tusc., i. 39, 94. 0. 'R.—On the river Bog^ says AristoUe^ ) little creatures are bom^ that live 0. 0,— Aristotle says that on the river Bog, j {but) one day. S0crat6s dicere lolebat : 0. B. OmnSs in eO quod sciunt latis lunt eloquentSs, 0. 0. Omn6s in eO quod iclrent latis esse eloquentSs, C, Or,^ 1. 14, 68. 0. B. Socrates used to say: *^AU men are elogttent enough in what they XTxn)ER- STAND." 0. 0. Socrates used to say that all men were eloquent enough in what they under- stood. Remark. — When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Indie, the Inf. is used according to the rule for Verbs of Saying and Think- ing. When the Principal Clause, or Apodosis, is in the Subjv., as in the Ideal and Unreal Conditions, special rules are necessary (656). Otherwise, Subjv. in 5. B, continues to be Subjv. in 5. 0. 661. Interrogative sentences are put in the Subjunctive, according to 467 ; inasmuch as the verb of Saying involves the verb of Asking. Ariovistus respondit b6 prius in Oalliam venisse qusm populum BOmfi- num : quid sibi veUet cHr in suSs possessiOnes venlret, Caes., B,Q,, i. 44, 7 ; Ariovistus replied that he had come to Gaul before the Roman peo- ple ; what did he (Caesar) msan by coming into his possessions f (Quid tibi vis %) Remarks. — 1. Indicative Rhetorical Questions (464), being substan- tially statements, are transferred from the Indie, of d. B. to the Ace. and Inf. of 6, 0. when they are in the First and Third Persons. The Second Person goes into the Subjunctive. 0. B. Kum possum 1 Cam, If [^o.] 0. 0. Hum posse ! Caes., B.O., i. 14, Could he f Quid est turpius 1 What is baser f [Nothing.] Quid esse turpius ! Caes.; ^.(?., v. 28, 6 ; WTia^ viOA ftawT \ 272 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. duO 16 repnlsOfl ab SOmSnls itflrOs! L., xxxiy. ii, 6 ; whither should they go, if repelled by the Romans f (QaO Ibimni !) Col nOn appfirSre ab eO qui prior arma intnlisset ixiillriam ortaxn esse 1 L,, XXXII. 10, 6 ; to whom is it not evident that the wrong began with him, who had been the first to wage war f (Col nOn appftretl) 81 bonum dtLcerent, quid prO noxiO damnSssent ! L., xxvii. 34, 13 ; if they thought him a good man, why had they condemned him as guilty f (81 bonnm dOcitis, quid prO noxiO damnSftiB %) 2. In Siibjv. Rhetorical Questions the Subjv. is either retained or transferred to the Infinitive. The Deliberative Subjv, is always retained. Quia sibi persoSderet line certS r6 Ambiorigem ad einsmodl cOniilinm dSscendisse 1 Caes., B.O,, v. 29, 5 ; who could persuade himself that Ainhiorix had proceeded to an extreme measure like that, without (hav- ing made) a sure thing (of it) ? (Quis libl persoSdeat!) 662. Imperative sentences are put in the Subjunctive, sometimes with, usually without, nt; the Negative is, of course, n6 (never ut nfi). Bedditur respOnsnm : nOndum tempns pUgnae esse ; castrli b6 tenSrent, L., II. 45, 8 ; there was returned for answer, that it wors not yet time to fight, that they must keep within the camp. (d. B., castrli vOs tenSte.) Vercingetorlz cobortfitns est: 116 pertnrbfirentiir incommodO, Caes., B.O., VII. 29, 1 ; Vercingetorix comforted them (by saying) that they must not be disconcerted by the disaster. (0. B., nOlIte perturbSrL) Tenses in Or&tid OblTqua. 653. The Tenses of the Infinitive follow the laws already laid down (530) : The Present Infinitive expresses contemporaneous action; The Perfect Infinitive expresses prior action ; The Future Infinitive expresses future action. Kemark. — The Irapf. Indie., as expressing piior continuance, be- comes the Pf. Inf. in 6, 0., and hence loses its idea of continuance. 664. The Tenses of the Subjunctive follow the laws of sequence (510). The choice is regulated by the point of view of the Keporter, or the point of view of the Speaker.* Point of View of the Keporter: LegStiOnI Ariovistns respondit : sibi mlmiii viderl quid in snfi OalliS qnam beUS vlcisset, Caesarl negOtil esset, Caes., B.G., i. 34, 4 ; to the embassy Ariovistns replied, that it seemed strange to him (he wondered) what business Caesar had in his Oaul, which he had conquered in war. * Tills is teclmically called repraesentStiO^ rept'eaentation. THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 2/3 Point of View of the Speaker : IiCgStb HelvStiOmm Caesar respondit : oOnsnSsse deOs ixmnortfilSB, qii9 grayiiu hominSB ez oommUtfitiQne rfirum doleant, qiiOs prQ soelere eOmm nlclscl velint, his secandiOrSB interdum rSs ooncedere, Caes., B.G.^ i. 14, 5 ; to the envoys of the Helvetians Caesar replied^ that the Gods were (are) trow/, that men might (may) suffer the more severely from change in their fortuneSy to grant occasional increase of prosperity to those whom they wished (wish) to punish for their crime. Point of View shifted : Ad haeo MSrdiu respondit : 81 quid ab senSttl petere veUent, ab armls discfidant, S., C, 34, 1 ; thereto Marcius replied : If they unshed to ask anything of the senate, they must lay doum their arms, 665. Object, Causal, Temporal, and Eelative Clauses fol- low the general laws for Subordinate Clauses in Oratid Obliqna. For examples of Object Clauses, see 525 ; for Causal, see 541 ; for Temporal, see 561-564, 569-577 ; for Relative, see 628. Remarks. — 1. Coordinate Relative Clauses are put in the Ace. and Infinitive occasionally, especially in Cicero. 2. Relative Clauses are put in the Indicative : (a) In mere circum- locutions. (6) In explanations of the narrator (628, r.). 3. Bum, with the Indie, is often retained as a mere circumlocution : Dio, hospes, Spartae nOs t6 blc vldisse iacentXs, dum sSnctls patriae I6gi- buB obBeqiiimiir, C, Tusc, i. 42, 101 ; tell Sparta, stranger, that thou ha^t seen us lying here obeying {i7i obedience to) our country's hallowed laws. 666. Conditional Sentences in OrStio OblTqua, Total and Partial. 1. The Protasis follows the rule for subordinate clauses (650). 2. The Indicative Apodosis follows the rule, but Present, Imperfect, and Perfect Subjunctive are turned into the Future Infinitive or its periphrases. The Pluperfect Subjunctive is transferred to tlie Perfect Infinitive of the Active Periphrastic Conjugation. Passive and Supineless Verbs take the circumlocution with futHnmi ftdsse nt . . . . 248. Remark. — ^Posse needs no Fut. (248 r.), and potuisse no Periphrastic Pf. Inf., so that these forms are often used to liglLtfen ^iW eo\i^\x\xa\X.wv, 18 274 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 3. Identical Forms. — In the transfer of Conditions to 0. 0., the difference between many forms disappears. For instance^ I. 1. 81 id orSdis, errSbii. 2. 81 id orSdSs, errftbii. \ DIoO t6, bI id orMii, errfttfinun eue. 3. 81 id oredSs, errSs. I II. 1. 81 id crSdis, errftbit. 4. 81 id crSderSs, errSrSs. UI. 1. 81 id orSdiderif , errSbis. 2. 81 id crSdiderlfl, errSs. 3. 81 id crSdideriB, errSverlb. 4. 81 id crSdidissSs, errSrSs. DIxI t6, slid orOdidiBsM, errSttlmm eeie. 657. Logical Conditions in OrfttiO Obliqua. Ad baec ArioviBtiu respondit : si ipse popnlQ SOmSnO nlSn praeicrlberet qaemadxnodum suQ itlre tLterfitur, nQn oportfire 1686 S popolO EOmSnO in luQ iOre impedlrl, Caes., B.G., i. 36, 2 ; to this Ariovistua made answer: If he did not prescribe to the Roman people how to exercise their right, he ought not to he hindered by the Roman people in the exercise of his right, (0. B. : si ego nQn praescrlbO, nQn oportet m6 impedlrl.) 81 bonum dUcerent, quid prO noxiQ damnSssent 1 81 nozinm oomperif- sent, quid altermn cdnBulfitum crSderentI L., xxyu. 34, 13; if they thought him a good man^ why had they condemned him as guilty ; if on the other hand, they had found him guilty^ why did they intrust him with a second consulship f (0. B. : si — dtcitifl, quid danmSstifl t si — comperistis, qtiid crSditis %) Earn omnium labSrum finem fore ezIstimSbant si hostem HibOrQ inter- clfLdere potuissent, Caes., ^.C, i. 68, 3 ; they thought that would he the end of all {their) toils, if they could cut off the enemy from the Ebro, (0. B. : is labSrum finis erit (or fuerit) si hostem interdlidere petnerlmus.) NOn multO ante urbem captam exaudlta vQx est . . . fatHmm esse, nisi prQyIsum esset, ut BOma caperfitur, C, Div.^ i. 45, 101 ; not long before the taking of the city, a voice was heard (saying), that unless precau- tions were adopted, Rome would be taken, (0. B. : nisi prOvIsnm erit, BQma capifitur.) Ariovistus respondit nisi d6c6dat Caesar s6s6 iUum pr9 hoste babitflmm ; quod si eum interfScerit, multls s6s6 nQbilibus principibusque popoU BOmSnl gritum esse factOrum, Caes., B.G., i. 44, 12 ; Ariovistus replied, that unless Caesar withdrew, he should regard him as am, enemy, a/nd in case he killed him, he would do a favor to many men of the highest position am^ong the Roman people. (0. B. : nisi d6oM6s t9 prO hoste h&hShO . . . si tS interfeceiG gr&t\]an.i&cet^\ VA^ ^. 4.^ THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 2/5 Rbhark. — ^Pofse is used as has been stated (656, 2, R.). KegSrunt dirimX bellnm posse nisi Messfinils Adhael Pylum redderent, L., xxvn. 30, 13 ; they said that the war could not he stopped unless the Achasa/ns restored Pylos to the Messenians. (0. B. : belium dirimi nOn potest (poterit) nisi Pylnm reddent.) Decent, si turris ooncidisset, nOn posse mllitSs oontinfirl qaln sp6 praedae in nrbem imunperent, Caes., B.C., 11, 12, 4 ; they show that if the tower fell, the soldiers could not be kept from bursting into the city in the hope of booty, (0. B. : si oonciderit, nQn possunt (poterunt) oontinfirl.) 658. Ideal Conditions in OratiO Obliqua. Ait s9 si llrfttar " Qoam hOo suSye " dictOmm, C, Fin,, 11. 27, 88 ; A^ declares that if he were to be burnt he would say, ''How sweet this is," (0. B.: si lirar, dicam, same form as Logical.) YolnptStem si ipsa prQ s6 loquStor concSssUranL arbitror BIgnitStI, C, -FV»., III. I, 1 ; I think that if Pleasure were to speak for herself, she would yield {the palm) to Virtue. (81 loqaatnr, concfidat.) 659. Unreal Conditions in Oratid Obliqna. Titorins dfimitfibat EbnrOnSs, si [Caesar] adesset, ad oastra ventfLrOs nOn esse, Caes., B.O,, v. 29, 2; Titurius kept crying out that if Caesar were there, the Eburones would not be coming to the camp. (0. B.: si Caesar adesset, EbnrOnSs nOn venlrent.) Appfirfibat si diUtius ylzisset, Hamilcare dace PoenOs arma Ztaliae inlS- ttlrOe fiiisse, L., xxi. 2, 2; it was evident that if he had lived longer, the Punics would have carried their arms into Italy under Samilcar*s conduct, (0. B.: si . . . vlzisset . . . intolissent.) Kisi eO ipsQ tempore nOntil d6 Caesaris yictQriS essent allStI ezIstimS- bant plSrlqne fattLrnm faisse at oppidam Smitterfitar, Caes., B.C., iii. loi, 3; had not news of Caesar's victory been brought at that very time, most persons thought the city would have been lost. (0. B.: nisi nUntil allsti essent, oppidam Smissam esset.) Pronouns in OrStio Obliqua. 660. I. The Eeflexive is used according to the principles laid down in 520 ff. 2, The person addressed is usually ille ; less often is. AriOYistos respondit nisi d6c6dat Caesar s6s6 iUam prQ hoste habitOram : qnod si com interfteerit, maltis s6s6 nQbilibas principibasqne popall BOmSnl grStom esse factflram, Caes., B.C., 1. 44, 12 (657). Of course^ this does not exclude the ordinary d^isioii'&\.T«^*v?^ "viiSfc^ 2^6 THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 3. Hie and iste are commonly changed into iUe or is^ nunc is changed into turn and tunc, except when already con- trasted with tunc, when it is retained. BiodOnu retpondit illod argentnm b6 panoli iUls diSbiu mliisie LUy- Iwenxtt, C, Vtrr,, iv. 18, 39 (398, R. 4). 4. Nos is used when the narrator^s party is referred to ; compare Caes., BM,, i. 44, below. 661. Specimens of the conversion of OratiO Obliqua into Or&tiO Eecta. OrfttiO Obliqua. 6rSti9 B6eto. I. Arioviatus respondit: Tr&nsisse Rhenum sese nQn 9ua TrSnsii RhSnum nOn med sponte sponte sed rogStum et arcessitum sed ro^atua et arcessitus S. GaUis ; & Gallls ; nOn sine magnS spe mSL- nOn sine mSgnft spS magnlsque gnlsque praemils domum propin- praemils domum propinquQsque quOsQue reilquisse ; sedes habere reliqui ; sSdes habao in Gallift ab inGalliSabipsIsconcSssils, obsidSs ipsis concessfts, obsides ipsOrum ipsOrura voluntate datOs ; stipen- voluntfite datGs ; stlpendium cap«d tfiura c&pere iQre belli, quod vie- idre belli, quod victores victis im- tOres victis impOnere cOnsuGnw^. ponere cOnsuerun/. NOn ego Gal- NOn sese Gallls sed Gall()s sibl bel- lis sed Galli mihl bellum intule- lum intulisse; omnes Galliae civi- runt; omnSs Galliae civitfites ad tatCs ad se oppGgnandum Y^msse me opptLgnandum Yenerunt et con- ct contra se castra habuisse ; eds trS. me castra hahuerunt ; eae om- omnes cOpitfs S. se iinO proeliO pul- nes cOpiae ft me tlnO proeliC pulsa« sds ac superstar esse. Si iterum ac superfitoe sunt. Si iteruin ex- experiri velinty se itenim para turn periri volunt, iterum paratus sum esse decertare ; si pflce Qtl velint, dgcertare, si pSce Qti volunt, ini- iniquumessedSstlpendiOrecQsare, quum est de stipendiO recusSre, quod sua voluntate ad id tempus quod sua voluntate ad hOc tempus pependenn^. Amicitiam populi pependerwn^ Amicitiam populi K<5mani sibl OrnSmentO et prae- xtCmani mihl 5rnfiment0 et prae- sidiO, non detrimentO esse oportere sidiO, nOn detriraentO esse oporte^ idque se ea spe petiase. Si per idque ea spe petti. SI per populum populum RomSnum stlpendium ROmSnum stlpendium remitte^wr reraitta^wr et dediticii subtrahaw- et deditlcil subtrahcn^wr, nOn mi- ^wr, nOn minus libenter se«e recQsa- nus libenter recusa&d populi RO- turum populi ROmani amicitiam raani amicitiam quam appetil. quam appetierit. Quod multitti- Quod multitfldinem GermfinQrum dinem GermanOrum in Galliam in Galliam trfidticam,* id met mtl- tradQca^, id se s^il mtiniendl, nOn niendi, nOn Galliae impagnandae Galliae impugnandae causa tsucere ; causa t&cio ; Sius rel testimCnlQ est Sius rei testimOniO esse quod nisi quod nisi ro^atus nOnvSnietquod rogatus nQn Y^nerit et quod bellum bellum nCn intuH sed dgfendi. non mixAerit sed def enden7. ♦ ^^^^^ ^ the preceding speech, CaES., BM.y I. 44. o\\ies^\ae txSdUcO. THE ABRIDGED SENTENCE. 277 OrStiO Obllqaa. OrfitiO BScta. 2. SiS Caesar ita respondit : Ed »ibi minus dubitatiOnis darl Hoc mihl minus dubitflti5nis quod eas rgs quRs leg^t! Helvetii datur quod eas res quas voa, ISgfitI QomvcLfimoTdaaent memorial tenerc/ Helvetii, commeraora«^i«, memorift atque eo gravius feire qu5 minus teneo atque hoc gravius fer^F qu5 merits populi ROmfin! accidmen^; minus raeritO populi ROmSnl acci- ?uisiaiicGiusinitlriaesib!cOnscius derunt ; q[ui si alicflius init\riae iiisset nOn tuisse difficile cavBre ; sibl c5nscius fuisset, n5n ixiit diffi- sed eO deceptuw quod neque com- cile cavSre ; sed e(5 dCceptu8 quod missum S s5 intellegcre/ qufire ti- neque commissum S. s5 intelleg€&a/ meret neque sine causS timendum quftre timSret neque sine causS ti- Ttutdret. Quod si veteris contume- mendum puta6a^. Quod si veteris liae oblivisci velletj num etiam re- contuniSliae oblivisci volOf num centium iniQriarum, quod ei? invito etiam recentium iniariarum, quod iter per prOvinciam per vim temp- me invito iter per prOvinciam per tdssent, quod AeduOs, quod Am- vim tempta«^t5, quod AeduOs, quod barrOs, quod Allobrogas \exd8sent AmbarrOs, quod Allobrogas vextf- memoriam depOnere posse f Quod sHs, memoriam dBpOnere possum f stid Victoria tam Insolenter glOriS- Quod vestrd victoria tam Insolentcr rentur, quodque tam ditl se imptlne ^lOriamtni, quodque tam diQ vos tulisse iniQriHS admlrdren^wr eO- impfinetulisseinifirifisadmlraTwmi dem pertinere. COnsu^«se enim eOdem pertine/. C6nsu^veru7it debs immortales quO gravius ho- enim di immortales quO gravius mines ex commQtatiOne rerum homines ex commQtatiOne rCrum doleant, quOs prO scelere eOrum doleant, quOs prO scelere eOrum ulciscl velint, his secundiOres in- ulclsci votunt, his secundiOrSs in- terdum res et ditltumiOrem impQ- terdum res et diUturniorem imptl- nitatem concedere. Cum ea ita nitatem concedere. Cum haec ita sint, tamen si obsides ab ils sibl sint, tamen si obsides a vobls mihl dentttTf uti ea quae pollicean^wr dahuntni^y uti ea, quae pollic^7?ani, facttirOs intellega^, et si Aeduis de factQrOs intellegam et si Aeduls de iniilriis quas ipsis sociisque eOrum iniariis quSs ipsis sociisque eOrum intulertw^, item si Allobrogibus intul*«^i5, item si Allobrogibus satisfacian^, sese cum ils pacem satisfacie/is, ego voblSQxxm pScem esse factHrum. faciam, Caes., B,G.^ I. 14. 3. Sulla tegl patefecit : Quod polhcea^wr, senatuw et Quod poUicms, senatus et popu- populuw KOmanuw, quoniam am- lu« ROmanus quoniam amplius plius armis valuwsent, nOn in gra- armis valuerwnt, nOn in gratiam tiam habi7wrc«; faciundum ali- hab^6w7it;faciundumaliquid, quod quid, quod illOrum magis quam illOrum magis quam tud retulisse md retulisse \\deretur ; id ideo in yidedtur ; id ideo in prOmpta est, prOmpta esse, quoniam lugurthae quoniam lugurthae cOpiam habea^ cOpiam habere?, quern si Romanis quem si ROmanIs tradideri«, tihl tradidts«e/, /ore ut illl plQrimum plGrimumdebe&iYwr; amicitia,foe- debSre/wr; amicitiaw, f oedus, Nu- dus, Numidiae pars, quam nunc roidiae partem, quam nunc petered, petifl, tunc QltrO advenie^. tunc tlltrO adven/t2ram. S., lug.f III. 2/8 PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES. OrStiO Obllqaa. ArStiO Bteta. 4. Athenienses deplardverunt vdatdtionem populMiunemque mi- aerabilem agrorum. Neque si id N(5n id qxierimur quod hostilia queri quod hostilia ab hoste passi ab hoste passi sumits. Sunt enim jorent ; esse enim quaedam Dclli quaedam belli iilra quae ut facere iflra quae ut facere ita pat! sit fSs. ita pati eat fSs. Sata extiii, dirul Sata exQri, dirui tecta, praedfts tecta, praedfis horainum pecorum- hominum pecorumque ag! misera queaglmiseramagisquamindigna magis quam indlgna patient! esse; patient! sunt; vBrum enim v5rO id v6rura enim verO id se queri, quod quen'mwr quod is, qui ROmSnQs is, qui RSmanGs alieiiigenSs et oar- alienigenSs et barbarSs Yoca^, adeO barOs voc6^, adeO omnia simul di- omnia simul divlna htlmflnaque Vina huraftnaque iilra poWuerit ut iQra pollutY ut priCre populStiOne priOre populatiOne cum infernls cum infemisdi!s,secunda cum su- di!s, secundS cum superis bellum% perls bellum nefftrium gesserit. neffirium gesserit. Omnia sepul- Omnia sepulcra monumentaque dl- cra monumentaque dlruta esse in ruta sunt in flnibus nostris, omni- flnibus suls, omnium nUdat^ umnGdStimSnes,ntlll!iisossat«rrS manes, nQlllus ossa terra tegi. iegy>ntur, Qualem terram Atticam Qualem terram Atticam t^cerity tecit, exGmStam quondam opulen- exCrnatam quondam opulentam- tamque, talem iSf s! Iic6^i^ (or : que, talem eum s! Uceat AetQliam lic6a/) AetOliam Graeciamque om- Graeciamque omnem isbcturum. nem faciei (or : facial. Urbis Urbis quoque suae similewi dSfOr- quoque nostras BimHis def0rmitpward stroke, signal-beaf) and is marked : . (735_7) 738. Rhythmical Series, — A Rhythmical Series is an unin- terrupted succession of rhythmical feet, and takes its name from the number of feet that compose it. Dipody = two feet. Pentapody = five feet. Tripody = three feet. Hexapody = six feet. Tetrapody = four feet. Remarks. — 1. The Dipody is the ordinary unit of measure (-meter) in Trochaic, Iambic, and Anapaestic verse. In these rhythms a mono- meter contains two feet, a dimeter four, a trimeter six, a tetrameter eight VERSIFICATION. 289 2. The single foot is the ordinary unit of measure (-meter) in Dac- tylic yerse. Thus, a verse of one Dactyl is called a Monometer ; of two, a Dimeter ; of three, a Trimeter ; of four, Tetrameter ; of five, a Pentameter ; of six, a Hexameter. (739) 740. Equality of tJie Feet, — ^Every rhythmical series is com- posed of equal parts. To restore this equality, when it is violated by language, there are four methods : 1. Syllaba Anceps. 3. Protraction. 2. Catalexis. 4. Correption. 741. Syllaba Anceps. — The final syllable of an independent series or verse may be short or long indifferently. It may be short when the metre demands a long ; long when the metre demands a short. Such a syllable is called a Syllaba Anceps. 742. Catalexis and Pause. — A complete series is called Acatalectic ; an incomplete series is called Catalectic. A series or verse is said to be Catalectic in syllabam, in dissyllabum, in trisyllabumy according to the number of syllables in the catalectic foot. ^\j \j I ^Kj \j I JL. Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in syllaham. ^\j \j I ^Kj Kj I j^\j Trimeter dactylicus catalecticus in dissyllabum. The time is made up by Pause. This is marked . if one mora is omitted : -r if two. A A 743. JProtraciion and Syncope. — Protraction {royrj) consists in drawing out a long syllable beyond its normal quantity. It occurs in the body of a verse, and serves to make up for the omission of one or more Arses, which omission is called Syncop6. I— = 3 = (triseme long) ; i— j = 4 = (tetraseme long). 744. Correption. — Correption is the shortening of a syllable to suit the measure. 1. So a long syllable sometimes takes the place of a short, and is marked > ; similarly, two short syllables often seem to take the place of one, and may be marked ^^. 2. When a Dactyl is used as a substitute for a Trochee, the approx- imate value is often 1^ + i + 1 = 3 ; which may be indicated by -^ '-' (cyclic Dactyl). The following line illustrates all the points mentioned : a h c h c h d e Klillam I Yfire sa- 1 crft | yite pri- 1 tui | seyeris | arbo | -rem.— Hob., O.J I. 18, 1. (a) Irratioxial trochee (irrational long). (6) Cyclic dactyl, (c) Syncop6 and Protrac- tion (triseme long), (d) Syllaba anceps. {e) CatalQxia. 19 290 VERSIFICATIOK. (745__g) 749. Conflict of Ictus cmd Accent, — In ordinary Latin verse, at least according to modem pronunciation, the Ictus overrides the Accent ; this conflict seems, however, to have been avoided in the second half of the Dactylic Hexameter, and the Ictus made to coincide with the Accent. 760. Conflict of Word- foot and Verse- foot, — The conflict of word- foot and verse-foot gives rise to Caesura. Caesura means an incision produced by the end of a word in the middle of a verse-foot, and is marked |. This incision serves as a pause, partly to rest the voice for a more vigorous effort, partly to prevent monotony by distributing the masses of the verse. The most important pause in the verse is called the Great or Principal Caesura. So in the Heroic Hexameter the Principal Caesura falls before the middle of the verse, to give the voice strength for the first Arsis of the second half. 9na BaltlB victls f nlillam spflrSre BaltLtem. — Y., A,, 11. 353. It does not occur at the middle, as in that case the verse would become monotonous. 761. Varieties of Caesura, — Caesurae have different names to show their position in the verse, as follows : JSendtemdria, after the third half foot, t. c, in the second foot. JSemiquindriaf after the fifth half foot, i, 6., in the third foot. JSemiseptSndria, after the seventh half foot, i, e., in the fourth foot. Seminovmdria, after the ninth half foot, i. e., in the fifth foot, Remark. — These Caesurae are frequently called after their Greek names, thus : trihemimeral, penthemimeral, hepthemimeral, etc, 762. Masculine and Feminine Caesurae, — In trisyllabic metres, when the end of the word within the verse-foot falls on a Thesis, it is called a Masculine Caesura ; when on an Arsis, a Feminine Caesura. _ a b c d Una sa I ItlB f vi I etls f nOl | lam f spS | rfire f sa | ItLtem. a, &, c, are Masculine Caesarae ; dl, a Feminine Caesura. Especially noteworthy is the Feminine Caesura of the third foot in the Hexameter, called the Third Trochee. 753. Diaeresis, — ^When verse-foot and word-foot coincide, Diaeresis arises, marked \, Ite domum saturae f venit | HoBpenui | Ite oapellae. — V., Ee,, 10, 77. Hemakk, — Diaeresis at the end of the fourth foot of a Hexameter la called Bucolic Caesura, and baa a si^VoX %;U^^\>. VE RSIFIC ATIOK. 29 1 Iambic Rhythms- (754—6) 767. The Iambic Rhythm is a rhythm in which the Thesis is double of the Arsis. It is represented By the Iambus : ^ ^; By the Dactyl : —\!/\j; By the Tribrach : ^yb^^ ; By the Anapaest : ^^ ^, By the Spondee : — -^ ; Remark. — The Spondee, Dactyl, Anapaest, and Proceleusmaticus are all irrational, and are consequently marked on the schemes thus : > — , > 'wT w , vA^ — , w^ \^ \j ; see 744. (758-61) 762. lamUc Trimeter. — The most common Iambic measure is the Trimeter (738, r. 1), composed of six feet, the last of which mvst always he an Iambus, Sdb et ipsa f B6ma ylribus niit. — HOR., Epod., XVI. 2. \^ji.Ky'-\\y^K^ — {k^jCkj — Heu X116 per nrbexn f nam padet tantf mall. — Hor., Epod., xi. 7. > j^ \j — \ >^vy — |>^*wr — BSrfpere lUnam f ydcibtui posnm melB. — Hor., Epod., xvii. 78. >»i/vyv^— |>-2.vy — |>^*wr — Inf&nis Helenae f Castor off^nstifl vioem. — Hor., Epod., xvii. 42. >j^kjkjkj\>j^kj — \>jlkj — Anacrustic Scheme : v^: — w|— '^1— »^|— ^|— ^|~A Remarks. — 1. The Iambic Trimeter, when kept pure, has a rapid aggressive movement. Hence, it is thus used in lampoons and invec- tives. It admits the Spondee in the odd places (first, third, fifth foot); the Tribrach in any but the last, the Dactyl in the first and third. The Anapaest is rare. When carefully handled, the closing part of the verse is kept light, so as to preserve the character. 2. Diaeresis at the middle of the verse is avoided. The Caesura is usually the semiqumSLria, but the semiseptendria is found also, but either with the semiqulndria or with Diaeresis after the second foot. Dactylic Rhythms. (763-82) 783. The Dactylic Rhythm is a rhythm in which the Thesis is equal to the Arsis (2 = 2). The Dactylic Rhythm is represented by the Dactyl : x.\j \j. Often, also, by the Spondee : ^ — . 784. Dactylic (Heroic) Hexameter. — The Heroic Hexameter is com- posed of two Dactylic tripodies, the second of which ends in a Spondee. Spondees may be substituted for the Dactyl in the first four feet ; in the fifth foot, only when a special effect is to be produced. Such verses are called Spondaic. The longest Hexameter contains five Dactyls and one Spondee (or Trochee)— in aU, aeyeut^iL ^^WaJc^Y^'^ \ "Ccka 292 VERSIFICATION. shortest in use, five Spondees and one Dactyl — in all, thirteen sylla- bles. This variety in the length of the verse, combined with the great number of caesural pauses, gives the Hexameter peculiar advantages for continuous composition. Scheme : —\j\j \ ^\j \j \ ^\j \^ |— w*^ | j^kj \^ \ ^ — TTt fagiant aquilfis f timldiiiiilTna | tnrba colnmbae, Ov., A.A,^ i. it 7, 5 Dactyls. Com medio oelerSsfreyolant | exaequoremergI,Y., (?.,i. 361, 4 Dactyls. K6 tnrbftta volant \ rapidls f Itldibria ventlB, V., A., vi. 75, 3 Dactyls. Yersaqu(e) in obnIxOs f nrgentur I comua vSstO, Y., G., in. 222, 2 Dactyls. Ant ISvSs oereSs f lentO f dfUmnt argentO, Y,yA., vn. 634, Spondaic. Remarks. — 1. The two reigning ictuses are the first and fourth, and the pauses are so arranged as to give special prominence to them — the first by the pause at the end of the preceding verse, the fourth by pauses within the verse, both before and after the Thesis. 2. The Principal Caesura is the semiqulndria or pentJiemimeral, i.e., after the Thesis of the third foot, or Masculine Caesura of the third foot ; the next is the aemiseptendria or hepthemimeraif after the Thesis of the fourth foot. In verses with several Caesurae, the semiaeptendria outranks the semiquindria, if it precedes a period, and the latter does not, or if it is perfect and the latter is imperfect {i.e., formed by tmesis or by elision) ; it also as a masculine Caesura outranks the Third Trochee. 786 (786-9). Elegiac Pentameter (Catalectic Trimeter repeated). The Elegiac Pentameter consists of two Catalectic Trimeters or Pen- themimers, tJie first of which admits Spondees, the second does not. There is a fixed Diaeresis in the middle of the verse, as marked below, which is commonly supplemented by the semitemdria Caesura. The Pentameter derives its name from the old measurement : — >-» <-» , — v-^ O , , w^— , \jKj — ; and the name is a convenient one, because the verse consists of 2^ + 2^ Dactyls. The Elegiac Distich is used in sen- timental, amatory, epigrammatic poetry. Scheme : — <^w|— ww|u_i|— w*wr|— v^w| A Neither Syllaba Anceps nor Hiatus is allowed at the Diaeresis, and a syllable long by nature is preferred at that point. The Elegiac Pentameter occurs only as a Clausula to the Heroic Hexameter, with which it forms the Elegiac Distich. Consequently the sense should not run into the following Hexameter (exceptions rare) : F5r erat Inferior yeratifl : rlsiBBe GnpIdO Dldtur atqne flnum | surriptdsse pedexn, Ov. Gnm pnlchrS dominae noBtrl placnOre libelll, QuO licnit librlB \ lAulkMit \x« ndS^ Qy .^ Am., m. 8, 5. APPENDICES. 1 . Roman Calendar. The names of the Roman mouths were originally adjectives. The substantive mSiudB, month, may or may not be expressed : (xneiuds) ISnnSriufl, rebmfiritifl, and so on. Before Augustus, the months July and August were called, not IfQiiu and Augnstiu, but Qulntllis and Sextllis. The Romans counted backward from three points in the month, Calends (Kalendae), Kones (KQnae), and Ides (IdtUi), to which the names of the months are added as adjectives : Kalendae ISnuSriae, NOnae Ee- bmSriae) TdtUi MSrtiae. The Calends are the first day, the Nones the fifth, the Ides the thirteenth. In March, May, July, and October the Nones and Ides are two days later. Or thus : In March, July, October, May, The Ides are on the fifteenth day. The Nones the seventh ; but all besides Have two days less for Nones and Ides. In counting backward (" come next Calends, next Nones, next Ides*') the Romans used for "the day before" pridis with the Ace. : pridie KalendSs IftnuSriSs, Dec. 81 ; pridis NOnSs iSn. = Jan. 4; pridis IdtlB ISn. = Jan. 12. The longer intervals are expressed by ante diem tertiom, qaSrtum, etc., before the Accusative, so that ante diem tertiam Kal. ISn. means ** two days before the Calends of January ; " ante diem quSrtnm, or a. d. iv., or iv. Kal. ISn., ** three days before," and so on. This remarkable combination is treated as one word, so that it can be used with the prepositions ex and in : ex ante diem iii. NOnSs ItlniSs Usque ad pridis Kal. Septembr9s,/rom June 3 to August 81 ; differre aliquid in ante diem XV. Kal. Nov., to postpone a matter to the ISth of October, Leap Year. — In leap year the intercalary day was counted between a. d. vi. Kal. Mart, and a. d. vii. Kal. Mart. It was called a. d. bis sex- tnmKal.MSrt., so that a. d. vii. Kal. MSrt. corresponded to our February 23, just as in the ordinary year. To turn Roman Dates into Enerlish. For Nones and Ides. — ^I. Add one to the date of the Nones and Ides, and subtract the given number. 294 KOMAH" SYSTEMS OF MEASURES AND WEIGHTS. For Calends. — II. Add two to the days of the preceding month, and subtract the given number. Examples : a. d. viii. Id. ISn. (13 + 1 — 8) = Jan. 6 ; a. d. iv. NOn. Apr. (5 + 1 - 4) = Apr. 2 ; a. d. xiv. Kal. Oct. (30 + 2 - 14) = Sept. 18. Year, — To obtain the year B.C., subtract the given date from 754 (753 B.C. being the assumed date of the founding of Rome, annO nrbis oonditae). To obtain the year a.d., subtract 753. Thus: Cicero was horn 648, a. n. c. = 106 B.C. Augustus died 767, a. u. o. = 14 a. d. 2. Roman Long and Square Measure. 1 p68 = 11.65 ^^S' ^^' 2\ pedSs = I gradoB. The iHgernm (acre) contains 2 gradtlB, ) _ ' 28,800 sq. ft. Rom. ; 5 pedSs J ~~ ^^ * Eng. acre = 43,560 sq. ft. 125 passtlB = I stadinm. 8 stadia = i mllle passnnm (mile). 3. Roman Money. The unit was originally the Ss (which was about a pound of copper), with its fractional divisions. This gradually depreciated, until, after the second Punic war, the unit had become a sSstertitifl) which was nominally 2^ assSs. 2\ assSs = I sSstertiufl (about 25 d6nfiril = i aureus (nammtifl). 4 cts.). 1000 sSstertil = i sfistertiuiiL 4 sSstertil = i dfinSrius. ($42.94 to Augustus's time). Observe that deciSs sfistertium = 1,000,000 sestertii (96, r. 6). 4. Roman Names. The Roman usually had three names ; a ndmen, indicating the gins, a cOgnOmen, indicating the feunilia in the g6ns, and the praenOmen, indi- cating the individual in the familia. The nOmina all end in ins. The cOg^Omina have various forms, in accordance with their derivation. For example : Q. MtLdns Soaevola (from scaevns, left hand). The praenOmina are as follows, with their abbreviations : Aulas, A. . Ltlcius, L. Qolntas, Q. Appius, App. MSrcns, M. Servius, Ser. GSius, C. MSnius, M'. Seztus, Sex. Gnaeos, Cn. MSmercos, Mam. Spnrius, Sp. Decimus, D. Numerius, Num. Titus, T. KMSd, K, PUbllTlB, P. Tiberius, Ti., Tib. RULES FOR GENDER. 295 5. General Rules for Gender (19, 20). 1. Names of Males are masculine ; names of Females feminine. 2. Names of Months and Mountains, Rivers and Winds are mascu line. 3. Names of Countries, Islands, Cities, Plants, and Trees are fem- inine. 4. Indeclinable words are neuter. 6. Special Rules for Gender. 5. Substantives of the First Declension are feminine (30) ; except Hadria. 6. Substantives in -us (Second Declension) are masculine (34) ; except alvTiB, coliu, hnmtui, vanntifl (fem.) ; pelagpis, vims, ynlgTU (neut.) ; Substantives in -nm are neuter. 7. Substantives in -1 are masculine (39) ; except fel, mel, bH, 8. Masculine are nouns in -0, Save those in -dO, -gO and -iO, With car6, flesh ; but oardO, OrdO, Are masculine with ligO, margO ; So harpagO and in -iO All concrete nouns like ptlgiO (43). 9. Substantives in -er and -or are masculine ; those in -ar and -ur are neuter (46). Observe : Feminine are linter, arbor. Neuters are : fibr, nectar, marmor, Aeqnor, iter, acer, piper, Yerber, liber, v6r, cadSyer, Ador, tuber and papSver. ID. Substantives in -is (-eris) and -0« (-Oris) are masculine ; except Os, mouth (neuter). Substantives in -us (-oris, -oris) and -Us (-firlB) are neuter ; except telltlB (f.) and leptui and mtts (m.) (49). II. Substantives in -s from mute stems are feminine. Observe : Masculine : -unx, -iz, and ex. Saving forfex, forpez, nex, L6x, yfbSx, faex, and forms of [prex]. Masculine are : Lapis, pariSs, p6s, and substantives in -as (-itis) ; except merges. Also : dSiui, fOns, rnOns, pOns, mdSiis, torrSns. Neuters are : cor, lac, caput. 296 IRREGULAR FORMS. 12. Vowel stems with nominative in -1 are feminine, except those in -ii, which are partly masculine, partly feminine (58). Vowel stems with nominative in -e, -al, -ar, are neuter. Observe : MaactUlni generis Are those words that end in -if : anmis, axis, bttrii, oollii, cavlif, erinii, fiUtds, follii, funis, fOstis, Ignii, torris, orbis, pfinis, postis, Snsis, ▼eetis, vermis, unguis, mSniis, — antSs, oassQs, mSnSs (plural)-^ Add to these t?ie mullet, mllgil, also certain animals. 13. Substantives in -tUi are feminine. 14. Substantives in -ns (Fourth Declension) are masculine (62), Except aens, domtifl, manns, IdtUi, penufl, porticuB, and tribiu. Substantives in -tl are neuter. 15. Substantives of the Fifth Declension are feminine (64), Except dies (common in Sing.) and meridiSs. 7. Irregular Forms. 16. Irregular Substantives (71). Ss, assis. ieenr, iecoris, iednoris, iedneris, iod- anoeps, ancupis. neris. bOs, bovis. Illpplter, lovii. PI. G. boom, D. Ab. btlbiui, bObiu. mel, mellii. caput, capitis. n6m5, G. ntUUns, Ab. nttllO. anceps, anoipitis, nix, nivii. praeceps, praedpitis. os, ossis. carO, camis. PI. G. caminm. Os, Oris. GerOs, Gereris. poUis, pollinis. fibr, fSrris. sanguis, sangninis. fel, fellis. senex, senis. femur, femoris, or feminis. supoUOx, supellOctilii. iter, itineris. Venus, Veneris. Pronominal Adjectives (76). 17. With Gen. in -lus, Dat. in -I: Alius, alter, alteruter; uter and neuter ; tUlus and ntUlus ; sOIus^ tOtus« and tinuB, IRBEQULAB FOBHS. 297 Irreffuiar Comparison of Adjectives (87-flO). 18. Dexter, dexterior. dextimns. ▼ettifl, veterior, vetnstior, veterrimns. oiterior, exterior. Inferior, interior, posterior. citimns. extrSmns, extimns. Infimns, Imns. intimns. postrfimns, postnmns, prior. primns, superior, Superlative in -limns (87, 3) : fkoilid, similis, gracilis. dificilis. dissimilis. hnmilis. [iuvenis] itlnior. minimus nfttU. [senex] senior. mSximns nStll. 19. bonns. melior, optimns (90). parnu. minor. minimus. mnltns. pills. plUrimus. mains, p6ior. possimus. mSgnns, mSior, mSximus. frtlgl. frtlgfiUor, frfLgSlissimus. Irregrular Comparison of Adverbs (93). 20. bone, melius, optimS. male, p6ius, pessimS. [parvus], minus, minims. [mSgnus], mSius, mfiximS. multum, plus, plUrimum. satis, satins. 298 INDEX OF VERBS. INDEX OF VERBS. Ab-d5, ere, -didi, -ditam, 138, i. ab-ig9, ere, -6gi, -actum, 153. ab-ici5, ere, -iScI, -iectum, 155. ab-lu5, ere, -lui, -latum, 156. ab-nu5, ere, -nui (-nuitUrus), 156. ab-oleO, ere, Bvi, itum, 124. ab-ol6sc5, -ere, -olevi, -olitum, 157. ab-ripiO, -ere, -ripui, -reptum, 158. abs-cond5 (dO), ere, -ai (-didi), ditum, 138. ab-sistO, -ere, -stiti, 149. ab-sum, -esse, ab-ful, fi-fui, 117. ac-cendO, -ere, -cendl, -censum, 154, ac-cid5, ere, -cidi, 148. ac-cipiO, ere, -cBpi, -ceptum, 155. ac-colO, ere, -colul, -cultum, 158. ac-cumbo, ere, -cubui, -cubitum, 158. ac-currO, ere, ac-curri, -cursum, 148. ac-quirO, ere, -quisivi, -quisltum, 157. acuO, ere, acui, actLtum, 156. ad-do, ere, -didi, -ditum, 138, i. adimS, ere, -emi, emptum, 153. ad-ipiscor, I, ad-eptus sum, 165. ad-iuv6, are, -iflvi, -itltum, 139. ad-olgsc5, ere, -olSvi, -ultum, 157. ad-orior, -orirl, -ortus sum, 166. ad-scisc5, ere, -scivi, -scltum, 157, ad-sist5, ere, -stiti, 149. ad-spici5, ere, -spexl, -spectum 147. ad-stS, -stare, -stiti, 138, 2. ad-sum, ad-esse, ad-fui (af-fui), 117. ad-vesperascO, ere, fivi, 157. af-fer5, -ferre, at-tuli, al-latum, 171. af-flig5, ere -flixi, -flictum, 144. ag-gredior, -gredi, -gressus, 165. a-gn0sc5, ere, fi-gn5vi, a-gnitum (agnOturus), 157. ago, ere, egi, actum, 153. aio, 175, I. algeO, ere, aisi, 141. -lexi al-lici5, ere, /tjc^tn -Iectum, 147. al-Iu5, ere, -lul, -latum, 156. al5, ere, alui, al(i)tum, 158. amb'igO, ere, 153. amb-iO, ire, ivT (ii), itum, 169, 2, B. 1. amicio, ire, (amT^^O ai^ictum, 160. amplector, i, amplexus, 165. angS, ere, anxi, 146. an-nuo, ere, annul (anatum), 156. ante-cello, ere, 158. ante-stO, -stare, -steti, 138. a-periO, -ire, aperui, apertum, 160. ap-petO, ere, ivi, Itum, 157, c. an nliefl are "P^icui, -plicitum, ap-plico, are, (.pijcsvi, -pUcatum), 137. ap-pOnO, ere, -posui, -positum, 157. arcea, Sre, arcui j*J?*^(^j.)_ arcessd (accersS), ere, arcesslvi, -itum, 157. ardeO, ere, arsi, arsum, 141. arguO,ere,argul,J^|^*2J^^)^^^156. ar-ripiO, ere, ui, -reptum, 158. a-scend5, ere, i, scensum, 154. a-spiciO, ere, a-spexi, a-spectum, 147. as-sentior, iri, assensus sum, 166. as-sideS, gre, -sedi, -sessum, 143. as-suSscO, ere, -suevi,-suetum, 157. at-tendO, ere, -tendi, -tentum, 150. at-tex5, ere, -texul, -textum, 158. at-tine5, ere, ul, -tentum, 135, i. a. at-ting5, ere, attigi, attactum, 150. audeO, ere, ausus sum, 167. au-ferS, -ferre, abstuli, ablatum, 171. augeO, ere, auxi, auctum, 141. ave, 175, 4. Batu5, ere, ul, 156. bibO, ere, bibi, (bibitum), 149. CadO, ere, cecidi, casum, 148. caed5, ere, cecidi, caesum, 148. calefaci5, ere, -feci, -factum, 155 ; 173, R. 2. canO, ere, cecini, cantum, 148. capessS, ere, IvI, Itum, 157. capiO, ere, cepi, captum, 126 ; 155. carpO, ere, carpsi, carptum, 144. cave(5, 5re, cavi, cautum, 143. INDEX OF VERBS. 299 cedo, 175, 6. cSd0, ere, oOssI, cSssiim, 144. cSnseO, Bre, ul, |*°Ss), ^^' '• «• cemO, ere, crSvi, (cretum), 157. cingO, ere, cinxi, cinctum, 146. circum-dO, -dare, -dedl, -datum, 138. circum-sistO, ere, stetl, 148. circura-st5, stare, stetl, 138, 2. claudO, ere, clausi, clausum, 144. co-alBscS, ere, -alui, (-alitum), 157, 158. co-arguO, ere, ui, 156. co-em5, ere, -Cml, -gm(p)tum, 153. coepi, coepisse, 175, 5, a, co-gnSscO, ere, -gnovl, -gnitum, 157. c5-g(5, ere, co-e^, co-actum, 153. col-lId5, ere, -llsl, llsiim, 144. coMigd, ere, -l6gl, -lectum, 153. col-lficeS, ere, -luxi, 141. colO, ere, colui, cultum, 158. coin-bQrS, ere, -UssI, -Qstura, 144. com-edS, ere, -Bdl, -Ssum (Sstum), 172. comminlscor, 1, commentus sum, 165. com-move5, §re, -mOvl, -motum, 143. c(J-m5, ere, cOmpsI, cSmptum, 144. com-parco, ere, -parsi, -parsum, 148. com-pellO, ere, com-puli, -pulsum, 150. com-periO, Ire, com-perl, com-per- tum, 163. compBscO, ere, ui, 158. com-pingO, ere, -p§gl, -pactum, com-plector, i, com-plexus, 165. com-prim(5, ere, -pressi, -pressum, com-pung(J, ere, -punxl, -punctum, cou-cid5, ere, -cidi, 148. con-cId(J, ere, -cIdi, -cisum, 148. con-cin5, ere, -cinul, 158. con-clQd6, ere, -cltlsl, -clQsum, 144. con-cumb(J, ere, -cubui, -cubitum, 158. con-cupIscO, ere, -cuplvl, cupltum, 157. eon-cutid; ere^ -cussl, -cussumi 144. con-d5, ere, -didi, -ditum, 138, i. con-dormIsc5, -ere, -IvI, Itum, 157. cSn-ferci(J, ire (fersi), fertum, 161. cSn-fer5, -ferre, -tuli, collatum, 171. cOn-ficiO, ere, -feci, -fectum, 155. cOnfiteor, eri, -fessus, 164. con-fligO, ere, -flixi, -flictum, 144, c5n-fring5, ere, -fregi, -fractum, 154. con-gruS, ere, congrui, 156. c5n-ici5, ere, -ieci, -lectum, 155. con-quirO, ere, -quisivi, -quisltum, 157. c5n-ser6, ere, -serui, -sertum, 158. c5n-ser5, ere, -s§vi, -situm, 157. c5n-sid6, ere, consedi, -sessum,153. cSn-sist5, ere, -stiti, -stitura, 149. con-spergO, ere, -spersi, -spersum, 144. cSn-spiciS, ere, -spexi, ^spectum, 147. c5n-stitu5, ere, ui, -stittitum, 156. c6n-st5, -stare, -stiti, (constat fi- nis), 138, 2. c5n-suBsc5, ere, -suBvi, suBtum, 157 ; 175, 5. consuls, ere, cOnsului, -sultunf, 158. con-temn(J, ere, -tem(p)si, -tem(p)- tum, 146. con-tendO, ere, -tendi, -tentura, 150. con-texO, ere, -texui, -textum, 158. con-tiiieO, ere, ui, -tentum, 135, I, a. con-tiugO, ere, contigi, contactum, 150. convalesce, ere, -valul, -valitum, 158. coqu6, ere, coxl, coctum, 147, 2 ; 144. cor-ripi5, ere, ripui, -reptum, 158. cor-ru5, ere, corrui, 156. cre-dO, ere, -didi, -ditum, 138, i. crepo, fire, crepui, crepitum, 137. crBscS, ere, crBvi, cretum, 157. cubs, fire, cubui, cubitum, 137. ctidO, ere, cUdi, ctisum, 153. cupiO, ere, cupivi, cupitum, 157. currO, ere, cucurri, cursum, 148. De-cemO, ere, -crevi, -crBtum, 157. de-cerpo, ere, si, tum, 144. de-dS, dSdere, dSdidi, dBditum^ 138, 1. 300 INDEX OF VERBS. dS-fendO, ere, •fend!, -f5nsum,154. de-g5, ere, 153. d6-IibuO, uBre, ul, tltura, 156. d6-lig5, ere, -legi, -l6ctum, 153. dS-mO, ere, dSmps!, deinptum,144. dSpellO, ere, dSpuli, dCpulsum, 150. dS-primO, ere, -pressi, -pressum, 144. de-scendO, ere, -scendi, -scSnsum, 154. dS-serO, ere, -serul, -sertum, 157. de-siliO, ire, Jj^' (dSsultum), 160. ul, de-sin5, ere, ^j|g:7 ' desitum,157. d5-sipi5, ere, 157. de-sistO, ere, -stiti, -stitum, 149. d5-spici5, ere, -spexl, -spectum, 147. de-su68c0, -ere, -evi, -etum, 157. d6-sum, -esse, -ful, 117. dS-tend(J, ere, -tendi, -tentum, 150. de-tineO, Sre, -ui, -tentum, 135, I. a. dIcO, ere, dixi, dictum, 144. dif-ferS, -ferre, distuli, dll&tum, 171. dl-gnSscS, ere, -gnOvi, 157. di-IigO, ere, -16x1, -ISctum, 144. di-rig5, ere, -rSxI, -rSctum, 144. dir-imO, ere, -6ml, -gmptum, 153. discO, ere, didici, 151. dis-crepO, are, -crepui (fivi), 137. dis-cumb(J, ere, -cubul, -cubitum, 158. dis-pSsc5, ere, -pgscul, 158. dis-sideS, Sre, -s6di, 143. di-stingu5, ere, -stinxl, -stinctum, 146. dl-stS, -stare, 188, 2. dlvid5, ere, divlsi, divlsum, 144. do, dare, dedi, datum, 138. doceen, is used with the Imperfect and Pluper- fect Subjunctive to give the circumstances under which an action took place (585). 125. Causal and Concessive cam, when, whereas, although, are used with all tenses of the Subjunctive (586, 587). 126. The Logical Condition has usually some form of the Indicative in both Protasis and Apodosis (595). 127. The Ideal Condition has usually the Present or Perfect Sub- junctive, less often the Imperfect or Pluperfect, in both clauses (595). 128. The Unreal Condition has the Imperfect Subjunctive of oppo- sition to present, the Pluperfect of opposition to past fact (597). 129. Tit si, Sc Bl, quasi, quam si, tamqaam, tamqoam si, velut, and velut Bl, introduce a comparison in the Subjunctive. The tense follows the rule of sequence (602). 130. Concessive clauses may be introduced by etsl, etiamBi, tametBl, with the Indicative or Subjunctive (604) ; by qaamqoam, with the Indicative (605) ; by qoamvIB, with the Subjunctive (606). 131. Indefinite and generic relatives usually have the Indicative (625) ; so explanatory qui, when equivalent to quod (626). 132. The Subjunctive is used in Relative Clauses that form a part 312 PRINCIPAL RULES OF SYNTAX. of the utterance of another ; so in OrfitiO Obllqua and Final Clauses (628). 133. Relative sentences that depend on Infinitives or Subjunctives, and form an integral part of the thought, are put in the Subjunctive by Attraction (629). 134. Relative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Design when qui = nt (final) is (630). 135. Relative sentences are put in the Subjunctive of Tendency when qui = nt (consecutive) is ; so after dlgnus, indlgnns, idOnens, aptns, etc.; after an indefinite antecedent ; after comparatives with qTLam(631). 136. Comparative sentences after words of Likeness and Unlike- ness may be introduced by atqne or Sc (643). 137. Comparative sentences after comparatives are introduced by quam (644). 138. In OrStiO Obllqua, Principal Clauses are put in the Infinitive, except Interrogatives and Imperatives, which are put in the Subjunc- tive ; Subordinate clauses are put in the Subjunctive (650, 651, 652). GENEEAL INDEX. A— length of final, 707,1. ab (5)--Syntax of as prep., 417,1; poBi- tion of, 413,B.l; Dat. after vbs. cpd. with,3i7,R.5; with Abl. of Separation, 390; with Towns, 391,b.1; with Abl. of Origin, 396; with Abl. of Agent, 401; with Abl. Ger., 433. abesse— with Ace. of Extent, or S and Abl., 335, R.2; with Dat., 349, R.4; tan- tum abest ut,— ut, 662,r.1. oMlity—adjs. of, with Inf., 423,R.3. ABLATIVE— defined, 23,6; PI. in Sbus, 29, R.4; mute stems with I, 54; vowel stems in I, 57,R.2; 4th decl. in nbUB, 61,R.l; PI. in Is (for ite), 75,2; adjs. of three endings in e, 79,r.1; adjs. and parts, in I and e, 82; adjs. in e and I, 83; of Comp., 89,r.1; forms advs., 91. With abesse and dIstSre, 335,r.2; with Ace. after vbs. of Giving and Put- ting, 348; with preps, instead of Part. Gen., 372,R.2; of Place where, 385; of Towns, 386 ; of Place whence, 390 ; with vbs. of Abstaining, 390,2; with Adjs., 390,3; of Towns, 391; preps, with Towns, ift.R.l; of Attendance, 392; of Time, 393; of Time with in, 394; of Origin, 395; of Material, 396; of Respect, 397; with Comp., 296, 398; of Manner, 399; of Quality, 400; of Instrument, 401; of Agent, 314, 401; with verbs of Sacri- ficing, 401, R.4; with nitor, fldO, etc., 401, R.6; of Standard, 402; of Difference, 403; of Price, 404; with vbs. of Plenty and Want, 405; with opus and tUniS) 406; with tltor, fruor, etc., 407; of Cause, 408 and rr.; of Ger., 431, 432; of Sup., 436. ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE — syntax of, 409,10; of part., 665 ; 666. abstaining— \ha. of, with Abl., 390,2. abstract— relations expressed by Indie, 254,r.1; substs. become concrete in PI., 204,r.5; formation of, 181,2,&. abfltl-with Abl., 407. So— see atque; Sc bI with Sabjy. of Comparison, 602. accentuation— 15; effect of enclitics, ib. R.l; in cpds., ib* r.2; in Voc, ib. R.3. aocidit— sequence after, 513,r.2; with qnod, 525,B. ; with at, 553,3. ACCUSATIVE— definition, 23,4. 3d decl. 36; in im, of vowel stems, 57,r.1; PI. in IB and 6b, 57, r.4; in Is, 83, R.2; of Comp. in Is, 89,R.2; forms advs., 91. Becomes snbj. of pass., 216; Direct obj., 330; with cpd. vbs., 331; Inner obj., 332, 333 ; nent. pron. and adj., 333,1; Cognate, ib.2. Double Ace, 333,1; of Extent, in Degree, Space, Time, 334- 336; with abesse and dIstSre, 335,r.2; with abbinc, 336, r.3; of Local Object, 337; of Bespect, 338. Double Acc<, 339-342; with vbs. of Inquiring, etc., 339; with vbs. of Naming, Making, etc., 340; with Interjections, 343> 1; and Dat. with vbs. of Giving and Putting, 348; with preps, for Part. Gen., 372, r.2; subj. of Inf., 203,R.l; 420; of Ger., 430, 432; of Sup., 435; with Inf. as object clause, 526-535 ; with Inf. as subj., 535; with Inf. after vbs. of Emotion, 542,r.; with Inf. in dependent comparative clause, 641. accusing— \hs. of, with Gen., 378. acquitting— yhs. of, with Gen., 378. active voice— 112,2; 213; of something caused to be done, 219; periphrastic, 247. ad— vbs. cpd. with, take Ace, 331; with Towns and Countries, 337, rr.1 and 2; with Ace. of End after vbs. of Taking, etc., 340,R.2; with Ace. for Dat., 345, R.2; vbs. cpd. with, take Dat., 347; in the neighborhood of, 386, r. 2; position of, 413, R.l; as prep., 416,1; with Ace. Ger., 429;432,R. arfrfiw^— vbs. of, with quod, 525, 1; with nt, 553,4. ADJECTIVE— 16,2; decl. of, 17; defined, 72; 1st and 2d decl., 73; stems in ro, 74; with Nom. wanting, 74, r.2; Pronominal, 314 GENERAL INDEX. 76; 3d decl., 77; two endings, 78; eteras in ri, 78,2; in Sli and Sri, 78,r.; one ending, 80; case peculiarities, 83; almn- dantia^ 8i; defective, 86; comparison of, 86; correlative, 109. As subst., 204,BR.l-4; agreement of pred., 211; attrib. agrees in Qender, 286; nent. with fern., ib. 8; concord of, 289; with two Bubjs., 290; position, 291; meaning varies with position, ib. r.1, 676 ; numerals, 292-296 ; comparatives, 296-301; superlatives, 102, 303; of In- clination, Knowledge, etc.^ in pred., 826, R.6; neut. in Cognate Ace, 833,1; of Extent in Degree, 33A and b.1 ; with Gen. of Quality, 366; of 3d decl. as pred., 366,R.2; with Abl. of Separation, 390,3 ; with Abl. of manner, 399; with Abl. of Quality, 400; with Inf. for Gen. of Ger., 428,R.3; neut. with at, 663,4. advantage— vha. of, with Dat., 346. ▲DTBRB— defined, 16,5, and B.3; formation of, 91, 92 ; comparison of, 93 ; numeral, 98; pron., 110; general use of, 439; po- sition of, 440, 677. adversative— sentences, 483-491; particles, 483; cam, 687; qui, 634. adver BUB— gives obj. toward which^ 369, R.2; as prep., 416,2. ae— pronunciation of, 4 and r. aequSlis— with Gen. or Dat., 369,b.1. aequSre— with Ace, 346,r.3. aestimfire— with Gen., 379; with Abl., 380, R.2; with Abl. and ex, 402, r.2. a<7«— how expressed, 296, r.5. agent— in Abl. with ab, 214, 366,r.1, 401; in Abl., 214.R.2; in Dat., 216, 364, 366; and Instrument, 401, R.l. SiO— 176,1; introduces O.B., 648,R. 2. aliquis and aliqul— 107; syntax of, 314; for quia aod qal, 107, R.l, 316, r.1. alius— decl. of, 76, 108; syntax of, 319; alia as Ace. of Respect, 338,2 ; alififl— alias, 482,1. alter— decl. of, 76, 108; for secundus, 96,5; and alius, 319. alteruter— decl. of, 76,108. amb9— 96, 108; and uterque, 292. amicus— with Gen. or Dat., 369,r.1. an— in disjunciive questions, 467, 1; in phrases, ib. 2 ; in second part of a die- junctivo (]iie8tion, 458 ; anne, ib. ; annOn and necne, 459; or 497. anacoluthou— 697. anacrusis— 733,r. anapaestic — foot, 733. animi as Loc., 374, r. ante— vbs. cpd. will take Ace. or Dat., 331,347; with Abl. of Standard or Ace. of Extent, 403, R.; as prep., 416,3; with Ace. Ger., 432,1. anteSquam— see antequam. antecedent— action, 661-667: of Rel., 613; repetition of, 616 ; incorporation of, 616 ; indefinite, 621: def. or indef. with Indie, or Subjv., 631,1 and 2. antequam— with Indic, 674-676; with Pr., 676; with Pf. and Fut. Pf., 676; with Subjv., 677. aorist— definition, 224; Hist. Pf., 239. aphaeresis— 714, r. apodosis— 689; omission of, 601; in com- parative sentences, 602; in Indic. in Unreal Conditions, 697,R.3; after vb. requiring Subjv., i6.R.5. aposiopesis — 691. appellfire— with two Aces., 340; with two Noms., 206. apposition— 320; concord in, 321; Parti- tive, 322, 323 ; Restrictive, 322; Distribu- tive, 323 ; to sentence, 324 ; Predicate, 326 ; Gen. of , 361 ; to names of Towns, 386,R.l; to Loc., 411,r.2; pron. incor- porated, 614, R.4; subst. incorporated, 616,2. apud— 416,4. arrangement— of words, 671-683; gram- matical or rhetorical, 672; of simple sentences, 674; of interrog. sentences, 676; of adj. and Gen., 676; of a'dvs., 677; of preps., 678; of particles, 679. as— decl. of, 48, R. a8Jdng—\\i&. of, with two Aces., 339 and R.l ; with ut, 646. asseverations— in Subjv., 262. at —use of, 488. atque— syntax of, 477; with adjs. of Lilieness, etc.^ 643. atquI--489. attendance— Abl. of, 392; with cum, t5. R.l; instrumental, ib. r.2. attraction— in Gender, 211,R.5; in mood, 608,4, 629, 662, 663; of Rel., 617. attributive— 288; concord of adj., 289; with two or more snbsts., 290; position of, 291; superlatives of Order and Se- quence, 291,1,R.2 ; pred., 326; withpart> 437.R. GENEKAL INDEX. 315 aut— use of, 493; ant— aut, 446. autem— position of,484,B.; syntax of, 484. auxiliary — vbs. with Inf., 280, 1,&. becoming— vhB. of, with two Noms., 206. beginning— \h8. of, with Inf., 423, and r.3. believing— yha. of, with Ace. and Inf., 627 ; with Nom., 628. bellum— in Abl. of Time, 304,R.; belli as Loc.,411,R.l. beseeching— \hB. of, with nt, 646. betoaring-vhs. of, with nS, 648. bidding — vbs. of, with Dat., 346. bXnX— for duo, 96,R.3. hOs— decl. of, 62. hrachylogy— 689. buying — vbs. of, with Gen. or Abl., 379, 380. caesura— defined, 760-763. calling— yhe. of, with two Aces., 340; with two Noms., 206. capability— &di8. of, with Inf., 421,r.2. cardinal numbers— 94; Gen. PI. of 96,r.2; position of, 676,R.2. carO— decl. of, 42 ; gender of, 43,1. cases— defined, 23; rSctI and obllqul, 24; case-forms, 26; endings, 26,2. catalexis— 742. causa— with Gen., 373; with Gen. Ger., 428,R.2. CAUSAL SENTENCES — co(irdinate, 498 ; sub- ordinate, 638-542; with quod, etc., and Indie, or Subjv., 640, 641; rejected reason, ib. r.; with vbs. of Emotion, 642; with cum, 686; relative, 634; clauses in 0.0. , 666. causation — vbs. of, with part., 637; with ut, 653,1 ; pass, with ut, ib. 3. cause— Abl. of, 408 ; represented by part., 666, 670,2. cavSre — with Subjv. for Impv., 271,2; with Dat., 346, R.2 ; constructions with, 548, R. cedo— defective, 176,6. cfilare— with two Aces., or dO, 339 and b. 1 and 3. (cSterus)— Nom. masc. wanting, 74,r.2, 85, B; use of cfiterum, 491; oStera used partitively, 291, R.2. charge— in Gen. with Judicial verbs, 378; with nOmine, ib. r.1; in Abl., ib. r.2. £hoosing—\hs. of, with two Noms., 206; with two Aces., 340. circS— position of, 413,r.1 ; as prep., 416,5; with Ace. Ger., 432. circiter— aa prep., 416,6. ciroum— vbs. cpd. with, take Ace., 331; never repeated, ib. R.2; as prep., 416,5. cis— as prep., 416,7. oitius quam— constr. after 6I4,b.3. citrS— as prep., 416,7. OOepI— 176,5,a,* with Inf., 423,R.8. cOgere— with ut, 663,2; condicdet with Inf., 646,R.l. Cognate Accusative — 333,2 ; similar phrases, ib. R.; with second Ace, 341. oOgnStus- with Gen. or Dat., 369, r.1. cOgnOmen esse— with Dat., 349,r.5. COlus— decl. of, 68,4. commflnis, with Gen. or Dat., 369,r.1. comparative— 86. 87; with quam or Abl., 296; omission of quam, ib. b.4; age with nStus, ib. r.5; of Disproportion, 298 ; doubled, 299; with Part. Gen., 372; with Abl. of Bespect, 398 ; with quam qui, 631,3. COMPARATIVE SENTENCES — 638-644 ;mood8 in, 639 ; vb. omitted in, 640 ; in dependent clauses, 641; correlatives in, 642; with atque, 643; with quam, 644. comparison — of adjectives, 86, 87; of par- ticiples, 88, 89; of ad vs., 93; irr^ular, 90; standard of, omitted, 297; of quali- ties, 299 ; conditional sentences of, 602. compelling— \hB. of, with nt, 663,2. composition of words, 193-200; of substs., 194-198; of vbs., 199, 200. compounds— 107, 108; quantity in, 715. conceiving— yba. of, with obj. clause, 623. CONCESSIVE SENTENCES— 603-609 ; with etsi, etc., 604 ; with quamquam, 606; with quamvls, 606 ; with licet, 607; with at, 608 ; representatives of, 609. concord— 210; pred. with subj., 211; of multiplied subj. and pred., 286-287; of app., 321; of rel., 614. condemning— vha. of, with Gen., 378; with other constrs., ib. r.2. CONDITIONAL SENTENCES— 689-602 ; nega lives, 691 ; two excluding, 692 ; equiva lents of Protasis, 693. Logical, 696 slve- slve, ib. r.4. Ideal, 696; Un REAL, 697 ; Indie, in Apodosis, ib. R.8 in O.O., ib. r.4; Incomplete, 698-601 of Comparison, 602; in D.O., 666 Logical, 667; Ideal, 668; Unreal, 668. cOnfldere— with Abl., 401,r.6. 3i6 GENERAL INDEX. conjagation— defined, 17 ; systeme of, 120 ; first, 122; second, 123; irregular second, 124; third, 126; third in iO, 126; fourth, 127; deponents, 128; periphrastic, 120; notes on, 130,131 ; change in, 136. CONSBCUTIVE SENTENCES — exceptional se- quence in, 613 ; syntax of, 661-K68 ; Pure, 662; with dignus, etc., ib. B.2; with idea of Design, ib. R.8; at nOn, wiih- ottty ib. R.4 ; Complementary, 663; vbs. of Effecting, 663; vbs. of Hindering, 664-666 ; quln with vbs. of Preventing, 666,1 ; with vbs. of Doubt, ib. 2 ; quln = nt nOn, 666; Explanatory at, 667; Exclamatory question, 668; rel. sen- tences, 631; with quln, 632. cdnstrCctid praegndns, 600. cOnsxilere— with Dat., 346, r.2. contemporaneous action— 638-673 ; in Ex- tent, 660,670; in Limit, 671-673. oontentns, with Abl. 401, r.6. contingit— with at, 663,3; contigit, sequence after, 613,b. continuance— y\M. of, with Inf., 423. contrS— position of, 413,r.1; as prep., 416,9. contracting — vbs. of, with Ace. Ger., 430. contrftrius — with Gen. or Dat., 360, r.1. contrasts— with hic—ille, 307, rr. 1,2 ; with ipse, 311, R.1; alter— alter, etc., 323. convicting— y^. of, with Gen., 378; other constr., ib. B.2. coordination— defined, 472 ; syntax of, 473- 603; copulative, 474-482; adversative, 483-401; disjunctive, 402-407; causal and illative, 408-603. copula— with Pred., 206; itself a pred., ib. N.; omitted, 200; agrees with pred., 211, copulative— vbs,, 206; with nom. and Inf., ib. R.1. Particles, 474, 481. Sentences 474-482 ; use of neg. to connect, 480. cor— decl. of, 63. coram- asprep., 417,3. correlatives— 100-111 ; coordinating par- ticles, as tam— ttim, alias— aliSs, etc., 482; of Eel., 618; absorption of, 610, 621; position of, 620; in comparative sentences, 642; omitted, 642,3. correption — 744, countries— in Ace, with prep., 337,R.l; without, ib. R.1. creSre— with two Aces., 340; with two Nome., 206. cam— vbs. cpd. with take Ace, or Dat., 331,347; with Abl. of Attendance, 382; with Abl. of Manner, 300 ; with unnatural productions, 400,r.2; as prep., 417,4; position of, 413, B.l; with Abl. Ger., 433. Pr&nom, as soon as, 661-4(63; with Iterative action, 666,667 ; with Subjv., ib. B.; Temporal, 680; fait com, i6. r.1; meminl cum, ib. r.2 ; with lApees of Time, ib. K.8; Inverse, 681; Iterative, 684; Circumstantial, 686-688; Historical, 686; Causal, 686; Concessive and Ad- versative, 687 ; cam— torn, 688. Dactylic— foot, 783 ; rhythms, 783-780. DATIVE— defined, 23,8 ; 1st decl. in Sbos, 28,R.4 ; 4th decl. in abas, 61,b.1 ; 5th decl., uncommon, 63,b.1 ; in adjs. in IS (for ils), 76,2 ; in I of pron. adjs., 76,2. With act. vb. unchanged in imiss., 217, 346,R.l ; of Indirect Obj., 344; with trans, vbs., 346; with vbs. of Taking Away, ib. R.1 ; with in trans, vbs., 346; with cpd. vbs., 347; with vbs. cpd. with d6, ex, ab, ib. r.5 ; and Ace. with vbs. of Giving and Putting, 348 ; of Possessor, 340; of Personal Interest, 360; Ethical, 361; of Reference, 362, 363; with par- ticiples, 363 ; of Agent, 216, 364; Double, 366; with snbsts., 367; Local, 368; with adjs., 360; of Ger., 420. dS— with Abl. for second Ace, 330,rr.1,8 ; vbs. cpd. with take Dat., 347, r.5 ; with Abl. of Separation, 300,1 and 2; of Origin, 306; of Respect, 307,b.; of Cause, 408, R.3; position of, 413,R.l; as prep., 416,5; with Abl. Ger., 433. dec6re— with Dat., 346,r.8. declension— defined, 17; varieties of, 27; rules for, 28; 1st, 20, 30; 2d, 31-33; 3d, 36-60; 4th, 61, 62; 5th, 63. 64; vary between 5th and 8d, 63,R.2 ; of Greek substs., 66; adjs. of 1st and 2d, 73; of pron. adjs., 76; of parts., 80. dfiesse- with Dat., 340,r.4. d6ficere— with Ace, 346, r.8. deliberative questions — ^266 ; Subjv. in O.O., 661,R.2. dBligere— with two Aces., 340; with two Noms., 206. demanding— vhB. of, with at, 646. demonstratives — 104; attracted -in Gen- der, 211,R.5; syntax of, 306-307; hic, GENERAL INDEX. 317 306; iste, 306; ille, 307; followed by quod, 626,2 ; position of, 676, r.1. deponent— 113 ; conjugation, 128; list of, 163-166; semi-, 167; how used, 220. depriving— vhe. of, with Abl., 406, n. desire— &d2B. of, with Gen., 374; vbs. of, with Inf., 281,c, 423,2,R.4. determinative pronouns— 103, 308. deus— decl. of, 33,R.6. dexter— 74,R.l ; Comp. of, 87,1, 2 and 7. diaeresis— 6, 763. dialysis— 724. diastole— 721. dicer e— with two Nome, in pass., 206. difference— measure of, 403. diflB.cile— comparison of, 87,3. difEldere— with Dat., 401, r.6. dlgpius— constr. after, 662,R.2 ; qui or nt, with Subjv., 631,1. diphthongs— length, 14; quantity, 706. disjunctive— particles, 492 ; sentences, 492- 497; questions, 462; forms of, 468; in- direct, 460,2. disproportion— by quam prO, qui, ut, etc., 298. dissimilis— Comp. of, 87,3. dis tare— with Ace, or S and Abl., 336,R.3. distributives— 97 ; with pltlrSlla tantum, ib. R.3 ; for cardinals, syntax of, 296 ; distributive apposition, 323. doc6re— with two Aces., or d6, 339, and R.l ; doctus, ib. r.2 ; discere as pass., ib. R.4 ; constr. after, 423, r.6. doing— vhe. of, take obj. clause, 623, 626,1. domus— dccl., 61,R.2, 68,4 ; domum, 337; domS, 390,2 ; domi, 411,r.2 ; with Gen. of poss. pron., 411,r.3. d^nec— while, 669; vntil, with Indie, 671; with Subjv., 672. doubt — vbs. of, with quln, 666,2. d?vpping—ybe. of, with quod clause, 626. dubitare— an, 467,2; nOn dubitO, with quln, 666,2; with Interrog., ib. R.l ; with Inf., ib. R.2. dvLm— while, 669, 670; until, with Indie, 571; with Subjv., 672; provided that, 673; retained, with Indie, in O.O., 666,R.3. dummodo— provided that, 673. duo-96 ; and ambO, uterque, 292. E— length of final, 707,2; see ex. ecce— with Ace. and Nom,, 343, 1,r. ecq'iis— 106. ecthlipsis— 719,2. effecting— couBtT. of vbs. of, 663. efficere— with Subjv. and ut, 663,1 and 3. egfire— with Gen. or Ace, 406,R.l. ego— dech of, 100 ; Gen. PI., 304,2 and 3; nOe in O.O., 660,4. elision— 719,1. ellipsis- 688. emere— with Gen., 379. emotion— \\)s. of, with Ace, 330,R. ; with Abl., 408; with Ace. and Inf., 633; Causal sentences after, 642 and r. 6n— in exclamations, 343, 1,r. enallage — 693. enclitics— effect of, on pronunciation, 16, R.I. endeavor— vhs. of, with ut, 646,1. ending— vhB. of, with Inf., 423,2. enim— position of, and use of, 498. epicene substantives— 21,3. f ergS— use of, 416,10; with Ace Ger., 432. ergO- with Gen., 373; with Gen. Ger., 428,R.2; usage of, 602. esse— conjugation of, 116; cpds., 117; as copula, 206; omitted, 209, 280,2; with Put. part, to form periphrastic, 247 ; cp J . tenses with ful, etc., ib. R.l; futlLrum esse ut, 248; in e9 est ut, 249; with Ger., 261,1; with Gen. of Price, 379; with Dat. Ger., 429; est, it is the case, with ut, 663,3 ; fuit Cum, with Subjv., 680,R.l ; sunt qui, with Subjv., 631,2. et— in numerals, 96,4, 97,4; et— et, usage of, 476; omitted, 481,2 and 3. etenim — use of, 498, Ethical Dative— 36L etiam— strengthens comparative, 301 ; syntax of, 478; yes, 471,1; and quoque, 479, R.; after sed, vfirum, 482,5. etiamsl— with Indie or Subjv., 604. etsi— with Indie or Subjv., 604. ex— vbs. cpd. with take Dat., 347,R.5 ; with Abl. of Separation, 390,1 and 2 ; with Towns, 391,r.1 ; with Abl. of Ori- gin, 396; of Material, 396 ; of Respect, 397,R.; Measure, 402,r.; of Cause, 408, R.2 ; use as prep., 417,6 ; with Abl. Ger., 433. exclamations— in Ace, 343,1; in Ace and Inf., 634; exclamatory questions, 668. exIstimSre —with Gen , , 379 ; with ex and Abl., 402,R. exspectfire— constr. of, 672. 3i8 GENERAL INDEX. extent— in Degree, 33A; in Space, 336; in Time, 336. eztri— as prep., 416,11. fiusere— fao (ut) for imp., 271,1; with pred. Oen., 366,r.1; with Gen. of Price, 379; with consecutiye claase, (63,1; fiioere (fazO) at as periphrasis, ib. 1 ; nOn poMam (facere) qtiln, 556, r.i. /ear— sequence after vbs. of, 616, R.3; claases of, and Final Clauses, 643, r.3 ; syntax of claose of, BtO. fer 9— position of, 677, r.1. ferre— conj. of, 171. fidere— with Abl., 401,r.6. fieri— conjugation of, 173 ; with two Noms., 206; with Gen. of Price, 379; with ez or d9, 396,R.l; with at, 663,3. Figures— of Syntax and Rhetoric, 688-700; of Prosody, 718-728. JUling—y^. of, with Abl., 406. FINAL SENTENCES— 643-660 ; Pure, 646; Complementary, 646-640; with vbs. of Will and Desire, 646; Inf. instead, ib. R.1 ; Sttbjv. without at, ib. R.2 ; with vbs. of Hindering, 647-649 ; n6 with vbs. of Preventing, 648 ; qaOminas, 649 ; with vbs. of Fear, 660 ; eight circuEolocutions for, 644, R.; sequence in, 612. final syllables— quantity of, 711-713. ^tne88—ad2B. of, with Dat., 369; with Dat. Ger., 429. flagitfire— with Abl. or 5, 339.R.1. following— \h%. of, with at, 663,8. foot— in Metre, 733,734; equality of, 740; conflict of Word and Verse, 760. forbidding— yhB. of, with Dat., 346; with 116,618. forgetting-yhB. of, with Gen. or Ace, 376. FORMATION OF WORDS— 176-200 ; simple words, 179-192 ; suffixes, 180 ; formation of Biibsts., 181; of adjs., 182; without suflaxes, 183; formation of vbs., 190- 192 ; cpd. words, 193-200; substs., 191- 198; vbs., 199, 200. fretus— with Abl., 401,R.6. fml— with Abl . , 407 ; personal Ger. , 427, R.5. fidness-adjs. of, with Gen., 374; vbs. of, with Gen., 383,1. fangi— with Abl., 406; personal Ger., 427,R.5. FUTURE— 112,3; formation of, 114, 116; deODidoB of, 223; usage, of 242; of YOlO and pofMnim, ib. R.2; in Impv. sense, 243; periphrastic act., 247; part, act., 283; representation of in O. O., 614,616; periphrastic in Unreal Cond., 616,R.l; Inf., 630; in rel. sentences, 622; syntax of part., 660, 670. FUTURE PERFECT— 112,3; formation of, 114, 116; defined, 223; syntax of, 244; as Fut., ib. R.1 ; with nOlO, YolO, poBsam, etc.^ ib. R.3; as Impv., 246; Representa- tion of, hi O. O., 614, 616; Pf. and Plupf. periphrastic in Unreal Condition, 616» R.1; in rel. sentences, 622. Gender— 19; common, 21,1; epicene, 213; sabBtantlva mObilia, ib. 2; of ist Decl., 30; of 2d Decl., 34; of 3d Decl., 89, 43, 46, 49, 66, 68; of 4th Decl., 62; of 5th Decl., 64; concord in, 286; neut. PI. with feminines, ib. 3. GENiTiYE— defined, 23,2; of 1st Decl. in fis, fil, am, 29,RR.l, 2; of 2d Decl. in I (from stems in io), in am, 33, R.1 and 8; of 3d Decl. in um, iam, 64, 67,r.3; of Greek substs. in On, edn, 66, r.1; of adjs., 73; in am, 76; of pron. adjs. in lOB, 76; of adjs. of three endings in tun, iam, 79, R.2, 82, 83, R. 3 and 4; of Comp. of part., 89, R.3; of Cardinals, 96,r.2; of Distributives, 97,r.1. With mllle, 293; mel, eic.^ as objec- tive, 304,2; nostrom as Part., ib. 3; poss. pron. for Gen., 304,2,r.; in app. to poBS. pron., 321,R.2; Part. Gen. for Part. App., 323, R.; Adnominal, Appositive, 361; Epexegetical, 361; Possessive, 362 ; Subjective and Objective, 363; 1st and 3d persons as possessive, 364; of Quality, 366; as Pred., 366; with facere, ib. R.1; generis^ 368, R.; with preposi- tional subst, 373; with adjs., 374; with participles and verbals, 376; with vbs. of Memory, 376 ; with vbs. of Emotion, 377; with Judicial vbs., 378; with vbs. of Rating and Buying, 379, 380; with interest and rfifert, 381 ; with vbs. of Fulness, 383; Ger., 428; with esse, causS, ^tc.j ib. R.2; position of, 676. genus— decl. of, 48. GERUND and GERUNDIVE— 112,5 ; forma- tion of, 116,3 ; Agent of, in Dat., 216,2 ; with esse to form periphrasis, 261 ; syntax of, 426-433 ; Ace. of, with preps., 432; Abl. of, with preps., 433. GENERAL INDEX. 319 giving— vhs. of, with Dat. and Ace, or Ace. and Abl., 348; with Ace. Ger.,430. grStiS— with Gen., 373; with Gen. Ger., 428,R.2. Greek substantives— 66 ; Greek Ace, 338. habSre— with two Noma, in pass., 206; with Pf. part, to denote Maintenance of the Result, 238; first Impv. wanting, 267,R.; with two Aces., 3iO,R.l; with Gen. of Price, 379 ; be able, with Inf., 423. happening— Beqnence after vbs. of, 613, R.2 ; vbs. of, with quod clause, 626,1 ; ut instead, ib. R.; vbs. of, with con- secutive clause, 663,3. hand— 441 and 443; sciO an, 467,2. (h)avere -176,4. hendiadys— 698. heteroclites— 68. heterogeneous substantives — 67. hiatus— 720. hic— 104,1 ; syntax of, 306; and ille, 307, RR.1,2 ; with Abl. of Time, 393,R.4 ; in 0.0., 660,3. hindering— \hB. of, with nS, 648; with qoln, 664-668; and vbs. of Preventing, 666 ; and vbs. of Doubt, ib. 2. HISTORICAL INFINITIVE- syntax of, 647. HISTORICAL PERFECT— 224; forcc of, 239; and Pure Pf., 236; and Impf., 231, 240. HISTORICAL PRESENT— 224 and 229; with dum, 670. historical tenses— 226. hope— coi\Biv. of, vbs. of, 423,r.5; sequence after, vbs. of, 616,r.3 ; vbs. of, with Ace. and Inf., 627,R.4. ^ huml, as Loc, 411, r.2. hypallage— 693. hyperbaton— 696. hypotaxis— 472. I— and J., 1,R.2; sound of, 3; effect of, on preceding vowel, 12,1, R.2 ; I-class of vb. stems, 133, VI.; length of final, 707,4. iam— with Pr. Indie, 230; with Impf. In- die, 234; iam-iam, 482,1. Iambic— foot, 734; rhythms, 767-767. IDEAL CONDITION— 596 ; = Unreal, ib. r.1 ; in O.O., ib. R.5, 668. Idem— decl. of, 103,2 ; syntax of, 310; the sa/ne a^% with qui, ut, atque, cum, or Dat., 310,R.2 ; not used with is, 310,R.3. idOneus— constrs. with,662,R.2 ; with qui and Subjv., 631,1. igi tar— position of, 484,r.; usage of, 601. ille— decl. of, 104,8 ; Syntax of, 307; and hIC, ib. RR.1,2 ; et ille, ib. r.2 ; with Abl. of Time, 393,R.4; in O.O., 860,2. ImmO— use of, 471, <:. IMPERATIVE— 112, 4 ; Subjv. for, 268; usage, 266-276; negative of, 270; peri- phrases of, 271; representatives of, 272; of Past, 272,3; tenses of, 278; for Pro- tasis, 693,4; in Subjv. with O. O., 662. IMPERFECT— 112,3 ; force of, 223,231 ; and Hist. Pf., 232; of Endeavor, Disappoint- ment, and Resistance to Pressure, 233; overlapping, ib. R.l, 662 ; of Awakening, 233, R.2; with iam, etc., 234; of opposi- tion to Present, 264,R.2 ; as Potential of Past, 268; in Wish, 260; Subjv. as Con- cessive, 264; Subjv. as Impv. of Past, 272,3 ; tense relations of Subjv., 277; in Sequence, 610, r. impersonal verbs— 208,1 and 2; vbs. of Saying, etc., 628; in Ger. constr., 427, R.4 ; with ut, 663,4. in— vbs. cpd. with take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; with Countries and Towns, 337, R.l; with Ace. for Dat., 346,R.2; with app. to Towns, 386,R.l; with books, 387; with Abl. of Time, 394,r.; as prep., 418,1; with Ace. Ger., 432; with Abl. Ger., 433. incorporation— of antecedent, 616 ; of cor- relative, 619. indefinite pronouns— 107 ; syntax of, 313- 319; rel. with Indie, 264,r.4, 626. INDICATIVE— 112,4; meaning of, 264, with indef. rel., ib. R.4; tense relations of, 276; neg. of, 267; in questions, 463,464; after nesciO quia, etc., 467,r.1; in Rel- ative Sentences, ib. r.2. indigSre— with Gen., 406,r. indlgnus— with qui, ut, or Inf., 662,r.2; with qui and Subjv., 631,1. INFINITIVE- 112,5; formation of, 116,3; usage of, 279, as subst., 280; after d6- be5,i&. 2,&/ as representative of Indie, 281 ; after memini, etc., ib. 2.r. ; syntax of, 419-424; with Ace as subj., 420; as Bubst., 421; as subj., 422; as obj., 423; ut instead, ib. r.4; as pred. with esse, 426; Fut. pass., 436,R.; sequence after, 618; Ace and Inf. after vbs. of Saying and Thinking, 527; part, instead, ib. r. 5; tenses after these vbs., 529-631; with vbs. of Will and Desire, 532; with vbs. of Emotion, 633; in Exclamations, 634; 320 GENERAL INDEX. Ace. and Inf. as Bubj., 536 ; Ace. and Inf. after vbs. of Emotion, 542; with vbe. of Will and Desire, 516. R. ; with dl^QB, etc.y 552,R.2; after potioB, etc., 6AA,b.3,6; iuO. O., «50. See Hist. Inf. Infrfi— as prep., 416,12. Inner Object— Ace. of, 328, 330. 332. _ inqnam— 176,2 ; inqoit, in citing O. R., 6i8,R.2. inquiring— \\m. of, with two Aces., 339, and R.l. Ingtar— 70,B ; with Gen., 373. instrument— in Abl., 214, 401; with ab, 214,it.2; Abl. of, contrasted with Abl. of Attendance, 392,R.2. inter— with reflexive to express reciprocal action, 221; vbs. cpd. with, take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; position of, 413, R.l ; as prep., 416,13 ; with Ace. Ger., 432. interest— with Gen. and Abl.. 381 ; constr. of Degree of Concern, 382, 1 and 2. Interest— Dat. of Personal, 360. interjection— 16, R.2 ; no syntax, 201, R.l. interrogfire — with two Aces., or d8, 339, R.l. interrogative pronouns — 106 ; distin- guished from rel., 467, r.2. INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES — 460 - 470 ; simple and cpd., 462; particles in, 464- 467; moods in, 462-467; Indie, 463, 464; Subjv., 466, 486; in O. O., 661. intra— position, 413,r.1 ; as prep., 416,14. intransitive verbs — used impersonally, 208,2; used transitively, 213, R.&,' con- strued as pass., 214, R.l ; with neut. subj. in pass., 217; impersonal Gerund, 261,2. invidSre— with Dat., 346.R.2. iocus — heterogeneous, 67.2. ipse— decl. of, 103.3: syntax of, 311; et ipse, ib. 1,R.2; emphasizes reflexive, ib. 2. is— decl. of, 103,1; syntax of, 308; =tSli8, ib. R.l ; with et, atque, que, ib. r.2; id temporis, aetStis, 336,r.5; with qui and Subjv., 631,1; in O. O., 660,2. islands — in Local Ace, 337; with" in, ib. R.l; prep, omitted, ib. R.7. iste— decl. of, 104, II.; syntax of, 306 ; in O. O., 660,3. ita-withut, 482.4. itaque— usage of, 500. iterative action— 666, 667 ; with cum, 684 ; in Relative Sentences, 623. iubfire— constr. after, 423,R.6; with Inf., with Subjv., 546,11.3. iUYfire— with Acc.,346,R.3. ilLxtft— as prep., 416,15. Judgment— y\y%. of, with Abl. of Standard, 4Q2. Knowledge— adJB. of, in pred. attrib., 326, R.6; adjs. of, with Gen., 374. laedere— with Ace, 346,r.3. iStUS— with Ace. of Extent, 335, R.l. leaving— vhe. of, with Ace. Ger., 430. length— by nature, 12,1, and b.; by posi- tion, ib. 2. letters— tenses in, 252; advs. in, ib.; dated from a place, 391, r.3. letting— yhB. of, with Ace. Ger., 430. libet— added to rels., 111,3; exact use of libuerit, 244,r.3; libSns, in pred. attrib., 325, r.6. licdre— exact use of Fut. Pf., 244, R.3; with Gen., 379; lioet, altfumgh, 603-607. likeness— adis. of, with Dat., 349; with atque(Sc), 643. litotes— 700. Local Dative— 358. LOCATiYB— 23,N.; of Ist Dccl., 29,R.2; of 2d Decl., 33,RR.3,5 ; syntax of, 411 ; app. to, in Abl., ib. R.2 ; domi, with poss. pron., ib. R.3. locus— 67,2 ; Abl. without in, 386,R.3. LOGICAL CONDITION— 596 ; with Subjv. by Attraction, ib. R.2; with Ideal 2d Person, ib. R.3 ; slve— Slve, ib. r.4 ; in O. O., 657, 596,R.l. longum— with est f^r Subjv., 254, R.l ; longfi strengthens Comp. or Superla- tive, 301, 303; with Ace, 336, R.l. macte— 86,C, 326,r.1. mSgnus— comparison of, 90 ; age with mSior, 296. r.5 ; magis, in comparison of Qualities, 299 ; mSgnl, Gen. of Price, 380,1; mSximI, Gen. of Price, 380,1. making— yhe. of, with two Noms., 206; with two Aces., 340. malle— conj. of, 174; malim, mallem, as Potential, 267,2, 268 ; in Unreal Wish, 261, R. malus— comparison of, 90. Manner— Abl. of, 399. Material— Abl. of, 396; indicated by adj., ib. Means- Abl. of, 402. measure — vbs. of, take Abl., 402. GENERAL INDEX. 321 Measure— Abl. of, 402; of Difference, 403; with ante and post, ib. b. medillB— u^d partitively, 291, R.2 ; Abl. ased without in, 388. memini— 176,5,6 ; First Impv. wanting, 287, R. ; with Pr. Inf., 281,2,r. ; with Ace., 376,R.2 ; with com and Indie, 680,r.2. -mSt— added to personal pron., 102, r. metre— 730 ; unit of, 731. mens- 78; Voc. of, 100 b.1; mel with Gen. Ger., 128,R.l. mllle— a subst. in PI., 96,R.3; milia, with masc. vb., 211,r.1,Ex. b; use of, in Sg. and Pi., 293. minor— quam omitted with, 298, r.4; mi- nSris, minimi, as Gen. of IMce, 380,1; minus, no, 471,6,1; minimS, no, ib.; sin minus, 692; si minus, ib. b. miseret, misereor— with Gen., 377. modo— modo, 482,1; nOn modo— sed etiam, 482,5; nOn modo nOn, sed nd— quidem, i6.R.l; pwvided only, 673. monSre— with Inf., or ut, 648,r.1. mood— 112,4, 263: Indie, 264; Subjv.,266- 286; Impv., 288-276; Inf., 279-281; at- traction of, 608,4; in Temporal Clauses, 680 ; in Relatives Sentences, 624-836 ; in Comparative Sentences, 839; in O. O., 660-862. Viotlon—\h. of, with Inf., 421,r.1; vb. of, with Sup., 436; vb. of, with Fut. part., 438,r.2. movSre— syncope in Pf., 131,3. nam— usage of, 498; position of, ib.\ ye8 for, 471, R. naming— \bB. of, with two Aces., 340. namque— 498; position of, ib. nasci— with two Noms., 208; nStus, constr. of, 298,R.5; with Ace, 336,r.4. nB-neg. of Opt. Subjv., 280; of Impv., 270; continued by neque,260; by n6ve, 270, 444,2; with Pf. Subjv., 270,r.2; syntax of, 441, 444; n6-quidem, 446, 448, 482,5 and r.1 ; in Final Sentences, 543,4; after vbs. of Hindering, 648 ; after vbs. of Fear, 660; with dum, 673; as Concessive, 808. ne— as interrogative, 464 ; to introduce double questions, 468 ; necne or annOn, 459; to introduce sectmd member of an indirect question, 460,2. 7.farhe.tt8—fuV.f». of, with Dut.,369. nec— see neque. *^1 ^/ 1 necesse- 86,C. ; with est instead of Subjv., 264,R.l; with Inf., or ut, 636.R.2, 653,4, R.l. necessity— &(\iH. of, with Inf.,421,R.2 ; ex- pressed by Indie, 264, R.l, 266, r. nSdum— 482,5,R.3. negative — of Potential, 287; of Opt., 280; of Impv., 270; nOn with Impv., 270, R.l; nOlI with Inf., 270, R.2; advs., 441-449; nOn, 442; hand, 443; nfi, 444; subdi- vision of, 446; combinations, 448; posi- tion of, 448, 449 ; two, 449 ; in Copulative Sentences, 480; in Final and Consecutive Sentences, 643,4. nem8— decl. of, 70,D.; and ntUlus, 108; and quisquam, 317,2. nSquam— 86,C.; comparison of, 90. neque— subdivides a general neg., or negO, 446 ; for et nOn, 480 and r.1. nequbre — conj. of, 170,6. nesciO— an, 467,2 ; quis, 487,r.1. neu, n6ve— 444,2; adds Final Clause, 643,4. neuter— decl. of, 78, 108. neuter— adj. with masc. subj., 211, R.4; demonstrative when subst. is expected, PI. pred. to two fems., 288,3. n6ve— see neu. nihil— and nUllus, 108 ; neg. of quis- quam, 317,2; no, 471,6,1; nihillasGen. of Price, 380,1. nihilSminus— 490,R. nisi— with quod, and si nSn, 591,6 ; but^ except, ib. r. nitl— with Abl., 401,R.6. no — how translated, 470,6 and c. n511e — conj. of, 174; exact use of nOlue- rit, 244,R.8 ; nOlim, nOllem, as Poten- tial, 257,2, 258; nOlI, with Inf. for Impv., 271,2 ; with Inf. or ut, 638 and 548,R.2. nOmen— with esse and Dat., 349,r.5; with Gen. of Charge, 378, R.2. NOMINATIVE— defined, 23,1; of 1st Decl., 29; of* 2d Decl., 31; of 3d Decl., 36; for Voc, 201, R.2; syntax of, 203 ; two Noms., 206; with 9n, or ecce, 343, 1,r.; after vbs. of Saying and Thinking, 528. nOn— neg. of Potential, 267; neg. of Wish, 260; with Impv., 270,R.l; syntax of, 441, 442; nOn possum nOn, 449,i:.l: t(0, 471,6,1; nSn modo— sed etiam, 482,5} nOn modo— sed nB- quidem, ib. r.1. nOnne — syntax of, 456. 322 GENERAL INDEX. nOnnfllliiB— 108. nOtoere— syncope in Pf., 131,3: 175,5,d. nlUlTis— decl. of, 76,90; and n9m8, 108; and fLllas, 817,2. niim-iM; in indirect qaestions, i80,l,a. number— Sg. and PI., 22; concord of, 285; violation of Concord in app., 321, R.l; eubets. of, with Gen., 368; definite num- bers in Abl. of Time, 383,R.3. numerals— cardinals, M; ordinals, 95 and 294; cpd., 96; omission of centSna milia, if>. 6; distributives, 97 and 295; mnltiplicatives, 97; proportionals, 97; advs., 98; with Part. Gen., 370. 0— as interjection, 201,r.2, 343; sI in Wishes, 261; length of final, 707, 5. ob— vbs. cpd. with, take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; to give the Cause, 408,R.2; as prep., 416,16; with Ace. Ger., 432. object— indirect retained in pass., 217; di- rect, 330 ; inner, 330, 332, 333 ; outer, 338 ; indirect, 344; of Ger., 427; after Abl. Sup., 436. OBJECT SENTENCES— 523-537 ; with quod, 525; with Ace. and Inf., 526, 527; with Nom. and Inf., 528; after vbs. of Will and Desire, 532; after vbs. of Emotion, 533; in exclamations, 534; as subj., 535; in part., 536, 537; in. O. O., 655. Objective Genitive— 383,2. 6dl— conjugation of, 175,5,c. omission— of subj., 207; of copula, 209; of conjunction, 481; of nOn, 482,5,r.1 ; of vb. with sin, 592, R. ; of si, 598 ; of vb. of Protasis, 599 ; of vb. of comparative clause, 640. ondtting—yhs. of, with quod, 555,1 ; vbs. of, with Inf., 423,2. omnis— in Abl., without in, 388; omnia, as Ace. of Respect, 338,2. oportet— Indie, for Subjv., 254,r.1; with Inf. or Subjv., 535, r.2, 553,4,r. oppidum— requires prep., 337, k.2 ; in app. to Town in Abl., 391,R.l ; in app. to Loc, 411, R.2. OPTATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE — 260-265 ; in Wishes, 260 ; in Asseverations, 262 ; as Irapv., 263; as concessive, 264; in De- liberative Questions, 265. opus— with Abl., 406; with part., ib. ORATio oblIqua— 508,2 ; partial, ib. 3 ; sequence in, 516; in Relative Sentences, 6ZB,R., 628,R., 648,649; moods in, 650- 652; interrogative in, 651; Impv. in, 652; tenses in, 653-655; in Causal Sen- tences, 655; Conditional Sentences in, 656-659; Logical, 595, R.l, 657; Ideal, 596, R.5, 658; Unreal, 597,r.4, 659; pronouns in, 660 ; by Attraction, 508,4, 662 ; partial, 508,3, 663; Representation, 654 and n. ordmals— 94; alter for secundoB, 96,5; in dates, 294; for cardinals, ib. and 336, R.l; with qnisque, 318,2; position of, 676,r.2. Origin— Abl. of, 395. oxymoron— 694. paene— with Indie, in Apod, of Unreal Condition, 597.R.3; position of, 677,R.l. paenitet— with Gen., 377. palam— as prep., 417,8. pfir- with est instead of Subjv., 254,r.1 ; with Gen. or Dat., 359,R.l. parataxis— 472. parenthetical nt and n6 — 515, r.. pars— with PI. vb., 211,r.1, Ex. a ; in Abl. without in, 385, R.3; mfignam partem, 334,R.2. Part Aflfected— in Ace, 338,1. partial obliquity— 508,3, 541,628. PARTICIPIAL SENTENCES— 664-670 ; tO CX- pressTime, 665; Cause, 666; Condition and Concession, 667; relative clauses, 668; Future similarly used, 669,670. PARTICIPLE— decl. of, 80,82; Abl. of, 83, r. 1; Nom. and Ace. PI. of, ib. R.2; compar- ison of, 88,89; defined, 112,5; formation of, 115,3; 135,1.; Pf. pass, of Deponents as act., 167, n.I. Pf. with habeO and teneO, 238 ; Fut. periphrastic, 247; Pf. with ful, 250; usage of Pr. and Pf., 282; usage of Fut. act., 283; Pr. with Gen., 375; of Birth with Abl., 395; Pf. pass, with opus and lisus, 406; in Abl. Abs., 409,410; as Bubst., 437; as adj., 438; sequence after, 518; after vbs. of Perception, etc., 627, R.5, 536 ; after vbs. of Causation , etchZt ; for Prot., 693,2, 602, R.3 ; Concessive, 609; forrel., 637. particles — copulative, 474 ; adversative, 483; disjunctive, 492; causal, 498; illa- tive, 499 ; position of, 679. Partitive Genitive— 367-372; with eubsts. of Quantity, etc.^ 368; with neut. Sg., 369; with numerals, 370; with pronouns, 371 ; with comparatives and superlatives, 372; partitive apposition, 322. GENERAL INDEX. 323 parvUB— Oomp. of, 90; in Gen. of Price, 380,1. passive— voice, 112,2 ; vbe. with two Noms., 206; vb. agrees with pred., 211, B.l,Ex.6; defined, 2U; Pf. with Dat. of Agent, 215.1; as reflexive, 218; of some- thing endured, 219^; periphrastic forms of, 2A8-261; impersonal, 9M,b.1. pause— in Verse, 748. peelUifiris— with Gen. or Dat., 3M,r.1. penes— position of, 413. k.1 ; use of, as prep., 416,17. pentameter— elegiac, 786. per— vbs. cpd. with take Ace, 831; with Ace. of Extent, 836, 336; to Express Time Within Which, id. R.2, 388, R.l ; with Person Through Whom, 401 ; posi- tion of, 413, R.1; use as prep., 416,18. perceiving— Yh8. of, with Object Clause, 623; with Ace. and Inf., 526, 527; with Nom., 528; with part., 527, R.5, 536. PERFECT— defined, 112,3; System, 114,2; and 3,6 ; formation of, 114, 115, 121,2; syncopated forms of, 131, 1-8; Stem, 134; part, as act., 167,n.1. Pass, with Dat. of Agent, 215,1; de- fined, 223; Historical, 225, 235; force of, 236; for Fut. Pf., 237; part, with habed and tene9, 238; pass, with fnl, 250; Subjv. as Potential, 257,2; in wishes, 260; Subjv. as Impv., 263,2,6, 270,r.2; tense relations in Subjv., 277; Inf. as subjv. or obj., 280,2; after vbs. of Will and Desire, 280,2,c,' use of part., 282; sequence after, 511,rb.3; in Consecutive Sentences, 513 ; Inf., 530. periphraeis- for Impv., 271; for Put. periphrastic, 515,R.2; for Fut., 531; for Apod, in Unreal Condition, 597, R.5. PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION- 129 ; aCt., 247; pass., 251; with fal, 247,r.1; wkh fatHmm esse ut, 248; with in eO est, 249; with posse, velle, 248,r.; Pf. part. with sum and ful, 250 and n.l; with Ger., 261; Fut. act., 283. permitting— \ha. of, with Consecutive Clause, 653,2. persons— in conjugation of vb., 112,1; concord of, 287 ; order of, ib. r. personal pronouns— 304; omitteb. of, with Gen., 376; Subjv., 610,R.2 ; with Subjv. in 0. O., with Ace, ib. R.2. 326 GENEKAL INDEX. rtfminrfingr— Vbfl. of, with Gen., 376; with Abl. or Ace., ib. br.1,2. removing— \ba. of, with Abl., 390,2. repraesenUUid—96i and n. reguiring—\\M. of, with two Acce., 339. reHsiing—yhs. of, with Dat., 346. resolation— of long syllable, 732. resolving— y\)e. of, with Inf., 423; withut, 546. Respect— Ace. of, 338; Abl. of, 397; Abl. of, with comparatives, 396. restrictions— in Relative Sentences, 627,R. Result — for Sentences of, see Consecutive Sentences, rhythm— in arrangement, 627 ; defined,739 ; names of, 736; rhythmical series, 738. rObur— decl. of, 46. rogftre— with two Aces., 339. rfls— as limit of Motion, 387; in Abl. of Separation, 390,2; r1lrIinLoc.,411,R.l. lalvfire— conjugation of, 176,4. saying— yhs. of, with Object Clause, 623 ; vbfl. of, with Ace. and Inf., 526,627; vbs. of with Nom. in pass., 528. scire— first Impv. wanting, 267,r.; quod sciam, 627, r. secundum— as prep., 416,24; alter for secundus, 96,5. sed— with etiam, quoque, after nOn mode, 482,5 and r.1; syntax of, 485. seeming— vhs. of, with two Noms., 206. semi-deponents— 167. semi-hiatus — 720. semi-vowels — 6, 2, A. senex— dccl. of, 71; Comp. of, 87,9. Separation— Gen. of, 383,2; Abl. of, 390. SEQUENCE OP TENSES— 509, 519; in sen- tences of Design, 512; in sentences of Result, 513; representation of Subjv. in, 514, 515 ; in O. O., 516 ; after other moods, 617; after Inf. or part., 518; original Subjvs. in, 519; in Comparative Sen- tences, 602 ; after Hist. Pr., 511,r.1 ; after Pure Pf., ib. R.2; after accidit, etc.j 511, R.; after vb. with future character, 515,R.3. s7iowing—yh6. of, with two Noms., 206; with two Aces., 340; with Ace. and Inf., 626, 627; with Nom. and Inf., 528. Sl— with in Wishes, 261; in Indirect Question after vbs. of Trial, 460,1,6,* in Iterative action, 566, 567; sign of Condi- tion, 590; si nOn and nisi, 591 ; sin, 592. similis— compared, 87,3; with Gen. or Dat., 359, R.l. simul— as prep., 417,12; simul— simul, 482,1; Temporal, with atque (Sc), as soon as^ 561-663 ; Causal with Pr. and Pf., 664; with Fut. and Fut. Pf., 665. sin— use of, 592 ; strengthened by minus, etc.^ ib. R. sine— as prep., 417,13. Slve- use of, 496, 596, r.4. sOlus— decl. of., 76; with qui and Subjv. 631,1. Specification — Gen. of, 361. Standard— Abl. of, 402, 403; with ez, 402,R.; Abl. of, with ante or post, 403; of comparison omitted, 297. stem— 26,1, 132; Present, 114, 3,a, 133; Perfect, 114,3,6, 134; Supine, 114, 3,c, 135; Formation of Verb stem, 132-135; varies between Conjugations, 136. sub— vbs. cpd. with, take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; usage of, as prep., 418,2. subject— 201; in Nom., 203; in Ace. with Inf., ib. R.1; forms of, 204; omitted, 207; prolepsis of subj. of dependent clause, 468; of Inf. omitted, 627, R.3; Ace. and Inf. as, 635 ; attraction of pred. after Ace. and Inf., ib. R.8. Subjective- Genitive, 363, 364; poss. pron. instead, 364. SUBJUNCTIVE— 112,4; with generic rela- tives, 254,R.d, 626,1 ; force of, 265; Indie, with vbs. of Possibility, etc., ib. r.; Ideal and Unreal, 256,1; Potential and Opt., ib. 2 ; Potential of Pr. Part, and Fut., 257-259; Opt, 260; particles with Opt., 261; in asseverations, 262; as Impv., 263, 267, 270,R., 272; as con- cessive, 264; tense relations of, 277; in Deliberative or Rhetorical questions, 266> 465, 466 ; in Indirect questions, 467 ; after vb. with Fut. eliaraeter, 515,R.3; Original in dependence, 519 ; with quod, as to the fact that, 627, R.; in Final and Con- secutive Sentences, 543,4; in Temporal Clauses, in Iterative action, 567, r.; in Contemporaneous action, 672, 573; in Subsequent action, 577; with cum, 585, 588; in Relative Sentences, 627, 628; by Attraction, 509,4, 629; in O. O., 650-652. subordination— defined, 472; syntax of. Subordinate Clauses, 504,ff.; division of, 505-507; moods in, 508; Sequence of Tenses in, 509-519. GENEEAL INDEX. 327 subsequent action— 674-677; with Indie, 674-676; with Subjv., 677. substantives— defined, 16,1; inflection of, 17 ; division of, 18 ; gender of, 19, 20 ; mSbilia, 21,2 ; epicene, ib. 3; hetero- geneous, 67 ; heteroclites, 68 ; metaplasts, ib. ; defective, 69 ; singulSria tantum, ib. A; plfLrSlia tantum, ib. B ; hetero- loga, ib. C ; formation of, 180, 181, 183 ; adjs. and parts, used as, 204, ru. ; PI. of abstracts, ib. r.4 ; agreement of pretl., 211; with several adjs. in Sg., 290,R.2 ; verbal with Dat., 367. subter— vbs. cpd. with take Ace, 331; as prep., 418,2. suflixes— 180-182. sul— decl. of, 102; usage of, 309, 620-4>22; complement of Inf., 309,3. Stun— see esse. summus— comparison of, 87,2 ; used par- titively, 291,R.2. super— vbs. cpd. with, take Ace. or Dat., 331, 347; as prep., 418,4; with Abl. Ger., 433. superlative— in issimus, 86; in rimus, 87, 1; in limus, lb. 3; in entissimus, ib. 4 and 5; lacking, ib. 9; of parts., 89; of advs., 93; meaning of, varies with position, 291, R.2; strengthened, .303; with Part. Gen., 372. SUPINE— 112,5; system, 114,3,c; formation of, 116,3; stem, 136; defined, 434; Ace. of, 436; Abl. of, 436. supra— as prep., 416,25. suus— 102 ; syntax of, 309 ; emphatic, ib. 2; with prep, phrases, ib. 4; suum cul- que, 318,3,R.; with Gen. Ger., 428,R.l; in dependent clauses, 621. syllaba anceps—til. syllables — division of, 10; names for, 11; open, 11,R.; close, ib.\ length of, 12; common, 13 ; quantity of final, 707-713. syllepsis— 690. synapheia— 728. syncope— 726-743; in Pf. forms, 131, ft. synecdoche— 696. synizesis— 727. systole- 722. taedet— with Gen., 377. taking— \h». of, with two Aces., 340; End For Which given by Dat. or ad, ib. R.2; vbs. of Taking Away, with Dat., 347,r.5; with Ace. Ger., 430. talis— with qui or ut and Subjv., 631,1. tarn— with qui or ut and Subjv., 631,1. tamen— syntax of, 490. tametsi— usage, 604. tamquam— with Subjv., 602. tantus— with qui or ut and Subjv., 631,1 ; tanti, with vbs. of Rating and Buying, 380; tantI est, it is worth while, ib. b.1 ; tantum abest ut, 662,r.1. teaching— vhB. of, with two Aces., 339. TEMPORAL SENTENCES— 669-688 ; dlvlslon of, 669; Antecedent Action, 661-667; Iterative Action, 666, 667; Contempora- neous Action, 668-673 ; Subsequent Ac- tion, 674-677; with cum, 678-688- Tem- poral cum, 680; cum inversum, 681; Iterative cum, 684 ; Circumstantial cum, 686-688; inO. O., 666. tenses— 112,8 ; signs of, 114,2 ; formation of, 114, 116; syntax of, 222-262; defini- tions, 223 ; of continuance, attainment, or completion, 224; Pr., 227-230; Impf., 231-234; Pure Pf., 236-238; Hist. Pf., 239, 240; Plupf., 241; Fut., 242, 243; Fut. Pf., 244, 246; periphrastic, 246-261 ; in Letters, 262 ; of Indie., 276 ; of Impv., 278; Sequence of, 609; in Final and Consecutive Sentences, 643,3 ; in Bela- tive Sentences, 622, 623; in O. O., 663- 666; in Inf., 279, 663; of Subjv., 277, 664, 666; Jiepraesentdtid, 664,n. tenus— position of, 413,R.l ; usage of, as prep., 417,14. ^^in^ns'— vbs. of, with two Noms., 206; with Inf., 627. time— when, in Abl., 393; Turn long, in Ace, 336; loithin which, in Abl., 393; with per, 336, 393,R.l ; with tOtus, ib. R.2; when=for which, ib. r.3; with hic, ille, ib. R.4; Abl. with in, 394; lapses of, with cum, 680, R.3 ; given by part., 666, 670,1. tmesis— 726. tOtus— decl. of, 76; with Abl. of Place Where, 388 ; of Time How Long, 393, R.2. towns— with Ace, 337 ; in Abl. of Place Where, 386; in Abl. of Place Whence, 391; in Loc, 411; with preps., 337,r.8, 391, R.1 ; with appositives, 337,r.2, 386, R.l, 391,R.l, 411,R.2. trajection— 696. trSns— vbs. cpd. with take Ace, 331; as prep., 416,26. transitive verb — defined^ 213. 328 GENERAL IJq^DEX. 88. pron. for, 304,2,r.; tul, vestrl, with Ger., 428, R.l. turn— tuni) 482,1; cam- turn, 688. tllllB— 101; tul with Gen. Ger., 428, B.l. U— length of Final-707,6. nbi— a« soon as, with Indie, 661-663 ; with Iterative action, 666, 667. mius— decl. of, 76; and quisqiiam, 107, 3,R., 106; syntax of, 317. ulterior— 87,8. Ultrfi— as prep., 416,27. uncertainty— vhe. of, with quin, 666,2. unlikeness — adjs. of, with atque (Sc), 643. UNREAL. CONDITION— 697; With Indic. in Apod., ib. RR.2,3; in O. O., ib. R.4, 669 ; Apod, in, after vb. requiring Subjv., 597,R.5. Ilnus-decl. of, 76, 96; PI. with plfLrSlia tantum, 96,R.l; as distribntive, 97,r.3; with superlative, 303; with prep, for Part. Gen., 372,r.2; with qui and Subjv., 631,1. Unusquisque— 107,5. urba— with name of Town, requires prep., 337,R.2, 386,R.l, 391,r.1, 411,r.2. flSUS— with Abl., 406; with Pf. Part., 406. at— in wishes, 261 ; with quam, 631,3; with pOtuit, to strengthen superlative, 303; ut— ita, 482,4; after vbs. of Adding and Happening, 526,1, R.; in Final and Con- secutive Sentences, 643; ut nOn, ib. 4, 646,R., 552 ; after vbs. of Fear, 560 ; to add restriction, 552,R.3; after vb. of Causa- tion, 663,1; after vbs. of Compelling and Permitting, ib. 2; after vbs. of Happen- ing, ib. 3; after impersonals, ib. 4; Ex- planatory, 567; Exclamatory, 668; ut primum, as soon as, with Indic, 561- 563; with Iterative sentences, 666, 667; with si and Subjv., 602 ; Concessive, 608 ; after comparatives, 631,3. uter, which— a^l. of, 76, 106; utrum as interrogative particle, 458. uterUbet- 108. uterque— decl. of, 108; usage of, 292; with Part. Gen., 371, R.l. utervlB— 108. atl— with Abl., 407; with Personal Ger., 421^,R.5. utinam— in wishes, 261. V— and u, 1,R.2; pronunciation of, 7. ve— usage of, 495. vel— with superlative, 303 ; usage of, 494. velle— conjugation of, 174; use of Fut. or Fut. Pf., 242,R.2; has no periphrasis, 248,R.; velim, 257,2; vellem, as Poten- tial, 268; vellem, as Unreal, 261,R.; with Pf. Inf. act., 280,2,6/ volSns in pred. attrib., 325,r.6; with Inf. or ut, 646,r.1. velut, velutsi— with Subjv., 602. Vfindere— with Gen. of Price, 379. vfinlre— 169,2,R.l ; with Gen. of Price, 379. verbals — subst. with Dat., 367; in fix, with Gen., 376 ; formation of, 191. VERBS— defined, 16,4 ; conjugation of, 17; inflection of, 114; deponents, 113; per- sonal endings, 114 ; regular, 120, ft. ; classes of, 133; list of, 137-162; Depo- nents, 163-166 ; Semi-deponents, 167 ; Ir- regular, 168-174; Defective, 175 ; forma- tion of, 190-200; composition of, 199, 200; Impersonal, 208; Concord of, 210, 211, 286-287; trans, and intrans., 213. V6r5— syntax of, 487; with sin, 692. yersuB— position, 413,r.1 ; usage, 416,29. yfirum— with etiam, 482,5; syntax of, 486. veicl— with Abl., 407; with personal Ger., 427,R.5. vester— 101. vetUS— decl. of, 82,2; comp. of, 87,1,r.2. vidfire— with nJ, 548,r. ; with two Noms. in pass., 206; vidS, with Subjv. for Impv., 648, R. VOCATIVE— defined, 23,5 ; in I, 33,r.2 ; in adjs. of 1st and 2d Decl., 73; no syntax of, 201, R.l ; in pred. app., 325, R.l. voice— 112,2, 212; act., 213; pass., 214. vOmer— decl. of, 45, r. vowels — quantity of final, 707. Want—\\i^. of, with Abl., 405; adjs. of, with Gen. and Abl., ib. r.2. warning— \\i%. of, with at, 546. M;i^;— vbs. of, with Inf., 280,2,c, 423,2, 532; sequence after vbs. of, 515,R.3; with Final sentence, 646; with Inf. instead, ib. R.l; with simple Subjv., ib. r.2. wishes— in Subjv., 260, 261. td'iiAow^— translated by ut n5n, 662, r.4; quIn, 556. Y— length of final, 707,3. ye«— trans, of, 471, a and c. Zeugma— 690. To avoid fine, this book should be returned on or before the date last stamped below ViKi 7^ tOM — 6-40 tf ^ ,.v